CNC SYSTEM FOR MACHINING CENTERS

YASNAC J300M
OPERATING MANUAL

LJpon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these
instructions thoroughly, and retain for future reference.

REFERENCE
YASNAC J300M PROGRAMMING MANUAL TOE-C843-1 3.31 B

YASUAVVA MANUAL NO. TOE-C843-13.30B

FOREWORD

This manual describes cautionary items that must be taken into consideration when operating
the YASNAC J300M (with basic NC operation panel, 9-inch CRT) as well as the basic con-
figuration and operation procedure of it.

Some information is presented in tables in the Appendix so that readers can easily find the
necessary information. In the specification table, section numbers are given for each specifi-
cation to allow quick access to a detailed explanation if necessary.

The YASNAC J300M comes with a programming manual in addition to this operating
manual. Use these manuals in conjunction with each other to ensure prc)ductive operation.

CAUTIONS

This manual describes all the option functions (identified by the “*” symbol) but some of
these may not be available with your YASNAC J300M. To determine the option functions
installed in your NC, refer to the specification document or manuals published by the ma-
chine tool builder.

Unless otherwise specified, the following conditions apply in programming explanations

and programming examples.

● Metric system for input and metric system for output/movement

●
@ : Zero point in the base coordinate system
●
@ : Reference point

Yaskawa has made every effort to describe individual functions and their relationships to oth-
er functions as accurately as possible. However, there are many things that cannot or must
not be performed and it is not possible to describe all of these. Accordingly, readers are re-
quested to understand that unless it is specifically stated that something can be performed,
it should be assumed that it cannot be performed.

Also bear in mind that the performance and functions of an NC machine tool are not deter-
mined solely by the NC unit. The entire control system consists of the mechanical system,
the machine operation panel and other machine related equipment in addition to the NC.
Therefore, read the manuals published by the machine tool builder for detailed information
relating to the machine.
 General Precautions
● somedrawings h this manual are shown with the protective cover or shields removed,
in order to describe the detail with more c“larity. Make sure all covers and shields are
replaced before operating this product, and. operate it in accordance with the directions
in the manual.
● The figures and photographs in this manual show a representative product for refer-
ence purposes and may differ from the product actually delivered to you.
● This manual maybe modified when necessary because of improvement of the product,
modification, or changes in specifications.
Such modification is made as a revision by renewing the manual No.
● TO order a copy of this manual, if your copy has been damaged or lost, contact your
Yaskawa representative listed on the last page stating the manual No. on the front
page.
● If any of the nameplates affixed to the product become damaged or illegible, please
send these nameplates to your Yaskawa representative.
● Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user since
that will void our guarantee.

ii

—— . .. —...-
NOTES FOR SAFE OPERATION

Read this operator’s manual thoroughly before installation, operation , maintenance or in-
spection of the YASNAC J300M. In this manual, the NOTES FOR SAFE OPERATION are
classified as “WARNING” or “CAUTION”.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if

~ WARNING not avoided, could result in death or serious injury to
personnel.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if

not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury
to personnel and damage to equipment.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practice.

Even items described in ~ CAUTION may result in a vital accident in some situations.
In either case, follow these important items.
KEY TO WARNING LABELS

The following warning labels are used with the YASNAC J300M.

Electric shock hazard

Do not touch the terminals while the power is
on, and for 5 minutes after switching off the
<pi
power supply!

Location of label
NC unit

D . Warning label
 Grounding wires must be connected to the unit’s

b!!!_’4:ILJI
Useproper
grounding
techniques.
grounding terminals.

Location of label
NC unit

7
Electric shock hazard
S_T
~Hi! !
WARNING Do not touch inside.

Location of label

NC operation panel with 9 inch CR-f

—

—
LEiJ
Rear face
Warning label
1 STORAGE PRECAUTIONS

~ CAUTION Page

●
Do not store the product in locations subject to rain, water droplets, 1-4

I
or harmful gases or liquids.
Failure to observe this caution may result in product failure.

● Select a storage area indoors that is clean and meets the following 1-4
temperature and humidity requirements.
Failure to observe this caution may result in product failure.
Ambient temperature : –20° C to 60° C
Relative humidity : 10% to 90%

2 CAUTIONS ON USE AND OPERATION

@ WARNING Page

Do not touch any unit, terminals, etc., while the power is ON. 2-5
Failure to observe this warning may lead to electric shock or device mal-
function.

Immediately after switching the power OFF, the product retains 2-5
some electric charge. Do not touch any parts which are live when
the power is ON for 5 minutes after switching the power OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may lead to electric shock or device mal-
function.

Do not damage cables, subject them to excessive stress, or pinch 2-5

them.
Excessive load on cables may cause electric shock.

When the unit is turned ON, never touch its rotating parts. 2-5
Failure to observe this warning may result in personal injury.

Never modify the product. 2-5

Failure to observe this warning may result in electric shock, fire, or prod-
uct failure.

\i

.
 ~ CAUTION Page

Use the product in an environment with the following characteris- 1-4

tics.
Using it in an environment in which it is subject to high temperatures, high
humidity, dust, corrosive gases, vibration or impacts may cause fire, tJec-
tric shock or malfunction.
● Free from gases or vapors that create a potentially explosive atmo-
sphere.
9 Free from oil, organic solvents, etc.
● Relative humidity in the range 10 to 9070 RH, with no condensation.
● Ambient temperature in the 0° C to 45 “C with no freezing.
(Installation site must not be exposed to direct sunlight, must be dis-
tanced from heat generating devices, and must be indoors.)
● Vibration not exceeding 4.9 rn/s2 (0.5 G).

Do not let foreign matter such as electric wire scrap enter the unit. 2-6
Failure to observe this caution may result in fwe, product failure or mal-
function.

Do not restart automatic operation after stopping automatic opera- 2-37

tion and then performing ‘Iool selection” in manual operation or”1
line MDI” operation.
The reason for this is that the “tool selection” operation may cause the
coordinate system to be changed, leading to unexpected operation if auto-
matic operation were restarted. This could cause tool damage due to irlter-
ference, and resulting accidents involving injuries to personnel.
Reset the NC after any manual intervention.

After stopping automatic operation and performing a manual inter- 2-37

vention, do not restart automatic operation without resetting first.
If automatic operation is started with the “mirror image” or “manual abso-
lute” function in effect, unexpected operation may be performed. This
could cause tool damage due to interference, and resulting accidents in-
volving injuries to personnel.
Reset the NC after any manual intervention.

vii
 ~ CAUTION Page

Before carrying out cutting clperation with a new program, confirm 2-25
safety by performing single block operation and dry run operation.
If this check operation is not performed, unexpected operation maybe per-
formed due to mis-setting of the amount of offset, leading to tool damage
due to interference, and resulting accidents involving injuries to person-
nel.

The end user must not change parameters relating to machine ac- 8-3
curacy, travel axis control and spindle axis control.
The NC parameters are set to the optimum values for each machine, and
changing them could therefore result in unexpected operation. This could
cause tool damage due to interference, and resulting accidents involving
injuries to personnel.
Reset the NC after any manual intervention.

Strictly observe the cautions in the user’s manual when using pro- 2-25
gramming functions.
Ignoring these cautions could lead to accidents involving injuries to per-
sonnel and malfunctions.

Use the product with the “System Number Switch” of the CPU set to 2-1o
“o”.
Use while set to another number may lead to malfunction.

Wait at least 2 seconds after turning the power OFF before turning it 2-1o
ON again.
Failure to observe this caution may lead to malfunction.

WI
3 PRECAUTIONS RELATING TO MAINTENANCE AND NSF’ECTION

——
~ WARNING Page

●
Always turn the power OFF (including the primary power supply) 2-5

I
before carrying out daily inspection.
Carrying out the inspection with the power ON may lead to electric shock.

w Wait 5 minutes after turning the power (including the primary power 2-5
supply) OFF before removing or replacing any unit or part.
Failure to observe this warning may lead to electric shock and product :~ail-
ure.

w Be sure to turn the power OFF before replacing the battery. 2-1o
Failure to observe this warning may lead to electric shock and product fail-
ure.

~ CAUTION Page

To prevent personnel other than those involved in maintenance 2-6

and inspection work from turning ON the power while maintenance
and inspection is in progress, place signs stating “Do not turn the
power on” or words to that effect at the primary power supplies of
related control panels and other relevant locations.
Failure to observe this caution may lead to electric shock.

Replace fuses and batteries with the designated products. 2-1o

Failure to observe this caution may result in fire or product failure.

Electronic devices such as C MOS ICS are used on the control 2-6
boards. If you touch them with your bare fingers the static electrical
charge in your body could destroy them; care must be taken when
handling these devices. Before handling these devices for mairlte-
nance purposes, first discharge the static electricity in your body by
touching a grounded metal device.
Failure to observe this caution could lead to injuries and product failure.

Do not install or remove boards, wiring, connectors, etc., while the 2-6
power is ON.
Failure to observe this caution could lead to electric shock, product failure,
and malfunction.
 ~ CAUTION Page

B When an alarm occurs, eliminate its cause and confirm safety be- 9-2
fore resetting it.
Failure to observe this caution could result in malfunction.

D Be sure to check the following points on completing maintenance 2-6

and inspection work.
“ Check that all fastening bolts are tightened.
“ Check that no tools or other objects have been left inside the control
panel.
● Check that the control panel door is closed properly.
Failure to carry out these checks may lead to electric shock, injuries, fire,
and malfunction.

B For details on trouble relating to the machine-related sequence, re- 9-2

fer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.

D Never attempt to disassemble or modify units or devices inside the 2-6

NC unit.
Failure to observe this caution may lead to fire, product failure, or mal-
function.

B Do not change the set values of the devices, variable resistors, etc., 2-6
in the control panel.
Failure to observe this caution may lead to fire, product failure, and mal-
function.
—
CONTENTS

FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . ..~
NOTES FOR SAFE Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . III
KEY TO WARNING MBELS .................................. iv

1. OUTLINE OF THE PRODUCT

1.1 OUTLINE OF YASNAC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1-2
1.1.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.2 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.1.3 Machine Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.1.4 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.2 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS . . . . ...”.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1-11

1.2.1 EmergencyStop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-n
1.2.2 Overtravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--11
1.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.2.4 Interlock Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-”14

2. BASIC OPERATION OF YASNAC

2.1 GENERAL FLOW OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. (.......2-4

2.2 INSPECTION BEFORE TURNING THE POWER ON . . . . . . . ...2-5

2.2.1 inspection ofthe NCUnit ..,..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.2 inspection oftheTape Reader.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2.3 Preparation beforeTurningthe Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

2.3 TURNING THE POWER ON AND INSPECTION

AFTER POWERON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-10
2.3.1 ProcedureforTurning thePowerON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.3.2 Checking the MotorsforAbnormalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3.3 ProcedureforTurningthePowerOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.3.4 inspection ofthe Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-13

2.4 MANUAL OPERATION (1), . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-16

2.4.1 Manual Rapid Traverse (RAPID).. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.2 Jog Feed (JOG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.4.3 Step Feed (STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.4.4 Handle Feed (HANDLE)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

xi
2.5 MANUAL OPERATION (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-19
2.5.1 Simultaneous 2-or3-axis Handle Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.5.2 Manual Reference Point Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.5.3 Manual Reference Point Return to the Second Reference Point* . . . . 2-23
2.5.4 I-line MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-24

2.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION (I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-25

2.6.1 Preparation of Automati cOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.6.2 Memory Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-27
2.6.3 MDIOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-28
2.6.4 Feed Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
2.6.5 Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-30

2.7 AUTOMATIC OPERATION (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-32

2.7.1 Optional Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2 -32
2.7.2 Optional Block Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
2.7.3 Dry Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-33
2.7.4 Display Lock and Machine Lock.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
2.7.5 Auxiliary Function Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
2.7.6 Z-axis Command Neglect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
2.7.7 4th-axis Command Neglect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
2.7.8 5th-axis Command Neglect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

2.8 OPERATION INTERVENTION

DURING AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-37
2.8.1 Manual Operation lntetvention during Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.8.2 MDIOperation intervention during Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.8.3 Automatic Handle Mode Offset* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-39
2.8.4 Manual Absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-41

2.9 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS AT ENHANCED LEVEL . . . . . ...2-43

2.9.1 Tool Length Measurement* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.9.2 Return tothe Operation interrupted Point* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.9.3 Manual Centering Operation*.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-49
2.9.4 Program Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-50
2.9.5 Playback Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-56

xii
3. BASICS OF DISPLAY AND WRITING OPERATION
3.1 BASICS OF TERMS RELATED TO OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . ...3-2
3.1.1 Process Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.2 Jobsand Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.3 YASNACJ300M Function Structure.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.2 NC OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-9

3.2.1 Keysand Display Screen on NC Operation F>anel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.2.2 Normal Display on CRT Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3- 16
3.2.3 Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..3-21
3.2.4 Key Buffer Edit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . ., . . ...3-22
3.2.5 Buzzer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-23

4. EDIT PROCESS OPERATION

4.1 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-3
4.1.1 Calling aPart Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.1.2 Editing aPart Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.1.3 Saving aPart Program after Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.1.4 Deleting aPart Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-25

4.2 PAI?TPROGRAM DIRECTORY JOB , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-28

4.2.1 Display ofthe Directory ofPartPrograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.2.2 Calling aPart Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-35
4.2.3 Deleting aPart Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-37
4.2.4 Renaming aPart Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-39
4.2.5 Copying aPart Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-41

4.3 PART PROGRAM lNPUT/OUTPUT AND VERIFY JOB , . . . . .. 4-42

4.3.1 inputting aPart Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-42
4.3.2 Outputting aPart Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.3.3 Verifying the Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.3.4 Setting the Communication Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4.3.5 Other Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-62

4,4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWING JOB..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-63

4.4.1 Features ofthe Program Path Drawing Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4.4.2 Description ofthe Program Path Drawing Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4.4.3 Basic Program Path Drawing Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.4.4 Switchingthe Program Path Drawing Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4.4.5 Differences between the Program Path Drawing Job
and the NC Path Drawing Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-90

X111

. ———..-—-... .—--— —-———.

5. SETUP PROCESS OPERATION
5.1 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-3
5.1.1 Writing the Workpiece Shift Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.1.2 Writing the Workpiece Coordinate System Shift Correction
Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.1.3 Writing the Workpiece Shift POSValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.1.4 Selecting the Absolute/lncremental Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

5.2 TOOL DATA CONTROL JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-9

5.2.1 Writing the Offset Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.2 Display ingand Writing the Tool Pot Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.2.3 Display ingthe ATCTool Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.2.4 Writing the Measured "ToolLength Offset Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

5.3 TOOL LIFE CONTROL JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-23

5.3.1 Writing the Tool Life CDntrolData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.3.2 Displaying the Tool Life Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.3.3 Setting the Tool Life Ccmtrol Data..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-24
5.3.4 Erasing the Tool Life Control Data.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

6. RUN PROCESS
6.1 PROGRAM JOB .................................. . ...6-s
6.1.1 Program information Displayed on Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.1.2 Program Number Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.1.3 Address Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.1.4 Editing the Part Program Stored in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.1.5 Execution ofa Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.1.6 Display of Subprogram Nesting information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

6.2 MDIOPERATION JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-12

6.2.1 Entry ofan MDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...-.6- 12
6.2.2 Editing an MDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.2.3 Execution ofan MDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.2.4 Deleting an MDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-14
6.2.5 Storing an MDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-14

6.3 COMMAND VALUE DISPUY JOB...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-15

6.3.1 Collective Display of Command Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

xiv
 6.4 SEITING JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-16
6.4.1 Internal Switch Function *...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.4.2 SoftwareSwitch Function *.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.4.3 Macro Variable Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.4.4 F1-digit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.4.5 Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,.6-20
6.4.6 Stored Stroke LimitFunctiorl *.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6-21

6.5 OTHER JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-22

6.5.1 NCPath Drawing Job* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

7. COMMON PROCESS OPERATION

7.1 PRESENT POSITION DATA CONTROL JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-2
7.1.1 CollectiveDisplayofPresentPosition Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.2 Display of Present Position Data
in theWorkpiece Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.1.3 Display of Present Position Data intheExternalCoordinate\/alues .... 7--5
7.1.4 Displayof Remaining Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.1.5 SettingtheCoordinateSystems.. ...................... ......... 7-7
7.1.6 Error Pulse Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

7.2 ALARM DISPLAY JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..7. ..7-fl O

7.2.1 Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-10
7.2.2 ServoAlarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.2.3 User’s Message Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-’12

7.3 TIME CONTROL JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-13

7.3.1 Calendar Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-14
7.3.2 OperatingTime Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

8. MAINTENANCE PROCESS
8.1 PARAMETER JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,.,.,.....,..,,...8-3
8.1.1 ParameterFunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-3
8.1.2 Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.1.3 Sequence Parameter Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.1.4 Pitch Error Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

8.2 l/O MONITORING JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-8

8.2.1 DisplayingtheON/OFFStatusof thel/OSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.2.2 DisplayingtheON/OFFStatusofthe Selectedl/OSignals . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.3 TurningON/OFFl/OSignalsForcibly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

xv
 8.3 lNPUT/OUTPUT AND VERIFY JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-12
8.3.1 input/output and Verify Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.2 Background Reset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.3.3 l/ODeviceSettingFunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

8.4 INTERNAL INFORMATIION JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-15

8.4.1 Version Number Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-15
8.4.2 Memory Dump Functicm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-16
8.4.3 KeyMemoryFunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-16
8.4.4 Servo Configuration Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

9. MAINTENANCE
9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-2
9.1.1 Checkingthe StatusofTroubles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.2 Checkingthe NClnformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.3 DisplayofAlarm information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.4 Cause ofAlarm and CorrectiveAction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.1.5 Troubleshooting(1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.1.6 Troubleshooting(2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-21
9.1.7 Alarms Not indicated tJyAlarm Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

APPENDIX 1 LIST OF N(ClNPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS

APPENDIX1.I INPUT SIGNALS (PLC-+ NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A1-2
1.1.1 Operation Mode Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A1-2
1.1.2 Sewo Mis Control Signals (X-axis to5th-ais) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-5
1.1.3 Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A1-7

APPENDIX 1.2 OUTPUT SIGNALS (NC + PLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Al -9

1.2.1 Operation Mode Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A1-9
1.2.2 Servo Axis Control (X-iwis to5th-axis). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A1 -13
1.2.3 Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A1 -15
1.2.4 Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A1 -17

APPENDIX 2 PARAMETER TABLE

APPENDIX 2.1 CLASSIFICATION OF THE PARAME- ‘ERS . . . . . .. A2-2

APPENDIX 2.2 PARAMETER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-3

APPENDIX 2.3 PARAMETER TABLE

(YENET1200 COMPATIBLE DRIVER) .0 . . . . . . . . A2-47

xvi
APPENDIX 3 ALARM TABLE
APPENDIX 3.1 CLASSIFICATION OF AIARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A3-2

APPENDIX 3.2 ALARM TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A3-3

APPENDIX 3.3 ALARM TABLE

(YENET1200 COMPATIBLE DRIVER) . . . . . . . . . . A3 -20

APPENDIX 4 INDEX
OUTLINE OF THE PRODUCT

Chapter 1 describes the outline of the product and the protec-

tive functions that should be thoroughly understood for safe
and efficient operation of the YASNAC J300M.

1.1 OUTLINE OF YASNAC SYSTEM . . . . . . 1-2

1.1.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.2 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.1.3 Machine Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.1.4 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.2 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . ~~

. . 1-11
1.2.1 Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-11
1.2.2 Overtrwel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.2.4 Interlock Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.1 OUTLINE OF YASNAC SYSTEM

1.1.1 System Configuration

The configuration of the YASNAC system and the list of components are described below.

, ~ ~-. ..._.-_...__._ . . ..___.J.___...J

s, ~.:Z~;~-F&:s
..—.
— Motor
PG

1 --m$’;’is
AC ~
j < L-i ,
3-phase R . .
General
Purpose 1/0

—. -. — “-””- Spindle

L—
Power Power —
_ Input
Motor
Sllpply T
Unit

-———————d El@ic control I

u
Fig. 1.1 Configuration of YASNAC System

1-2
 1.1 OUTLINE OF YASNAC SYSTEM

Table 1.1 List of YASNAC System Components

r Component Name Model Name 7

I CPumck IIZNC-JRKDD I

I SERVOPACK \ (2ACR-IRUU I
/ Spindledrive [ CIMR-M5 I
[ %vornotor I

Manualpulse generator pREH-2E5T/1OO-M

A

1-3
1.1.2 Environmental Requirements

Requirements for the installation of an NC unit are indicated below. Install the NC unit only
in a location where these requirements are satisfied to avoid malfunctioning.

A CA I lTlnrN
u wnu I IWIV

E Use the product in an envircmment with the following characteristics.

Using it in an environment in which it is subject to high temperatures, high humidity,
dust, corrosive gases, vibration or impacts may cause fire, electric shock or malfunction.
● Free from gases or vapors that create a potentially explosive atmosphere.
● Free from oil, organic solvents, etc.
● Relative humidity in the range 10 to 90% RH, with no condensation.
● Ambient temperature in the O“C to 45° C with no freezing.
(Installation site must not be exposed to direct sunlight, must be distanced from heat
generating devices, and must be indoors.)
● Vibration not exceeding 4.9 m/s2.

~ Do not store the product in locations subject to rain, water droplets, or harmful
gases or liquids.
Failure to observe this caution may result in product failure.

~ Select a storage area indoors that is clean and meets the following temperature
and humidity requirements.
Failure to observe this caution may result in product failure.
Ambient temperature : –20° C to 60° C
Relative humidity : 10% to 9070

(1) Ambient Temperature

For operation 0°cto450c

For storage and transportation –20”C to +60”C

Install the NC unit in locations not subject to direct sunlight, distant from heat sources,
and indoors.

(2) Humidity

Relative humidity must be in the range of 10 to 90%RH (non-condensing).

14
 1.1 OUTLINE OF YASNAC SYSTEM

(3) Vibration

During operation: Max. 4.9rds2

(4) Atmosphere

Avoid the following locations:

● Dusty places

. Places where concentration of coolant and/or organic solvent mist is extreme-

ly high.

(5) Power Source

Input voltage: AC (single-phase) 200/220/230 V –1 5 to +1OYO

Frequency: 50/60 Hz –2 to +2 Hz

1-5

.-— —..—.— -—..

 1.1.3 Machine Operation Panel

An example of machine operation panel is indicated below. Arrangement and names of

switches and indicator lamps vary according to the machine model. For details, refer to the
manuals published by the machine tool builder.

MOOE SELECT AUX

CYCLE FEEO SINGLE OPTIONAL OPTIONAL oflY FUNCTION
START HOLD BLOCK STOP BLOCK SKIP RUN LK
TAPE
HANOLE
D MDI Q Q(IQ 6
STEP OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
MEM
JCG
mu ●
ml
RAPIO

MIRROR IMAGE
FEEORATE
AUTO MODE MANUA. Axis EDIT
OVERRIDE START
HANOLE ABSOLUTE x Y LOCIC LOCC
CANCEL
OFFSET. PRCGRAM RESTART P~K@@)@

+
6) @l@
@ @ OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF

HANDLE MANUAL RAPID TRAVERSE FEEDRATE SPINDLE-SPEED

AXIS PULSE MULTIPLY RATE OVERRIDE OVERRIDE OVERRiDC

D
.50

o 0

JCG
REFERENCE POINT’ TOOL LENGTH

EMERGENCY xYzm P MEASUREMENT

GHmHEm
JOG FEEDRATE

o
STOP
K2UCIC3Q / t >
1 I 1 I J WRITE &

ml
MEASUREMENT
i RETRACT
RESET REFERENCE POINT c1

Ellrlmm ❑ ID
RETURN
●

mmhnin SBoo

Fig. 1.2 Example of Machine Operation Panel

1-6
 1.1 OUTLINE OF YASNAC SYSTEM

1.1.4 General Specifications

(1) Standard Specifications

Numberof simultaneouslycontrolledaxes
~-;=
I Least input increment I I 1.1.2 I
Least output increment, ~ ~ P ~ 1.1.2 I

Input
~k=zl+==i=d
Absohk/mcremental programming

command

Ei%x---------t-++++i
Bufferregister
— 1 ==l=ma
Positioning v’ 2.1.1
~. 2.1.2
Interpolation Linear interpolation
Circularinterpolation F’ 2.1.3
Rapid traverse Y’ 1.2.1
Cuttingfeed J+’ 1.2.2
Feed Dwell Y’ 3.3.1
Incrementalfeed v 2.3.3
Automaticaccelerationand deceleration k’ 1.2.6
s+= —
Programstoragecapacity v 4.I
Numberof programs @ 1.1.5
Storageand Programediting v 4.1.2
editing of Programnumbersearch v 6.1.2
program Sequencenumbersearch v 6.1.2
—
Addresssearch v — 6.1.3
MDI editing # a 6.2
—
Operationpanel
===l=Z:=l==l
I MDI function IJ”I I 6.2 I
l-line MDI v 2.4.4
Operation Operationtime display Y 7.3.2
and display
Calendardisplay v 7.3.1
Pop-upmenu @ 3.1.2
Buzzerfunction P —a 3.2.3

1-7
 Operation Programming Section
Category
I Item and Function
Manual Manual No.
Input/output
Input/outputinterface P 8.3.3
function
Spindle,tool Spindlefunction I 1~ I 3.5.1 I
and miscel-
Toolfunction v 3.5.2
laneous
functions Miscellaneousfunction v 3.5.3
Toollengthoffset v 3.4.2
Tooloffset Toolpositionoffset v 3.4.3
Numberof tool offsetdata sets P 3.4.1
Manualreturn to referencepoint P 2.4.2
Automaticreturnto referencepoint v 2.2.1
Coordinate Automaticreturn to secc,ndreferencepoint v 2.2.4
system Referencepoint return check v 2.2.2
Returnfrom referencepoint v 2.2.3
Basecoordinatesystemsetting v 3.1.1
Label skip P 1.1.4
Singleblock v 2.5.2
Optionalstop P 2.6.1
Optionalblock skip H 2.5.2
Dry run v 2.6.3
Dperation Machinelock v 2.6.4
support Miscellaneousfunctionlock v 2.6.5
function Display [ock v 2.6.4
Manualabsolute

F=
P 2.7’.4
Numericalvalue set-up P 7.1.5
Break-pointfunction v 4.2.5
Operationmode v 2.3, 2.5
Feed hold P 2.5.4
Circularinterpolationby R command v 2.1.3
Program- Repetitivecircle interpolation v 2.1.3
ning support Subprogram F 4.1.7
‘unction Exactstop check F 3.3.2
Exact stop check mode v 3.3.3
Emergencystop input v 1.2.1
Overtravel P I.2.2
Safetyand Axis interlock v 1.2.4
maintenance
Storedstroke limit v 1.2.3
Self-diagnostics(alwaysdisplayed) P 3.2.2
Power supply P 1.1.2
Environment Ambienttemperature v 1.1.2
requirements
Humidity ti 1.1.2

1-8
 1.1 OUTLINE OF YASNAC SYSTEM

(2) Option Specifications

Category
“’”a”’’””’t’”=_l%=Rkm=7 I
Controlled Numberof controlledaxes I I ~’ 1.1.1 I
axes Rotaryaxis control
Least input/outputincrementof---t-+++--=
rotaryaxis
Input Inch/metricswitching
command
Multi-activeregisters ++~+i
Interpolation Helical interpolation
Synchronizedfeed@oidW)~ ~~~+
High-speedmode operation I I “ I 4.2.6 I
F]-digit
Feed
Simultaneous1-axishandlefeed
---++--’+%4
Simultaneous2-axishandlefeed
Simultaneous3-axishandlefeed +9--+--%+
Additionof programstorageCi]pady
Storageand
editingof Additionof numberof programs
++-=+---++
program
Playback
Internaltoggleswitch ++++-=+
Operation NC programdrawing
and display
Commentdisplayfunction ----++. :::
Tapereaderwithouttake-upreels
Input/output
functionand Tapereaderwith take-upreels
device
RS-232Cinterface
4+-+4
1~’-~
Spindle,
tool, and
miscella-
T4-digitcommand
I iv I 3
I
neous
function
Secondmiscellaneousfunction
I I v’ I 3
I
Toolradius offset ----I---+-=*4I
Tooloffset I
Additionof tool offsetdata sets I l-’ I 3.4.1 I

1-9
 Operation Programming
Category Item and FIJnction
Manual Manual [w
Manualsecondreferencepointreturn 2.4.3

FAutomaticthmYfourthrt.ferencepoint re-
“ F 224

E
I Coordinate Workcoordinatesystemsetting P 3.1.2
system Expandednumberof workcoordinatesys-
P 3.1.2
tems
Localcoordinatesystem v 3.1.3
Rotationof work coordinatesystem v 3.1.5
IOptionalblock skip B I 2.6.2 I
I Automaticmode handleoffset I 2.7,3 I
Operation
support 2.8.4
function
- Automatictool lengthmeasurement(TLM) : 2.8.1
Manualinterruptionpoint return

--k===-
ICannedcycle B
“ +-++
ICirclecutting I

Program-
ming
Scaling P 3.2.3
support
function Coordinatesystemrotation P 3.1.5
Automaticcomer override # 4.2.2
Programmabledata input P 4.1.6
Hole machiningpatterncycle v 4.1.2

Accuracy
ki==---
Storedpitch error compensation v
Y 4.2.1

8.1.4
correction I I I I
for mechani-
cal system Unidirectionalapproach
I I P I 2.1.1
I
Skip function I 1~ I 4.3.1 I
Automation
support Tool life controlfunction I 1P \ 4.3.3 1
function
Program interruption I 1~ \ 4.3.2 I
1- 4.2.3
P 4.2.3
~

1-10
 1.2 PROTECTIVEFUNCTIONS

1.2 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

1.2.1 Emergency Stop

Press the emergency stop button immediately if a problem occurs with the system or
line. The execution of all commands stops instantaneously when the emergency stop
button is pressed. Servo power supply of the NC is shut OFF and dynamic brake is applied
to stop all mechanical movement. In the emergency stop state, the NC is in the alarm state
“3002”. In the state the emergency stop signal input (CN02-19 pin on JANCD-JCP03 board)
is “opened”, the NC stops the entire operation, and turns OFF SVMX (CN2- 17 pin on
JANCD-JCP03 board) and BKX (CN- 1.8pin on JANCD-JCP03 board).

1.2.2 Overtravel

The overtravel function stops axis feed operation when an axis reaches the travel limit; for
the detection of travel limit, a limit switch and a dog are used and if an axis reaches the travel
limit, the limit switch outputs a signal and the function stops axis feed operation in response
to this input. The axis reached and stopped at the travel limit can be moved manually
into the axis movable range.

When the overtravel input is “opened”, axis move is stopped in the manner as indicated in
Table 1.1. In response to this input, the :alarm output (A1.M) is “closed” and the correspond-
ing alarm message is displayed on the screen.

Table 1.2 Axis Stop Direction with Overtravel Input “Opened’

I Manual C)peration Mode Automatic Operation Mode

*+x to *+5 Movementin the *+Xto *+5

input is “opened” directionis stopped. Movementof al] axes is stopped in
*–X [~ *_5 Movementin the *–X to *–5 all directions.
input is “opened” directionis stopped.
* Normally closed contact

If the overtravel input is “opened”, select the manual mode (jog, pulse handle) and move the
axis in the direction opposite to the direction for which the overtravel input is “opened” to
“close” the input. After that press the [RESET] key on the NC operation panel, and the
alarm output and display are canceled.

1-11
(3
SUPPLE-
‘MENT
1.

2.
After the occurrence of an alarm due to the “open” of the overtravel input, the M,
S, and T code read output signals (MF, SF, and TF) are not turned OFF.

If it is necessary to interrupt the operation called by M, S, and/or T code, set the

interlock by an external sequence.

3. The alarm numbers at the occurrence of overtravel are 2001 to 2005. If the over-
travel alarm occurs, axis move is stopped. Note that the servo is not turned OFE

1.2.3 Stored Stroke Limit

To ensure improved safety in operi~tion, the function prevents axes from entering the preset
entry prohibited areas both in manual and automatic operation.

(1) Stored Stroke Limit

To use the stored stroke limit function, the axis movable area is set by parameters with
the coordinate values in the machine coordinate system. The area outside the set bound-
ary is established as the entry prohibited area. If an axis enters the entry prohibited area,
the function stops axis movement and displays an alarm message. The function is made
valid upon completion of the manual reference point return after the power is turned
ON. In automatic operation, if even one axis causes the alarm, all axes are stopped.
In manual operation, only the axis that caused an alarm is stopped.
.,,;., . .. . .. .
‘. . ..../’ .(X1, Y1, Z1)
I

~x..~ / ““’” ““

/. —-—___ ———
//
,/
/
/
/ .’.. .- 5 ‘
(x2, Y2, z2j

The outside is the entry prohibited area.

Fig. 1.3 Stored Stroke Limit

1-”12
 1.2 PROTECTIVEFUNCTIONS

(2) Stored Stroke Limit B, C (G22, G23) *

The area either outside or inside the boundary set by parameters or by the commands
in a program is established as the entry prohibited area. The boundary is set with the
coordinate values in the machine coordinate system. Whether the entry prohibited area
is established outside or inside the boundary can be determined by the setting for a pa-
rameter, The function is made valid upon completion of the reference point return after
m
turning ON the power.

Table 1.3 G Code Used to Turn ON/OFF the Stored Stroke Limit B Function

~ ‘; I unctionI ‘;
TurningON the storedstroke limitB
~
TurningOFF the storedstrokelimit B

G22x..Y.Z..l”J “K;
~ ‘~
(Point A) (Point B)

k
Y

x
fq’ f-.-.-f
B
Entry Prohibited Area Set Entry Prohibited Area Set
Outside the Boundary Inside the Boundary

Fig. 1.4 Stored Stroke Limit B Function

. In addition to the stored stroke limits A and B, stored stroke limit C can be add-
ed.

● With the stored stroke limit C, set the boundary of the area and inside or outside
the boundary by parameters.

. According to the setting for the parameter or the input signal, one of the stored
stroke limit C (third to fifth prohibited area) can be made valid.

● For details of the stored stroke limit B, C, refer to 4.2.3 “Stored Stroke Limit
B and C (G22, G23)” in the PROGRAMMING MANUA.L.
1.2.4 Interlock Inputs

The interlock input is the signal used to disable axis movement, and is provided for each axis.

● When an axis is interlocked during movement, it is stopped after deceleration.

● When the interlock is released, the axis continues moving to complete the re-
maining commands. Upon completion of the commands, the program ad-
vances to the next block.

“ For simultaneous two or three axis inte~olation commands, interpolation op-

eration is disabled if one of these two or three axes is interlocked.

YASNAC
—.-—. 1
f ITX
x
[3--- ~ ‘
‘ ITX
) Y
[3

Axis Interlock z Axis Interlock

[~ ‘
lTa
“a
[~ ‘
I lT~
~●
P
L [2
I

Fig. 1.5 Interlock Inputs

1-14
 2
BASIC OPERATION OF YASNAC

Chapter2 describers various kinds of operations including

power ON procedure, manual operation, and automatic opera-
tion.

2.1 GENERAL FLOW OF OPERATION . . . . 2-4

2.2 INSPECTION BEFORE TURNING
THE POWER ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-5
2.2.1 inspection of the NC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-7
2.2.2 Inspection of the Tape Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2.3 Preparation before Turning the Power ON . . . 2-9

2.3 TURNING THE POWER ON AND

INSPECTION AFTER POWER ON . . . 2-10
2.3.1 Procedure for Turning the Power ON . . . . . . 2-10
2.3.2 Checking the Motors for Abnormalities . . . . . 2-11
2.3.3 Procedure for Turning the Power OFF . . . . . 2-12
2.3.4 inspection of the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-13

2.4 MANUAL OPERATION(1) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

2.4.1 Manual Rapid Traverse (RAPID) . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.2 Jog Feed (JOG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-17
2.4.3 Step Feed (STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-17
2.4.4 Handle Feed (HANDLE) * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2-l8
2.5 MANUAL OPERATION(2) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.5.1 S~multaneous 2- or 3-axis Handle Feed * . . . 2-19
2.5.2 Manual Reference Point Return . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.5.3 Manual Reference Point Return
to the Second Reference Point ● . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.5.4 I-lineMDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-24

2.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION (1) . . . . . . . 2-25

2.6.1 Preparation of Automatic Operation . . . . . . . 2-25
2.6.2 Memory Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-27
2.6.3 MDI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-28
2.6.4 Feed Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2 -29
2.6.5 Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-30

2.7 AUTOMATIC OPERATION (2) . . . . . . . 2-32

2.7.1 Optional Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-32
2.7.2 Optional Block Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-32
2.7.3 Dry Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2 -33
2.7.4 Display Lockand Machine Lock . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.7.5 Auxiliary Function Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-35
2.7.6 Z-axis Command Neglect . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-35
2.7.7 4th-axis Command Neglect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.7.8 5th-axis Command Neglect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

2.8 OPERATION INTERVENTION

DURING AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . 2-37
2.8.1 Manual Operation Intervention
during Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.8.2 MDI Operation Intervention
dUfing Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.8.3 A1.JtomaticHandle Mode Offset ● . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.8.4 Manual Absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-41

2-2
2.9 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS
AT ENHANCED LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . ...2-43
2.9.1 Tool Length Measurement* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.9.2 Return to the Operation Interrupted Point * . 2-47
2.9.3 Manual Centering Operation * . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.9.4 Progralm Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-50
2.9.5 Playback Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-56

2-3

...-—-— —.. ——. —..—...- ———

——--..— .—..—-..——.—--— —..
2.1 GENERAL FLOW OF OPERATION

The operation procedure usually followed for daily operation is indicated in Fig. 2.1. This
Chapter gives explanation on these operation items.

I Preparation Checking the NC unit

- MODE SELECT
Setting the switches
- SINGLE-BLOCK
on the operation panel etc.

I Turning
the Dower
ON POWER-ON
1 Press 2 times
RESET ON

v Confirming READYsignal ON CYCLE START ON

FEED HOLD or
SINGLE-BLOCK ON

Manual operation

1 ----- -------------

CYCLE START ON
Zero point
Manual or by G28
return operation
SINGLE-BLOCK ON
Pitch error compensa-
tion,
?- Stored stroke limit ON/
P-
..oFF . . . . . -----

Preparation for Positioning

automatic operation at the start point

J Setting NC tape

A M021M30

-=T--
End of machining

w’ I
V

Preparation for
turning OFF the power
CYCLE START OFF
Checking for alarm

Checking tool
offset amounts
—-J---l-
OFF power I -
I Turning the
Pressing
EMERGENCY STOP
Pressing
POWER-OFF

Fig. 2.1 Operation Procedure

2-4
 2,2 INSPECTION BEFORE TURNING THE POWER ON

2.2 INSPECTION BEFORE TURNING THE POWER ON

Before turning the power ON for YASNAC J300, it is necessary to carry out inspection to
ensure safety. If the power is turned ON while the system has troubles, it could cause mal-
functioning of the system itself as well as hazards to the operators. Make sure to carry out
daily inspection before turning the power ON.

~ WARNING -
—
DAlways turn the power OFF (including the primary power supply) before carrying
out daily inspection.
Carrying out the inspection with the power ON may lead to electric shock.

s Wait 5 minutes after turning the power (including the primary power supply) OFF
before removing or replacing any unit or part.
Failure to observe this warning may lead to electric shock and product failure.

● Do not touch any unit, terminals, etc., while the power is ON.
Failure to observe this warning may lead to electric shock or device malfunction.

● Immediately after switching the power OFF, the product retains some electric
charge. Do not touch any parts which are live when the power is ON for 5 minu-
tes after switching the power OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may lead to electric shock or device malfunction.

● Do not damage cables, subject them to excessive stress, or pinch them.

Excessive load on cables may cause electric shock.

~ When the unit is turned ON, never touch its rotating parts.
Failure to observe this warning may result in personal injury.

~ Never modify the product.

Failure to observe this warning may result in electric shock, fire, or product failure.

2-5

-—...—. . . --- ——. .— .— .- .——.. ————.—.-. —-

 ~ CAUTION
To prevent personnel other than those involved in maintenance and inspection
work from turning ON the power while maintenance and inspection is in prog-
ress, place signs stating “Do not turn the power on” or words to that effect at the
primary power supplies of related control panels and other relevant locations.
Failure to observe this caution may lead to electric shock.

Electronic devices such as C MOS ICS are used on the control boards. If you
touch them with your bare fingers the static electrical charge in your body could
destroy them; care must be taken when handling these devices. Before han-
dling these devices for maintenance purposes, first discharge the static electric-
ity in your body by touching a grounded metal device.
Failure to observe this caution could lead to injuries and product failure.

Do not install or remove boards, wiring, connectors, etc., while the power is ON.
Failure to observe this caution could lead to electric shock, product failure, and mal-
function.

Do not let foreign matter such as electric wire scrap enter the unit.
Failure to observe this caution may result in fire, product failure or malfunction.

Be sure to check the following points on completing maintenance and inspection

work.
● Check that all fastening bolts are tightened.
● Check that no tools or other objects have been left inside the control panel.
● Check that the control panel door is closed properly.
Failure to carry out these checks may lead to electric shock, injuries, fire, and malfunc-
tion.

Never attempt to disassemble or modify units or devices inside the NC unit.

Failure to observe this caution may lead to fire, product failure, or malfunction.

Do not change the set values of the devices, variable resistors, etc., in the con-
trol panel.
Failure to observe this caution may lead to fire, product failure, and malfunction.

2-6
 2.2 INSPECTION BEFORETURNING THE POWER ON

2.2.1 Inspection of the NC Unit

In this subsection, the items to be inspected before turning ON the power are indicated for
the standard NC box supplied by Yaskawa. For the control box specific to the machine tool,
refer to the manuals published by the machine tool builder.

(1) Inspecting the Doors

Make sure that the doors are securely closed before turning the power ON.

The NC box is completely shielded to keep outside air out to protect the precision de-
vices in the NC box from oil mist or other airborne foreign matter. Ile doors of the NC
box must always be kept closed.

(2) Inspecting the Shielding Parts

Inspect the shielding parts in the NC box every month for gaps amtior damages.

@ Open the doors and check the packings which are installed around the door for
damage.

@ Inspect the inside of the NC box for abnormal contamination. If the inside is
abnormally dirty, clean it immediately after locating the cause of contamina-
tion.

@ Lock the doors securely i,nd inspect the doors to make sure that there are no
gaps.

By carrying out the inspection indicated above at regular intervals, performance of

YASNAC J300 can be maintained for a long period.
2.2.2 Inspection of the Tape Reader

If the tape reader is dirty or does not operate smoothly, it could cause malfunctioning of the
NC. Inspect and clean the tape reader from time to time.

Tape holder

Reading head

P
~~

Fig. 2.2 Tape Reader

Clean the glass in the reading head by removing tape chips and dust with a soft
brush. If oily stain is found, wipe it off with clean gauze or soft cloth soaked
with absolute alcohol. Clean both the tape guide face and tape holder at the
same time.

If dust is found on [he LED face in the upper light source, clean it with soft
brush.

For the tape reader equipped with 6-inch or 8-inch tape take-up reels, if tension
arm movement seems to be heavy, apply a small amount of machine oil to the
shaft base portion.

)
c)

P Supply oil here

o
\ Irension arm

/
\

Fig. 2.3 8-inch Take-up Reel

2-8
 2.2 INSPECTIONBEFORE TURNING THE POWER ON

D
SUPPLE-
MENT
If a problem occurs with tape winding or tape feed operation with the tape reader
equipped with 8-inch tape reels, open the front door, and clean the area around the pho-
tocoupler located near the reel drive motor.

2.2.3 Preparation before Turning the Power ON

Before turning the power ON, confirm the following items.

● Make sure that both the front and rear sides of the NC unit are closed. If the
door is open or if there is a gap between the door and the box panels, securely
close the door using the door lock.

● Carry out the inspection for the machine and machine related controllers ac-
cording to the instructions given in the manuals published ‘bythe machine tool
builder.
2.3 TURNING THE POWEFI ON AND INSPECTION AFTER
POWER ON

In this section, the procedure to be used for turning the power ON is explained. Inspection
that must be conducted after turning the power ON is also described.

~ WARNING
● Be sure to turn the power OI=F before replacing the battery.
Failure to observe this warning may lead to electric shock and product failure.

~ CAUTION
●
Replace fuses and batteries with the designated products.
Failure to observe this caution may result in fire or product failure.

● Use the product with the “System Number Switch” of the CPU set to “O’.
Use while set to another number may lead to malfunction.

● Wait at least 2 seconds after turning the power OFF before turning it ON again.
Failure to observe this caution may lead to malfunction.

2.3.1 Procedure for Turning the Power ON

Turn the power ON in the following procedure.

Make sure that the power is supplied to the NC unit from an external power
source.

Press the POWER ON button on the NC operation panel. Control power is

turned ON and the cooling fan starts rotating.

Make sure that air is flowing out at the upper part on the side of the NC unit.

In approximately 2CIseconds, the control is ready for turning ON the servo

power (alarm code 3000).

Press the POWER C)N button once again.

The servo power is turned ON. When the machine is ready for operation, the
NC enters the ready state.

When the power is correctly turned ON to the NC unit, the NRD (NC ready)
signal is output.

2-1o
 2.3 TURNING THE POWERON AND lNSPECnON AFTER POWER ON

When the power is turned ON at the machine side in response to the NRD sig-
nal, the MRD (machine ready) signal will be returned to the NC. The READY
lamp goes on when the MRD signal is returned. Note that the READY lamp
is not used with some types of machines.

When the NC unit enters the ready state, the alarm message displayed on the
screen will go off.

If the NC unit fails to enter the ready state, locate the cause by referring to Sec-
tion 7.2, “ALARM DISPLAY JOB”, and take appropriate measures. For tur-
ningthe power ON, there are items that must be inspected at the machine side I
in addition to the NC unit related items. For such items, refer to the manuals
published by the machine tool builder.

POWER ON POWER ON
i{
&ox, j Control power supply
;&sgE! ; Control ready —
_~\ ——.
Servo power suIfiy

—. —-- n----
,, MRD (machine r~ady)

—-—— ~&=ADYlarnplit
::
:,
Alarm code: “:3000 “2190; “Blank
::

Fig. 2.4 Power ON Sequence

2.3.2 Checking the Motors for Abnormalities

Check the motors for their operation. If abnormal vibration or noise is found, turn OFF the
power and contact the maintenance personnel.
2.3.3 Procedure for Turning the Power OFF

Turn the power OFF in the following procedure.

Make sure that the CYCLE START lamp on the machine operation panel is
OFF with the math ine stopped.

Make sure that there is no alarm message displayed on the CRT screen. If an
alarm message is clisplayed, locate the cause by referring to Section 7.2,
“ALARM DISPL4Y JOB” and take appropriate measures to clear it.

Carry out inspection necessary for turning the power OFF at the machine side.
For details, refer to the manuals published by the machine tool builder.

Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operation panel to turn
OFF the servo power.

Press the POWER C~FFbutton on the NC operation panel to shut off the power
to the control panel,.

Turn the power supply to the NC OFF by turning OFF such as a circuit breaker.

EMERGENCY STOP POWER OFF

J I
Control power supply ~-

Control ready !.

‘NRD (NC ready)

::-
MRD (machine ready)

READY lamp

Alarm: “Blank” “3002 ;

Fig. 2.5 Power OFF Sequence

2-12
 2.3 TURNING THE POWERON AND INSPECTICINAFTER POWER ON

2.3.4 Inspection of the Battery

After turning the power ON, check the CRT screen if “BAT” message is blinking at the lower
right area. If it is displayed, it indicates that the batte~ is weakening. The battery must be
replaced within one month. If the display of “BAT” message is given, make sure to leave
the NC unit power ON at least one hour every three days.

Batteryalarm indication

Standard batteries cannot be used. For a spare battery, contact your Yaskawa representative.
Battery type: ER6VC3, Parts code: B,4507

Connector

The location of battery and related indicator (LED) is shown in Fig. 2.5.

(1) Checking the Battery Which Needs Replacing

Follow the procedure indicated below to check whether or not battery must be replaced.

Press the POWER OFF button.

If a door interlock switch is installed, place the door interlock key in the OFF
position. This makes power ON possible with the door opened.

Open the door so that the front part of the NC unit is visible.

Press the POWER ON button once again.

Check the red LED on the JCPO1 board. If it is lit, the battely must be replaced.
 Battery Battery cover

/ /

f UL— ——-– —J

+=%=%=

Red LED –

u,
f+!l~fl
I
!/I Iu ii IIu) ,/ n

Fig. 2.6 Arrangement of Battery and Indicator Lamp (LED)

2-14
 2.3 TURNINGTHE POWERON AND INSPECTIONAFTER POWER ON

(2) Replacing the Battery

Replace the batte~ quickly in the following procedure.

Turn the power OFF.

Remove the battery cover by prying it up with a screwdriver. Then, remove

L
the battery from the holder.

Fit the new batte~ in the holder and insert the connector. Although the con-
nector may be inserted in either direction, it must be securely inserted. Other-
wise, the power will not be supplied by the battery. (See Fig. 2.7.)

(Correct) (Correct) (Incorrect)

Fig. 2.7 Connecting the Battery Connector

@ Turn the power ON.

@ Make sure that “BAT’ is not blinking on the CRT screen and that the red LED
in the board is OFF.

\\ I/,
1. If the red LED remains lit after replacing the battery, the connector might be in-
POINT serted incorrectly or the battery might be faulty.

Q 2. Power OFF operation is allowed a few seconds after turning the power ON.

3. After turning thepowerOFF, replace the battery quickly. If the NC unit is left with
the battery removed, the data stored in the memory could be lost.

2-15

.- . .. .. .—..—--.—.—— —-
..—— ..-. .— ——... .- —,—-------
 91.-?
d+ ~ 7+ ),+ y-i
aldwl
9or e law
d31S
l“wlw
31 CINVH@
3dVl
(i) NOllVkJ3d0 lVflNVMl P-Z
 2.4 MANUAL OPERATION (1)

2.4.2 Jog Feed (JOG)

It is possible to move an axis in the jog feed mode. Follow the procedure indicated below.

Select the jog mode by placing the MODE SELECT switch on the machine
operation panel in the JOG position.

Select the feedrate with the JOG FEEDRATE switch on the machine operation
panel.

Feedrate can be selected from 32 steps, with actual feedrates of individual set-
ting positions set for parameters pm2400 to pm2431. The actual number of
steps and feedrates selectable by the JOG FEEDRATE switch vary depending
on the machine model. For details, refer to the manuals published by the ma-
chine tool builder.

Press the JOG switch corresponding to the axis to be moved and the required
axis move direction.

The axis moves at the selected feedrate while the JOG switch is held pressed.

2.4.3 Step Feed (STEP)

Manual step feed operation is possible. Follow the procedure indicated below.

Select the step mode by placing the MODE SELECT switch on the machine
operation panel in the STEP position.

Select the feed distance per step with the MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY
switch on the machine operation panel.
Metric system : 0.001,0.01,0.1, 1.0, 10.0, 100.0 mm (per step)
Inch system : 0.0001,0.001,0.01,0.1, 1.0, 10.0 inch (per step)
Press the JOG switch corresponding to the axis to be moved and the required
axis move direction.

Each time the JOG switch is pressed, the selected axis moves in the selected
direction by the set feed distance per step.
2.4.4 Handle Feed (HANDLE)*

When the NC is equipped with a manual pulse generator, pulse handle feed operation is pos-
sible. Follow the procedure indicated below.

@ Select the handle mc,deby placing the MODE SELECT switch on the machine
operation panel in the HANDLE position.

@ Select the axis to be movedby the HANDLE AXIS selection switch on the ma-
chine operation panel.

@ With the MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch on the machine operation

panel, select the axis feed distance per pulse (one division of the pulse handle).

Clockwise rotation: In the positive direction

Counterclockwise direction: In the negative direction
Metric system : 0.001 ,0.01,0.1 mm (per division)
Inch system : 0.0001,0.001,0.01 inch (per division)
@ Turn the pulse handle. The axis moves in the positive or negative direction
according to the direction in which the pulse handle is turned.

2-18
 2.5 MANUAL OPERATION (2)

2.5 MANUAL OPERATION (2)

This section describes manual operations carried out in daily production using the manual
operation functions explained in 2.4 “MANUAL OPERATION ( 1)“.

2.5.1 Simultaneous 2-or 3-axis Handle F:eed *

By installing the pulse handle for the individual axes, it is possible to move up to three axes
among the X-, Y-, Z-, a-, and ~-axis simultaneously. Follow the procedure indicated below.
1st HANDLE AXIS 2nd HANDLE 3rd HANDLE AXIS
z AXIS Z z
‘f a Y a
x@ x@
O P
e e

1st HANDLE AXIS 2nd HANDLE AXIS 3rd HANDLE AXIS

— —
+ +

o [o
(
o
@

MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY

Xloo
xl Xlooo

xl . Xlo,ooo
m
Xloo,ooo

Fig. 2.8 Simultaneous 2-or 3-axis Pulse Handle Feed

@ Select the handle mode by placing the MODE SELECT switch on the machine
operation panel in the HANDLE position.

@ Select the axis feed distance per graduation of the pulse handle with the
MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch on the machine operation panel. This
switch is used in common for the three pulse handles.

@ Turn the pulse handle. The selected axis is moved in the positive or negative
direction according to the handle turning direction.

2-19

—..—.—..—..-— —. ..—.— ,.- ,,—— ...—— --- .——-. .—-.

2.5.2 Manual Reference Point Return

Axes can be returned to the reference point in manual operation. Follow the procedure indi-
cated below.

@ Select the rapid or jog mode by placing the MODE SELECT switch on the ma-
chine operation panel in the RAPID or JOG position.

@ Move an axis manually (manual rapid traverse or jog feed) to a position away
from the reference point (within the reference point return enabled area).
When an axis is located in range A in Fig. 2.9, reference point return ca be
executed correctly.

@ Turn ON the REFERENCE POINT RETURN switch.

@ Keep the JOG switch pressed corresponding to the axis to be returned to the
reference point and in the return direction. When the JOG switch is held
pressed, the corresponding axis starts moving in the same manner as ordinary
manual axis feed operation. When the axis reaches the deceleration point, fee-
drate is decelerated to a low feedrate and the axis stops automatically at the
reference point.

@ Upon completion of the reference point return, the REFERENCE POINT

lamp of that axis lights.
Rapid traverse rate
(pm2801 to pm2805) Approach feedrate
1 (pm2521 to pm2525)

lc’
>~+.
Deceleration
Creep feedrate
point
I (pm2531 to pm2535)
I
J Travel distance
(pm4451 to pm4455)
:
I I
I
Feedrate sequence
I Dog width I ~
I Feedrate LS signal
I I

----
I Zero-point signal
I
Area A I Area B

Point C
Fig. 2.9 Manual Reference Point Return

+ Reference Point
TERM?
e A specificposition in the machinecoordinatesystem. It is alsocalled the machine zero point or tfremachine
D
reference point.
 2.5 MANUAL OPERATION (2)

— ..— —.—
\\ I/,
1. Once the reference point return is completed, point C indicated in Fig. 2.9 is stortxl
POINT
to the NC. Therefore, if reference point return is attempted while an axis is in area
B, an error occurs. In this case, the axis should first be returned tc~area A and then
Q
the reference point return should be executed.

2. The axis for which reference point return has been completed can be moved in the
reference point return direction manually only if the reference point return switch
is turned OFF.

3. If commands have been read to the buffer area during automatic c~peration, manu-
al reference point return must not be executed. If manual return operation is
executed, the data in the buffer area is cleared.
—. ——
 ——— —

1. Immediately after the power is turned ON, the axes start manual or automatic ref-
erence point return operation independent of the present axis position. However,
reference point return cannot be executed correctly if the axis is located in area
B. In this case, the axis must be returned to area A before executing reference
point return.

2. If the MODE SELECT switch setting is changed while an axis is moving auto-
maticallyy to the reference point, an alarm (alarm 2141 to 2145 reference point re-
turn interruption error) occurs.

3. Reference point return cannot be executed when the MACHINE LOCK switch
is ON.

4. With a rotary axis, it is pcjssible to execute automatic reference point return as

with a linear axis. With a rotary axis, if h has been moved by more than
A 360.000° from the reference point established first, reference point return is
executed to the closest reference point in the preset direction of reference point
return.

The illustration below shows how the reference point return is executed from
points A and B. (The refermce point return direction is determined by the setting
for pm4002 D3 and D4.)

B
A
o ~~ +
–720° –360°

5. Once the reference point return is completed, second and later reference point re-
turn is executed at a high-speed mode. This is called “high-speed reference point
return”. However, if the setting is so made to execute the reference point return
at a low speed (pm4003 D6 = 1), second and later reference point return is
executed at a low speed.
Feedrate Rapid traverse
4 /

2-:22
 2.5 MANUAL OPERATION (2)

2.5.3 Manual Reference Point Return to the Second Reference Point*

The axes are automatically positioned at the second reference point. This operation allows
positioning at the second reference point independent of the present axis position, whether
it is in the negative side or positive side from the second reference position. Follow the proce-
dure indicated below.

Select the jog or rapid mode by placing the MODE SELECr switch in the JOG
or RAPID position.

Turn ON the ZRN2 (second zero point return request) switch on the machine
operation panel.

Keep the JOG switch cm-responding to the axis and direction of reference
point return. The corresponding axis is positioned at the second zero point at
the jog feedrate or rapid maverse rate according to the selected mode.

If the ZRN2 switch is turned OFF while an axis is moving to the second refer-
ence point, the axis stops moving. To restart the second reference point return
operation, turn ON the ZRN2 switch and turn OFF the JOG switch having
been pressed once, then press it once again.

If the JOG switch is pressed again to be turned OFF while the X-axis is moving
to the second zero point, the axis stops moving. In this case, press the JOG
switch again to turn it ON, and the X-axis restarts moving to the second zero
point. With the Y- and Z-axis, this is also applied.
— — .—
\\ I//
1. If the JOG switches of [+] and [--] are pressed at the same time, the corresponding
POINT axis stops moving since this operation is assumed to have turned OFF the JOG
switch.
Q
2. It is not allowed to use the first zero point return mode and the second reference
point return mode at the same time. If both input signals are ON at the same time,
both of the modes are invalid and neither jog nor rapid feed is executed. This fea-
ture is provided to ensure safety.

3. If the NC is in either the machine lock state (including the machine lock for indi-
vidual axes) or the Z-axis command disregard state, the second zero point return
operation cannot be executed, When a JOG switch is pressed under such state,
normal jog operation is perfomled.

4. Whh the axis for which second zero point return has been completed, manual axis
move operation is allowed only after the ZRN2 (second reference point return)
switch is turned OFF.
— — .

2-23

—
(3
suPPLE-
MENT
1. If the second zero point return input signal is turned ON in the state that the first
zero point return has not been completed, the input is invalid and the second refer-
ence point return mode cannot be set.

2. In the second reference point return mode, input from the JOG switch [-X] ([-Y],
[-Z]) is valid. If the mode is changed, the ZRN2 switch is assumed to have been
turned OFF.

2.5.4 l-line MDI

During the execution of manual operation, it is possible to execute one block of a part pro-
gram by directly entering it to the CRT screen. For this type of operation, a maximum of 40
characters can be written and the function codes that are allowed are M, S, T, F, and E codes.
However, MOO,MO1, M02, M30, M90 to M99, and Ml 90 to Ml 99 cannot be specified. An
offset command with a T command is also disregarded. Whh the system that carries out set-
up by using a T command, a T command must not be specified for this 1-line MDI operation.
Follow the procedure indicated below.

Select the manual mode with the MODE SELECT switch on the machine op-
eration panel. 1-line MDI operation is not possible in the automatic or edit
mode.

Enter the program from the operation panel and press the [EOB] (carrier re-
turn) key.

Press the CYCLE START switch on the machine operation panel, and the en-
tered program is executed. When the execution of the program is completed,
the program displayed in the key entry display area is cleared.

If the mode is changed while the program is executed (waiting for FIN), the
FIN is not returned forcibly and the NC remains in the state waiting for the in-
put of FIN.

2-24
 2.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION (1)

2.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION (1)

Thissection describes basic information necessary for performing automatic operation.

~ CAUTION
DBefore carrying out cutting operation with a new program, confirm safety by per-
forming single block operation and dry run operation.
If this check operation is not performed, unexpected operation maybe performed due to
mis-setting of the amount of offset, leading to tool damage due to interference, and re-
sulting accidents involving injuries to personnel.

~ Strictly observe the cautions in the user’s manual when using programming
functions.
Ignoring these cautions could lead tc, accidents involving injuries to personnel and mal-
functions.
—

2.6.1 Preparation of Automatic Operation

After turning ON the power, the axes must be positioned at the start point defined in a pro
gram before starting automatic operation. Set the coordinate system to be used for machining
either manually or by specifying appropriate commands in a program. Several examples are
given below to explain how the the coordinate system should be set. For details, refer to the
manuals published by the machine tool builder.

(1) Setting the Coordinate System

The origin of the coordinate system to be used for executing the commands should be
set.

(a) When G92 is not specified in the program

The coordinate system for which the origin is set at other than the reference point
for the program not containing the coordinate system setting command (G92) is
called a coordinate system for machining. The procedure for setting a coordinate
system for machining is indicated below.

Return the axes to the reference point by following the manual reference point
return procedure (see 2.4.2.).

Select the MDI mode by placing the MODE SELECT switch on the machine
operation panel in the MDI position.

2-25

——.. -—.. -— —-.. —..

 Write the program for setting the coordinate system.

For example,
G92X”. ”Y. -” Z”.”;

+Y

1- x
Reference point

,,———
JI 1..

Origin (O,O)
Y

+x

Fig. 2.10 Coordinate System for Machining

@ Execute the program by pressing the CYCLE START switch on the machine
operation panel.

(b) When G92 is specified in the program

Return the axes to the reference point by manual reference point return operation.

Example of Programming

EOR;
N1G92X””” Y””. Z--”;

(c) When G28 (automatic reference point return) and G92 are specified in the
program

Move the axes manually to a position (in the area where reference point return op-
eration is allowed) away from the reference point.

Example of Programming

EOR;
N1G28. .”. ”Y”” Z””.;
N2G92X””” YO. ”Z .-”;
 2.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION (1)

(2) Start Lock

Keep the machine in the start lock state until it is confirmed that machine operation is
permitted. Follow the procedure indicated below.

@ Before starting machine operation, turn the START LOCK switch on the ma-
chine operation panel ON.

@ After safety is confirmed, turn the START LOCK switch OFF.

2.6.2 Memory Operation

Memory mode operation is used to carry out automatic operation by using programs stored
in the NC memory. Follow the procedure indicated below.

Make sure that the alarm indicating lamp on the machine operation panel is
not lit. Note that with some types of machines, the alarm indicating lamp is
not provided on the machine operation panel. If the alarm indication is given,
locate the cause by referring to 9.1.4, “Cause of Alarm and Corrective Action”
and take appropriate measures to clear it.

@ Check the tool offset amounts and correct them if necessary, then position the
axes at the start point. Fc)r details of tool offset, refer to 5.3, “TOOL DATA
CONTROL JOB”.

Carry out necessary settings with the switches on the machine operation panel.

Select the memory mode by placing the MODE SELECT switch in the MEM
position.
● Set the SINGLE-BLOCK switch ON or OFF. To execute the program block-
by-block, set it ON.

Set the rapid traverse rate with the RAPID TRAVERSE RATE OVERRIDE
switch.
●
Set the MANUAL ABSOILUTE switch ON or OFF. Set the switch ON to re-
turn the tool by manual operation intervention to the previously located posi-
tion.
● Set the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch ON or OFF. Set the switch ON to
disregard the blocks that include the “/” (slash) code.
● Set the OPTIONAL STOP switch ON or OFF. To execute the optional stop
function (MO1 ), set the switch ON.
●
Set the DRY RUN switch. ON or OFF. Set the switch ON when checking the
program.

2-27

..——. .—... —.-.-.. -.-—-— .—..... .. ——-..—. —-.-. —.—.... ——.. —.—... ,-_.. — ___________
8Z-Z
iaw c9.z
1N31N
+rkms
c)
 2.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION (1)

2.6.4 Feed Hold

The feed hold function suspends automatic operation temporarily. Follow the procedure in-
dicated below.

When the FEED HOLD switch on the machine operation panel is pressed
while an axis is moving, it stops after deceleration. The CYCLE START lamp
on the machine operation panel goes OFF and the FEED HOLD lamp lights.
B
After the completion of axis movement, the indicating lamp goes OFF.

(3)
supple-
ment
1. If the execution of a drilling canned cycle is stopped halfway due to the single-
block function, the FEED HOLD lamp automatically goes ON to indicate that the
operation is suspended during the execution of a drilling canned cycle.

2. The setting of the FEED HOLD switch is disregarded while a tapping cycle is
executed in the G84 mode.

3. If the FEEL HOLD switch is turned ON while S, T, M, or B* function not

associated with axis movements is executed, the function is continuously
executed to be completed although the FEED HOLD lamp lights immediate y.
After the completion of the function, the FEED HOLD lamp goes OFF and opera-
tion stops.

2-29
 2.6.5 Override

The following gives a general description of the override function. For details of override,
refer to the manuals published by the machine tool builder.

(1) Feedrate Override

In the automatic mode (TAPE, MEM, MDI), feedrate specified by an F code can be
overridden in21 steps in the range from Oto 200% in increments of 10~o, using the FEE-
DRATE OVERRIDE switch on the machine operation panel. During the execution of
a tapping cycle (G74, G84), the setting is disregarded and the tapping cycle is executed
in the feedrate specified by the program. If the OVERRIDE CANCEL switch is ON,
the setting of the FEEDRATE OVERRIDE switch is disregarded and the axes are
moved at the feedrate specified by the F codes in a program.

Table 2.1 Feed rate Override Steps

I STEP l%! STEP 1%1

k+---++++-++%
H---t+t+++h-h

e
4 40 15 150

5 50 16 160
6 60 17 170

7 70 18 180

H+:l%=--
D
SUPPLE-
MENT
Optionally, feedrate override range can be expanded to O to 54070 (32 steps). In this
case, override increments are 1CMO in the range from Oto 20070,209’0 in the range from
220 to 30090, and 40% in the range from 340 to 54090.

2-:30
 2.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION (1)

(2) Rapid Traverse Override

For the GOO mode operation in automatic mode and for the rapid mode operation in
manual mode, the switch can be installed to adjust rapid traverse rate in 4 steps ( 100%,
50%, 25%, Fo) in the range from Oto 100%, using the RAPID TRAVIERSE OVERRIDE
switch on the machine operation panel. For Fo, actual override value is set for parameter
(pm2447).
——

(3
SUPPLE-
MENT
Optionally, override setting is possible in 6 steps as 100%, 50%, 25%, Fo, F1, and F2.
The feedrates called by the selection of F] and Fz are set for parameters (pm2448 and
pm2449). For details, refer to the manuals published by the machine tool builder.
2.7 AUTOMATIC OPERATION (2)

This section describes the switches used for automatic operation.

2.7.1 Optional Stop

The OPTIONAL STOP switch is used to select whether or not the MO 1 (optional stop) com-
mand should be executed in the automatic mode (TAPE, MEM, MDI).

(1) OPTIONAL STOP Switch ON

When the OPTIONAL STC)P switch is ON, the machine stops operating with the
CYCLE START lamp on the machine operation panel lit after the execution of the block
that includes MO1. The CYCLE START lamp goes OFF if the FIN signal is returned.
The operation restarts when the CYCLE START switch is pressed.

(2) OPTIONAL STOP Switch OFF

The MOI command is disregarded. If the OPTIONAL STOP switch setting is changed
during the execution of an automatic operation, it is disregarded for the block presently
executed. The new setting becomes valid from the block which is read after the switch
setting has been changed.

2.7.2 Optional Block Skip

The OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch is used to set whether or not the data in the block
which includes the “/” (slash) code should be disregarded in automatic operation. Note that
if the switch setting is changed during operation, the new setting is not valid for the blocks
having been read to buffer area.

(1) OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP Switch ON

When the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch is ON, the commands specified after the
.’/” (slash) code are disregarded (up to the end of the block). For the blocks in which
the “/” code is specified, the commands specified preceding the “/” code are executed.

(2) OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP Switch OFF

The blocks which include the “/” (slash) code are executed. If the OPTIONAL BLOCK
SKIP switch setting is changed during the execution of an automatic operation, it is dis-
regarded for the block presently executed and also for the blocks having been read to
the buffer area. The new setting becomes valid from the block which is read after the
switch setting has been changed.

2-32
 2.7 AU1OMATIC OPERATION (2)

D
SUPPLE-
MENT
1.

2.
Specification of “/” is equivalent to”/ l“.

When the optional block skip 13function is selected, the switches are provided
corresponding to “/2” to “/9” individually and by using these switches, it is pos-
sible to turn ON and OFF the block skip function for the individual designation
of “/2” to “/9”.
— —— —

2.7.3 Dry Run

When automatic mode operation (TAPE, MEM, MD1) is executed with the DRY RUN
switch set ON, feedrates specified in a program are disregarded and axis move commands
are executed at the feedrate set with the JOG FEEDRATE switch. Since the F code specified
in a program is displayed during the e~ecution of a program, the program can be checked
efficiently by using this function.

Feedrate to be used in positioning (GOO) can be selected from the rapid traverse rate or jog
feedrate according to the setting for parameter pm2000 DO as indicated in Table 2.2.

Table 2.2 Rapid Traverse in Dry Run

~ ::’::::::. ‘7
,,,>
L 1 Jog feedrateset with JOG FEEDRATEswi:ch
----1
—

D
SUPPLE.
MENT
1. When the setting of the DRY RIJN switch is changed during autc~matic operation,
the new setting becomes valid immediately. However, if it is changed while axis
movement is controlled in the “mm/rev” mode” or during the execution of a tap-
ping cycle, the new setting becomes valid after the completion of the presently
executed block.
2. In the dry run mode, the setting of the RAPID ‘TRAVERSE RATE OVERRIDE
switch is valid for rapid traverse operation.
—

2-33
 2.7.4 Display Lock and Machine Lock

The DISPLAY LOCWMACHINE LOCK switch allows the program to be executed in the
following manner – to operate the tnachine with the present position data fixed, or to execute
the program to update the present position data without actually operating the machine. The
switch can be operated only while the operation is stopped in the block stop or feed hold state.

(1) DISPLAY LOCK/MACHINE LOCK Switch OFF

Select this position for normal manual or automatic operation. Both the machine and
the position data are operated and updated according to the execution of the commands
in the program.

(2) In the DISPLAY LOCK Position

The displayed position data are not updated even when the axes are moved. This posi-
tion should be selected when the display data should not include the distance of shift.

(3) In the MACHINE LOCK Position

As the program commands are executed manually or automatically, the position data
are updated according to the execution of the commands while the machine is not actu-
ally operated. Whh this setting, the M, S, T, and B* functions are executed normally.
This are used for manually presetting the display or for checking the tape. Note that the
reference point return operation is not executed if the switch is placed in the MACHINE
LOCK position.

2-34

—— —.=
...
 2.7 AUTOMATIC OPERATION (2)

2.7.5 Auxiliary Function Lock

The AUX FUNCTION LOCK switch cm the machine operation panel is used to check the
NC tape in combination with the MACHINE LOCK function. When the switch is ON, the
M, S, T, and B* function commands are disregarded. When the switch is turned ON during
automatic operation, the function becomes valid from the block next to the presently
executed block.
— ——

a)
SUPPLE.
MENT
1.

2.
The MOO, MO1, M02, and M03 codes are processed normally,

Both the decode signal and BCD code are output. However, BCD code is not out-
put with M90 to M99 (internally processed M codes); BCD code is not output in-
herently with these M codes.

3. The AUX FUNCTION LOCK switch setting is invalid for the S5-digit com-
mands.
————.

2.7.6 Z-axis Command Neglect

The Z-AXIS COMMAND NEGLECT switch is used to execute a program only in the XY
plane.

When the switch is ON, the program is executed with the machine lock function applied only
to the Z-axis. Although the Z-axis does not move, position data of the Z-axis is updated as
the program is executed.

The switch can be operated only while the operation is stopped in the block stop or feed hold
state.

2.7.7 4th-axis Command Neglect

When the 4TH-AXIS COMMAND NEGLECT switch is ON, the program is executed with
the machine lock function applied only to the 4th-axis. Although the 4th-axis does not move,
position data of the 4th-axis are updated as the program is executed.

The switch can be operated only while the operation is stopped in the block stop or feed hold
state.

2-35

.—-.. .— . ..-. —
2.7.8 5th-axis Command Neglect

When the 5TH-AXIS COMMAND NEGLECT switch is ON, the program is executed with
the machine lock function applied only to the 5th-axis. Although the 5th-axis does not move,
position data of the 5th-axis are updated as the program is executed.

The switch can be operated only while the operation is stopped in the block stop or feed hold
state.

2-:36
 2.8 OPERATIONINTERVENTIONDURING AUTOMATIC OPERATION

2.8 OPERATION INTERVENTION DURING AUTOMATIC

OPERATION

This section describes the procedure used for manual and MDI operation intervention during
automatic operation.

~ CAUTION
— —
I Do not restart automatic operation after stopping automatic operation and then
performing ‘tool selection” in manual operation or”1 line MDI” operation.
The reason for this is that the “tool selection” operation may cause the coordinate system
to be changed, leading to unexpected operation if automatic operation were restarted.
This could cause tool damage due tcl interference, and resulting accidents involving in-
juries to personnel.
Reset the NC after any manual intervention.

I After stopping automatic operation and performing a manual intervention, do

not restart automatic operation without resetting first.
If automatic operation is started with the “mirror image” or “manual absolute” function
in effect, unexpected operation maybe performed. This could cause tool damage due to
interference, and resulting accidents involving injuries to personnel.
Reset the NC after any manual intervention.

2.8.1 Manual Operation Intervention during Automatic Operation

To carry out a manual operation during automatic operation, follow the steps indicated be-
low.

a Interrupt the operation by using the FEED HOLD or SINGLE-BLOCK switch

on the machine operation panel.

@ Record the position where the operation has been interrupted after displaying
the present position data by pressing the [EXTERN] (f3) key of the POS. job
at the COMN screen.

@ Select the manual mode (RAPID, JOG, STEP or HANDLE) with the MODE
SELECT switch on the machine operation panel.

@ Return the axes to the position where manual operation (see 2.3 “MANUAL
OPERATION (1 )“.) has been started (the position recorded in step @).

@ Return the MODE SELECT switch to the operation mode (MEM or MDI)
position selected before manual operation intervention.

a Press the CYCLE START switch on the machine operation panel to restart the
interrupted automatic operation.

2-37

-. .. . . . ..._____
.. .. .. —.. .— . ..-.— .—-----
CD
SUPPLE.
MENT
1. If the operation mode is changed from automatic to manual without stopping the
operation, the axes are decelerated and stopped immediately. When the operation
mode is changed from one automatic mode to another automatic mode, operation
stops at the block end.

2. If automatic operation is restarted without returning the axes to the previously lo-
cated position after manual operation intervention, how the tool paths to be gener-
ated after the restart of automatic operation differs depending on the setting of the
MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch on the machine operation panel. For details of
the switch, refer to 2.8.4, ‘“’Manual Absolute”.

3. In the manual mode, l-line MDI operation is possible. For details of the opera-
tion, refer to 2.5.4, “ 1-line MDI”.

2.8.2 M131 Operation intervention during Automatic Operation

To carry out an MDI operation during automatic operation, follow the steps indicated below.

Interrupt the automatic operation by turning the SINGLE-BLOCK switch on

the machine operation panel ON. The machine stops after the completion of
the block being executed when the switch is turned ON. In this case, several
blocks of commands might have been read into the buffer area.

Place the MODE SELECT switch on the machine operation panel in the MDI
position.

Enter the necessary commands.

Press the CYCLE START switch to execute the entered commands.

Return the MODE SELECT switch to the mode previously selected (TAPE or
MEM).

Turn OFF the SINGLE-BLOCK switch.

Press the CYCLE START switch to restart the interrupted automatic opera-
tion.

9
%JPPt.E-
lENT
Do not attempt
G77,G81
MDI operation ]mtervention in a canned cycle mode (G73, G74, G76,
to G89) or during reference point return. Interrupted canned cycle or refer-
ence point return could not be completed correctly,

2-:38
 2.8 OPERATIONINTERVENTIONDURING AUTOMATIC OPERATION

2.8.3 Automatic Handle Mode Offset *

During automatic operation (TAPE, MD1, MEM), distance of axis shift carried out by using
the pulse handle can be added by this function. This function allows compensation for errors
in mounting workpieces, etc. Follow the procedure indicated below.

Turn ON the AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET switch on the machine opera-
tion panel.

Select the axis to be moved with the HANDLE AXIS switch on the machine
operation panel. If the simultaneous 3-axis control by using the pulse handles
is selected optionally, simultaneous 3-axis operation is allowed.

Select the axis feed distance per graduation of the pulse handle by placing the
MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch on the machine operation panel at an
appropriate position. By this switch, it is possible to select 1, 10, or 100 pulses
per graduation of the manual pulse generator.

When the pulse handle is turned during the execution of automatic operation,
movement of the axis which is selected in step@ above is added to the axis
move distance specified in the program. When the pulse handle is turned in
the clockwise direction, the selected axis moves in the positive direction and
when it is turned in the counterclockwise direction, the axis, moves in the nega-
tive direction.

Restart the automatic operation after turning the AUTO MODE HAN’DLE
OFFSET switch OFF. Succeeding operation is executed with the axis shifted
by the pulse handle operation. When the coordinate system set-up command
(G92, etc.) is executed after that, the shift amount is not included but the coor-
dinate system is set according to the specified values.

2-39

.—.—. .——..———.. —.-..... ,—.. —.__.. _.- —._

 Table 2.3 Setting Valid/Invalid for AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET

Valid/Invalid

pm2002DO 1 Valid
X-axis

E
(HOFSX) o Invalid
~—
pm2002D1 1 Valid
‘ Y-axis
(HOFSY) o Invalid
L
I Z-axis pm2002D2
—
(HOFSZ)
1
o
Valid
Invalid
pm2002D3 I Valid
4th-axis
(HOFS4) o Invalid
——
L= Valid
pm2002D4 1
~ 5th-axis
(HOFS5) o Invalid

-..,---. ————— .....— —.—

(3
SUPPLE-
MENT
1.

2.
If the NC is in an alarm state or the interlock input (see 1.2.4.) is ON, it is not pos-
sible to move an axis by using the automatic mode handle offset function.

With parameter pm2003 D 1, the condition necessary for moving an axis by using
the automatic mode handle offset function can be set.

pm2003 D1 = O: Enabled during both rapid traverse and interpolation operation

D 1 = 1: Enabled only during interpolation operation

3. The manual absolute function cannot be used in this function.

2-40
 2.8 OP133ATIONINTERVENTIONDURING AUTOMATIC OPERATION

2.8.4 Manual Absolute

If a cutting tool is moved manually by interrupting automatic operation, how the manually
moved distance should be treated when restarting automatic operation can be determined by
the setting of the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch on the machine operation panel.

(1) MANUAL ABSOLUTE Switch ON

After the intervention of manual operation, the program coordinate system is not
changed. Subsequently, the remaining commands in the interrupted block are executed
by shifting from the programmed path when automatic operation is restarted. When the
block appearing next to the operation restarted block is the circular interpolation block
(G02, G03), circular interpolation is executed with the paths shifted from the pro-
grammed paths. When the GOO or GO1 mode commands are given, the shift distance
is canceled, and the paths return to the programmed paths.

Actual movement
Remaining /
commands } Programmed path

Manual
operation

d’ Feed hold

Fig. 2.11 Operation with MANUAL ABSOL.UTE Switch ON

— ——

By settingpm4011 D7, it is possible to make the manual absolute function valid when
@i@ a program is executed in the G91 (incremental command) mode. In this case, the
manual absolute function is called when the G90 (absolute command) is executed.

2-41

——— ————__ _____ .__, _ . _. ___ -,- .——. -Y.. Y ..-, ,~..—...-..—. —.-
(2) MANUAL ABSOLUTE Switch OFF

If manual operation is executed by interrupting automatic operation, the program coor-

dinate system is shifted by the manually shifted distance. Accordingly, when automatic
operation is restarted, the program is executed in the shifted coordinate system.
Actual movement
Remaining
commands

Manual

opea’’onf;~r

%’” Circular interpolation;’ \

Feed hold %..
/ -.+

Fig. 2.12 Operation with MANUAL ABSOLUTE Switch OFF

The manually shifted amount is canceled by the following commands or operation in

which the commands in the program are changed so that they agree with the present val-

Manual or automatic reference point return

Setting the base coordinate system

Execution of skip(G31)

Reset operation

2-42
 2.9 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONSAT ENHANCED LEVEL

2.9 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS AT ENHANCED LEVEL

In this section, enhanced level functions of YASNAC J300 are described.

2.9.1 TOOI Length Measurement *

The tool length measurement function measures the tool length offset amount which is used
for the tool length offset (G43, G44, G49) function.

(1) Operation (Parameter pm6008 DO = O)

Follow the procedure indicated below to measure the travel distance.

Mount a tool in the spindle and position the Z-axis at the position that should
be taken as the home position. Although the home position maybe set at any
position, setting it at the tool change position will simplify the tool change pro-
cedure.

Select a manual mode by placing the MODE SELECT switch on the machine
operation panel at the RAPID, JOG, HANDLE, or STEP position.

Press the [SET] process key on the NC operation panel to select the set-up pro-
cess.

Press the [TOOL] (f 1) job soft-key to select the tool job. The tool offset
amount display mode is selected and the tool offset amount of the offset num-
ber already specified and those near this number are displayed.

In the state that axes are all stopped, press the MEASIJREMENT switch on
the machine operation panel. Note that this switch is valid only in a manual
mode. The MEASUREMENT lamp lights and the preset Z-axis position is set
as the home position. If the selected process is not the set-up process, the set-
up process is automatically selected and the corresponding screen is dis-
played.

‘[ -Hen’eposn

Travel
distance
(ML) i
Contact level

1 Reference level (B)

--k+ ;..1 length measurement bias amount

‘arameter:pm0806
Block gage, etc.
Fig. 2.13 Measuring the Tool Length Offset Amount

2-43

.—.
..-— .—— —.
 @ Measurement starts from the home position; this position is taken as “O”.

(3
SUPPl,E-
hlENT
1. To start measurement from “O” in the workpiece coordinate system, execute zero
set operation of the workpiece coordinates ystem at this position. Note that mea-
surement can be executed correctly even if zero set operation is not executed.

2. For details of the screen used for tool length measurement, refer to 5.2.4, “Writing
the Measured Tool Length Offset Amount”.

Move the tool offset number where the offset amount should be written by us-
ing the page keys or cursor up/down keys. Or press the cursor down key after
entering the tool offset number. The page including the specified offset num-
ber is displayed and the cursor is located at the specified tool offset number.

Manually move the Z-axis to bring the nose of the tool into contact with the
contact level. The contact level is set in reference to the reference level (top
face of the workpiece to be machined) and the difference between these two
levels is set for parameter pm0806 as the “tool length measurement bias
amount” ( 1 = input unit). This bias amount can be considered as the thickness
of the block gage, etc, and should be written in a positive value. This bias
amount can be set by carrying out the following operation on the tool length
measurement screen.

Press the [BIAS] (fl ) soft-key, and “BIAS (B)” is highlighted.

After keying in the bias amount, press the [WR] key. The keyed in bias amount
is entered.

Press the WRITE &. RETRACT switch on the machine operation panel, and
the following operation is executed.

The Z-axis automatically returns to the home position at a rapid traverse rate.
The distance from the home position to the reference level, which is equivalent
to the travel distance (ML) is stored to at the specified offset number. Note that
“(ML) = Z - B“.

After the completion of the above, the offset number one larger than the speci-
fied offset number is newly specified. The tool length offset amount can now
be entered for this new offset number. After the completion of offset amount
storing for H99, the H code number returns to HO 1.

Change the tool either manually or in MDI mode operation to set the next tool
in the spindle. The MEASUREMENT lamp remains lit even when the mode
is changed to MDI. After setting the tool length offset amount for all tools,
return the mode to a manual mode.

2-44
 2.9 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONSAT ENHANCED LEVEL

Repeat steps @ to@ to set the tool offset amount for all tools to be used.

Press the [RETURN] (f5) function soft-key. The screen is changed to the off-
set screen. Note that this operation can be omitted.

Press the MEASUREMENT switch. The MEASUREMENT lamp goes OFF

and the automatic offset data writing function is canceled. If the tool length
measurement screen has been displayed, the screen is changed to the offset

E
screen.
A

Measuring the Remaining Distance (Parameter: pm 6008 DO= 1)

If “parameter pm6008 DO = 1”, the remaining distance (RL) is stored to the tool offset
data memory instead of the travel distance (ML).

I’F
+Z

Remaining
distance
(R~
>

(fvfL) ~

f94
I

I
I
(-Z1 ;1

Work
+
I
1

I
I

piece
Home position

Tool length measurement

bias amcmnt (B)
pm0806
Reference level
Bottom level setting (A)
pm0807

Bottom level

Fig. 2.14 Measuring the Remaining Distance

The bottom level which is taken as the reference for measuring the remaining distance
is set for parameter pm0807 (1 = input unit) with the signed value reference from the
home position. The bottom level can also be set in the following operation at the tool
length measurement screen.
Press the [BOITOM LEVEL] (f2) soft-key. The “BOI’TOM LEVEL (A)” is
highlighted.

After inputting the bottom level setting value, press the [WR] key. The bottom
level is written. For other operations, follow the same steps as in ( 1). RL =
- (A - ML)

2-45
 (3) Measuring the Tool Length Using the NC Operation Panel

Without using the special switches on the machine operation panel provided for mea-
surement, it is possible to measure tool length by using the switches and keys on the NC
operation panel. Follow the procedure indicated below instead of pressing the WRITE
& RETRACT switch.

Display the common process screen by pressing the [COMN] process key. Af-
ter that press the [P OS] (f 1) job soft-key and then the [UNIV] (f2) function
soft-key.

Press the [SET] (f5) function soft-key to clear the coordinate system set value
to “O”. This means that the home position is set to “O”.

Press the [SET] process key to display the set-up process screen. After press-
ing the [TOOL] (f 1) job soft-key, press the [OFFSET] (f 1) function soft-key,
then press the function selection key to change the menu. Select the [TLM]
(fl ) function soft-key to display the tool length measurement screen.

Press the [WRITE] (f4) function soft-key. The measured tool length is written
in the same manner as in normal tool length measurement operation. In this
case, however, the Z-axis does not return to the home position. The setting for
parameter pm6008 DO (travel distance measurement/remaining distance mea-
surement) is valid fcmthis operation, and which of the values written is deter-
mined by the setting for this parameter.
.— .—

(3
SUPPLE-
fulENT
1.

2.
In this automatic writing operation, the measured value is stored to the memory
in an absolute value.

When the home position is not the tool change position, the tool can be brought
into contact with the contact level directly after changing the tool to the next one.
Once the home position is set with the MEASUREMENT switch, positioning at
the home position is not necessary for the succeeding operation.

3. If “HOO” is specified, the offset amount is not updated even when the WRITE &
RETRACT switch is pressed. Therefore, the tool length measurement operation
should be executed after moving the cursor to a position of “HO 1” or below.

4. On the tool length measurement screen, it is possible to update the offset amount
where the cursor is positioned by pressing the [WR] key after entering the data
by the keys.
 2.9 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONSAT ENHANCED LEVEL

2.9.2 Return to the Operation Interrupted Point*

The “return to operation interrupted point” function is provided to return the axes to the pre-

//
/
viousl y located position where automatic operation has been interrupted to carry out manual
operation for measuring the machined dimensions or removing chips.

// ‘L /’
\

Fig. 2.15 Return to Operation Interrupted F)oint

The operation procedure is explained below.

Interrupt the automatic operation by pressing the SINGLE-BLOCK or FEED

HOLD switch on the machine operation panel.

Select a manual mode by placing the MODE SELECT switch on the machine
operation panel in the JOIG, RAPID, HANDLE, or STEP position.

Move an axis in the manual mode to retract the cutting tclol appropriately.

Carry out required operation such as measuring the workpiece, removal of

chips, etc.

Turn ON the INTERRUPTION POINT R.ETURN switch on the machine op-

eration panel.

Press the MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch on the machine operation

panel corresponding to the direction to the machining interrupted point (the
point where the operation mode has been changed from automatic to manual).
The axis moves to the machining interrupted point at the selected feedate and
it stops moving when it reaches the machining interrupted point.

Turn OFF the INTERRUPTION POINT RETURN switch on the machine op-
eration panel.

Return the operation mode to an automatic mode and press the CYCLE
START switch on the machine operation panel. The automatic operation re-
starts.

2-47

-— ..- .— —--
a)
SUPPLE.
MENT
1. If the axes are positioned on the machining interrupted point, turn OFF the IN-
TERRUPTION
possible.
POINT RIETURN switch. Otherwise, jog feed of such axes is not

2. If the NC is reset after changing the operation mode from automatic to manual,
the present position is taken as the machining interrupted point. This means that
the axes are positioned on the machining interrupted point and, subsequently, jog
feed operation is not allowed unless the INTERRUPTION POINT RETURN
switch is turned OFF.

3. If automatic operation is interrupted by manual operation for a second time after

the automatic operation was once interrupted by manual operation and then the
automatic operation was recovered, the point where the operation mode was last
changed from automatic to manual is taken as the machining interrupted point.

4. If the REFERENCE POINT RETURN switch or the second reference point re-
turn switch is ON, the machining interrupted point return operation is not
executed but the reference point return or the second reference point return opera-
tion is executed.

2-48

——.. .. .
 2.9 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONSAT ENHANCED LEVEL

2.9.3 Manual Centering Operation *

The manual centering function can detelmine the coordinate values of the center between the
two points or the center of a circle by manual operation. Follow the procedure indicated be-
low.

~ Place the MODE SELECrswitchon themachineoperation panel in the ElAN-

DLE, STEP, JOG, or RAPID position,

@ Press the COMN process key to display the common screen. Then press the
[POS.] and [UNIV] soft-keys.

@ Turn ON the MANUAL CENTERING MODE switch. At the same time, turn
ON the MANUAL SKIP MODE switch.

@ Specify the axis for centering operation. If the [WR] key is pressed after enter-
ing “XO” or “Xl 23.000”, the entered value is saved temporarily and displayed
on the screen.
r —,
POS. (CENTER) COM O***** NOOOOO
UNIVERSAL Pos X99’9999.999

x 0.000
Y 0.000
z 0.000

STP LSK
~ AIARM TIME
+zzlmm[m=l&

.mmEEEIEEi
Fig. 2.16 Centering Axis Designation Screen

@ Operate the X-axis to bring the sensor into contact with the circumference.
When the sensor outputs a signal, the axis stops moving and the value saved
in step @ is set for position data. This is the same processing as the setting
for coordinate system. The axis does not. move in the contact detected direc-
tion until it is retracted by more than the preset return amount.

2-49
 @ Move the axis in the opposite direction and bring the sensor into contact with
the circumference in the opposite side. When the sensor outputs a signal, the
axis stops moving and the center of two contact detected points is set as the
present position.

@ Carry out the same tsteps @ to@ for the Y-axis.

@ Turn OFF the MANUAL CENTERING MODE switch. At the same time,
turn OFF the MANIJAL SKIP MODE switch.

cl)
suPPLE-
MENT
This

—.. ——._
function is valid only when the manual skip is valid.
..__________________ ..——— —

2.9.4 Program Restart *

By using the program restart function, it is possible to restart an interrupted operation in such
cases where execution is interrupted due to breakage of a cutting tool or to restart the program
continuously from the block where the operation was stopped the previous day. By designat-
ing a sequence number of the bloclc, the function allows the program to be restated from the
specified block.

(1) Operation

Turn ON the PROGRAM RETURN (program restart) switch on the machine

operation panel.

After placing the MODE SELECT switch on the machine operation panel in
the MEM position.

Rewind the program to the beginning. For details of this operation, refer to
the explanation given in 6.1, “PROGRAM JOB”.

Press the [RESTART] (f3) function soft-key on the PROGRAM JOB screen
of the RUN process. The message requesting the input of the program restart
position information is displayed.

The message “ENTER SEQUENCE NUMBER’ is displayed. Enter the se-

quence number and press the [WR] key.

The message “ENTER THE OCCURRENCE NUMBER” is displayed. If the

same sequence number appears more than one time, enter the position of the
objective sequence number and press the [WR] key. If designation of the posi-
tion of the objective sequence number is not necessary, press the [WR] key
only.

2-50
 2.9 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONSAT ENHANCED LEVEL

@ Press the [WR] key again. Sequence number search starts from the present
cursor position.

● During the execution of the search, the message “PREPARING TO RE-

START” is displayed on the screen, and, at the same time, the program restart
message “PRS” blinks on. and off on the screen. The “PRS” is cleared when
the positioning of the axes at the restart position is completed.

● Upon completion of the search, the program restart information is displayed

on the screen.
— I
RUNNING O***** NOOOOO
N1OO G54;
N101 M06;
N102 G43 H05 M03;
N103 GOO X-1 O.;
UNIVERSAL INCREMENT M FREQ
x 109.947 x -50.500 13 14 15
‘t 0.300 Y -80.000 06 03 05
z 10.300 z 0.000 :
T 0005 0100
s 1000 B 0000 :
MEM pRs
STP LSK
= co.mm ?EmING t
. -I n -] ~mj ml m]
—

Fig. 2.17 Example of Program Restart Information Display Screen

UNIVERSAL : Indicates, the coordinate values of program restart posi-

tion.
INCREMENT : Indicates the distance from the present tclol position to the
program restart position.
M Displays all M codes having been read from the sequence
number search start block to the restart block. If there are
more than 24 M codes, the latest 24 M codes are dis-
played.
MFREQ : Indicates, the number of specified M codes.
T Displays up to two latest T codes specified before the re-
start block.
s Displays the last S code specified before the restart block.
B Displays the last B code specified before the restart block.
(only when the second auxilia~ function option is valid.)

2-51
cl)
SUPPLE.
MENT
M and T codes are displayed in the order of their appearance.
—,..—.———

If the searched sequence number is the objective block, turn OFF the PRO-
GRAM RETURN switch. If it is not the objective block, execute the program
restart request again.

If there are M, S, T, and/or B codes that are necessary for restarting the pro-
gram, specify one on the program restart information screen. Select the manu-
al mode for this operation.

Enter the necessary M, S, T, and/or B code and execute it by pressing the

CYCLE START switch on the machine operation panel (execution of M, S,
T, and/or B code using the 1-line MDI function).

Return the mode to the memory mode.

Restart the program by pressing the CYCLE START button, When the
CYCLE START switch is pressed, the axes move to the operation restart point
one by one in the order of 5th-axis, 4th-axis, X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis. After
that the automatic operation restarts from the block next to the specified se-
quence number.

(2) Precautions on Operation

8 While the “PREPARING TO RESTART” message is displayed, no key opera-

tion is accepted except the RESET key on the NC operation panel. The G and
M code display in the program job of the operation process is not changed.
●
After the “PREPARING TO RESTART” message is cleared, it is possible to
change the display in the lower half area of the screen to “G/M code informa-
tion”, “Subprogram nesting information”, or “Program restart information”
by pressing the page keys.
● While “PRS” is displayed, it is not allowed to call and edit the program stored
in memory.
● The [RESTART] (f3) function soft-key is displayed only when the PRO-
GRAM RETURN switch on the machine operation panel is ON and the NC
is in the label skip status.
● The program restart request can be executed without using the PROGRAM
RETURN switch.

G
PROGRAMRETURNswitch necessary
PROGRAMRETURNswitch not necessary

2-52
 2.9 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONSAT ENHANCED LEVEL

● When the parameter setting is made so that the PROGRAM RETURN switch
is not necessary for the program restart request, the program restart mode ON/
OFF is changed by the [RESTART] (f3) soft-key. In this case, operation step
@ explained in item (1) i~bove is not necessary.

(3) Remarks on Program Restart and Related Functions

The program restart function establishes various conditions during the execution of se-
quence number search so that the conditions at the restart will be the same as those when
the program was interrupted. However, some program commands require extra care. I
These are indicated below.

(a) Program restart position

The position for the restart of program is generated in the NC. Therefore, the axes
are regarded to move as programmed during the search for the program restart posi-
tion. If the function is executed in the mode called by the following G codes, the
point specified in a program and actual positioning point differ from each other and
in such modes, the point specified in the program is regarded as the endpoint: auto-
matic reference point return (G28), reference point return check (G27), return from
reference point (G29), second - fourth reference point return (G30), and machine
coordinate system (G53).

(b) Input signal

There are commands that perform different opemtions depending on the input sig-
nals. With one type of signal, the status at the start of search for the program restart
is retained, and with another type of signal, they are completely disregarded.

c The signals that retain the status at the start of search:

Mirror image (M95, M94), block delete, machine lock, and FI -digit selection

“ The signals that are disregarded:

Feed hold, single-block, auxiliary function lock, skip, program interrupt

(M91, M90), and optional stop

● The distance which the axes were moved before cycle start is cancelled disre-
garding of the ON/OFF status of the manual absolute signal and the commands
are executed in the workpiece coordinate system caI1ed at the completion of
search.

2-53

—..——. .—-.. .-—— . ....— _____ .,______ ._____ .__.,____ -—..—..+— -.—— ..-—.- “.. ,— .. —. ——— ---—--
(c) Program restart in a special mode

When program restart is attempted in a special mode, there are cases where the
commands in the program cannot be executed as specified since the operation
mode cannot be established.

“ If the program is restarted in the solid tap mode (M93), G74/G84 mode is
executed in normal mode tapping.

● If the program is restarted in the high-speed cutting command (HON, HOF)

mode, normal operation is executed.

“ Restart is possible according to the feedrate selected by the F1 -digit command.

However, for acceleration/deceleration using the pulse handle, it is necessary
to specify the FI -digit command again.

● To restart the program in the tool life control mode, it is necessary to specify
the life control groups before restarting the operation.

● The tool group is displayed in a T code in the program restart information.

(d) Using a microprogram

When a microprogram is used, care must be paid on system variables,

“ All interface input/output signals (#1000 - #1031, #1032, #1 100 -#1131, and
#1 132) are processed as “O”. Therefore, correct results cannot be expected.

● Although the clock (#3001, #3002) is read and written normally, the time
count at the restart of the program is not guaranteed.

● The control of single-block stop and wait for the completion of auxiliary func-
tion (#3003) is disregarded and the specification of control is made invalid.

“ The control for feed hold, feedrate override, and exact stop (#3004) is disre-
garded and the specification of control is made invalid.

● Although the positio,n data (#5000 - ) is read normally, the data generated in
the NC is used for the operation. For the servo error data (#5101 -#5 105), “O”
is read.

* Concerning the RS-232C data output 2 (BPRNT, DPRNT), if the program is

restarted at the RS-232C open command, an alarm occurs at the execution of
the RS-232C output command.

2-54
 2.9 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONSAT ENHANCED LEVEL

0
suPPLE-
MEN?
1. When moving the axes to the program restart position by pressing the CYCLE
START switch, if interference occurs between the axes and the workpiece or fix-
ture, move the axes to the same position manually.

2. If the CYCLE START switch is pressed while the PROGRAM RETURN switch
is ON, the warning message “R.ESTARTING PROG!” is displayed.

3. After the completion of search for program restart, operation intervention is not
allowed in other than manual mode until program restart is executed. If the
CYCLE START switch is pressed in the MDI, TAPE or MEM mode, alarm
“0292” occurs and the message “IMPOSSIBLE TO START THE COMMAND
WHEN RESTARTING PROGRAM” is displayed.

4. If the PROGRAM RETURN switch is ON, it is not possible to move an axis

manually. Operation of jog switches and manual pulse generator is disregarded.

5. When requesting the program restart, conditions such as the input signals and tool
offset must be the same as those at the interruption of the program. Otherwise,
correct restart position and conditions cannot be established. Manual operation
that is carried out in the program restart operation is allowed only with the
MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch set ON.

6. During the search for program restart, the FEED HOLD switch and the SINGLE-
BLOCK switch are disregarded. If the NC is reset during the search, the search
is interrupted immediate y. If this occurs, it is necessary to request the program
to restart once again.

7. This function executes processing on the assumption that the coordinate system
has been established correctly before the restart of operation. Therefore, if the
restart request is given without executing the reference point return after turning
the power ON, alarm “041 1” to “041 5“ occurs and the message “REFERENCE
POINT RETURN NOT COMPLETED” is displayed. Whh the incremental
command program, if the coordinate system setting command is not given at the
beginning of the program, the restart position cannot be generated correctly.

8. If the sequence number given with the restart request is not found, alarm “0290”
occurs and the message “PROGRAM RESTART SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT
FOUND” is displayed.

9. Upon completion of the search, if reference point return is executed by changing

the mode to manual, or if manual coordinate system setting is executed, alarm
“029 1” occurs and the alarm message “COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFf’ED
AFTER PROGRAM RESTART” is displayed.

10. Program restart is impossible for DNC operation, tape operation, and high-speed
cutting mode operation.
— —

2-55

.——.——. . . . . . . . ..—
 2.9.5 Playback Function *

When editing a part program, it is possible to set the present value of axes,and F, S, and T
codes for the command values. In other words, for axis command, after moving the axis to
the required position, that position data can be set as the command value. With F, S, and T
codes, the present valid values can be written as the command values.

(1) Operation

To enter the playback mode, select the RUN process and press the [PROG] and [EDIT]
soft-keys to select the edit mode. After that turn the PLAY BACK switch ON.

For writing the data, either key input or external signals can be used.

(a) Writing the data by key operation

@ Move the axes to the position whose position data should be written as the
command value. Fclr this movement, select an appropriate method for the in-
dividual axes.

@ Press the address ke:y corresponding tothe axis name for which the data should
be written and press the [WR] key. The present position data (workpiece coor-
dinate system) displayed on the screen is taken as the command value for that
axis. If a value is entered from the keyboard before pressing the [WR] key,
the entered value is added to the present position data and the total of these val-
ues is used as the cc)mmand value.

cl!)
suPPt&
MENT
If the [WR] key is pressed repeatedly, the value of the present position is added each
time the [WR] key is pressed.

Examples:

● When the present position value (workpiece coordinate system) is” 1.000”, if
the [WR] key is pressed after entering “X”, the value is set for X as “X 1.“.

● When the [WR] key is pressed after entering “2.000”, the present position val-
ue of” 1.000” is added to the entered value and the value is set for X as “X3.”.

● When the [WR] key is pressed two times after entering “2.000”, the present
position of”1 .000” is added two times to the entered value and the value is set
for X as “X4.”.

2-56
 2.9 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONSAT ENHANCED LEVEL

Write the data for F, S, and T. The data can be written in the same manner as
writing the axis data. Differences from the procedure for writing the axis data
are indicated below.

If a value is entered before pressing the [WR] key, the entered value is taken
as the command value. The entered value is not added to the present value as
with the axis data.

When writing the For S data, the presently specified F or S command value
is written.

(b) Writing the data by using the external write signal

Theexternal signal used for writing is #30086.

@ When the external write signal is turned ON, writing is enabled for the axes
and cutting feed set for parameters pm4024 and pm4025
om4024

a a 1st-axis write enabled

b b 2nd axis write enabled
c c 3rd a(is write enabled
d d 4th axis write enabled
e 5th-a(is write enabled
e
f Not used
f
9 Not used
9 h Not used
I
h I Not used
j Not used
pm4025 k Not used
I Not used
m Not used
I n F write enabled
I o S write enabled
k P T write enabled
I
m
n
o
P

@ When writing the data, the new data are compared to the existing data and only
the changed data are written.

2-57

————.——..—— .—... —— ——.——. .. . .... .<—.——!—.—.

 (c) Storing the edited pro!gram to memory

After the completion of editing, press the [EDIT] (f5) soft-key to store the edited
part program.

(d) Supplements to the playback function

● Concerning the data other than the axis data, and F, S, and T data, edit the part
program in the same manner as normal editing operation.

. The present value written by pressing the [WR] key is the position data in the
workpiece coordinate system. Therefore, the playback operation can be
started only after setting the zero point for machining by using such as G92.

● Editing is possible cmly when the [EDIT] soft-key is highlighted.

(2) Input/output Signal

The playback function can be turned ON and OFF by the value set for #30087. Instead
of this, the playback function can be turned ON and OFF by changing the setting for
parameter pmOO05 D5.

1. If the [EDIT] soft-key is not highlighted, it indicates that the playback mode is
OFF.
2. When writing the data by key entry operation, if the [WR] key is pressed without
entering the address of the data to be written (axis address, F, S, T), the warning
message “NO ADDRESS SPECIFIED” is displayed. Press the [WR] key only
after specifying the address.

3. If an attempt is made to write the data before axis movement is completed, the
warning message “AXIS MOVING” is displayed and writing operation is not ac-
cepted until the completion of axis movement.

4. For F, S, and T, the preset F, S, and T command value are written.

2-58
 3
BASICS OF DISPLAY AND WRITING
OPERATION

Chapter 3 describes the basic terms related to operation and

B
the NC operation panel.

3.1 BASICS OF TERMS RELATED TO

OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-2
3.1.1 Process Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.2 Jobs and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-3
3.1.3 YASN,4C J300M Function Structure . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.2 NC OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . ..i... 3-9

3.2.1 Keys and Display Screen
on NC Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.2.2 Normal Display on CR-r Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.2.3 Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-21
3.2.4 Key BMferEditF unction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-22
3.2.5 Buzzer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-23

3-1

..—— .——-—. —... ...-—-—- —.—.— .—.

3.1 BASICS OF TERMS RELATED TO OPERATION

This section describes the functions of the keys on the operation panel and guide messages
displayed on the screen for each of the operation steps according to the actual operation flow.
[OPERATION STEPS]

rl I Part PWYam ‘rape

I Creating Part Program

~ ml

‘D
L Tool List
Tool Layout

I MountingTools
I

. I Set-up Process

v
I SettingOffset Data ~

/
v .

, —
v CheckingProqram

●
RzEn

v
Changing Workpieces
Checking Accuracy
1
~:
Continuous Machining Checking Offset Data
1
/
—
OPERATION STEPS

3.2
 3.1 BASICS OF TERMS REIATED TO OPERATION

3.1.1 Process Screens

YASNAC J300 provides a variety of display screens and these display screens are largely
classified into six blocks according to the processes: edit, set-up, operation (run), mainte-
nance, common, and AUXI.

Edit processscreen,set-up process screen, run

Process screensdirectlyrelatedto cutting
7-7 process screen, AUX1screen

Process screenrelatedto NC maintenance Maintenanceprocess screen

-i————— J

L-
Process screen used in common for four cutting
related processes
1. Common process screen
-– A

At each screen, keys used to control the display are arranged on the NC operation panel (four
cutting process keys, maintenance process key, and common process key). By using these
keys, the required process screen can be quickly displayed for each machining process.

3.1.2 Jobs and Functions

Each process consists of jobs and each job has functions. One process has a maximum of
five jobs, and for each of the jobs there are no restrictions in the number of functions. After
selecting a process, the jobs and functions are selected by using soft-keys. Tree structure of
the process, jobs, and functions is indicated in Fig. 3.1.

, , ~~ , , f“”

A+
PARAM

P’121@”flf”
/ PARAM
ICI]
Fig. 3.1
SETING

Example of Structure
FUNC-
TIONS

3-3

-....—- —— .—— ———... -.,,—..—-.-—. -—.

3.1.3 YASNAC J300M Function Structure

The structure of processes, jobs, and functions is indicated below.

‘ ‘D’TT=EEE f5

fl -1
.——
I
I
——— —_ ___
SELECT ●
J_
I
I

—1 1 — I

f5 11 I BT/TOF I
1
LL— —______ LA
-$--mm-------l
—J
fl I OPEN
f2 DELETE
f3 RENAME
m f4 ~
J I I

f5 {1 DSP.SL I
l—
~_——— ——— —— _ I

+---Rmmr] fl DSP.SL
f2 CLEAR
f3 START
f4 SINGLE
f5 r RESET
I J
~L— ——— ——— ——
1

-f-ii-- --l-+ PRM 1

f2 I SCALE
f3 I AUTO
f4 I
f5
L——___— —___ J

3-4
 3.1 BASICS OF TERMS RELATEDTO OPERATION

SET fl WORK = 1

7 ‘:
f2 “D o
f3
~=
f4 POS.WR ~]
f5 ABWIN =1

TOOL fl OFFSET ‘1
f2
~.x
f3 ‘Tc ‘ o
f4 ~:o
f5
VII-J ——— —— —
fl TLM ● _O i

4
f2 ‘= 1
L
f3 O CLR ‘1 ~
f4 ALL CLR ‘1 I
f5 ABS/lN ‘1 I
[: L———..—————— _J

3-5
. PROG fl DSP.SL
l———
f2
1 f3

J I

f3 MOVE ‘
— f4 II I
L
REPL
— ●
I
I
f5 BTiTOP I
} 1- ——————————J
fl r~ DSP.SL “ MDI- 1
f2 DELETE mode ‘
only
f3
f4 CLOSE
--~

mode ‘

--l COMMND

--i SETING 1
fl SWITCH *
f2 SOFTSW ‘
4 f3 MACRO ●

--l DRAW1 E— fl DSP.SL

f2 CLEAR
f3 START
f4
f5
~———— ——. ———
fl I PRM
f2 SCALE
+~ ~ AUTO
f4 1
f5
L——————————— -1

3-6
 3.1 BASICS OF TERMS RELATEDTO OPERATION

PARAM fl PARAM ‘~
--+
f2 / SETTING~

1 I ~———.

4 SUDEL ‘]
DIAGN L
12 [
fl
f7
.- 1
1
I
I
r)lsP
—.-.

1--1 f3 DELET~~l

‘4 1—
f5 k--- —.—
I

DATA fl VER NT 1

II
i t-
f2 DUMP ‘1
f3 KEY MEM~l

LADDER * 1

Note Only when the IR servo is used

3-7
LQM!!Lt- Pos. t— _ fl ALL
f2 UNIV
f3 EXTERN
f4 INCR
f5 F SET ‘1
~————— 1
fl [ ERROR
f2 I

f3 1.

f4 I
f5 I
L———————__ _ J

4 ALARM fl 1 ALARM

L
f2 I 1
SV. ALM I

f3 USERS
f4
f5

i TIME fl CALEN
f2 W.TIME
f3
f4
f5
~————
fl I SET i
f2 I

f3 I
{
f4 I
f5 I
L————————_ _ J

~__——7
I 1: Functions displayed by pressing the FUNCTION SELECTION key
L————A
●
Option

— —
I 1.
,. Mode dependent functions
L.—- A

3-8
 3.2 NC OPERATION PANEL

3.2 NC OPERATION PANEL

This section describes the configuration of the NC operation panel and the editing function.

3.2.1 Keys and Display Screen on NC Operation Panel

NC operation panel of YASNAC J300 series is shown in Fig. 3.2.

POWER ON button 9-inch graphic display Data keys AUX key RESET key

I I, Process keys
A \. .J —. I
““—=ilc-z=
T - \

@
I

POWER OFF button Soft-keys Address keys Page keys and Action keys
cursor keys

Fig. 3.2 Operation Panel

(1) POWER ON/OFF Buttons

(a) POWER ON button (Turning ON the power to the NC unit)

Power is supplied in two steps of operation. In the first, pressing of the POWER
ON button, power is supplied t:othe control unit, and power is supplied to the servo
the second time the POWER ON button is pressed. With some models of machines,
power will be supplied to the servo in the first pressing of the POWER ON button.
For details, refer to the manuals published by the machine tool builder. To turn ON
the servo power after emergency stop or other similar operation, this button is also
used.

(b) POWER OFF button (Shutting OFF the power to the NC unit)

The power is supplied to the control unit and servo is shut OFF by pressing the
POWER OFF button.

3-9

——-.--.,———— —-. —.. — ——. -...——. .-—- ..—.,.— .. ——_— —. —-

(2) 9-inch Graphic Display (CIRT)

Data are displayed indifferent sizes of characters in the range from 1 x 1 to 3 X 3 mag-
nification.

40 characters x 20 lines (25 lines)= 800 characters (or 1000 characters)

r [in 1 X 1 scale]
Numerals (O to 9,-, .)
Displayedcharacters Alphabets (A to Z)
Special codes [/ (slash), EOB, +, #, SP, =, etc.]
\ Graphic display 640 x 400 dots (high resolution type)

40 characters
/- >

[T
0 line
r
5 line

Ilimimmmmlm
Fig. 3.3 9-inch Graphic Display

3-1o
 3.2 NC OPERATION PANEL

(3) Process Keys

The process keys are used to select the process. The following five process keys are
provided and by pressing one of these keys, the corresponding process is selected.

[PROG] Edit key : Selects the editing process.

[SET] Set-up key : Selects the set-up process.

[RUN] Operation key : Selects the operating process.

[MAINT] Maintenance key : ;Selects the maintenance process.

[COMN] Common key : :$elects the common display or returns to each

process.

3-11

——.—. ——_ .._ _..__..—._.._..- —____________________ ._... _ .——, ----- .-. ——..—. —,,,...,,. ________ ,_. .- _
 (4) Soft-keys

Thesoft-keys areselection k.eysrelated todisplay andwfiting. Thesoft-keys aredis-

played in two rows (upper and lower) as shown in Fig. 3.4. The upper soft-keys are used
to select jobs and the lower ones to select functions. By pressing the UP/DOWN SE-
LECT key, the selection mocle can be changed between the job selection mode and the
function selection mode. The presently selected mode can be found from the UP/
DOWN SELECT indicator on the CRT and also from the soft-keys.

In the job selection mode, selection of job soft-keys is possible and in the function selec-
tion mode, selection of function soft-keys is possible. If more than five functions are
provided in the selected job, the next set of functions are displayed by pressing the
FUNCTION SELECT key. The selected job or function is highlighted.

— UP/DOWN SELECT
indicator
_’__+== Function soft-keys

y!:ON+rmmii-mil.m@-+ ‘p/DOwNsELEcTkey
FUNCTION soft-key

Fig. 3.4 Soft-keys

CD
SUPPLE.
MENT
When there are more than five function soft-keys, the FUNCTION SELECT indicator
is displayed as shown in Fig. 3.4.

When the UP/DOWN SELECr indicator is moved, the box moves up or down.

When the box is in the upper position, it indicates the job selection mode and if it is
in the lower position, it indicates the function selection mode.

* Soft-key
TERM?
Lll Thesoft-keys indicatethemenu frames displayed at the lower part of the CRT. Selection of menu is accom-
plished by pressing the key located at the corresponding position.

3-’12
 3.2 NC OPERATION PANEL

(5) Address Keys

The address keys are used to specify the addresses when writing data.
[/] Slash key : The slash key is used to indicate the optional skip
command.
[SHIFT] Shift key : To display special characters such as “%” and “#’,
press the address keys of F to Z on which the corre-
sponding special character is indicated while pressing
the [SHIITJ key.

(6) Data Keys

The data keys are used to write numerical values such as command values, tool offset
amounts, and settings for parameters.
[0] - [9] Numeric keys : Used to enter numerals.
[-1 Minus key : Used enter a minus sign.
[.1 Decimal : Used to enter a decimal point.
point key

(7) Page Keys

Display given on the screen is assumed as “page”, and these keys are used to change
the display page to the previous o:r next page.

[ A ] page up key : Used to display the previous page.

[ V ] page down key : Used to display the next page.

When a page key is held pressed, the display page changes continuously.

3-13

.—— ...—-—..- .——..—.—.,.-. — .-—-—-... ._ —.———_—

(8) Cursor Keys

The cursor keys are used to move the cursor on the screen up/down and right/left. When
the cursor is positioned at a certain position on the screen, that position is highlighted.
In this manual, the position clisplayed in highlighted block is called the cursor.

(a) Moving the cursor up/down

When a set of parameter data is displayed with parameters selected, the up/down
cursor keys are used to move the cursor to the required parameter position.

[A] cursor up key : lJsed to move the cursor up.

[v] cursor down key: Used to move the cursor down.

When the cursor up or down key is held pressed, the cursor moves continuously.

It is also possible to move the cursor to the required position by specifying the re-
quired numbe~ enter the required number and press the cursor up or down key, and
the cursor moves to the specified position.

(b) Moving the cursor right/left

[<] cursor left key : Used to move the cursor left.

[~] cursor right key : Used to move the cursor right.

(9) Action Keys

The action keys are used for various applications. When an action key is pressed, dis-
play on the screen will be chiinged by such as entered data.

[CAN] Cancel key : Used to cancel typing error of numerals or address

data.
[EOB] End of block key : Used to indicate the end of a block. “;’’(semico-
lon)is displayed on the screen instead of EOB.
[INSRT] Insert key : Used to insert data to the memory.
[ALTER] Aher key : Used to correct data in the memory
[ERASE] Erase key : Used to erase data in the memory
[WR] Write key : Used to store address data (=word) keyed in by
using the address keys and data keys

3-14
 3.2 N(; OPERATION PANEL

(10) RESET Key

The RESET key is used to reset the internal state of the NC unit. When the RESET
key is pressed, the following items are executed.
● Cancels the move commands.
● Clears the buffer area.
● Resets the alarm (after removing the cause).
● Cancels the tool offset.
● Cancels the miscellaneous function.
● Turns ON the label skip function.
● Rewinds the memory. (Returns the program execution pointer to the begin-
ning of the program.)
Whether or not the memory rewind is executed is determined by the setting
for the parameter.

pm4008 DO= O Memory rewind is executed. 1

pm4008 DO= 1 Memory rewind is not executed.
-J
If “pm4008 DO = O“, memory rewind is executed by pressing the [SRCH] soft-
key.
● Sends the reset signal.
● Resets the G code.
● Clears the key buffer area.

Note that the following items are not influenced by the reset operation.
● Present position data of the axes
● F command
● S and T commands
● Tool offset amounts, setting data, and parameter data

(ll)AUX Key

The AUX key is used for the future expansion of the functions.

[AUX1], [AUX2] keys: Used for optional functions.

3-15

.. -.-.-..-—.—. —.—...-——— —.— .—. -—-.—— ..—.- .,.....— ..—-. —.. —. ——-. .
3.2.2 Normal Display on CRT Screen

Independent of the selected process, job, and function, the following information is always
displayed at the top line and the lcwer five lines as shown in Fig. 3.5.

\ \
[ ALM [ COM j 012345 I N12345 t’ - Normal Display @

INPUT COMPLETE . - Normal Display @

1234 SERVO OFF . - Normal Display @
MEM I I INPUT ERROR! I ] MSTFR I STP I ALM I LSK< - Normal Display @
Xloo Yloo; . - Normal Display @
(key buffer area)
—— 11 f+ - Normal Display @
1 (soft-keys in two rows)
/
J

Fig. 3.5 Normal Display on the Screen

3-16
 3.2 NC OPERATION PANEL

Contents of normal display are indicated in Table 3.1.

Table 3.1 Contents of Normal Display

Normal
Item Message Meaning
Display

ALM
Job name of the selected screen is displayed as the
Screen title display OPFSET
title.
. . . etc.

EDT AUX 1
SET AUX2
Process display The selected process name is displayed,
MNT
o COM

O***** The number of the program opemting in the selected

Program number
series is displayed.
display 000001-099999
O*****indicates that program number is not selected.

Sequence number The present sequence number of the selected series is

NOCOOO- N99999
display displayed.

INPUT? ( Y/N)
INPUTTING
INPUT STOPPED
INPUT COMPLETE
OUTPUT? ( Y/N)
OUTPUTI’ING
OUTPUT STOPPED
OUTPUT COMPLETE
VERIFY? ( Y/N)
VERIFYING
VERIFICATION STOPPED
VERIFICATION COMPLETE
CREATE ? ( Y/N)
CREATION COMPLETE
Display of opera- COPY? ( Y/N)
Result of key operation and the NC execution state
@ tion results and COPY COMPLETE
are displayed.
guide messages RENAME ? ( Y/N)
RENAMING COMPLETE
DELETE ? ( Y/N)
DELETION COMPLETE
SELECT OTHER JOB
PUSH EXEC TO CONTINUE
EXECUTING
STOP?( Y/N)
SEARCH COMPLETE
INPUT O NO.
INPUT COMMENT
SAVING COMPLETE
TRANSFER PARM ?
TRANSFERRING
PARM TRANSFER COMPLT

3-17
 Table 3.1 Contents of Normal Display (cent’d)

Normal Meaning
Item Message
Display
[NPUT O NO.
SAVING
SEARCHING
INPUT? (PUSH Y)
OUTPUT? (PUSH Y)
VERIFY? (PUSH Y)
OK? (y/N)
SET POINT I
SET POINT 2
SET POINT 3
MODE IS UNSUITABLE
Display of opera- SEARCH STOPPED
?esult of key operationand the NC executionstate
tion results and [NPUT O NO. (DELETE)
ire displayed.
guide messages DELETE ALL? (Y/N)
[NPUT OLD O NO.
INPUT ORIGINAL O NO.
INPUT NEW O NO.
[NPUT O NO. (COPY)
RANGE IS UNSUITABLE
DRAWING COMPLETE
CLEAR ALL OFFSETS? (Y/N)
SEARCH COMPLETE
INPUT OLD STRING
INPUT NEW STRING
( Yes/No/All)?

l%e top priority alarm occurring in the selected series

Alarm number dis is displayed. If there is no alarm in the selected se-
0001-9999
play ries, the top priority alarm of the other series is dis-
played.

TH error Ihe message of the top priority alarm occurring in

Alarm message Character cannot be used he selected series. If there is no alarm in the selected
display External data input error series, the alarm message of the top priority of the
. . ... . etc. other series is displayed.

Edit
Memory
MDI
Communication The operation mode of the selected series is dis-
@ Operation mode
Step played.
Handle
Jog
Rapid feed

3-18
 32 NC OPERATION PANEL

Table 3.1 Contents of Normal Display (cent’d)

Normal Item Message Meaning

Display
—
[IWUT ERROR !
O NO. NOT FOUND !
NOT FOUND !
ALREADY IN !
OVER MEM CAP !
TOO MANY PROGS !
VERIFY ERROR !
MACRO LOCK !
LINE LOCK !
RUNNING PROGRAM !
NC RUNNING !
FORMAT ERROR !
EDIT LOCK !
NOT FOUND !
ALREADY EDIT !
SELECT MODE ERR !
COPY MODE ERROR !
MOVE MODE ERROR !
PRM SETIING ERROR !
CAN’T SET COORD !
Warning indicates lower priority error, which does
OVER MDI BUFFER !
not cause operation stop.
@ Warning display PRM SETTING ERR !
Reset the error by key input, mclde change, screen
READING PROGRAM !
switching.
EDITING PROGRAM !
IMPOSS COLLECT !
EDIT LOCK !
BIAS ERROR !
BO’lTOM ERROR !
OFFSET ERROR !
OVER MEM CAP !
RUNNING PROGRAM !
MEASUREMENT ERR !
TOO LARGE AREA !
ALREADY IN !
NC RUNNING !
BREAK POINT !
PLAYBACK LOCK !
SYSTEM NO. 1 !
CAN’T WRITE!
ADDRESSING ER!
AXIS MOVING!
RESTARTING PROG!
CAN’T SET COORD!
 Table 3.1 Contents of Normal Display (cent’d)

Qormal
Item Message Meaning
)isplay

Indicates the status of the selected series. M, S, T

MI SITIFIRIB Waiting for the completion of the specified code.
DWELL F During cutting, R: During rapid traverse, P:
~During communication, and D During dwell.

Indicates the status of the selected series.

Operation status HSC Indicates high-speed cutting mode.

STP Indicates that the NC stopped.

RST Indicates that the NC is in reset status.

Indicatesthat the NC is in the n-block buffering sta-

BUFrr
tus.
0
Indicates the status of the selected series.

ALM Indicates that an alarm has occurred.

BAT Indicates that the battery alarm has occurred.

Alarm status Indicates that both an alarm and a battery alarm have
AIB
occurred.

BGA Indicates that a background alarm has occurred.

Indicates that both a background alarm and a battery

B/B
alarm have occurred.

Label skip LSK Displayed when label skip is ON.

—
Key input echo back display
@ Key buffer
(up to 40 characters can be input.)

Selection key for display and writing (in two rows -

@ Soft-key
up and down)
k
 3.2 NC OPERATION PANEL

3.2.3 Pop-up Menu

The pop-up menu is used to select a menu item in the selected function. Usually, there is only
a single menu item in a function. The pc)p-up menu is used to select the menu if there is more
than one menu item in the selected function. The soft-keys that support the pop-up menu are
distinguished by the soft-key frame with a double-line at the left side.

I Job I

+
& u Function

11 —
[ 1
Pop-up menu is used to
select the menu from
these sets of menus. 4CI EazcI EE?a
If the [DELETE] soft-key is pressed, the pop-up menu is displayed. Selection by the
pop-up menu is made by using the UP/DOWN SELECT key and the [WR] key. The
pop-up menu is cleared when the selection is finished.

PROG(OPR) EDT O***** NOOOOO

— Pop-up Menu
I-!!L

INPUTONO.(OELETE)

MEM STP LSK

– m 0’” ‘wOuT
+msm E@m A

Eimlmmmlmf!llJ
Fig. 3.6 Pop-up Menu for DELETE Function
3.2.4 Key Buffer Edit Function

For the data keyed in by key operation and displayed at the key buffer area on the CRT screen,
insertion and deletion of characters, are allowed. This key buffer area edit function is helpful
to correct the entered data in the following cases.

● The user finds an error immediately after keying in the data.

● The keyed in data could not be entered with the “INPUT ERROR!” warning
message displayed even when the [WR] key was pressed.

(1) Key Buffer Cursor

The underline cursor”_ “ blinks at the beginning of the key buffer area. This
underlined cursor is the key buffer cursor. It moves to the right as characters are keyed
in and is displayed after the last character.

(2) Moving the Key Buffer Cursor

With characters keyed into ths key buffer area, the underlined cursor moves in response
to the operation with the cursor right/left keys. The underlined cursor is valid in the key
buffer area but not for the contents displayed on the screen. However, if there are no
characters keyed in to the key buffer, the underline cursor is valid for the contents dis-
played on the screen. Examples of the key buffer edit operation are explained below.

(a) Deletion

GOOX1 OO.Z1OO.; _

To delete “X100.” while the data indicated above are keyed in to the key buffer
area.

@ Move the key buffer cursor back to “Z” by pressing the cursor left key.

GOO X1OO. Z1OO.;

@ Press the [C~N] key five times to delete “X1OO.”.

GOO Z1OO.;
When the [CAN] key is pressed, the last character before the key buffer cursor is
deleted. If the key buffer cursor is at the beginning of the key buffer area, pressing
the [CAN] key has no effect and no characters are deleted.

3-22
 3.2 NC OPERATION PANEL

(b) Insertion

Xloo.zloo.; _

To insert “GOO” before “X100.” while the data indicated above are keyed in to the
key buffer area.

@ Move the key buffer cursor back to “X” by pressing the cursor left key.

Xloo. Zloo.;
@ ~ey in “GOO”. The keyed in characters are inserted before the key buffer cur-
sor.

GOO —
XIOO. ZIOO.;

3.2.5 Buzzer Function

It is possible to sound the buzzer for eac:h key operation at the NC operat ion panel. Whether
the buzzer should be sounded or not can be selected by the setting for the parameter.
—
pmOO07 D7 = O No buzzer sound

pmOO07 D7 = 1 With buzzer sound

3

3-23
EDIT PROCESS OPERATION

Chapter 4 describes the operation carried out by using the edit

process keys. Intheeditprocess apart program iscreated us-
ing the edit job, part program directory job, part prclgram input/
output and verify job, and program path drawing job.

Job selection is possible by using either the [EDIT’Jjob soft-key

or the [PROG] process selection key.

The operation indicated above can be executed anytime inde-

pendent of the NC operation mode even while a~ltomatic op-
eration is being executed.

4.1 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.1.1 Calling a Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-4
4.1.2 Editing a Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-7
4.1.3 Saving a Part Program after Editing . . . . . . . 4-23
4.1.4 Deletirlg a Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-25

4.2 PART PROGRAM DIRECTORY JOEI . 4-28

4.2.1 Display of the Directory of Part Programs . . 4-28
4.2.2 Calling a Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-35
4.2.3 Deleting a Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-37
4.2.4 Renaming a Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-39
4.2.5 Copying a Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-41

4-1
4.3 PART PROGRAM lNPUT/OUTPUT
AND VERIFY JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-42
4.3.1 lrlputting aPart Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-42
4.3.2 CMtputting a Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-46
4.3.3 Verifying the Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.3.4 Setting the Communication Conditions . . . . . 4-57
4.3.5 C~her Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-62

4.4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWING JOB . . . . 4-63

4.4.1 Features of the Program Path Drawing
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-63
4.4.2 Description of the Program Path Drawing
Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-64
4.4.3 Basic Program Path Drawing Operation . . . . 4-87
4.4.4 Switching the Program Path Drawing
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-89
4.4.5 Differences between the Program Path
Drawing Job and the NC Path Drawing
Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-90

4-2
 4.1 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB

4.1 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB

To select the part program edit job, press the [EDIT] (f 1) job soft-key. In the part program
edit job, the following functions are provided.

● Calling a part program

“ Editing a part program

● Saving a part program

“ Deleting a part program

Optionally, editing up to three part programs is simultaneously possible. The standard pro-
gram storage capacity is 16 KB (40 cm in tape length) and this capacity can be optionally
expanded to 32 KB, 64 KB, 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB, 1024 KB, or 2048 KB.

CD
SUPPLE-
MEW
1. If a process key other than [PROG] is pressed while editing a part program, the
part program is temporarily y savad. The interrupted editing can be continued after
pressing the [PROG] key.

2. Do not turn OFF the power during editing. Before turning OFF the power, the A
part program(s) must be saved.
E

4-3

—.-. —.-___________ ________ ... e____, ,- .,._ .,__ ,_ —-. —.+ .~..,—.. —... —-.-. ..-—. —
 4.1.1 Calling a Part Program

Call the program to be edited. To call a program not existing in the memory, create it before
calling.

(1) Using the [EDIT] (fl ) Job Soft-key

Basic and optional operation is possible by using the [EDIT] (fl ) job soft-key.

(a) Basic operation

Cany out the basic operiition in the following procedure.

Press the [EDIT] (f I ) job soft-key.

Press the [OPEN] (fl ) function soft-key. (This step can be skipped.)

Key in the program number of the program to be called by using the address
and data keys (O111, for example). If a new program number is keyed in and
the [WR] key is pressed in this step, it is registered as a program and can be
called in later operation.

@ Key in a comment with the address keys and press the [WR] key. (This opera-
tion is necessary even when a comment is not entered.)
—..— —— ——

(z)
SUPPLE-
MENT
1.

2.
In the edit lock state, it is not allowed to create a new program number. Reset the
edit lock state before creating a new program number.

The program presently executed can also be called. However, it is not allowed
to edit such a program after calling it to the screen.

3. While the EDIT LOCK switch is ON, the edit function keys ([INSRT], [ALTER],
and [ERASE]) and NC tape loading operation are invalid.

4. If program editing is attempted with the EDIT LOCK switch ON, the warning
message “EDIT LOCK !“ is displayed.

4-4
 4,1 PART PROGRAMEDIT JOB

The contents of the called part prclgram are displayed as indicated below.

PRG(EDITI EDT ().**** NOOOO

000111

rl
CREATE COMPLETE

MEM STP LSK

– ~ ““ ‘“’O”’

‘mmsmmamal

ImmmBm Eml El
Fig. 4.1 Contents of the Called Part Program

Optionally, up to three part programs can be called at the same time. To call another
program, press the [OPEN] (f 1) function soft-key. The message “INPUT O NO.” is dis-
played. Execute steps @ and@. Examples of screens where two or three part programs
are called are shown in Figs. 4.2 and 4.3.
— —
PRG(EDIT) EDT O***** NOOIXI
000111 000222
T[n

CREATE COMPLETE

MEM STP LSK

\
–
-mEEzmzEm
CEEl D’”
E@uh
‘~ou’

Fig. 4.2 Display Screen with Two Parl Programs

4-5
 .
(

PRG(EDIT) EDT O***** NOOOO

000111 000222 000333

Drrl
CR:SATE COMPLETE

Fig. 4.3 Display Screen with Three Part Programs

(2) Using the [BUF. CH] (f3) Soft-key

If the part program to be called is within the allowable range of program call, the speci-
fied program can be called. However, if calling a new part program causes the allow-
able range of program call to be exceeded, the program selected by the [BUF. CH] (f3)
function soft-key is saved automatically before calling the specified program.

A part program can be called without using the [OPEN] (f 1) function soft-key. Follow
the procedure indicated below.

After keying in the program number of the program to be called, press the
[WR] key. When the existing program number is entered, the specified pro-
gram is called. If a program number not existing in the memory is entered, the
message “INPUT COMMENT” is displayed indicating that the specified pro-
gram number is a new program number.

Key in a comment and press the [WR] key.

4-6
 4.1 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB

4.1.2 Editing a Part Program

The procedure for editing the part progriim called to the screen is explained below. Optional-
ly, the expansion editing functions (cop:y, move, and alter and erase with range specification)
can be used. Select the part program to be edited in the following procedure.

@ If more than one program has been called, press the [13UF. CH] (f3) soft-key
several times until the cursor moves to the program number of the program to
be edited.

PRG(EDIT) EDT ()***** NOOOO

000111 000222 000333
0111 (ABCD) 0222 (EFGH) 0333 (IJKL)

u El n

MEM STP LSK

Fig. 4.4 Part Program Editing Screen

@ For editing a part program, the following keys are used: function soft-keys
([SELECTI (fl), [COPYI (fl), [MOVEI (f3), [REPL] (f4), and [BT/TOP]
(f5)), function keys ([lNSRT], [ALTER], and [ERASEI), cursor keys (up/
down, right/left), page keys, etc.

4-7

—.-. —. — . . ...—. — “——. —-.. ——.. —.-..,..., .-— .. —... — .—-—

(1) Inserting a Word

By pressing the [INSRT] key, new data can be inserted immediately after the word spe-
cified by the cursor. Follow the procedure indicated below.

@ Move the cursor to the word immediately before the position where a new
word should be inserted (for example, “;”).

PRG(EDITI EDT o***** NOOOO

r
012345
012345 G91 G30 ZO M19;
G30 XO YO;
:(3L MO&

G&i G90 GO X-160.O S300 T02;

G46 Y80. Dll ;
G43 ZO HOI;
M03;

MEM STP LSK

““2 [~ DIR INIPUT t

- @@ m ml (-l = [-i-]

Fig. 4.5 Screen before Word Insertion

@ Key in the word to be inserted (’cFl .2”, for example) by using the address and
data keys and press the [INSRT] key,
\
PRG(EDIII EDT O***** NOOOO
012345
01234.S G91 G30 ZO !419
G30 XO YO;
TO1 M06;
N1
F1.2 G54 G90 GO X-160.O S300 T02;
-F Y60.
G43 ZOHOI;
Dll;

Inserted here M03

IL MEM
—

Immlmmlmmsll
-
[~
IGEGI m
DIR IN1OUT
riRXE 1=1
STP

m
LSK

rG
t

Fig. 4.6 Screen after Word Insertion

4-8
 4.1 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB

—... —.. — —..—.— .—.-,— .. —_...___.

(3
SUPPLE-
MENT

——
After inserting a word, the cursor ind icates the word entered last. The insertion opera-
tion allows more than one word (within 40 characters) to be inselled at a time.
—— —. —. —_____

(2) Altering a Word

By pressing the [ALTER] key, the word specified by the cursor is erased and replaced
with a new word. Follow the procedure indicated below.

@ Move the cursor to the word to be altered (for example, ‘(F1.2”).

PRG(EDIT) E12T O***** NOOOO

012345
012345 G91 G30 ZO M19;
G30 XO Y(I;
r To1 M06:

&F1.2

G43
G54
Y80.
G90
011;
20 H(I1 ;
GO X–160.O S300 T02;

M03;

MEM
STP LSK
x30, —

~] DIR lN/QuT t

Ilirmimmmmml
I I

Fig. 4.7 Screen before Alter

4-9

. ... ... ._. _

 @ Key in the word (“X30.”, for example) that replaces the cursor specified word
by using the address and data keys and press the [ALTER] key. The word spe-
cified by the cursor is erased and replaced with the keyed in new word.

PRG(E[)IT) EDT O***=* NOOOO

012345
012345 G G30 20 M19;
G30 XO Y::
r TOI
N1
M06

IIF
...-.
This pari has
been
changed. I
x3(~

G43
Mn?
G54
a Y80.
20 HOI;
G90
Dll;
GO X-160.O S300 T02;

MEM STP LSK

—
~ DIR IN1OUT

“-EzQa Hm@d

pmlmmmlmlq
Fig. 4.8 Screen after Alter

CD
SUPPLE-
MENT
In this operation, if more than one word (within 40 characters) is keyed in, the speci-
fied wordwords are replaced with keyed in words.

4-1o
 4.1 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB

(3) Erasing a Word

By pressing the [ERASE] key, the word specified by the cursor is erased. Follow the
procedure indicated below.

@ Move the cursor to the word to be erased (for example, “X30.”).

PRG(EDIT) EDT o***”* NOOOO

012345
012345 G91 G30 20 M19

ET

PA
X30, G54 G90 GO X-1 60.0 S300 T(K2;

riimmmlIIInm
I
Ml I

Fig. 4.9 Screen before Erasing

@ Press the [ERASE] key. Only the specified word is erased,

PRG(EDIT) EDT o***** NOOOO

012345

~
TO1 M06
‘O””; 1

F
N1
G54 G90 GO X-160.O S300 T02;
G46 Y60. DI 1
G43 20 HOI;
“X30.” has
MOS
been erased.

II 1
II MEM STP LSK

Fig. 4.10 Screen after Erasing

4-11
(4) Search and Erase Function

The search and erase function erases the characters in the specified range, from the pres-
ent cursor position to the specified character-string. Follow the procedure indicated be-
low.

~ Move the cursor to the first character of the character-string to be erased (for
example, “TO 1“).

I 1

Immlmmmmilml
$ 1

Fig. 4.11 Specifying the First Character in the Character-string to be Erased

@ Key in the last word. of the range to be erased (for example, “YO>’if the part
program should be erased up to “YO” in the “G54 XO YO;” block) and press
the [ERASE] key. The specified range is highlighted. At the same time, the
message “DELETE OK ? (Y/N) ?“ is also highlighted.
(/—————— \
I I PRG(EDITI EDT O***** NOOOO
012345

m% “8 ““

1’
I
\ The range to be
erased I
DELETE OK? (Y/ N)

MEM STP LSK

– = DIR iN/OuT

--[=---I+

lamm Elmlm El

Fig. 4.12 Screen for Specifying the Range to be Erased

4-”12
 4.1 PART PROGRAMEDIT JOB

If the specified word is not found in the part program, the warning message
“NOT FOUND !” is displayed.

While the message “DELETE OK? (Y/ N)” is displayed on the screen, word
insertion, alter, and erase operation are not allowed. If any of the soft-kc ys
calling such functions is l?ressed, the search and erase furlction is canceled.

To cancel the search and erase function, press the [RES13T] key, [CAN] key,
or address key [N]. After the pressing of the [RESET] or [CAN] key, the cur-
sor moves to the position where it was located before the specification of the
range. In the case of the address key [N], the cursor is located at the position
where it was located after the specification of the range.

After confirming the range to be erased, press the [Y] key and the character-
string in the highlighted range is erased.

I PRG(EDIT) EDT O****” NOOOO

012345

rGg’G’7; 1

MEM STP LSK

Fig. 4.13 Screen after Erasing the Range to be Erased

(3
SUPPLE-
MENT
If the first character of the character-string specified for erasing, an O number is
erased. This is not the search and erase function. For the search of character-string,
binary search is used (leading zeros can be omitted).

4-13

—.—.—— ..-.......—. ——— —.——. —.—— ..—.—..-. .. —.. —————— ——-.

(5) Moving the Cursor

● When the cursor up/down keys are pressed, the cursor moves up or down in
units of the part prc)gram blocks. The cursor always moves to the beginning
of the next or previous block.

● When the cursor right/left keys are pressed, the cursor moves right or left in
units of words.

● When page keys are pressed, the part program display screen is scrolled up or
down in units of pages.

(6) Address Search Function

Follow the procedure indicated below to execute the address search function.

Key in the character-string to be searched for.

When the cursor down key is pressed, the search is made from the present cur-
sor position to the end of the program. When the cursor up key is pressed, the
search is made fronn the present cursor position to the beginning of the pro-
gram. During search operation, the “SEARCHING” message is displayed on
the screen.

Upon completion of the search, the message is cleared and the cursor is posi-
tioned at the found word.

If the specified word is not found, the warning message “NOT FOUND!” is
displayed.

To search the same character-string continuously, press the cursor up or down

key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. This executes the search operation
again. Once the character-string to be searched is keyed in, the same charac-
ter-string can be searched as many times as required unless another character-
string is specified

4-14
 4.1 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB

(7) Copy Function

By pressing the [COPY] key, the registered character-string can be copied to the speci-
fied area.

Limit of character-string length: 1024 characters

Follow the procedure indicated below to executed the copy function.

Move the cursor to the fwst character of the character-string to be copied (for
example, “G91 “).

Press the [SELECT] (f 1) function soft-key.

The function name “SELECT” is highlighted indicating that the selection

mode is selected. If the [SELECT] (fl ) function soft-key is pressed while it
is highlighted, the selection mode is canceled.
Move the cursor to the last character of the character-string to be copied. The
specified character-string ~“e displayed highlighted.

When the [COPY] (f2) function soft-key is pressed, the selected character-
string is saved and, at the same time, “*” symbol appears at the start of the
[COPY] (f2) function soft-key. Display of the character-string returns to the
normal mode.

PRG(EDIT) EDT O***** NOOOO

012345

E-’’0”os300T021

Fig. 4.14 Screen for Specifying the Character-string to be Copied

Move the cursor to the position where the specified character-string should be
copied (“;” that follows “M03”, for example).

Press the [*COPY] (f2) function soft-key, and the specified character-string
is copied to the position indicated by the cursor.

4-15

.—— —________ .—. .——.. -. ———.—.

—— !,——.-.-—-—. . .. ..... .,—..— ---s.,---
 ~ While’’* COPY” is displayed, the same character-string can be copied as many
times as required b:y simply pressing the [*COPY] (f2) function soft-key.

PRG(EDIT) EDT O****= NOOOO

017345

, p: GJ\o;zoM91,
I TI)I M@j;
Nl;
G54 G90 GO X–1 60.0 S300 T02; -
-.. Vfln GII;
CAR “.. ~
G43 ZO101; }

M03;
G91 G30 ZO M91;
G30 XO Y‘o; “To be co-
I w+ M06, pied Iatefl 1

Fig. 4.15 Copy Screen

-“.—.. -— —...-.—.————
———..

CD
SUPPLE-
MENT
1.

2.
When the power is turned OFF, selection of the character-sting
the “*” symbol is cleared.

When executing program edit by displaying more than one program, it is possible
is cancelled and

to copy the same character-string if the edit objective program is changed.

3. If the move function is used after using the copy function, selection of the charac-
ter-string for the copy function is cancelled.

4. If the number of character:$ in the selected character-string exceeds 1024 charac-

ters, the warning message “MEM AREA OVER !” is displayed.

4-16
 41 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB
———

(8) Move Function

By pressing the [MOVE] key, the registered character-string is moved to the specified
position.

Limit of character-string length: 1024 characters

Follow the procedure indicated below to execute the move function.

@ Specify the character-string to be moved in the same manner as with the copy
function after pressing the [SELECT] (f 1) function soft-key. The selected
character-string is displayed in white characters.

PRG(EDIT) EDT o***** iwooo

012345

pz.OOO,; ]

I
G42 20 HOI;
M03;
I

Fig. 4.16 Specifying the Character-string to be Moved

@ When the selected character-string is saved by pressing the [MOVE] (f3) func-
tion soft-key, the “*” symbol appears at the beginning of the soft-key function
name. The character-string, displayed in white characters, is deleted from the
screen.

@ Move the cursor to the position where the selected character-string should be
moved.

@ When the [MOVE] (f3) function soft-key is pressed, the specified character-
string is moved to the position indicated by the cursor.

4-17

.—... — .—... —— .---— .-—. —..-. .—

 While “*MOVE” is displayed, the same character-string can be moved as
many times as required by simply pressing the [*MOVE] (f2) function soft-
key.

PRG(EDIT) E:DT O***** NOOOO

012345
01234s;

G54 G90 GO X-160.O S300 T02;

G46 Y80. 011;
G43 20 }{01;
Mo VE MO$
G91 G30 20 M91;
G30 XO YO;
MO%
d
r

II “

Fig. 4.17 Screen after Move

(3
SUPPLE-
MENT
1.

2.
When the power is turned OFF, selection of the character-sting
the “*” symbol is cleared.
is cancelled and

When executing program edit by displaying more than one program, it is possible
to move the same character-string if the edit objective program is changed.

3. If the copy function is used after using the move function, selection of the charac-
ter-string for the move function is cancelled.

4. If the number of characters in the selected character-string exceeds 1024 charac-

ters, the warning message “MEM AREA OVER !” is displayed.

5. It is not allowed to move the range including an O number given at the beginning
of a program. If move operation is attempted after specifying the range which
includes an O number, the warning message “MOVE MODE ERROR !“ is dis-
played.
—

4-18
 4.1 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB

(9) Replace Function

By pressing the [REPL] key, this function searches the specified character-string and
replaces it with the new character-string. Follow the procedure indicated below to
execute the replace function.

a When the [REPL] (f4) function soft-key is pressed, the message “INPUT OLD
STRING” is displayed.

@ Key in the character-string to be replaced and press the [WR] key. The mess-
age “INPUT NEW STRING’ is displayed. See the examples below.

To change “GOO”, key in “GOO” and press the [WR] key.

● To change only address Y, key in “Y [SHIFT] [X]” and press the [WR] key.

● To change only the data clf “-1 60.0”, key in “[SHIFT] [Xl –1 60.0” and press
the [WR] key.
Note1: The[SHIFrland[X]keyscanbepressedat thesametime.
2: Fortheoldcharacter-string,
only
“INPUT ERROR !“ is displayed.
one wnrd is allowed. Iftwoormorewords

3: It is allowed to use a wild card “’*” when specifying an old character-string.

Iessage
are spec”fied, the warning m{ m
r
A

Use a wild card as a substitute for an unknown character in the address part or a numeral in the data part.

PRG(EDIT) EDT o***** NOOOO

012345

F; 7
I N1 G91 G30 ZO M91; I
NI ;
G54 G90 GOX-”160.O S300 TO.2
G46 Y60. Dll;
G43 ZO HOI;
M03~
I I

INPLIT OLD STRING

MEM STP LSK

1~-mmm=m
Fig. 4.18 Replace Screen
CD
supple-
ment
1.

2.
Only one wild card can be used. If two ore more wild cards are used, the “INPUT
ERROR !“ warning message is displayed.

If a wild card is used, it is disregarded and search is executed with the rest of the
character-string,

3. The replace function is valid for the character-string appearing after the cursor.
If an attempt is made to rel?lace the character-string before the cursor, the replace
processing completes at the time the [WR] key is pressed.

4. If the character-string specified is not found, the “NOT FOUND !” warning mes-
sage is displayed.

● For a new character-string, more than two words can be specified.

● The new character-string must begin with an address. Otherwise the “INPUT
ERROR !” warning message is displayed.

“ A wild card can be used in the new character-string only when a wild card is
used in the old character-string.

Q The wild card must be used in the same part (address or numeral) as it is used
in the old character-string.

Example

I Old Character-string I NewCharacter-string I Remark I

I *10.0 I
*_lo.o
I I
I
y*
I Z*
I I
L *10.0 “Z* “1~~ ERROR !“ OCCWS.

4-20
 4.1 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB

Key in the new character-string (for example, “GO 1”) and press the [WR] key.

To change the all of address of “Y*” to “Z”, key in “Z [SHIFT] X“.

To change the data part to “10.5”, key in “[SHIFT] X 10.5”.

PRG(EDITI EDT O****” NOOOO

012345

E’=00T02; 1
INPUT NEW STRING

MEM STP LSK

Fig. 4.19 Keying in New Character-string

D
suFP&E-
MENT’
If a wild card is used in the old character-string, only one word can be specified for
the new character-string. If more than one word is specified in the new character-
string, the warning message “INPUT ERROR !” is displayed.

4-21
 @ The cursor moves tcl the character-string specified in step @, and “(Yes/No/
All)?” is displayed.
●
If “Y” is input, the character-string specified in step @ is replaced with the
character-string specified in step@. If there is another character-string that
is the same as the one specified in step @, the cursor moves to it. If the charac-
ter-string specified in step~ is not found, the replace processing is completed.
9
If “N” is input, replace processing is not executed. If there is another charac-
ter-string that is the same as the one specified in step@, the cursor moves to
it. If the character-string specified in step @ is not found, the replace proces-
sing is completed.
*
If “A” is input, all character-string specified in step @ are replaced with the
character-string specified in step@). During replace processing, “EXECUT-
ING” message is displayed.

* The replace function is cancelled by pressing the [RESET] key or [REPL] (f4)
function soft-key once again.
———— . ..-.. ——...- ——

(3
supple-
ment
While “(Yes/No/All)” is displayed on the screen, [SELECT], [COPY], [MOVE], and
[BT/TOP], and other edit operations are not possible.
—————— ——

(1O)Moving the Cursor to the lop or Bottom Line of the Program

When the [BT/TOP] function soft-key is pressed, the cursor moves to first address in
the program displayed on the screen. Pressing the soft-key once again moves the cursor
to the last address of the program displayed on the screen. Bottom line and top line are
alternately selected each time the [BT/TOP] function soft-key is pressed.

4-.22
 4.1 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB

4.1.3 Saving a Part Program after Editing

The called program must be saved after editing. The part program in the part program
memory is updated only after the edited program is saved. After a part program is saved,
another part program can be called.

Assume that the program numbers of the programs that have been called are displayed on
the screen in the state as shown in Fig. 4.20. The following describes the procedure for saving
the part programs under this state.

PRG(EDIT) EDT O**..* NOOOO

~ 006789
012345 G91 G30 ZO 06789G92 Xl 40
M19; Yloo Z30;
G30 XO YO; (D) S1 200 T0202
TO1 M06 M03;
Nl; (;41 ;
G54 G90 GO X-160.O Xo Z600;
S300 T02; GOI ZO F20;
G46 Y80. Dll; X50Q
G43 ZO HOI; %2000;
M03; Y2000
X3000 Y4000
M30;
DI
MEM STP LSK
—
m DIR lN/ou”r
.EIGdGlmrl+l
—
—

Immlmmmlml!il

Fig. 4.20 Screen before Saving Part Program

@ When the [BUF.CH] (f3) function soft-key is pressed, the cursor moves to the
other program number. Select the program to be saved by using this function
soft-key.

4-23

——— .- .,.. ..——. .—. ———

.—— -—-—
 @ Press the [CLOSE] (f2) function soft-key. The screen displays the contents
of the program that has been selected to be saved.

PRG(EDIT) EDT O*=**= NOOOO

012345

Fr
– -
“EmamEH4 DIR lN/@JT

Rimlmmmlmwl
Fig. 4.21 Screen after Saving Part Program

4-24
 4.1 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB

4.1.4 Deleting a Part Program

For the deletion of a part program, the following two types of operation are provided.

[EACH] : Part programs are deleted one by one,

[ALL] : All part programs are deleted simultaneously.

In the edit lock status, part program deletion is not allowed. To delete a part program, cancel
the edit lock status. During operation, the part program presently executed cannot be deleted.
To delete the program being executed, delete it only after completing operation.

(1) Deleting a Part Program One by One

To delete a part program one by one, there are two methods: To use the [DELETE] (f4)
function soft-key and to enter the program number.

(a) To use the [DELETE] (f4) Iunction soft-key

Follow the procedure indicated below.

@ When the [DELETE] (f4) function soft-key is pressed, the message “INPUT
DEL O NO.” is displayed.

PRG(EDIT) EDT IO***** NOOOO

I=m
LEJ

INPUT DEL O NC].

MEM STP LSK

Immmmllmimlml

Fig. 4.22 Delete Menu Screen

4-25

.— .——.———. —.— .. .—. ——.——

—--.-——---———
 @ Key in the program number to be deleted (for example, “01 23”) and press the
[WR] key. The message “DELETE OK ? (Y/N)” is displayed.
● Key in “Y” to delete the program. The designated program is deleted and the
message “DELETE COMPLETE’. is displayed upon completion of program
deletion.
● Key in “N” when the program should not be deleted.

(b) TO start with the entry of program number

Follow the procedure indicated below.

@ Enter the program number of the program to be deleted.

@ Press the [ERASE] key.

@) The message “DELETE OK? (Y/N)” is displayed.

● Key in “Y” to delete the program. The “DELETE COMPLETE” message is
displayed when the designated program is deleted.

* Key in “N” when the program should not be deleted.

(3
supple-
ment
If the specified program number is not found, the “NOT FOUND O NO. !“ message
is displayed.

(2) Deleting All Part Programs

Follow the procedure indicated below.

Press the [DELETE] (f4) function soft-key.

Press the [DELETEI (f4) function soft-key once again. The pop-up menu is
displayed.

Press the cursor down key to select “ALL”.

Press the [WR] key. ‘Thepop-up menu for the delete menu selection is cleared.
The message “DELETE ALL? (Y/N)” is displayed.

Key in “Y” to delete all part programs. The “DELETE COMPLETE” message
is displayed when all programs are deleted.

Key in “N’ if the part programs should not be deleted.

4-26
 4.1 PART PROGRAM EDIT JOB

— — —.——

1. If the program specified to be deleted is called for editing, that program is auto-
matically saved and deleted.

2. If the program specified to be deleted has been called for operation, the program
number for operation changes to “O**** *“ and the status before the selection of
a program is recovered.

4-27

———.——. .——. -— .- .—,,,—. -— —-— ,—. ——. -

4.2 PART PROGRAM DIRECTORY JOB

Press the [DIR] (f2) job soft-key. l[n the directory job, the following functions are provided.

● Displaying the directory of part programs

● Calling part programs

“ Deleting part programs

Q Renaming part prog;ram

● Copying part programs

4.2.1 Display of the Directory of Part Programs

This function displays the directoly of program numbers of the part programs stored in the
NC memory. The display mode can be selected from the following three modes by pressing
the [DISP.SL] (f3) function soft-key: with comment and date, with comment and the actually
used number of characters, or pro,gram number only.

Display capacity of program numlbers on one page is,

With comment : 10 program numbers
Without comment: 50 program numbers

c) Press the [DIR] (f2) job soft-key. The directory of part program numbers is
displayed.
, .
DIRECTRY EDT O.**** NOOOO
ALL
000111 (A B C D ) 1990.09,281513
000222 (E F G H ) 1990.09.281514
000333 (1 J K L ) 1990.09,281514
012345 ( ) 1990.09.28 l&06

USED PRG USED CHAR 1024 ( 3M)

REST PRG %4 REST CHAR 31488 ( 80M)

1/1
MEM STP LSK
—
EDIT ~~ lN/OUT

-Hmi=mmh

Fig. 4.23 Display of Pail Program Directory with Comment and Date

4-28
 4.2 PART PROGRAM DIRECTORYJOB

Press the [DISP.SL] (f5) function soft-key.

The display mode is changed cyclically in the order from “with comment and
date” to “with comment and number of actually used characters”, then to “O-
number only” as the [DISP.SL] function soft-key is pressed. From the “O-
number only”, the display mode is changed back to “with comment and date”.
An example of the display in “with comment and a number of actually used
characters” mode is shown below.
—
DIRECTRY EDT o***’* NOOOO
ALL REAL CHAR
000111 (A B C D ) 513
000222 (E F G H ) 14
000333 (1 J K L )
012345 ( ) 1~6

USED PRG 4 USED CHAR 1024 ( 3M)

REST PRG 295 REST CHAR 31488 ( 80M)

1/1
MEM STP LSK

Fig. 4.24 Part Program Directory Display with Comment

and Number of Actually Used Characters

—— ————.——

0
SUPPLE*
MEN’T
The number of actually used characters indicates the number of characters actually
used in the individual programs. It is different from the number of used characters and
the number of remaining characters. The number of used characters and the number
of remaining characters indicate the number of characters occupying the memory area
and they change in units of 256 or 1024, depending on the hardware specifications.

4-29
 ● An example of the display in “only O numbers” mode is shown below.

DIRECTRY EDT o***** NOOOO

ALL
000111
000222
000333
01234S

USED PRG USED CHAR 1024 ( 3M)

REST PRG 29: REST CHAR 314S8 ( SOM)

1/1
MEM STP LSK

Immlmmmlmlml
Fig. 4.25 Part Program Directory Display Screen without Comment and
Date

For the display of the part program directory, the following four items can be se-
lected from the menu; selection is made by pressing the [SELECT] (f 1) function
soft-key.

● ALL

● O NO. RANGE

● DATE RANGE

● COLLECT

For the display of related. part programs (COLLECT), the [DSP.SL] function soft-
key is invalid.

4-30
 4.2 PART PROGRAM DIRECTORYJOB

(1) Selection of All Programs

The directo~ of part program numbers of all stored part programs are displayed.

Move the selection symbol to “ALL” by pressing the cursor up/down keys af-
ter pressing the [SELECT] (f 1) function soft-key. In the initial state, “ALL”
is selected.

Press the [RETURN] (f5) function soft-key. The screen returns to the directo-
ry display screen and displays the directory of all program numbers.
,
DIRECTRY EDT O***** NOOOO

*ALL
O NO. RANGE

DATE RANGE
YMD-YMD

COLLECT

MEM STP LSK

—
EDIT ~ iN/OUT

mcclmEEzAl
—,

piimmil ml miiiiiliiiimq
Fig. 4.26 Selection of “ALL”

4-31
 (2) Selection of Program Number Range

The directory of program numbers of part programs in the specified range is displayed.

Move the selection symbol to “O NO. RANGE’ by pressing the cursor up/
down keys after pressing the [SELECT] (f 1) function soft-key. In the initial
state, “ALL” is selected.

Enter the first program number (for example, “01 000”) and press the [WR]
key.

Enter the last program number (for example, “02000”) and press the [WR]
key.

Press the [RETURN] (f5) function soft-key. The screen returns to the directo-
ry screen and displays the directory of program numbers in the range from the
first program number to the last program number.
.
DIRECTRY EDT o***** NOOOO

ALL

*O NO. RANGE
001000-002000

DATE RANGE
YMD-YMD

COLLECT

MEM STP LSK

—
EDIT ~1~ lN/OUT

mclrlm=h
,

rmmmmlmlmm
I

Fig. 4.27 Selection of “() NO. RANGE’

CD
SUPPLE-
MH4T
If there is an error in the input program numbers, the warning message “TOO LARGE
AREA!” is displayed.

4-:32

—
 4,2 PART PROGRAM DIRECTORY JOB

(3) Selection of Program Creation Date Range

The directory of program numbers in the specified range of program creation date is
displayed.

Move the selection symbol to “DATE RANGE” by pressing the cursor up/
down keys after pressing the [SELECT] (f 1) function soft-key. In the initial
state, “ALL” is selected.

Enter the first date of program creation (for example, ” 1991.1. 1”) and press
the [WR] key. If only the year is entered, the first day of the year is set. And
if only the year and month are entered, the first day of that month of the year
is set.

Enter the last date of prcgram creation (for example, ” 1991.5.20”) and press
the [WR] key. If only the year is entered, the last day of the year is set. And
if only the year and month are entered, the last day of thiit month of the year
is set.

Press the [RETURN] (f5) function soft-key. The screen returns to the directo-
ry display screen and displays the directcmy of program numbers in the range
from the first program creation date to the last program creation date.

DIRECTRY EDT O***** NOOOO

ALL

O NO. RANGE
001000-002000

“DATE RANGE
1991 YOIMOID -1 S91Y051420D

COLLECT

MEM STP LSK

—
EDIT ~ lN/OUT

Omc=lmmw+l

ImmlmlBmlmi El
Fig. 4.28 Selection of “DATE RANGE”

cl)
yPJLE*
If there is an error in the input program creation dates, the warning message “TOO
LARGE AREA!” is displayed.

4-33
 (4) Selection of Related Programs

By specifying the main program numbers, the directory of part programs that are called
from the specified main program is displayed.

Move the selection symbol to “COLLECT” by pressing the cursor up/down

keys after pressing the [SELECT] (f 1) function soft-key. In the initial state,
“ALL” is selected.

Enter the main program number (for example, “012345”) and press the [WR]
key.

Press the [RETURNI (f5) function soft-key. The screen returns to the directo-
ry display screen and displays the directo~ of program numbers of the pro-
grams called from thle specified main program.

DIRECTRY EDT o***** NOOOO

ALL

O NO. RANGE
001000-002000

DATE RANGE
1S91Y01M 01 D-1991 Y05M20D

‘COLLECT
012345

MEM STP LSK

EDIT r~~l lN/OUT

munmmh

Fig. 4.29 Selection of “COLLECT”

(3
&&P&lE:. 1. For the display of the directory of related programs, only the display mode of
“without comment and date” is selectable. The [DISP.SL] (f5) function soft-key
is valid.

2. The programs which are called from the specified main program, but not stored
in the part program memory, are displayed in blinking characters.

4-34
 4.2 PART PRC)GF!AMDIRECTORYJOB

4.2.2 Calling a Part Program

In the directory of program numbers, part programs can be called to the program edit screen
by a simple operation. When the program number of a stored program is entered, the screen
changes to the program edit screen and the called program can be edited immediately. If a
new program number is entered, comment must be entered to create a ne w part program and
the screen changes to the program edit screen where the newly created prclgram can be edited.

A part program can be called in the same manner as calling a part program in the edit job.
On the program directory screen, a part program can be called by pressing function soft-keys
or by entering a program and pressing the [WR] key. Follow the procedure indicated below.

Press the [EDIT] (f 1) job soft-key.

Press the [OPEN] (f 1) function soft-key. Note that this operation can be
omitted.
A
Key in the program num”ber of the program to be called iind press the [WR]
m
key.

Key in a comment and press the [WR] key.

DIRECTRY EDT O***** NOOOO

ALL
000111 ( ) 1990.09,2810:05
000222 ( ) 1990.09.2810:05
012345 ( ) 1990.09.2810:05

USED PRG 3 USED CHAR 768 ( 2M)

REST PRG 296 REST CHAR 31744 ( 81M)
INPUT O NO.

MEM STP LSK

—
EDIT ~ lN/OUT

-==ka==~b

Fig. 4.30 Calling a Part Program

4-35

——.— ,,——..-.. -.. -.-..!..- .— .. —....— .——

 —— —— ——

CD
supple-
ment
1.

2.
Optionally, it is possible to call a maximum of three programs at the same time
by repeating steps@ to@.

In the edit lock state, it is not allowed to create a new program number. Reset the
edit lock state before creating a new program number.

3. The program presently executed can also be called. However, it is not allowed
to edit such a program after calling it to the screen.

4-:36
 4.2 PART PROGFtAM DIRECTORY JOB

4.2.3 Deleting a Part Program

A part program can be deleted in a simple operation on the screen displaying the directory
of part programs. The same operation a.sused for deleting apart program in the edit job can
be used.

(1) Deleting a Parl Program One by One

To delete a part program one by one, there are two methods: To use the [DELETE] (f4)
function soft-key and to enter the program number.

(a) To press the [DELETE] key

Press the [DELETE]

NO.” is displayed.
(fl) function soft-key. The message “INPUT DEL O

Enter the program number of the program to be deleted. The message “DE-
E J

LETE OK? (Y/N)” is displayed.

Enter “Y” to delete the specified program. After the completion of deletion,
“DELETE COMPLETE’” message is displayed.

Enter “N” when the program should not be deleted.

(b) To input a program number

Enter the program number of the program to be deleted.

Press the [ERASE] key.

The message “DELETE OK? (Y/N)” is displayed.

Enter “Y” to delete the specified program. After the completion of deletion,
“DELETE COMPLETE’ message is displayed.

Enter “N” when the program should not be deleted.

0
&JPPLE-
MEtdT
If the specified program number is not found, the “NOT FOUND CI NO. !” message
is displayed.

4-37

——
 (2) Deleting All Part Programs

Press the [DELETE] (f4) function soft-key.

Press the [DELETE] (f4) function soft-key once again.

The pop-up menu is displayed.

Press the cursor down key to select “ALL”.

Press the [WR] key. The pop-up menu for the delete menu selection is cleared.
The message “DELETE ALL? (Y/N)” is displayed.

Enter “Y” to delete ad]part programs. The “DELETE COMPLETE” message

is displayed when alll programs are deleted.

Enter “N” when the part programs should not be deleted.

.
DIRECTRY EDT O***** NOOOO
ALL
000111 ( ) 1990.09.2810:C5
000222 ( ) 1990.09.2810:05
012345 ( ) 1990.09.281005

USED PRG 3 USED CHAR 768 ( 2M)

REST PRG 296 REST CHAR 31744 ( 81M)
INPUT DEL O NO.

MEM STP LSK

—
EDIT [~ lN/OUT

“H[-=mmh

Fig. 4.31 Deleting Part Programs

D
SUPPt.E-
MENT
1.

2.
In the edit lock status, part program deletion is not allowed. To delete a part pro-
gram, cancel the edit lock status.

During operation, the part program presently executed cannot be deleted.

To delete the program being executed, delete it only after completing operation.

4-38
 4.2 PART PROGRAM DIRECTORYJOB

4.2.4 Renaming a Part Program

The rename function changes the program number. Follow the procedure indicated below.

@ Press the [RENAME] (Cl) function soft-key. The message “INPUT OLD O
NO.” is displayed.

r DIRECTRY
ALL
000111
000222
012345

USED PRG
REST PRG
(
(
(
EDT

29:
INPUT OLD O NO.
)
)
)

USED CHAR
REST CHAR
O*****

1590.09.281005
N&300

1990.09.2810:05
1990.09.281005

768 ( 2M)
31744 ( 81M)

Fig. 4.32 Renaming a Part Program

@ Enter the old program number (for example, “0100”) and press the [WRj key.
The message “INPUT NEW O NO,” is displayed.

@ Enter a new program number (for example, “0200”) and press the [WR] key.
The message “RENAME OK? (Y/N)” is displayed.

● Enter “Y” to rename the program.

● Enter “N” when the program should not be renamed.

4-39

—-—.— _. —.—
___ .....—.-—- ..... —.— — ._... _ ... . . .____ .,.—.- ...-..,__. ___ ----- ,_ -—— . .
 , .
DIRECTRY EDT o***** NOOOO
ALL
000100 ( ) 1990.09.281005
002222 ( ) 1990.09.281005
012345 ( ) 199009.281005

USED PRG 3 USED CHAR 768 ( 2M)

REST PRG 296 REST CHAR 31744 ( 81M)
RENAMEOK? (Y/ N)

MEM STP LSK

Immmmmlmml
1

Fig. 4.33 Part Program Rename Screen

If a program number is entered at the beginning of the part program after renaming or copying
(refer to 4.2.5.) a part program, whether or not this program number should also be changed
automatically can be selected by the setting for the parameter.

Parameter Selection of Processing Remark

Do not edit the program number automat- The program creation date is not updated
lcally m renammg, copying or storing. by program renaming operation.
~
Edit the program number automatically in
pm3005 D4 = 1
renaming, copying or storing.

4-40
 4.2 PART PROGRAM DIRECTORY JOB

4.2.5 Copying a Part Program

A part program is copied. The new program created by copying is assigned a new program
creation date.

Press the [COPY] (f4) function soft-key. The message “INPUT ORIGINAL
O NO.” is displayed.

Enter the original program number (for example, “O 100”) and press the [WR]
key. The message “INPUT O NO. (COPY)” is displayed.

Enter a new program number of the program to be created (for example,

“0200”) and press the [WR] key. The message “COPY OK? (Y/N)” is dis-
played.

Enter “Y” to copy the part program.

Enter “N” when the part program should not be copied.

DIRECTRY EDT O***** NOOOO

ALL
000100 ( ) 1990.09.2810:05
002222 ( ) 1990.09.281005
012345 ( ) 1990.09.2810:05

w-l? w: USED CHAR 768 ( 2M)

29; REST CHAR 31744 ( 81M)
INPUT ORIG O NO.

MEM STP LSK

—
EDIT ~ lN/OUT

“HB[’=HE~&

Fig. 4.34 Copying a Part Program

4-41
4.3 PART PROGRAM lNPUT/~OUTPUT AND VERIFY JOB

Press the [IN/OUT] (f3) job soft-key. This job provides the following functions,

Inputting part programs

Outputting part programs

Verifying part programs

Setting communication conditions

Others

In the edit lock state, part program input, output, and verify functions cannot be executed.
To execute these functions, cancel the edit lock.

4.3.1 Inputting a Part Program

Inputs apart program from an external device to the NC memory. For the input function, two
menu items (EACH, ALL) are displayed in the pop-up menu. Check the communication pa-
rameters by pressing the [RS232C] (f3) function soft-key.

(1) Selection of EACH

Select “EACH” in the input pop-up menu and input part programs one by one. Follow
the procedure indicated below.

Enter the program number of the part program to be input (for example,
“01 11”) and press the [WR] key. Program input is started and the program
input screen is displayed.

To stop the input of a program, press the [BGREST] (f4) function soft-key or
the [RESET] key.

If a program number is punched on the tape, it is not necessary to input a pro-

gram number on the screen. In this case, simply press the [WR] key.

Even if a program number is punched on the tape, the program can be input
with a new program number by entering a new program number. When a pro-
gram is input to the NC memory with a new program number, whether the pro-
gram number should. also be changed or not can be selected by the setting for

r
the parameter.

Parameter Selection of Processing Remark

—
Do not edit the program number The program creation date is not
pm3005 D4 = O mtomatically in renaming, copy- updated try program renaming
Ing or storing. operation.

Edit the program number auto-

I pm3005 D4 = 1 matically in renaming, copying

or storing.

4-42
 4.3 PARTPROGRAM lNPUT/OUTF’UTAND VERIFYJOB

“ If the input program number already exists, the processing to be executed can
be determined by the setting for the parameter. Selection is possible from the
generation of warning or the deletion of the existing program.

-:::::::::::::=- ❑
PROGRAM 1/0 EDT O***** NOOOOO
INPUT(EACH)
(002000)
02000 ; G28XOY0 ; T01M06 ; G43Z0 ; G1X1O
O. Y30. ; X229. 999Y89. 787 ; X250. Y70.
00. ; X-17. 837Y-120. 761 ; Z49. 984 ; Z6
16,0 ; X383. 889; Y87. 787 ; GOIF870Z90
78; G02X30. R1 00. F50. ; X304. 925; Xl
25. Y-16. 127Z4. 6F35. O ; X29. 99; X6 ; G
Oozloo. 04; Z120. o ; Z30. ; Z30. 333 ; V7
r 632-17.47: GOOX-17. 469: X423. S9 : G4 ‘1

INPUT

Fig. 4.35 Part Program Input Screen

● Whether or not the list of part programs being input is displayed on the screen
can be selected by the setting for the parameter setting.

l+=+-
I pmOO07D5 = 1
‘e’ec’iOnOf’rOce
--i
List of programs is not displayed.

\ Li.stof programsisdisplayexi. I
Table 4.1 Difference between the [BGREST] (f4) Function Soft-key
and the [RESETl Key

Stops only tape input/output and verifies.

[BGREST] (f4) key
Opration is not influenced.

I ~ESETl key I Reset3 all NCopemtions.

4-43
@ When an end Mcode (M02, M30, M99) or the “%” code is read, program input
is completed. Upcm completion of program input, the message “INPUT
COMPLETE’ is displayed.

● The [RETURN] (f5) function soft-key is invalid until the program input is
completed. However, the process keys are valid.

● Whether or not the end M code is regarded as the end of a program can be se-
lected by the parameter setting.

The end M code (M02, M30, M99) is not regarded as the end

The end M code (M02, M30, M99) is regarded as the end of

E~

“ Whether or not spaces are deleted during program input and verified can be
selected by the setting for the parameter.

= ~~~:~~~te, -

4“44
 4,3 PART PROGRAMlNPUT/OUTPUT AND VERIFYJOB

(2) Selection of “AN”

Select “ALL” in the input pop-up menu and input all part programs punched on tape
at a time. Follow the procedure indicated below.

When “ALL” is selected, the message ‘*ALL PROG. INPIJT” is displayed and
the message “INPUT OK ? (Y/N)” is displayed.

To input all programs, enter “Y”. Program input starts and the screen changes.
As shown in Fig. 4.35, the list of programs being input is displayed.

Enter “N” when part programs should not be input.

To stop the input of a program, press the [BGREST] (f4) function soft-key or
the [RESET] key.

PROGRAM 1/0 EDT O***** NOOOOO

INPUT (ALL)

ALL PROG. INPUT

INPUT OK? (Y/N)

MEM STP LSK

—
EDIT DIR pm

UZlCLZ!lE~2ZFEEl@&l

Fig. 4.36 All Program Input :Screen

@ The ALL input operation is completed when the % code is input. IJpon
completion of the input of the part programs, the message “INPUT COM-
PLETE’ is displayed.

4-45

.—.——
——..
————--..—— -—-—-
4.3.2 Outputting a Part Program

Outputs a part program from the NC memory to an external device.

The output function provides the following six menu items (EACH, PLR, RANG, ALL,
COL, and DATE) by the pop-up menu. Check the communication parameters by pressing
the [RS232C] (f3) function soft-key.

(1) Selection of EACH

Select “EACH” in the output pop-up menu and output part programs one by one. Fol-
low the procedure indicated below.

@ Enter the program numberof the program to be output (for example, “02000”)
and press the [WR] key. Output of the specified program starts and the list of
the program being output is displayed on the screen.

● To stop program output, press the [BGREST] (f4) function soft-key or the
[RESET] key.

PROGRAM 1/0 EDT O=**** NOOOOO

OUTPUT(EACH)
(002000)
02000 ; G28XOY0 ;~Ol M06 ; G43Z0 ; G1X1O
O. Y30. ; X229. 939Y89. 787 ; X250. Y70.
00. ; X-17. 637Y-120. 761 ; 249. 984; Z6
18.0 ; X383. 889; Y 87. 767 ; GO1 F870Z90
78 ; G02X30. R1OO. F50. ; X304. 925 ; Xl
25. Y-16. 12724. 6F35. O ; X29. 99; X6 ; G
002100. 04; 2120. 0 ; 230. ; Z30. 333 ; Y7
En 632-17. 47 ; Goox-17. 469 ; X433. 99 ; G4

OUTPUT

MEM STP LSK

. -–4

Fig. 4.37 Program Output Screen (EACH)

4-46
 4.3 PART PROGRAMlNPUT/OUTF’UTAND VERIFYJOB

● Whether or not the list of part programs being output is displayed can be se-
lected by the parameter setting.

m=::::~:~d” :3
● To cancel the feed portion at the leader and trailer part, press the [CAN] key
while feed holes are being output.

✠
Upon completion of the program output, the message “OUTPUT COM-
PLETE” is displayed. The [RETURN] (f5) function soft-key is not valid until
output of a program is completed. Note that process keys are valid.

(2) Selection of PLR., RANG, ALL, COL and DATE

Select the required output function from the output pop-up menu. Follow the procedure
indicated below. A
@ Press the [OUT] (fl) function soft-key. The “OUTPUT (EACH)” screen is I
displayed.

b Press the [OUT] (f2) function soft-key once again. The pop-up menu appears,
displaying the selection items of EACH, PLR., RANG, ALL, COL, and
DATE.

PROGRAM 1/0 EDT O***** NOOOOO

OUTPUT(EACH)
EACH – Pop-up menu
OUTPUT O NO.
PLR.

RANG

ALL

COL

DATE
[3

MEM STP LSK

—
EDIT DIR ~W~

mm@!lmlI&l

Fig. 4.38 Output Menu Selection Screen

@ Select the menu item by :moving the cursor with the curser up/down keys and
press the [WR] key. The output pop-up menu is cleared and the specified
screen is displayed.

4-47

—. —..-— ——.,—-. .-. ——-—. —... —--—.. -. .— -—-.

(a) Selection of PLR.

Outputs the specified multiple part programs. Follow the procedure indicated be-
low.

Enter the program number of the part program to be output (for example,
“01 11”) and press tlhe [WR] key.

Move the cursor to the next line and press the [WR] key. Up to 20 program
numbers can be entered consecutively.

f
PROGRAM 1/0 EDT O***** NOOOOO
OUTPUT(PLURAL)

OUTPUT O NO.

*000111 = =
= 000222 * *
* 000333 * *
* 001000 * =
* 002000 * =
* 003000 * =
* . .

MEM STP LSK

—
EDIT
‘“3 m

mc@lmmBA
\

riiimimmmmmllal
Fig. 4.39 Program Number Input Screen

Output of the specified program starts and the list of the program being output
is displayed on the screen. The specified programs are output on a single NC
tape.

4-48
 4.3 PARTPROGRAM lNPUT/OUTl”UT AND VERIFYJOB

(b) Selection of RANG

Outputs the part programs in the range specified by the program numbers. Follow
procedure indicated below.

The message is displayed requesting the input of the start program number of
the range. Key in the first program of the program output range (for example,
“01 11”) and press the [WR] key.

@ For the next message, input the end program number of the range (for exam-
ple, “0222”) and press the [WR] key.

PROGRAM 1/0 EDT O***** NOOOOO

OUTPUT(RANG)

START O NO.
000111

END O NO.
000222

JOG STP LSK

0222
EDIT DIR ~ml

mm[mm E&l

Fig. 4.40 Start and End Program Number Input Screen

@ Output of the specified program start and the list of the programs being output
is displayed on the screen. The part programs in the specified range are output
on a single NC tape. If nc~program number is found in the specified range, the
warning message “O NO NOT FOUND!” is displayed.

4-49

..—— ..- .——. .— ..—...—,—.---—. —

(c) Selection of ALL

Outputs all part programs stored in the NC memory. Follow the procedure indi-
cated below.

@ The message “ALL PROG. OUTPUT” is displayed on the screen and themes-
sage “OUTPUT OK.? (Y/N)” is displayed.

“ Enter “Y” to output all part programs.

● Enter “N” when the part programs should not be output.

IF ALL PROG.OUTPUT
o***** NOOOOO

CNJTPUT OK ? (Y/N)

Fig. 4.41 All Part Program Output Screen

@ Output of the part programs starts and the list of the program being output is
displayed on the screen. All part programs are output on a single NC tape.

4-50
 4,3 PARTPROGRAMlNPUT/OUTPUT AND VERIFYJOB

(d) Selection of COL.

By specifying the main program, the subprograms, program copies, and micropro-
grams called from the specified main program can be output up to 500 programs.
Follow the procedure indicated below.

@ When the “COL.” item is selected, the “COLLECT O NO.” message is dis-
played; enter the main program number (for example, “O 12345”) and press
the [WR] key.

PROGRAM 1/0 EDT O***** NOOOOO

OUTPUT(COLLECT)

COLLECT O NO.

JOG STP LSK

Fig. 4.42 Program Number Input Screen

Output of the programs starts and the list of the programs being output is dis-
played on the screen. The main program and the programs that are called from
the specified main program are output on a single NC tape.
(e) Selection of DATE

The date of part program creation and registration is stored in the NC memory. It
is possible to output part programs by speci~ing the date. Follow the procedure
indicated below.

The message requesting the input of the date is displayed. Enter the date of
program creation of the programs to be output (for example, ” 1991.05. 20”)
and press the [WR] key. If onl y the year is entered, all programs created in the
specified year are output, and if only the year and the month are entered, all
programs created in the specified month of the specified year are output.

PROGRAM 1/0 EDT O***** NOOOOO

OUTPUT(DATE)

DATE
YMD

JOG STP LSK

1991. 05 20
EDIT
o“ I!@I!Il

mmmmmmh

Fig. 4.43 Date Input Screen

@ Output of the specified programs starts and the list of the programs being out-
put is displayed on thle screen. The part programs created in the specified date
are output on a single NC tape.

4-52
 4.3 PART PROGRAM lNPUT/OUTF’UTAND VERIFYJOB

4.3.3 Verifying the Part Programs

Compares the part program in an external device with the part program stored in the NC
memory. For the execution of the verify function, selection is possible from each and all us-
ing the pop-up menu.

Check the setting for communication parameters by pressing the [R.S232C] (f5) function
soft-key.

(1) Selection of EACH

Verifies part programs one by one. Follow the procedure indicated below.

Press the [VER] (f3) function soft-key.

Press the [VER] (f3) function soft-key once again. The pop-up menu is dis-
played to allow the selection between “EACH” and “ALL”.

Select “EACH” by moving the cursor with the cursor up/down keys.

PROGRAM 1/0 EDT O***** NOOOOO

n
,

VERIFY(EACH)
~ EACH – Pop-up menu
VERIFY O NO.
ALL (for verification)
L=

I-mmmmmmuw 1
I

Fig. 4.44 Verification Menu !3election Screen

@ Enter the program number of the program to be verified (for example,

“02000”) and press the [WR] key.

4-53
 @ Verification is started and the list of the part programs (tape input side) to be
compared with the part programs stored in the NC memory is displayed on the
screen.

PROGRAM 1/0 EDT O***** NOOOW

VERIFY(EACH)
(002000)

02000: G28XOY0 ; TO1 M06 ; G43Z0 ; G 1Xl O

0. Y30. ; x229. 999Y89, 787 ; X250. Y70.
00. ; X-17. 637Y-120. 761 ; Z49. 984 ; Z8
18.0 ; X383, 889 ; Y87. 767 ; GO1F870Z90
78; G02X30. R100. F50. ; X304. 925 ; Xl
25. Y–16. 127Z4. 6F35. O; x29. 99; X6 ; G
Oozloo. CM; Z120, o ; Z30. ; Z30, 333 ; Y7
63Z-17. 47 ; Goox--I7, 469 ; x433. 99 ; G4

VERIFY

MEM STP LSK

Fig. 4.45 Program Verify Screen

s It is possible to select whether or not the list of part programs should be dis-
played on the screen for execution part program verification,

pmOO07 D5 = O List of part programs is not displayed.

pmOO07 D5 = 1 List of part programs is displayed.

4-54
 4.3 PARTPROGRAM lNPUT/OUTPUT AND VERIFYJOB

● If inconsistency between the contents of the part programs stored in the NC

memory and the contents of the one input from an external device is found, the
display area in the screen is divided into two parts. The upper half area dis-
plays the list of the part programs in the NC memory and. the lower half area
displays the list of the part programs input from the external device. Inconsis-
tent parts are highlighted.

PROGRAM 1/0 EDT o***** NOIY200

VERIFY
(O020CO)
INPuT FROM TAPE
05; X–14. 829Y-16. 46722. 74F35. O ; X2
79. 534. Y75. 666. X29. &34; GOD 2100,
G02X8. 875 ; Y- 58. 868; G54 ; GO1X39. 2Y
=—.: 3

CONTROLLER INTERNAL DATA

05; X-14. 629Y-16. 46772. 74F35. O ; X2
79. 534 Y75. 666 ; x29. 634; GOO Z1OO.
G02X8. 875; Y-56. 866; G54 ; G01X39. 2Y
-z -45, 854218.0 ; GO1 F650XOY12. 3220, ;

VERIFY ERROR!

MEM STF) LSK

—
EDIT
‘“ ‘m

m r] ‘1 -1 E=l &

Fig. 4.46 Screen after Occurrence of Inconsistency

4-55

.—-—— .—. - ..-. ,——..—. --—, —.. ~..

(2) Selection of ALL

Verifies all programs punched on tape. Follow the procedure indicated below.

Press the [VER] (f3 ) function soft-key.

Press the [VER] (f3) function soft-key once again. The pop-up menu is dis-
played to allow the selection between “EACH” and “ALL” (Fig. 4.46).

Select “ALL” by moving the cursor with the cursor up/down keys and press
the [WR] key.

The pop-up menu is cleared and the VERIFY (ALL) screen is displayed.
\
PROGRAM 1/0 EDT O***** NOOOOO
VERIFY(ALL)

ALL PROG. VERIFY

VERIFY OK? (Y/N)

JOG STP LSK

—
EDIT
“R m

pl i~~l rl~l l-l -I 1~1

)

mmiimmmlmw
Fig. 4.47 All Program Verify Screen

The “ALL PROG. VERIFY” message is displayed, and the message

“VERIFY OK? (Y/N)” is displayed.

Enter ‘-Y” to execute all program verify operation.

Enter “N” when program verification should not be executed.

Verification is started and the list of the part programs (input from the tape)
to be compared with the part programs stored in the NC memory is displayed
on the screen.

If inconsistency is fcjund between the contents of the part programs stored in

the NC memory and the contents of the one input from an external device, the
screen changes as shown in Fig. 4.46 and inconsistent parts are highlighted.

4- !36
 4.3 PART PROGRAM lNPUT/OUTPUT AND VERIFYJOB

4.3.4 Setting the Communication Conditions

Sets the baud rate of the data I/O interface, stop bit length, the use of control codes, etc.

(1) Setting the RS-232C Communications Parameters

This screen is used to display and set the communication parameters used when an ex-
ternal device is connected by the R.S-232C interface. For the connection of an external
device, two ports are provided; one is used for input and the other for output. Follow
the procedure indicated below.

@ Press the [RS232C] (f5) function soft-key, and the screen as shown below is
displayed.
~
PROGRAM 1/0 EDT O***** NOOOOO
1/0 uNIT SET IN Oul”

PORT NO.1 NO~?

UNIT RS232C RS232C

BORS 4s00 9EO0
STOP BIT 2BIT IBIT
BITS 8BITS 7BITS
PARIN OFF EVEN
X ON/OFF ON OFF
RTS CONTROL ON OFF
PARllY ISO ON OFF

MEM STP LSK

—
EDIT DIR ~u~
I
[-l F1 F=n 1(-=0 r—-l }1
J

Fig. 4.48 RS-232C Communication Parameters Setting

Move the cursor to the parameter for which the data should be set by using the
cursor up/down keys. When the cursor is moved to a certain parameter, the
contents of the function soft-keys change meeting the selected parameter.

Press the soft-key corresponding to the required setting. The selected value
is set for the cursor located parameter. For example, in the setting of BORS,
if [9600] (f4) soft-key is pressed, “9600” is written.

CD
SUPPLE-
MEt4T
For the parameters for which “****’“ is displayed, setting is not permitted.
—— . . . . .—--—. ——.-. ____

4-57
 For the serial interface, setting is possible as indicated in Table 4.2.

Table 4.2 Serial Interface Setting

Menu Item Input output

YE tape reader
UNIT (device)
General-purpose RS-232C General-purpose RS-232C

NO. I NO. 1
PORT
NO. 2 NO. 2

1000r75 1000r75

llOOr 150 llOOr 150

300 300
600 600
BORS (baud rate)
1200 1200

2400 2400

4800 4800

9600 9600

1 bit 1 bit
STOP BIT
2 bits 2 bits

7 bits 7 bits
BITS (bit length)
8 bits 8 bits

Even parity Even parity

PARITY (parity scheme) Odd parity Odd parity

None None
1

Supported Supported I
X ON/OFF (control code)
None None

Supported Supported
RTS CONTROL
None None

Supported Supported
PARITY ISO
None None

Note 1: Although two RS-232C ports are provided, these two portscannotbeusedat thesametime. For thesetwo ports,
settingcanbemadeindependentlyfrom eachother.
2: Recommended setting for thecommunicationat 9600 bpsis indicatedbelow.

EEliEE-‘:AspEc’ALcON
‘:”DD’om
4- !58
 4.3 PART PROGRAMlNPUT/OUTPUT AND VERIFY JOB

The menu items are explained below.

(a) UNIT (external device)

Select “YE tape reader” when the tape reader special for YASNAC is used. If “YE
tape reader” is set, parameters are automatically y set and “****” is displayed for oth-
er parameters.

BORS 4800 bps

STOP BIT 2 BITS

BIT LENGTH 8 BITS

PARITY OFF

X ON/OFF El ON

By selecting “RS232C” (general-purpose RS-232C), connection is possible with

a variety of RS-232C devices by setting appropriate communication parameters.

(b) PORT

Selection is possible between No. 1 port and No. 2 port.

(c) BORS

Communication speed can be set by this parameter. Whether 100 and 110 bps or
75 and 150 bps are selected for low speed is determined by the setting for the fol-
lowing parameters.

No. ] pOtt ‘“P”’

=*=
output
F*=I

Inout
-r.. Ea-’”and “’bps~
I ptnOOi6 D7= 1 I 75 and 150 bps I
No. 2 pOlt

(d) STOP BIT

It is possible to set the bit length of the stop bit,

4-59

—— ..— —.——- ...— —, —.. —— —,,-.--. — —. —.- .,..,,,— .. —. —..— .—. -

(e) BITS

It is possible to set the bit length of the data.

(f) PARITY

It is possible to specify the hardware dependent parity check status.

(g) X ON/OFF

It is possible to specify whether or not the control codes are used,

(h) RTS CONTROL

When the setting for this parameter is “ON”, communication between the YAS-
NAC and the connected device is controlled using the RS and CS signals. To use
the RTS control, the cross-cable as shown below must be used.

m’s’ ‘s -

c’ * x Cs

(i) PARITY ISO

When 1S0 code data is used, this parameter is used to set whether parity check is
made with the higher data bits. For this parameter, setting is possible if “YE tape
reader” is selected for UNIT.

4-60
 4.3 PART PROGRAM lNPUT/OUTPUT AND VERIFYJOB

(2) Other Communication Control Parameters

Set the communication parameters used for data communications with an external de-
vice.

(a) DR LINE CHECK

The DR line check executes the test at the NC side whether thfi DR line of the con-
nected external device is ON (that is, whether the connected device is ready for
communications). For this function, the following parameters are provided. To
perform this test, use the cable that connects the DR line of the NC to the DR line
of the connected device. The connected device must have the DR line control func-
tion.

-7s?::::?

No. 2 port
H)%::::::+

(b) NC DATA SPECIAL CONTROL

This parameter is used to set whether or not the check specific to the NC is executed
and also whether or not special character codes are used. How this control is used
is indicated below.

The following are as set with parameters:

● pmOO04 D 1, D2, D3
● pm3005: DO, D2, D3, D4, and D5
Control ON for input
The following parameters are made valid:
●pm4100-4109 and pm4144- 4146
EIA/ISO automatic recognition is provided.

Several bits of the following parameters we fixed:

●pmOO04 XX XX1OOX
c pm3005: X xOOOOXO
Control OFF for input
The following parameters are made invalid:
● pm4100 -4109 and pm4144 -4146
Fixed to 1S0 code

The following are as set with parameters:

● pmOO04: Other than D3

Control ON for output ● pm3005: D5

The following parameters are made valid
. pm4100 - 4]09 and pm4i44 -4146

Several bits of the following parameters are fixed:

Control OFF for output ●pm@04 OIIOXXXO
.pm3005: XX OX XXXX
—

4-61

,.———.
-... _ ....———..-._— . .,..—.-- ——.—..-...,---------------- .,.- ,——-. —- —-—.—-. ——
4.3.5 Other Function

With the [BGREST] (f4) function soft-key, resetting operation is possible.

(1) BG Reset

The [BGREST] function soft-key provides the background reset function which is dif-
ferent from the function provided by the [RESET] key on the operation panel. The BG
reset function executes the fcdlowing processing.

● Interruption of input/output/verify operation

● Turning on the label skip function

● Resetting the background alarm [ALM 9000’s)

The [BGREST] (f4) function soft-key does not have any influence on the operation
even if it is pressed during the execution of a program. Even if the [BGREST] (f4) func-
tion soft-key is pressed, the “RST” status indicating message is not displayed.

4-62
4.4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWING JOB

The tool paths defined by a machining program are analyzed and drawn on the program path
drawing screen. The range of drawing, view angle, and other conditions are set on the pro-
gram drawing screen.

4.4.1 Features of the Program Path Drawing Screen

The program path drawing job has the following features.

Table 4.3 Features of the Program Path Drawing Screen

Function Feature

Line drawing Toolpathsare drawnby lines.

—
Drawingplane selection The planeon which the tool paths shouldbe drawncan be selected.
(XY,Yz, 2X, XYZ,xY/Yz, XY,X2)
Viewangle selection On the XYZ plane,view angle can be selectedin units of 5 degrees.
Drawing range (scale) selection Tool path drawing range can be selected as required from all the tool
paths.

Automatic scaling The scale for drawing the tool paths is automatically determined so
that all the tool paths can be drawn on the screen.

Process drawing Cutting operations carried out by a single tool are assumed as one
process, and drawing of the tool paths is possib !e only for the se-
lected processes.

\uxiliary function indicator While an auxiliary function is executed, the status of the functions
being executed are displayed by the corresponding symbol.

~ontinuous/single selection Continuous drawing and single-block drawing can be selected.

4-63
4.4.2 Description of the Program Path Drawing Screens

When the program path draw job ([PROG DRAW]) is selected at the edit process screen, the
tool path drawing screen is displayed.

(1) Drawing Screen

The tool path drawing screen is the main screen to draw the specified program and the
screen used for setting the drawing parameters, the one used for setting the drawing
scale can be called. The settin,g screens for program path drawing provide the following
functions.

\
DRAW (PROG) EDT 001000 NOOO02

O NO.000001
x 0.000
Y 0.000
z 0.000
(mm)
F 200
(mm/min)
T 0002
TIME 0:09:16
<5
01:
NI G92 G28Z0 ;
N2 G28 XO YO ; 4

MEM STP LSK

m~l iPT P1 ml r] T
“ p==] !F=y 1-1 -I [-] ❑
J

❑ mmmmmlm
Fig. 4.49 Program Path Drawing Screen

4-64
 4.4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWING JOB

(a) Setting the program number for program path drawing

When drawing program paths, it is necessary to specify the program number first.
Follow the procedure indicated below.

@ Press the [DRAW] (f4) function soft-key to display the DRAW (PROG)
screen.

@ To set the program number, key in “O” and “program-number” and press the
[WR] key.

● Once set, the program number is retained until the power is turned OFF.
Therefore, if a program drawn previously should be drawn. again, it is not nec-
essary to enter the program number again.

c When the power is turned ON, “00” is set.

● If tool paths of a subprogram are drawn or when automatic scaling is executed

for a subprogram, the program number is automatically y changed to the subpro-
gram number.

(b) Executing the program path drawing

The program paths are drawn according to the setting for drawing parameters.
Whether the paths are drawn continuously or block by block is determined accord-
ing to the setting made by the [CONT/SINGI.E] soft-key. Fcdlow the procedure
indicated below.

@ On the program path drawing screen, press the [START] (f3) soft-key and the
program path drawing starts. In the state that the [START] (f3) soft-key is
highlighted, it indicates that the program paths are being drawn.

@ To suspend program path drawing temporarily, press the [START] (f3) soft-
key while the program piiths are being drawn. Note that drawing of the pro-
gram paths is suspended at the single-block stop point. When the [START]
(f3) soft-key is pressed, while the program path drawing is suspended, pro-
gram path drawing is restarted.

@ Upon completion of the program path drawing, the “DRAW COMPLETE’

message is displayed. To end the program path drawing forcibly, press the
[RESET] soft-key. If the [START] (f3) soft-key is pressed the next time, the
program paths are drawn from the beginning of the program.

4-65
 @ To clear the drawn paths from the screen, press the [CLEAR] (fl) soft-key.
If the [CLEAR] soft-key is pressed while the program paths are being drawn,
the paths having already been drawn are cleared and the remaining paths are
drawn continuously.
●
If there are errors in the program, the alarm number and the corresponding
alarm message are displayed on the screen. Note that if there is more than one
alarm in the program, only the largest alarm number is displayed.
●
The modes of axis feed (rapid traverse, cutting feed) are identified by the line
types as indicated below.

Dotted line Tool center path

Rapid traverse
t- Dot chain line Offset path

k
Solid line Tool center path
Cutting feed
Dot chain line Offset path

CD
SUPPLE-
MENT
1.

2.
Program paths are drawn a.ta fixed speed independent of the feedrates specified
in a program or the setting of the override switches.

Usually, the size of drawing is determined by the maximum and minimum values
of the program that are set for GRAPH RANGE on the drawing parameter setting
screen. However, if the scale is changed on the scale setting screen, program
paths are drawn according to the setting made on this screen.

4-66
 4,4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWINGJOB

(c) Contents of display

The program paths of the specified program are drawn in line.

“ When two-dimensional (drawing mode is selected (XY, YZ, ZX, XY/YZ,

XY/X planes), the coordinate axes are displayed on thes creen.
r \
—— ‘
DRAW (PROG) EDT 001000 NCIOO02

A Y
O NO. 000001

x 0.000
Y 0.000
z 0.000
(mm)
F 200
(mm/min)
T 0002
TIME 0:09:16

E3
01:
N1 G92 G28Z0 ;
N2 G28X0 YO ; ~~.+ x
O 101: ADDRESS/DATA MISUE
MEM STP LSK

lzErl[mKlllmIlm E:l ~
“m[mm@EEIEE%~lIl
—)

Fig. 4.50 Program Path Drawing Screen (l-we-dimensional Drawing)

4-67

-.—.—.——— .—.——._._ .._-_ ___________ .__.._ .--— .— --- .....- ——. .——. ——..=. - ..—— .. ..-—. .— --— !—. -_ .-
 ● When three-dimensi.onal drawing mode is selected (XYZ plane), the coordi-
nate axes are not displayed.

DRAW (PROG) EDT 001000 NOOO02

X-Y Y-z
A A ‘f O NO. 000001

x 0.000
Y 0.000
z 0.000
(mm)
F 200
(mm/min)
T 0002
TIME 0:09:
:. L 16
01:
N1 G92 G28Z0 ;
N2 G28 XO YO; x

MEM STP LSK

lII!z!Il
!I!zEcl@?IzTlmr3 t
‘c!E!IELI
PE!lm@EEllEElm

Fig. 4.51 Program Path Drawing Screen (Three-dimensional Drawing)

4-68
 4.4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWING JOB
——

. The area where program paths are drawn is the “304 x 544” dot area at the
upper left part of the screen. When the XY/YZ or XY/XZ planes are selected,
the size of the single plane is determined so that the drawn program path size
will be the maximum size.
——
——
( DRAW (PROG) EDT 001000 NOO002

A Y O NO. 000001

x 0.000
Y 0.000
z 0.000

(mm)
F 200
(mm/min)
T 0002
TIME 0:09:16
- c1 [3
01: [m
N1 G92G28Z0 ;
[a
N2 G28X0 YO ; ,~~> ‘x
O 101: ADDRESWDATA MISUE
MEM STP LSK

Fig. 4.52 Program Path Drawing Screen (l-hree-dimensicmal Drawing)

“ O NO. (drawing program number)

Displays the program number of the program for which program paths are
drawn. While program paths of the subprogram called from the main program
are being drawn or when automatic scale calculation is being made for that
subprogram, the program number of the subprogram is displayed.

● Coordinate symbol

When the three-dimensional mode is selected, the coordinate symbol is dis-

played at the lower right part of the screen. Note that the symbol is not dis-
played when the two-dimensional mode is selected.

The symbol is displayed in the “80 x 80” dot area.

● Program list

Three blocks of the program that are being drawn are displayed.
 Position data

The Present Position. of the X-, Y-, and Z-axis is displayed. The position data
do not include the tc~olradius offset amounts.

Command values

For F and T codes, the values specified in the program are displayed.

M code function indicator

The valid M code functions are indicated by the symbols.

Depending on the M code type to be indicated, three display positions are used.

Left position M code symbol to indicate the spindle status

Spindle forward rotation, spindle reverse rotation, spindle stop, and
spindle orientation stop

I Center I Mcode symbol to indicate the coolant ON/OFF status I

r!!---modsd”cocsymbobo
Pro,gram stop, optional stop, end of program, and tool change

CD
SUPPLE-
MENT
The correspondence between the miscellaneous functions (M code functions) and the
M code numbers is determined by the machine tool builder. This correspondence is
set for the NC function parameters (pm3442 to pm3448).

Spindle forward rotaticm M code

&
I pm3444
Spindle reverse rotation M code

I Spindle stopM code number I

= ~~~~~
pm3448 I Coolant OFF Mcode number I

I pm3445 I Spindle orientation M code number I I I

● TIME (machining time)

Actual machining time up to the block for which program paths are presently
drawn is calculated and displayed.

4-7’0
 4.4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWINGJOB

(d) Description of thesoft-keys

Q [CLEAR] (f2) soft-key

When this soft-key is pressed, the program paths having been drawn are
cleared. Note that the information displayed by characters is not cleared.

● [CONT/SINGLE] (f4) sclft-key

The drawing mode (continuous drawing, single-block drawing) is switched

over by pressing this soft-key.

● [START] (f3) soft-key

Program path drawing starts when this soft-key is pressed. While the program
paths are drawn, the soft-key is highlighted. If the [START] soft-key is
pressed while the program paths are drawn, drawing is suspended. Pressing
the [START] soft-key while the program path drawing is suspended restarts
drawing from the block where drawing has been suspended.

. [DSP.SL] (fl) soft-key

This soft-key is used to select whether or not the operation information (posi-
tion data, command values, program blocks, etc.) should be displayed on the
screen. Each time the [DSP.SL] soft-key is pressed, the status alternates be-
tween “display” and “not display”.

● [RESET] (f5) soft-key

When this soft-key is pressed, the key buffer area and the drawn paths are
cleared and the drawing execution pointer is returned to the beginning of the
programs. Both drawing and the automatic calculation of scale are stopped.

● [PRM] (f 1) soft-key

When this soft-key is pressed, the screen changes to the drawing parameter
setting screen (PRM (PROG)).

● [SCALE] (f2) soft-key

When this soft-key is pressed, the screen changes to the scale setting screen
(SCALE (PROG)). Note that this soft-key is invalid when the program paths
are drawn by selecting the XY/YZ plane or XY/XZ plane.

4-71

—. —..——. .———..— —.,—— ..=—. —.— .,..- ——.——....——— -—. ----- .,.—..—...—! .—..
 Q [AUTO] (f3) soft-key

When this soft-key is pressed, the scale is calculated automatically. While the
scale is calculated, the “AUTO SCALING” message is displayed. At the same
time the [AUTO] so:ft-key is highlighted. Upon completion of the calculation,
the [AUTO] display returns to the normal display and the lower row of the
soft-keys returns to the display of the foreground functions. If the [SCALE]
soft-key is pressed during automatic scale calculation, the calculation is
stopped and the value obtained at that point becomes valid. When the
[DPS.SL] soft-key is pressed, the program for which the scale is calculated,
position data, command values, etc. are displayed.

● [PROCESS] (f4) soft-key

This soft-key is useci to select whether the program paths should be drawn for
all processes (normal state) or only for the selected processes (highlighted
state). The selection alternates each time the [PROCESS] soft-key is pressed.
In the state where the automatic scale calculation has not been made, this soft-
key is not displayed.

(e) Soft-keys valid in the individual functions

● Soft-keys valid for automatic scale calculation

[DSP.SL], [CONT/SINGLE], [AUTO], [START], [RESET], and [CLEAR]

● Soft-keys valid during program path drawing

[CLEAR], [CONT/!HNGLE], [START], [RESET], and [PROCESS]

Note that the [PROCESS] soft-key is displayed only after the completion of
automatic scale calculation.

(f) Messages

On the program path drawing screen, the following messages are displayed.

Table 4.4 Messages

Description

- Indicates that automatic scaling is executed. (highlighted,

I I blinking) I

“SCALING COMPLETE” Indicates that automatic scaling is completed. (highlighted) I

“DRAWING COMPLETE” Indicates that program path drawing has been completed.
(highlighted) I

4-72
 4.4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWING JOB

(g) Others

. Even if the [RESET] (f5) soft-key is pressed during program path drawing or
automatic scaling, the processing is not influenced.

. If an additional axis is selected, although the position data of the additional

axis is displayed, program path drawing is executed with the additional axis
disregarded.

● For the calculation of cycle time (machining time), the time used for the execu-
tion of M, S, and T commands is taken intc) account. The values set for parame-
ters pm3449 to pm3451 are used for this calculation (average time of the execu-
tion of the M, S, and T commands).

The average time necessary for the execution of an M code (msec)

Es& :4
The average time necessary for the execution of an S code (msec)

The average time necessary for the execution of a T code (msec)

4-73
(2) Drawing Parameter Settin!~ Screen

When the [PRM] function soft-key is pressed on the program path drawing screen, the
drawing parameter setting screen as shown below is displayed. On this screen, the pa-
rameters necessary for drawing the program paths are displayed. It is also possible to
setthe required values or change the displayed setting.
\
PRM (PROG) EDT 001000 NOOO02

1. PLANE 4. GRAPH RANGE

XL = -123456.789
2. ANGLE YL = –123456.789
~ = –lo,> ZL = -123456.789
~ = -25, XH = -123456.789
4
YH = –123456.789
3. PROCESS (TOOL No.) ZH = -123456.789

0001 0002 0003 0004 5. CMP MODE SINGL

0005 0006 0001 0008 6. CMP (LENGTH) ON

0009 0010 0002 0003 7. WORK SHIFT ON

1/2
MEM STP LSK

– ~~mmmmt
+ pY-1 yl [~1 I- PI ❑
/

mmmmmmm
——
i XYIXZ
--l
F=-1 I 1

——
I DO\NN I
I--EL-J I RIGHT I I RETURN
L—————JL—————J
I
——
I DO\NN I I
——
I I RETURN I

r=== m I—— I I RETURN I

m-.EEEl
IMMI
1 ....IEEI
Fig. 4.53 Program Path Drawing Parameter Setting Screen

4. ;74
 4.4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWING JOB

—— ‘
------- -------
PRM (PROG) EDT Uuluuu NUUUW<!

8. lNCH/MM IIUCH

9. BLOCK SKIP ON

10. OPTL STOP OFF

11. MIRROR X OFF

12. MIRROR Y OFF

13. MIRROR Z OFF

2/2
MEM STP LSK
——
EEElczmEmEi!Elm t
+zKlc12Elc=lc =HEEE!dLD

❑ mmmmmm
Fig. 4.54 Program Path Drawing Parameter Setting Screen

The following parameters are provided to set the conditions for drawing the pro-
gram paths.
● PLANE (Program path clrawing plane)
● ANGLE (View angle for three-dimensional drawings)
● PROCESS (Processes for drawing program paths)
9 GRAPH RANGE [Range (scale) of drawing]
● CMP MODE and CMP (LENGTH) (Offset data handling for drawings)
● WORK SHIFT (Workpiece coordinate system shift amount handling for
drawings)
● INCWMM (Selection of “mm” or “inch’” system)
● BLOCK SKIP (Handling of block skip for drawings)
● OPTL STOP (Handling of optional stop for drawings)
● MIRROR X/Y/Z (Handling of mirror image for drawings)
Follow the procedure indicated below to set the program path drawing parameters.

@ After moving the cursor to the program path drawing parameter item.

@ Set the contents by using the soft-keys, cursor keys, [WR] key, and data keys.

@ The parameter settirlg screen consists of two pages and the page keys are used
to change the displa:y pages. The page is also changed by the movement of the
cursor.

(a) PLANE

The parameter is used to select the plane (two-dimensional- XY, YZ, ZX, XY/YZ,
XY/XZ, three-dimensional – XYZ) where the program paths should be drawn.

@ When the cursor is moved to this parameter, the soft-key names are changed
as indicated below to permit the selection of the required program path draw-
ing plane.

@ It is also possible to select the plane by entering the addresses of the plane to
be selected and pressing the [WR] key ([X], [Y], [WR] for the selection of the
XY plane, for example).

(b) ANGLE

This parameter is used tcj select the view angle for program path drawing,
● “~” indicates an angle around the Z-axis; the angle measured from the X-axis
to the Y-axis has a positive value.

● “(3” indicates an angle between the XY plane and the view point; the angle
measured from the plane to the Z-axis has a positive value.

@ When the cursor is moved to this parameter, the soft-key names are changed
as indicated below.

EEECIE!ZEIDCHE
EIEEI

4.76
 4.4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWINGJOB

Setting by using the soft-keys

Value of “a” changes in increments of–50 and+50 each t ime the [LEFT] and
[RIGHT] soft-keys are pressed respectively. Value of “~” changes in incre-
ments of–50 and +50 each time the [UP] and [DOWN] soft-keys are pressed
respectively.
Direct setting by inputting a numerical value

While the cursor is located on this parameter, the second cursor is displayed
at the position of “a” or “~”. When the [WR] key is pressed after keying in
a numerical value, the view angle is updated according to the input value. The
second cursor is moved by the cursor right/left keys or the [WR] key.

(c) PROCESS

The toolnumbers of the tools to be selected for the selection of the processes are
displayed. The highlighted numbers indicate the tool numbers selected for draw-
ing the program paths. A

“ The tool numbers of the tools used in the program for which automatic scaling I
calculation has been made are displayed. These numbers are stored during au-
tomatic calculation.

When the cursor is moved to this parameter, the second cursor (blinking) is
displayed in the tool number list and the soft-keys are changed as shown be-
low.

P! TIZEILEHZ!EIEEEII
@ The second cursor moves right or left as the cursor ri.ghtileft key or the
[RIGHT] and [LEfl] soft-keys are pressed. When the [Ul?] or [DOWN] soft-
keys are pressed, the second cursor moves up or down.

@ The [WR] key changes the “selected” and “not selectecl” status of the tool
where the second cursor is positioned each time the key is pressed. The se-
lected tool number is displayed in highlighted characters. The tool number
display status and meaning are as follows.
—
Normal characters Not selected and not at the second cursor position
—
Highlighted characters Selected and not at the second cursor position
—
Blinking characters Not selected and at the second cursor position

Blinking highlighted characters Selected and at the second cursor position

z
● Up to 12 tools are displayed on one page and if more than 12 tools are used
in the program, they are displayed by scrolling the screen bIythe second cursor.
 c The cursor is not moved in the following cases.
The cursor left key is pressed when the cursor is on the first tool.
The cursor right key is pressed when the cursor is on the last tool.

“ When the cursor left or right key is pressed when the cursor is on the right end
or the left end tool, respectively, the cursor moves to the next or previous tool,

(d) GRAPH RANGE (base coordinate system)

The parameters indicate the range of program path drawing. The range is specified
by the coordinate values in the base coordinate system.

@ When the cursor is moved to this parameter, the soft-keys are changed as indi-
cated below and the second cursor (highlighted cursor) is displayed.

@ When the [UP] soft-key or the cursor left key is pressed, the second cursor is
moved up, and when the [DOWN] soft-key, cursor right key, or the [WR] key
is pressed, the cursor is moved down.

@ When the [WRI key is pressed after keying in a numerical value, the coordi-
nate value where the second cursor is positioned is updated and the cursor
moves down.

● When automatic scaling is not executed, the required range for program path
drawing can be defined by setting appropriate coordinate values in the base
coordinate system for these parameters.

● When automatic stalling is executed, the maximum and minimum values in the
program are automatically set.

(e) CMP MODE

This parameter indicates whether or not the tool radius offset is included when pro-
gram paths are drawn. Selection is possible from “OFF”, “SINGLE”, and
“DOUBLE”.

● If the setting for CMP MODE is “OFF”, program paths are drawn without in-
cluding the tool radius offset amount.

s If the setting for CMP MODE is “SINGLE”, program paths are drawn includ-
ing the tool radius offset amount.

● If the setting for CMP MODE is “DOUBLE’, both program paths are drawn
(OFF mode paths and SINGLE mode paths).

4- ;78
 @ When thecursoris locatedon this parameter, the soft-keys are changed as indi-
cated below.

@ Program paths drawing status is selected by using the soft-keys ([DOUBLE],

[SINGLE], [OFF]) or the [WR] key.

(f) CMP (LENGTH)

This parameter indicates whether or not the tool length offset is included when pro-
gram paths are drawn. Program path drawing status depends cm the setting for pa-
rameter CMP MODE.

“ If the setting for CMP MODE is “OFF”, the setting made for this parameter
is disregarded.

s If the setting is “ON’, tool paths are drawn with both the tool radius and tool
length offset included.

@ When thecursoris located on this parameter, the soft-keys are changed as indi-
cated below,

@ The [ON] and [OFF] soft-keys or the [WR] key are used to select whether or
not the workpiece coordinate system shift distance is valid for drawing the
program paths.

(g) WORK SHIFT

This parameter is used to select whether or not the workpiece (coordinate shift dis-
tance is included for the program paths to be drawn.

When the cursor is located on this parameter, the soft-keys are changed as indi-
cated below.

m E’3 c1 E:] k@

The [ON] and [OFF] soft-keys or the [WR] key are used to select whether or
not the workpiece coordinate system shift distance is valid for drawing the
program paths.
(h) lNCH/MM

This parameter is used to select whether program paths are drawn in the units of
inches or mm. When G2.O(inch input) orG21 (mm input) is specified in the pro-
gram, the setting for this parameter is changed accordingly,

@ When the cursor is located on this item, the soft-keys are changed as indicated
below.

@ The input unit is selected by pressing the soft-keys ([MM], [INCH]) or the
[WR] key.

(i) BLOCK SKIP

This parameter is used tc, select whether the blocks preceded by the slash code (/)
at the beginning of a block are valid or invalid for program path drawing.

@ When thecursoris Ic,catedon this parameter, the soft-keys are changed as indi-
cated below.

@ The [ON] and [OFF] soft-keys or the [WR] key are used to select whether or
not the block skip is valid for drawing the program paths.

(j) OPTIONAL STOP

This parameter is used to select whether the program path drawing is suspended
at the MO1 block.

@ When the cursor is locatedon this parameter, the soft-keys are changed as indi-
cated below.

@ The [ON] and [OFFI soft-keys or the [WR] key are used to select whether or
not the optional stop is valid for drawing the program paths.

@) After the suspension of program path drawing, drawing restarts when the
[START] soft-key is pressed.

4-130
 4.4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWING JOB

(k) MIRROR

These parameters are used to specify the axes for which the mirror image is made
valid. The following three parameters are provided: MIRROR X, MIRROR Y, and
MIRROR Z. Mirror image is valid only for the X-, Y-, and Z-axis.

@ When thecursoris located on this parameter, the soft-keys are changed as indi-
cated below.

~ P:= Cl E:] EEE!!!l

@ The [ON] and [OFF] sofr-keys or the [WR] key are used to select whether or
not the mirror image is valid for drawing the program paths.
——— ——

D
SUPPLE-
MENT
The setting for the program path drawing parameters is not cleared when the power
is turned OFF. Note that the tool information for the drawing processes is cleared. B
(3) Drawing Scale Change Screen

When the [SCALE] soft-key is pressed on the program path drawing screen, the draw-
ing scale change screen is disl?layed. On this screen, the program paths drawn once can
be redrawn by enlarging a pa,rt of the drawn paths.

\ \
SCALE (PROG) EDT 001000 NOOO02

+ +

-.

hmmmilmmilwl
Fig. 4.55 Drawing Scale Change Screen

Scale of program path drawing can be determined by specifying the range to be enlarged
by a frame on the drawn paths. When the range to be drawn is defined by using the
frame, the enclosed part is drawn in the maximum size when the program paths are
drawn next.

(a) Display contents

“ The same program paths drawn on the main drawing screen are drawn on the
screen.

c The drawing frame indicates the range of program path drawing; when the
position and the size of the frame is changed, the drawing window to be used
next is changed.

4-82
 4.4 PROGRAMPATH DRAWING JOB-

(b) Operation

Set the position and the size (ofthe drawing frame.

c) As the cursor up/down or right/left keys are pressed, the drawing frame moves
up/down or right/left by one character.

@ When the [LARGE] or [SMALL] soft-key is pressed, the drawing frame is en-
larged or reduced in units of characters.

@ When the [STD] soft-key is pressed, the drawing frame is returned to the same
size as the standard drawing scale (the maximum scale for displaying the
drawn paths), and the screen is switched to the main drawing screen. Howev-
er, if the drawing frame is at the end of the display range in the screen, the
frame cannot be moved or enlarged any more.

@ The screen returns to the program path drawing screen when the [RETURN]
soft-key is pressed.

(c) Others

When the XY/YZ or XY/XZ plane is selected for drawing the program paths,
it is not possible to change the screen to this drawing scale change screen.

Even if the drawing frame is changed, the setting for the parameter GRAPH
RANGE on the drawing screen is not influenced.

4-83

. .. .. .. .....——.—.— —.—.—-
 (4) Scaling

Before starting the drawing of program paths, it is necessary to set the size of program
paths to be drawn on the screen. To determine this size, either the automatic scaling
function is used or the coordinate values are used to define the scale that should be en-
tered.

(a) Automatic scaling

The automatic scaling determines the display scale so that all the program paths are
drawn in the maximum size. At the same time, the function checks the syntax error
in the program and calculates cycle time. If an error is found in the program, auto-
matic scaling is terminated before completion and an alarm is given. As with an
error found during the prc)gram path drawing, both the alarm number and the alarm
message are displayed at the lower section in the screen.

* To start the automatic scaling, press the [AUTO] soft-key. The automatic scal-
ing ends when any of M30, M99, or M02 specified in the program is executed.
Note that M99 specified in a subprogram does not cause the automatic scaling
to end.

“ To stop automatic scaling forcibly, press either the [START] soft-key (high-
lighted) or the [AUTO] soft-key (highlighted). In this case, the scale is calcu-
lated based on the program paths before the automatic scaling is stopped.

● After the execution of the automatic scaling, the following data are automati-
cally set.

GRAPH RANGE
(drawing parameter)
The maximum and minimum coordinate values of X, Y, and Z in
the program (in the base coordinate system). I
PROCESS
(drawing parameter)
The tool numbers of the tools used in the program.
I
● It is possible to execute automatic scaling block by block by selecting
“SINGLE” by pressing the [CONT/SINGLE] soft-key.

● It is possible to select the display status (with or without the position and pro-
gram list display) during the automatic scaling processing by using the
[DSP.SL] soft-key.

(3)
stJPP&E.
MEf4T
For automatic scaling, the setting for the drawing parameters (workpiece coordinate
system shift distance includedhot included, tool offset includedhot included) are ref-
erenced.
.———

4-84
 4.4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWINGJOB

(b) Entering the drawing scale values

When determining the scale for drawing the program paths, it is possible to directly
set it by entering the coordinate values. On the drawing parameter setting screen,
enter the range for drawing the program paths with the coordinate values in the base
coordinate system for the pari~meter “4. GRAPH RANGE’.

Once the scale is determined by the automatic scaling function, the obtained scale
remains valid until a new scale is calculated for another program or the coordinate
values are entered to determine the scale. Therefore, to draw the program paths of
the same program repeatedly, execution of the automatic scaling function is not
necessary for the second and later operations.

(5) Program Path Drawing for the Selected Processes

By assuming that an operation executed by one tool constitutes a process, it is possible

to draw the program paths only for the selected processes.
@ When the [PRM] soft-ke:y is pressed on the program path drawing screen, the
drawing parameter setting screen is displayed.
m
d

@ Move the cursor to “3. PROCESS” by using the cursor up/down keys.

@ Move the second cursor (blinking) to the tool number which corresponds to
the process for which the program paths should be drawn by using the cursor
right/left keys and select “to draw” by pressing the [WRI key. Selection re-
turns to the “not to draw” if the [WR] key is pressed again. The program paths
are drawn for the process of the tool which is highlightecl.

Press the [RETURN] soft-key on the drawing parameter setting screen to re-
turnthe screen to the path drawing screen.
Press the [PROCESS] soft-key to select the process drawing mode. The
[PROCESS] soft-key is highlighted.

Program path drawing starts; program paths are drawn only for the selected
processes.
 In the process drawing mode, a process refers to a unit of machining operation which
begins with the mounting of a new tool in the spindle and ends when the tool is changed
to the next tool. For the automatic scaling, the tool numbers that are set for PROCESS
on the tool path drawing para~meter setting screen are only the tools which are changed
by the M06 command. If tool change is not executed even if a T command is specified,
such T command is disregarded.

Example)

TO1 ;
T02 ;
G28 ZO ;
G28 XO YO ;
M06; . . . . . . . . . . . ...(i)

TO1 ;
T02 ;
G28 ZO ;
G28 XO YO ;
M(]6; . . . . . . . . . . . . .. (ii)

. Since TO1 tool is not changed, it is disregarded.

. T02 tool is used from block (i) to block (ii).

a)
SUPPLE-
MENT
1.

2.
Process drawing is not executed even if the drawing parameters are changed un-
less the process drawing mode is set.

Process drawing is valid up to the 45th process from the first process in a program,

3. If the same tool number is specified two times, it is assumed to be the same pro-
cess.

4. If M06 is specified without a T command at the beginning of a program, the tool

number of the first process is TOOOO,In this case, this process is always drawn.

4-56
 4.4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWING JOB

4.4.3 Basic Program Path Drawing Operation

The program path drawing operation allows the paths to be drawn in enlarged mode or only
for the specified processes in addition to the basic drawing operation.

(1) Basic Operation for the Program Path Drawing Function

Follow the procedure indicated below to draw the program paths,

Enter the edit process by pressing the [PROG] process key.

Press the [PROG DRAW] job soft-key to select the program path draw job.

On the program path drawing screen, key in “O” and “prclgram-number”, and
press the [WR] key to specify the program for which the tool paths should be
drawn.D

If no program number is entered, the program selected fclr previous tool path
drawing operations is selected.

Press the [PRM] (fl ) soft-key on the program path drawing screen, and the
screen changes to the drawing parameter setting screen where the drawing
plane, view angle and other items (block, skip, offset drawing mode, drawing
scale, etc.) should beset. Drawing process selection is invalid at this step (be-
fore automatic scaling).

Press the [AUTO] (f3) soft-key on the program path drawing screen, and the
scaling value is automatically calculated and the message “AUTO SCAL-
ING” is displayed. Sealing can be manually set without using the automatic
scaling function. Enter values for GRAPH RANGE to determine the drawing
range. Note that the values should be those on a workpiece coordinates ystem.

Press the [START] (f3) soft-key, and tool path drawing starts.

To stop drawing, press the [START] (f3) soft-key once again.

To clear the drawn paths, press the [CLEAR] (f2) soft-key.

4-87

—..——.——-
(2) Enlarged Path Drawing

To draw the enlarged program paths, follow the procedure indicated below.

@ Press the [SCALE] (f2) soft-key on the program path drawing screen to dis-
play the drawing scale change screen.

@ Change the position and size of the frame for drawing using the cursor keys
and soft-keys to set the program path drawing range.

@ Return the screen to the program path drawing screen by pressing the
[SCALE] (f2) soft-key and press the [START] (f3) soft-key.

(3) Drawing the Paths for the Specified Process

To draw the program path of the required process, follow the procedure indicated below.

@ To draw the program paths of the required processes, first change the screen
to the drawing parameter setting screen by pressing the [PRM] (fl ) soft-key.

@ Move the cursor to “IPROCESS” and select the tool numbers of the tools used
in the processes to be drawn by using the soft-keys.

@ Return to the drawing screen and press the [DSP.SL] (fl) and [START] (f3)
soft-keys.

4- [38
 4.4 PROGRAM PATH DRAWING JOB

4.4.4 Switching the Program Path Drawing Screen

The program path drawing screen, drawing parameter setting screen, and drawing scale
change screen have the following features. After switch ing the screen tc)the one in another
process or job, the same screen is recovered when the selection of the display screen is re-
turned. The display status is also recovered.

(1) Switching to Other Processes

(a) Program path drawing screen

Switching to another process is permitted during automatic scaling or program path

drawing. While the screen of another process is displayed during automatic scaling
or program path drawing, execution of automatic scaling or prclgram path drawing
A
is suspended.
u
(b) Drawing parameter setting screen and drawing scale change screen

Switching the screen from both of the screens to another process screen is permitted
and the display screen status is retained even when the screen is switched.

(2) Switching in the same job

(a) Switching from the program path drawing screen to the drawing parameter
setting screen or drawing scale change screen

Switching is permitted during program path drawing and autclmatic scaling.

(b) Switching between the drawing parameter setting screen and the program
path drawing screen

The previous status is recovered including the cursor position.

(c) Switching between the drawing scale change screen and the program path
drawing screen

The previous status is recovered including the frame.

4-89
 (3) Switching between the Program Path Drawing Screen and NC Path Drawing
Screen

(a) Program path drawing screen

If the path drawing mode is switched between the program path and NC path on
the drawing screen, the ]?reviously drawn path is recovered. If the path drawing
mode is switched while paths are being drawn, the paths are drawn in the selected
mode.

(b) Drawing parameter setting screen

The setting on the drawing parameter setting screen does not influence the other
path display mode.

(c) Drawing scale change screen

While paths are being drawn in one drawing mode, if the drawing scale change
screen of the other mode is displayed, the paths drawn in the previous mode are
displayed as with the path drawing screen.

4.4.5 Differences between the Program Path Drawing Job and the NC Path Draw-
ing Job

The program path drawing job and the NC path drawing job differ in the following points
from each other.

(1) Program Path Drawing Job

The tool paths are drawn independent of the NC mode or program execution status.

By using this job, the tool paths are drawn in the background mode during automatic
operation.

(2) NC Path Drawing Job

The job monitors the NC tool paths and draws them on the screen.

For the NC path drawing job, refer to 6.5.1, “NC Path Drawing Job”.

4. $)o
 5
SETUP PROCESS OPERATION

Chapter 5 describes the operation carried out by using the set

process key. In the set process, setting up before starting ma-
chining is carried out by using the workpiece coordinate sys-
tem job, tool data job, and tool life control job.

Job selection is possible by using either the job soft-keys or

the [SETl process selection key.

The operation indicated above can be executed any time in-

dependent of the NC operation mode even while automatic
operation is being executed.

5.1 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM

JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-3
5.1.1 Writing the Workpiece Shift Amount . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.1.2 Writing the Workpiece Coordinate System
Shift Correction Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.1.3 Writing the Workpiece Shift POS Value . . . . . 5-6
5.1.4 Selecting the Absolute/Incremental Mcde . . . 5-8

5.2 TOOL DATA CONTROL JOB . . . u. . . . . 5-9

5.2.1 Writing the Offset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-9
5.2.2 Displaying and Writing the Tool Pot
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-15
5.2.3 Displaying the ATC Tool Status . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.2.4 Writing the Measured Tool Length Offset
Amount. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-18

5-1

—.— ..——.—— .—. - .,.-,,.— .—. ---.— .—-.

5.3 TOOL LIIFE CONTROL JOB . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.3.1 Writing the Tool Life Control Data . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.3.2 Displaying the Tool Life Control Data . . . . . . 5-23
5.3.3 Setting the Tool Life Control Data . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.3.4 Erasing the Tool Life Control Data . . . . . . . . . 5-27

5-2
 5.1 VVORKPIECECOORDINATE SYSTEM JOB

5.1 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM JOB

When the [WORK] (f 1) job soft-key is pressed, the following function menu is displayed:
[WORKI (fI), [UPD] (D), [POS.WRI (f4), and [ABS/lNl (fS).

\\ I/,
1. The job to be selected when the power is turned ON can be selected by the setting
POINT for the parameter.

Q pm3003 D2 = O Workpkce coordinatesystem job is selected. 1

pm3003 D2 = 1 Tool job is selected.

–J

2. Position data can be displayed in the machine coordinate system or the workpiece
coordinate system according to the setting for the parameter.

pm3000 D3 = O Machine coordinate system ‘1

I
pm3000 D3 = 1 I Workpiece coordinate system I

5-3
5.1.1 Writing the Workpiece Shift Amount

It is possible to display and set the work shift amount.

Press the [WORK] (f 1) function soft-key.

Press either the page keys or enter a P number. After entering a numerical val-
ue, press the cursor up/down keys to display the workpiece coordinate system
shift data.

In the standard specification, 6 sets of workpiece coordinate systems are pro-

vided. Optionally, the number of workpiece coordinate system sets can be ex-
panded to 54 or 162. The P number and the number of sets have the relation-
ship as P1 = 6 sets, P2 = 12 sets, .... up to P27 = 162 sets.
/ \
WORK SHIFT SET O***** NOOOWI

mm
POS. (M/\CHINE) .=ABSCb
x 0.000
Y 0.000
z 0.000

MEM STP LSK

- m -rooL ❑
- m UPD POS.WR ABS/lN I

Iammmmlmlmi

Fig. 5.1 P Number Entry Screen

Move the cursor to the axis and the workpiece coordinate system for which
the offset amount should be written. For the axis selection, use the cursor up/
down keys and for the selection of G codes, use the cursor right/left keys.

G codes are classified into the two groups: G54 to G56 and G57 to G59.

Enter a numerical value (for example, “-1 .234”) and press the [WR] key. The
screen as shown in Fig. 5.1 is displayed.

5-4
 5.1 WORKPIECECOORDINATESYSTEM JOB

5.1.2 Writing the Workpiece Coordinate System Shift Correction Amount

It is possible to shift all workpiece coordinate systems by setting the shift correction amount.
Follow the procedure indicated below.

Press the [UPD] (f2) function soft-key.

Move the cursor to the UPD (correction amount) column of the axis for which
the workpiece coordinate system shift data should be changed.

Enter a numerical value (for example,”- 1.234”) and press the [WR] key. The
screen as shown in Fig. 5.2 is displayed.

W SHIFT (UPD) SET O***** NOOOOO

m3t
POS. (MACHINE)
x
Y
0.000
0.000
.+BSO=.
— offset changed

z 0.000

MEM STP LSK

- mm G1

--l~lr—lr==qmi ~

rimimiiiimlmlmlml
I I

Fig. 5.2 Correction Data Entry Screen

● It is possible to select whether the workpiece shift correction amount should

be added or not by the setting for the parameter.

pmOO07D3 = O Correctionamountis added. 1

\ pmOO07 D3 = 1 I Correction amount is not added. I
● If workpiece shift correction amount is written with the setting of “pmOO07
D3 = O“, the warning message “CAN’T WRITE !“ is displayed.

5-5

——..— —. —-— ... ..- ...-.!.— .. —.-. !— .—.—

5.1.3 Writing the Workpiece Shift PO!3 Value

By using the workpiece shift write function, it is possible to write the position data displayed
on the workpiece shift screen as the workpiece shift amount.

When the [POS.WR] (f4) function soft-key is pressed, the soft-key is high-
lighted and the message “ALL SET? (Y/N)” is displayed in highlighted char-
acters.

Press “Y” to set the position data for the workpiece shift amount.

If “N” is pressed, the “INPUT AXIS NAME’ message is displayed.

Key in the axis name for which the position data should be set for the work-
piece shift amount and press the [WR] key. The workpiece shift amount is set
for the specified axis.

The position data input mode is canceled by pressing the [CAN] key, [RESET]
key, or [POS. WR] (f4) function soft-key, or by changing the screen from the
workpiece shift screen to another screen.

(1) Writing the POS Data Collectively

If POS. (MACHINE) is “X: 123.456 Y 654.321 Z: -1.234”:

@ The “ALL SET? (Y/N)” message is displayed.

R I O.000 I

@ The POS data is written when “Y” is pressed.

I Pol I G54 I

: t---%=----i
z
I
-1.234
R 0.000 I

5-6
 5.1 WORKPIECECOORDINATE SYSTEM JOB

(2) Writing the POS Data for the Specified Axes (Y- and Z-axis)

If POS. (MACHINE) is “X: 123.456 Y 654.321 Z: -1.234”:

@ The “ALL SET? (Y/N)” message is displayed.

@ Press “N”.

@ Enter the name of axis for which the position data should be set.

@
E3
After pressing “Y”, press the [SHIFT] key. Then press “N” and “Z”, and press
the [WR] key. The POS data are written.

-9

(2)
:UWiPLE- 1.

2.
The position data are written to the workpiece coordinate system indicated by the
cursor.

The position data displayed on the screen is written.

3. When writing the position data by specifying an axis name, if an invalid axis
name is specified, the warning message “INPUT ERROR !” is displayed.

4. When writing the position data by specifying multiple axis names, if any one of
the specified axis names is incorrect, position data are not written to any of the
specified axes.

5. The position data are always written in absolute values independent of the se-
lected dimensioning mode.

5-7
5.1.4 Selecting the Absolute/Incremental Mode

It is possible to select the input mode between the incremental mode and the absolute mode.

(1) Selection by [ABS/lNC] Sc~ft-key

● When the [ABS/IN] (f5) function soft-key is pressed while in the incremental
input mode, the mode is changed to the absolute input mode.

“ When the [ABS/IN] (f5) function soft-key is pressed while in the absolute in-
put mode, the mode is changed to the incremental input mode.

(2) Selection by Parameter Setting

The dimensioning mode to be set when the power is turned ON can be selected by the
setting for the parameter.
r
1 pm3003 D3 = O Sets the absoluteinput mode.
I pm3003 D3 = I I Sets the incremental mode. I

5-8
 5.2 TOOL.DATA CONTROL JOB

5.2 TOOL DATA CONTROL JOB

When the [TOOL] (f 1) job soft-key is pressed, the following function menus are displayed:
[OFFSET] (fl), [POT] (f2), [ATC] (f3), and [TLM] (fl).

\\ I/,

Q
1. The [ABS/IN] function soft-key is a toggle key and the selection is changed alter-
POINT nately each time it is pressed. When the incremental input mode is selected,
“<INC&” is displayed at the upper right corner in the screen. In the absolute
input mode, “cABSO>” is displayed

2. The dimensioning mode to be set when the power is turned ON can be selected
by the setting for the parameter.

I prn3003 D3 = O I Sets the absolute input mode. I

pm3003 D3 = 1 Sets the incremental input mode.

3. Position data can be displayed in the machine coordinate system or the workpiece
coordinate system according tcl the setting for the parameter.
I
—
I pm3000 D4 = O Machine coordinate system 1
I pm3000 D4 = 1 I Workpiece coordinate system I
———— .—
I

5.2.1 Writing the Offset Data E

A

For the offset data, either of the following types is selected according to the setting for the
parameter.
I I
H and D common use type I The offset numbers are used in common for the tool length offset number I
and the tool radius offset number.
I -~
H and D individual use type I The offset numbers are used for the tool length offset numbers and the tool I
radius offset numbers independently.
–~

5-9
(1) H and D Common Use Type

@ Select the input mode (absolute or incremental) by pressing the [ABS/IN] (f5)
function soft-key.

OFFSET SET O***** NOOCOO

-=ABSCb
H (D) 000
H (D) 001 0.000 POS.(UNIVERSAL)
H (D) 002 0.000 x 0.000
H (D) 003 0.000 Y 0.000
H (D) 004 0.000 z 0.000
H (D) 005 0.000
H (D) 006 0.000
H (D) 007 0.000
H (D) 008 0.000
H (D) 009 0.000

STP LSK

T-LIFE t

-EiEElmilcmnnm

Fig. 5.3 Offset Screen (H and D Common Type)

5--1o
 5.2 TOOL DATA CONTROL JOB

Move the cursor to the offset number for which the offset data should be
changed, key in the required offset data (for example, “54.321 “), and press the
[WR] key. The offset data are updated.

To clear the offset data to “O” in the incremental input mode, move the cursor
tothe value which shoulcl be cleared to “O” by using the cursor up/down keys
and press the [ATC] (f3) function soft-key.
\
OFFSET SET O***** NOOOOO
<ABSO>

H (D) OC4
H (D) 001 0.000 POS. (UNIVERSAL)
H (D) 002 0.000 x 0.000
H (D) 003 0.003 Y 0.000
H (D) 00454.321 Z 0.000
H (D) 005 O.ow
H (D) 006 0.004
H (D) 007 0.000
H (D) 008 0.000
H (D) 009 0.004

MEtd STP LSK

—
WORK ~ T-LIFE

“mm[mnc+l

Fig. 5.4 Screen after Changing the Offset Data

5-11
(2) H and D Individual Use Type

@ Select the input mode (absolute or incremental) by pressing the [ABS/IN] (f5)
function soft-key.

OFFSET SET O****= NOOOOO

-+BSO>

❑ Y
z
m
POS. (UNIVERSAL)
x 0.000
0.000
0.000

MEM STP LSK

WORK ~~ T-LIFE

- rq 1~=1 m r---l r-- ;I

1 ,

Fig. 5.5 Offset Screen (H and D Individual Use Type)

@ Move the cursor to the column of the offset data which should be written by
using the cursor keys, key in the offset data, and press the [WR] key.

@ The offset data are changed and the screen as shown in Fig. 5.6 is displayed.

OFFSET SET O****= NOOOOO

II cABSO>

Changed

0.000 0.000
L!!L-1 PCIS.(UNIVERSAL)
II x’ 0.000
Y 0.000
z 0.000

MEM STP LSK

Immlmmmlmm
Fig. 5.6 Offset Data Change Screen

5-12
 5.2 TOOL DATA CONTROL JOB

(3) H and D Common Use Type with Tool Wear Offset (Tool Wear Offset Option
Selected)

The data can be set manually by clisplaying the offset screen.

Move the cursor to the offset memory data to be changed by using the cursor
keys, key in the offset data and press the [WR] key.

To clear all offset data, press the [ALLCLR] function soft-key. In this case,
if the setting for the parameter is “pm3000 D6 = 1”, only the wear offset data
are cleared.

To clear the cursor located data, press the [0 CLR] (f3) function soft-key.

(3
SJJF#LE- 1. Geometry offset data can be changed only when the parameter setting is “pm3000
D6 = O“. If the geometry offset data are changed with the parameter setting of
“pm3000 D2 = O“, the corresponding wear offset data are cleared to “O”. The
wear offset data can be changed independent of the setting for the parameter
pm3000 D6.

2. For the input value of the wear offset data, the input value is checked against the
preset maximum value. If the input value of the wear offset data exceeds the val-
ue 999.999 set for the parameter pm3800, the “lNPUT ERROR !” warning mes-
sage is displayed. The check against the value set for the parameter pm3800 is
made in the absolute value.

OFFSET SET O***=* NoOOOO

cAB SO>

HDNO GEOMETRY WEAR

ml
)
H (D) 001 -23.456 123.456 Pos. (UNIVERSAL)
H (D) 002 0.000 0000 x 0.000
H (D) 003 0.000 0.000 ‘i 0.000
H (D) 004 0.000 0.000 z 0.000
H (D) 005 0.000 0.000
H (D) 006 0.000 0000
H (D) 007 0.000 0.000
H (D) 008 0.000 0.000
HD 0.00 0. 0

MEM STP LSK

—
WORK ~1 T-LIFE t

.~~mlmlrl r-----l~]

lIwm_m-m!!J
Fig. 5.7 Offset Data Screen (H and D Individual Use Tyi>e)

5-13
(4) H and D Individual Use Type with Tool Wear Offset (Tool Wear Offset Option
Selected)

The offset data can be written in the same manner as writing the offset data for the H
and D common use type.

NOOOOQ

mm
OFFSET SET O*.***
cABSO>

POS. (UNIVERSAL)
x 0.000
Y CLOOO
z 0.000

MEM STP LSK

Immmmmlmiml
Fig. 5.8 Offset Screen (H and D Individual Use Type)

5-”14
 5.2 TOOL DATA CONTROL JOB

5.2.2 Displaying and Writing the Tool Pol Number

When the [POT] (f2) function soft-key is pressed, the TOOL POT screen is displayed.

Either of the following types is selected according to the setting for the parameter.

pm3001 D6 = O Byte display ty~

pm3001 D6 = O Word display type i

(1) Byte Display Type

Select the tool pot number for which the corresponding tool number should
be changed. The tool pot number can be specified by moving the cursor with
the cursor up/down keys or by pressing the cursor up/down key after keying
in the tool pot number.

Key in the tool number (for example, ” 12“) and press the [WR] key.

TOOL POT SET O-+*+* NOOOOO

POT NO. TOOL NO.
tp 0001 1
tp 0002 2
tp 0003 39
tp 0004 0
tp 0005 35
tp 0006 12
tp 0007 30
w 0008 1
tp 0009 2
tp 0010 0

Fig. 5.9 Byte Display Screen

5-15
(2) Word Display Type

Select the tool pot number for which the corresponding tool number should
be changed. The tool pot number can be specified by moving the cursor with
the cursor up/down keys or by pressing the cursor up/down keys after keying
in the tool pot number.

Key in the tool number (for example, “1234”) and press the [WR] key.

TOOLPOT SET o***** NOOOOO

POT NO, TOOL NO.

tp 0001 0000
tp 0002 0039
tp 0003 0030
tp 0004 0002
tp 0005 1234 — — Differs from the byte
tp 0006 oc03
tp 0007 0005
display screen
tp 0008 0007
tp 0009 0008
tp 0010 0

MEM STP LSK

—
WORK ~~ T-LIFE

mmwlnnh

Fig. 5.10 Word Display Screen

5-16
 5,2 TOOL DATA C~NTR~L JOB

5.2.3 Displaying the ATC Tool Status

When the [ATC] (f3) function soft-key is pressed, the ,4TC tool status N displayed.

—
—
ATC SET O**=** NOOOOO

SP TL 0031
MG TL 0(115
WT TL 0(116

MEM STP LSK

—
wORK ~]

-mmm[=m :
—
—

Fig. 5.11 ATC Tool Status EJisplay Screen

Tool number of the tool mounted in the spindle

Tool number of the tool at the tool change position in the tool magazme
E-:3
WT Tool number of the tool in the waiting pot

● Whether or not the waiting pot number is displayed depends on the machine
specifications.

5-17
5.2.4 Writing the Measured Tool Length Offset Amount

The tool length offset amount to be used for the tool length offset function (G43, G44, G49)
is measured by using the tool length measurement function. Either of the following types
is selected according to the setting for the parameter.

I w6008 DO.O 1
Measurement of travel distance I
I pm6008 DO= 1 I Measurement of remaining distance I

(1) Measuring the Travel Distance

When the [TLM] (fl ) function soft-key is pressed, the following soft-keys are dis-
played: [BIAS] (f 1), [WRITE] (f4), and [RETURN] (f5).

(a) Bias function

The bias function sets the bias amount for measuring the tool length.

@ Press the [BIAS] (f 1) function soft-key. The “BIAS(B)” is highlighted.

@ After keying in a numerical value (for example, “10.000”), press the [WR]
key. Bias amount is written and the “BIAS(B)” returns to the normal display.

TOOL POT SET O*-*** NOOOOO

+Z -=ABSO>
POS. (UNIVERSAL)
x 0.000
+ Y 0.000
HOOI z 0.000

B
bE
HOOO
HOO1 0.000 MOVE 0.000
HOO2 0.000
HO03 0.000 BIAS(B) 10.000
HO04 0.000

MOI STP LSK

—
wORK ~~

-m E3u mm&

Fig. 5.12 Bias Amount Setting Screen (Travel Distance Measurement)

5-18
 5.2 TOOL DATA CONTROL JOB

D
slag%’ Bring the tool nose into contact with the contact level face by manually moving the
Z-axis. The contact level is set arbitrarily in reference to the reference level (top face
of the workpiece), and the difference between the contact level and the reference level
should beset for parameter pm0806 (“ 1” = input unit) as the “tool length measurement
bias amount” beforehand. This can be considered as the thickness of the block gage
and should be set in a positive value.

(b) ~RITE] function soft-key

The distance from the home position to the reference level is stored as the contents
for the specified offset number.

@ Display the page in which the required tool offset number is included by press-
ing the page keys and specify the tool offset number by moving the cursor to
it. It is also possible to specify the tool offset number by pressing the cursor
up/down keys after keying in the tool offset number (for example, ” 12“).

The display page that includes the entered offset number k displayed and the
cursor is positioned on the entered offset number.
@ Press the [WRITE] (f4) function soft-key. 1

TLM (BIAS) SET O***** NOOOOO

POS. (UNIVERSAL)
0.941
+ ‘f+T : “’s”
0.000
11.150

&d__
HOOO
HOO1 0.000 MOVE 11.15[)
HO02 1.150
HO03 0.000 BIAS(B) 10.000
HO04 0.000

RAPID STP LSK

Fig. 5.13 Tool Offset Number Contents (Travel Distance Measurement)

Screen

5-19

—— .——-..—-—.
—-— .— .. . ..
(3)
SUPPi.E-
MENT
After the completion of the operation indicated above, an offset number one greater
than the presently specified number is newly specified for the next tool offset data
writing operation. (Upon completion of the data setting for H99, H number is returned
to HOI.)

(c) [RETURN] function so&key

Press the [RETURN] (f5) function soft-key. The screen changes to the offset
screen.

(2) Measuring the Remaining Distance

When the [TLM] (fl ) function soft-key is pressed, the following soft-keys are dis-
played: [BIAS] (fl), [BTLEVL] (f2), [WRITE] (f4), and [RETURN] (f5).

(a) Bias function

The bias function sets the bias amount for measuring the tool length.

@ Press the [BIAS] (fl) function soft-key. The “BIAS(B)” is highlighted.

@ After keying in a numerical value (for example, “10.000”), press the [WR]
key.

Bias amount is written and the “BIAS(B)” returns to the normal display.

TLM (BOTM) SET O***** NOOOOO

+ y=DF ~(gRsap”

HOOO
HOO1 0.000 MOVE 11.150
HO02 0.000
HO03 0.000 BIAS(B) 10.000
HO04 0.000 BTMLVL(A) 0.000

RAPID STP LSK

—
wORK fi~

“mm~nm-h

Immmmmmmll
Fig. 5.14 Bias Setting Screen (Remaining Distance)

5-20
 5.2 TOOL DATA CONTROL JOB

-— .———— —

(3
SUPPLS-
MEt4T
Bring the tool nose into contact with the contact level face by manually moving the
Z-axis. The contact level is set arbitrarily in reference tothe reference level (top face
of the workpiece), and the difference between the contact level and thereference level
should beset for parameter pm0806 (“ l” = input unit) as the “tool len,gth measurement
bias amount” beforehand. This can be considered as the thickness of the block gage
and should be set in a positive value.

(b) [BTLEVL] function soft-key

Press the [BTLEVL] (fZ) function soft-key. The “BTMLVL (A)” is high-
lighted.

Key in the required bottom level value (for example, “30.000”) and press the
[WR] key. The data are written for the bottom level and the “BTMLVL (A)”
returns to normal display.

Use steps (b) and (c) explained in item(1) above.

TLM (BOTM) SET O***** NOOOOO

+Z cABSO>
POS.(UNIVEI?SAL)
x 0.000
Y 0.000
+yLH.) ~,
z 6.220

&L-.-.L_
HOOO
HoO1 0.000 MOVE 11.150
HO02 0.000
HO03 0.000 BIAS(B) 10.000
HO04 0.000 BTMLVL(A) 30.000

RAPID STP LSK

—
WORK ~

“ m =1 [1 ml F’==4 A

Fig. 5.15 Bottom Level Setting Screen

The bottom level, which is used as the reference for measuring the remaining distance,
can beset for the parameter pm0807 (“1”= input unit) as the signed distance from the
home position.
—

5-21
 (c) Memory clear

Press the [0 CLR] (f 1) function soft-key. The offset memory which is indicated
by the highlighted cursor is cleared to “O”.

(d) Memory all clear

Press the [ALLCLR] (f2) function soft-key. “CLEAR ALL OFFSET? (Y/N)” is
displayed.

● Press “Y” and all offset memory is cleared,

* Press “N’ and the memory all clear function is cancelled.

(e) Selecting the input mode (absolute, incremental)

Press the [ABS/IN] (f5) function soft-key. The input mode is changed between ab-
solute and incremental each time it is pressed.

~@D The offset data on which the cursor is positioned can be changed by pressing the [WR]
key after keying in a numerical value on the tool length measurement screen.

5-22
 5.3 TOOL LIFE CONTROL JOB

5.3 TOOL LIFE CONTROL JOB

When the tool life control function is useal, tools are ccmtrolled in the f ollowing manner.

In a program, the tools are specified by the tool group; when tool life has expired, the next
tool in the same group is selected.

5.3.1 Writing the Tool Life Control Data

Classify tools into groups according to the type of tools and set the tool life for the individual
groups.

5.3.2 Displaying the Tool Life Control Data

When the [T-LIFE] soft-key is pressed in the [SET] process, the screen as shown in Fig. 5.16
is displayed.
Tool life type

%::=,~’”’
T-NO,
ToOO1
H-NO.
001
O-NO.
010
LIFE
300
USEO
301
‘123”
STS
OVER
TOO02 002 011 400 401 OVER
Display for life TOO03 003 012 560 200 SKIP
control is being— + TOO04 004 013 999 444
executed , .

.
Not registered – —.

symbol

MEM STP LSK

Fig. 5.16 Tool Life Control Data Display Screen

5-23
 (1) Display

On one page of the display screen, tool data of up to ten tools (per group) are displayed.
The tool life control data display screen is provided for the individual tool groups and
the selection of the display screen is possible by using the page keys. It is also possible
to select the display screen by pressing the cursor up/down keys after keying in the
group number.

● When 16 tools are set for a single group, two display pages are provided for
the tool group. In this case, the page keys can be used to change the display
screen in units of tool groups. To display the second page in the same tool
group, it is necessary to press the cursor key.

(2) Searching a Tool Number

@ Display the TOOL LIFE screen.

@ Press the cursor up/down keys after keying in a tool number following address
T, and the specified tool is searched and the tool group of that tool is displayed.

5.3.3 Setting the Tool Life Control Data

The tool life control data can be set in the following two methods: to set the data by directly
keying them in using the NC operation panel keys and to set them by inputting them from
tape. Setting of the tool life control data using tape is possible at the input screen of the IN/
OUT job in the [MAINT] process.

This sub section describes the procedure used for writing and correcting the tool life control
data by using the keys on the NC operation panel.

(1) Writing a Tool Number

Set the tool number for which the tool life control is executed.

Move the cursor to the T-NO. column and press the [WR] key after keying in a tool num-
ber (1 to 9998).

When a tool number is written to T-NO., the corresponding data are initialized: 9999
for LIFE, O for H-NO., D-NC)., and USE, and blank for STS.

5-24
 5.3 TOC)LLIFE CONTROL JOB

a)
SIJPPLE-
MEtUT
While the tool life control is executed, the tools are used in the order from the top.
If an attempt is made to enter the tc}olnumber which is already entered, the warning
message “REPETITION ERROR!” is displayed.

(2) Writing the Data for H-NO. and D-NO.

Set the tool length offset number or tool radius offset number corresponding to the set
tool number. The offset number written here is used when H99$I or D999 command
specified in a part program is executed.

Move the cursor to H-NO, or D-NO., key in an offset number, and press the [WR] key.

Setting range varies according to the selected options. The initial data for H-NO. and
D-NO. is “O” (offset cancel).

(3) Writing the Tool Life

Set the tool life.

Move the cursor to the LIFE column, key in the tool life ( 1 to 9999), and press the [WR]
key.

(4) Writing the Tool-use Data

Set the tool-use count data.

Move the cursor to the USED column, key in the use-count data (O to 9999), and press
the [WR] key.
● Enter “()” when a new tool is used. If the value in the USED column is greater
than the LIFE value, the STS automatically changes to “’OVER”.

5-25

.- —- —.. —.—. -— —..

(5) Writing the Tool Life Contrcll Type

When the [KIND] (f 1) function soft-key is pressed, the pop-up menu as indi-
cated below is displayed and, at the same time, the message “SELECT BY
CURSOR & WR” is displayed.

To change the life control type, move the cursor to the required life control
type by using the cursor up/down keys and press the [WR] key. When it is not
necessary to change the presently selected life control type, press the [KIND]
(f 1) function soft-ke:y again and the pop-up menu is cleared,

Table 5.1 Tool Life Control Type Menu

Menu Contents

H TIME

COUNT
“rool life is controlled by the length of time the tool has been used.

“t’oollife is controlled by the number of times the tool has been

used.

Tool life is controlled by the distance in which the tool has been

w’ Tool life is controlled by the number of holes machined by the tool.

“ The selected tool life control type is valid only for the tool group for which
it is written.

5-26
 5.3TOOL LIFE CONTROL JOB

5.3.4 Erasing the Tool Life Control Data

(1) Erasing the Tool Number

When the [T-ERS] (f2) function soft-key is pressed, the pop-up menu is dis-
played and, at the same time, the message “SELECT BY CURSOR & WR’
is displayed.

Select the required erase mode by moving the cursor to the required erase
mode with the cursor upjdown keys and press the [WR] key. When it is not
necessary to change the presently selected erase mode, press the [T-ERS] (f2)
function soft-key again and the pop-up menu is cleared.

Table 5.2 Tool Life Control Data Erase Menu

Menu Contents

EACH The data of the tool number indicated by the cursor are erased.

GROUP The data of the tools in the displayed group iut erased.
L Y
I
ALL The data of all groups am erased.
-~

● When tool data are erased for all groups or the selected gro up, the tool life con-
trol type of such groups k automatically set at “TIME’.

(2) Erasing the Tool Use Count Data

@ When the [U-ERS] (f3) function soft-key is pressed, the pop-up menu as indi-
cated below is displayed and, at the same time, the message “SELECT BY
CURSOR & WR” is displayed.

@ Select the required erase mode by moving the cursor tc the required erase
mode with the cursor up’down keys and press the [WR] key. When it is not
necessary to change the presently selected erase mode, press the [U-ERS] (f3)
function soft-key again and the pop-up menu is cleared.

Table 5.3 Tool Use Count Data Erase Menu

The ciata of the tools in the displayed group are erased.

B- The ciata of all groups are‘contents:-

erased.

5-27
 (3) Erasing the Status Data

@ When the [S-ERS] (f4) function soft-key is pressed, the pop-up menu as indi-
cated below is displayed and, at the same time, the message “SELECT BY
CURSOR & WR” is displayed.

@ Select the required erase mode by moving the cursor to the required erase
mode with the cursor up/down keys and press the [WR] key. When it is not
necessary to change the presently selected erase mode, press the [R-ERS] (f4)
function soft-key again and the pop-up menu is cleared.

Table 5.4 Status Data Erase Menu

Menu Contents

EACH The data of the tool number indicated by the cursor are erased.

I GROUP I Thedataof the tools in thedisplayedgroup areerasect. I

I ALL I The data of all groups are erased (blank). I

(3
SUPPLE-
MENT
1.

2.
The LIFE, USE, and STS are closely related to each other.

Generally, “OVER” is disl?layed if “LIFE c USE”.

● The data can be corrected when the edit lock is OFF and the NC is in the auto-
matic operation suspended state (reset state). This also applies to the erase op-
eration.

● For the change and erase of the LIFE, USE, and STS data, data change and erase
operation are possible in the single-block stop state, with an exception of the
tool data of the tool in the tool life control mode.

● When the setting of the number of groups and the number of tools (set for pa-
rameters pmOO09 D6, D7) is changed, the display changes at the time the pa-
rameter is set valid (at the time the reset key is pressed.).

5-28
 6
RUNI PROCESS

Chapter 6 describes the operation carried out by using the run

process key.

In the run process, the part program is actual executed by the

program job (program run, MDI run), command value display
job, setting job, and NC path drawing job.

During the execution of the part program it is possible to dis-

play the list of the program, command values of the program
presently executed, and the necessary settings having been
made to execute the program.

Job selection is possible by using either the job soft-keys or the

[RUN] process selection key.

6.1 PROGRAM JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6.1.1 Program Information Displayed on Screen . . 6-3
6.1.2 Program Number Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.1.3 Address Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-7
6.1.4 Editing the Part Program Stored
in Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-8
6.1.5 Execution of a Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.1.6 Display of Subprogram Nesting
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6=-11

6-1
6.2 MDIOPIERATION JOB . . . . . . . . . . . ...6- 12
6.2.1 Entry ofan MDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-12
6.2.2 Editing an MDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-12
6.2.3 Execution ofan MDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.2.4 Deleting an MDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-14
6.2.5 Storing an MDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-14

6.3 COMMAND VALUE DISPLAY JOB . . . 6-15

6.3.1 Collective Display of Command Values . . . . 6-15

6.4 SETTING JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

6.4.1 Internal Switch Function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.4.2 Software Switch Function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.4.3 Macro Variable Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-17
6.4.4 F1-digit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-19
6.4.5 Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-20
6.4.6 Stored Stroke Limit Function* . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

6.5 OTHER JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-22

6.5.1 NC Path Drawing Job* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-22

6-2
 6.1 PROGRAMJOB

6.1 PROGRAM JOB

The program job means the job in which the operation is executed using I:hecreated part pro-
gram. This section describes how to execute the part program.

6.1.1 Program Information Displayed on Screen

To execute
thepart program, first call the RUNNING screen.

When the [PROG] (f 1) job soft-key is pressed, the list of the programs presently executed
and the execution information are displayed. The display screen is generally classified into
four display blocks.

(1) Displaying and Editing the Execution Program

For the display of the program to be executed, the contents of the di:splay differ depend-
ing on the selected automatic NC operation mode (memory, MDI, tape). In the manual
mode, the contents of the searched part program are displayed.

In the memory mode, it is possible to edit the program displayed on the screen by press-
ing the [EDIT] (f5) function soft-key. When the NC is in the edit enabled state, the list
of programs is displayed with a frame.
—
RUNNING RUN o***** NOOOOO

0123
G91 G30Z0 M91 ;
G30X0 YO;
TO1 MO&

UNIVERSAL INCREMENT G/M CODE

x 0.000 x 0.000 GOO GSO
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 G17 G98
z 0.000 z 0.000 G90 G52
G23 G67
G94
T.NO : TOOO ACT so G21
FEED : FO ORDER ; S O G40
G49
MEM STP LSK

– mmm Da
- LISP.SL OPEN EDIT J
J

❑mmmmmmJ
Fig. 6.1 Program Execution Display Screen

6-3

-—...—.— . . . ———
—— .-
(3)
supple-
ment
1. The position data display cm the workpiece coordinate system can be changed to
the display of the coordinate values in the machine coordinate system by the set-
ting for the parameter.

pm3000 D5 = O Workpiece coordinate system

pm3000 D5 = 1 Machine coordinate system

2. If “pm3005 D5 = O“:
It is possible to display the Z-axis position data without including the offset data
(G43 H**).

———
w? Z-axis offset data are not included.

(2) Display of G Codes and M Codes

Modal G codes, non-modal G codes, and M codes that are being executed or those im-
mediately before the executicm in automatic mode operation (TAPE, MEM, or MDI)
are displayed. Concerning the modal G codes, those in the most important 14 groups
of 23 G code groups supported by the NC are displayed. With the non-modal G codes,
if no non-modal G codes are specified, only character G is displayed. Concerning the
M codes, the specified M codle numbers are displayed as a 3-digit number.

(3) Display of Workpiece Coordinate System and Remaining Distance

The values displayed in the U NIVERSAL (workpiece coordinate system) and INCRE-
MENT (remaining distance) (columns are conveniently used for checking a program.

6-4
 6.1 PROGRAMJOB

(4) Display of Tool Number, Feedrate, Actual Spindle Speed, and Specified Spindle
Speed

For T-NO., FEED, ACT, and ORDER, the values immediately before the execution or
those being executed are displayed. The items to be displayed can be changed as indi-
cated below by changing the setting for the parameter.

R+----
Tool number, feedrate, actual speed, and specified speed
pm3003
Actual speed, feedrate, spindle tool, and next tool ‘– +

.2
ACT S = Specified spindle speed x override

ACT S = The spindle speed of feedback value

~ .–

——— —.—

CD
SUPPLE-
MENT
Note that the display of “ACT S“ is optional.
——

6.1.2 Program Number Search

It is possible to call the program by specifying its program number. The program can be
called by the following two methods.

(1) Using the [OPEN] (f4) Function Soft-key

Select the memory or tape mode with the MODE SELECT switch on the ma-
chine operation panel.

Press the [OPEN] (f4) function soft-key. The message “SPECIFY PRO-
GRAM NUMBER TO CALL” is displayed.

Key in the program number beginning with address “O”.

Press the [WR] key.

6-5
—.-,.-. —----.—.
—.— .. .. ---- ..—
 (2) Entering the Program Number

@ Select the memory cmtape mode with the MODE SELECT switch on the ma-
chine operation panel.

@ Key in the program number,

@ Press the cursor up or down key.

(a) In the memory mode

Program number search is executed for the stored programs and the specified pro-
gram is called. When the specified program is called, the execution program num-
ber displayed at the upper right area of the screen is changed to the called program
number. If the specified program is not found, the warning message “O NO. NOT
FOUND !” is displayed.

Whether the program previously called should be called or not when the power is
turned ON can be selected by the setting for the parameter.
/
pm3CQ5 D] = O Program number is cleared when the power is turned ON.

I pm3005 Dl = 1 Program number is not cleared when the power is turned ON.

(b) In the tape mode

Program number search is executed after reading the program data (tape) from the
selected RS-232C input port (No. 1 port, No. 2 port). During program search, the
.“SEARCHING” message is displayed on the screen, Tape reading stops after the
programs have been read, If the specified program number is not found in the pro-
gram data having been read, the warning message “O NO. NOT FOUND !” is dis-
played.

After the completion of program number search, press the CYCLE START switch
on the machine operation panel, and the reading of program data (tape) restarts and
the program is executed. The list of the programs being executed is displayed on
the screen.

(3
StJPPLE-
MENT
1.

2.
If an attempt is made to execute program number search in the manual mode, the
message “MODE IS UNSIJITABLE’ is displayed.

When entering a program number, leading zeros can be omitted.

6-6
 61 PROGRAM JOB

6.1.3 Address Search

The data (character-string) entered from the NC operation panel is compared to the data
(tape) input from the RS-232C port or the data (character-string) in the memory, and the dis-
play stops when the data match. The object of search is the data (tape) input from the
RS-232C port in the tape mode, part program in the memory mode, and the MD1 program
in the MDI mode.

(1) In the Memory Mode

Key in the word to be searched and press the cursor up or down k~y.

● When the cursor up key is pressed, search is executed from the present cursor
position to the beginning of the data.

c When the cursor down key is pressed, search is executed from the present cur-
sor position to the end of the data.

During address search, the “SEARCHING” message is displayed,

(2) In the Tape Mode

The program data (tape) is read from the RS-232C port and the :specified character-
string is searched for. During address search, the “SEARCHING” message is dis-
played, but data having been read are not displayed. Reading of I:he data stops when
the specified character-string is read.

If the specified character-string is not found in the read data (tape), the warning message
“NOT FOUND !“ is displayed.

After the completion of address search, press the CYCLE START switch on the opera-
tion panel, and the reading of program data (tape) restarts and the program is executed.
The list of the programs being executed is displayed on the screen.

(3) Status after the Completion of Search

Upon completion of the search, the message is cleared and the cursor is positioned on
the searched word. If the word to be searched is not found, the corresponding warning
message “NOT FOUND !” is displayed.

Using the cycle start operation afl:er the completion of address search, the program is
executed from the block where the cursor is positioned.

6-7
 -— ——c

(3
SUPPLE.
MENT
1. For the address search operation, leading zeros maybe omitted in the data to be
specified. Decimal point processing is also executed during search according to
the input unit (mm or inches). Therefore, it is possible to execute search for the
command having the same meaning (e.g. X1. = X1000). (Binary search function)

2, Address search is not possible in the alarm state.

3. The operation to search a sequence number which is specified by address N is

called sequence number search.

6.1.4 Editing the Part Program Stored in Memory

Follow the procedure indicated below to edit a part program.

Press the [EDIT] (f5) function soft-key while a part program is selected in the
memory mode. The part program presently selected can be edited. When the
edit function is called, a frame is displayed on the program display screen. In
the edit function called in this job, expanded edit function can be used the same
as with editing by the edit function called in the edit process. Four lines of a
part program are displayed.

If the [DSP.SL] (fl ) function soft-key is pressed in this state, 13 lines of a part
program are displayed.

After completing the editing, press the [EDIT] (f5) function soft-key once
again. The part prog,ram is stored and the edit mode ends. While the part pro-
gram is being stored., the message of “SAVING” is displayed.

6-8
 6.1 PROGRAM JOB

(3
SUPPLE-
MENT
1. If the [EDIT] (f5) function soft-key is pressed while a program is being executed,
it is not possible to edit the program. However, program editing is possible if the
NC is in the single-block stop state.

2. Cycle start is not possible while a program is being edited. To execute cycle start,
complete program editing frost. In this case, the program is restarted from the
block on which the cursor is positioned after the editing. Therefore, pay attention
to the cursor position when completing the editing.

3. The [EDIT] (f5) function soft-key is not displayed in the MDI and tape mode.

4. If the [RESET] key is pressed, the cursor moves to the beginning of the program
even during editing.

5. Even in the edit status, it is possible to call another program by following the op-
eration explained in 6.1.2, “Program Number Search”. However if the cursor up/
down key is pressed after inputting address “0”, character “C)” is searched in the
program being edited.
— —— —. ———.—

6-9
 6.1.5 Execution of a Part Program

Follow the procedure indicated below to execute a part program.

@ Select the memory mode by placing the MODE SELECT switch on the ma-
chine operation panel in the MEM position.

@ Enter the program number from the NC operation panel and execute program
search. The list of the part program is displayed on the screen and the cursor
is displayed in a highlighted block.

@ Press the CYCLE START switch on the machine operation panel. Execution
of the part program starts and the cursor is positioned at the beginning of the
block presently executed.
—.—

(3
SUPPLE.
MENT
If the CYCLE START switch is pressed while the cursor is positioned in the middle
of a block, how that block is executed is determined according to the setting for the
parameter.

pm4008 D3 = O The block is executed from the word on which the cursor is positioned.

pm4008 D3= 1 The block is executed from the beginning.

6-10
 6.1 PROGRAMJOB

6.1.6 Display of Subprogram Nesting Information

When the page key is pressed, the subprogram nesting information is displayed.

RUNNING RuN O***** NOOOOO

MAIN NEST PROG LCOP NEST PROG LOOP

PROG 1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8

T NO : TOOOO ACTS :S o
FEED : F O ORDER : S o

MEM STP LSK

– [-[ COMMNO SETING

“mnn[mmh

Immmmmlml El
Fig. 6.2 Nesting Information Display Screen

On the subprogram nesting information display screen, the main p rogram number and
the subprogram numbers are displayed. For the subprograms, the number of loops is
displayed for up to a nesting level c)feight. The program presently executed is indicated
by the symbol of “-+”. Subprogram call is executed by M98.

Microprogram call is also displayed on this screen. While a program is being executed
in the memory mode, the subprogram nesting information is not displayed even if a page
key is pressed. In this case, the display page of the program being edited is changed.

6-11

__.. ___. - . ... ———. ——. —.- —.- —-—..-—.

—
6.2 MDI OPERATION JOB

The job to execute an automatic operation by manually inputting a program is called the MDI
operation job. This section describes the MDI operation procedure.

6.2.1 Entry of an MDI Program

An MDI program of a maximum of 1024 characters can be entered by the following opera-
tion. If a program exceeding 1024 characters is entered, the warning message “OVER MDI
BUFFER !” is displayed.

a Select the MDI mode by placing the MODE SELECT switch on the machine
operation panel in the MDI position. On the screen, “EOB” is displayed in the
execution program clisplay area. In this status, MDI program can be entered
by using the address and data keys.

@ Key in the required address and data, and press the [WR] key.

@ The entered data are stored to the MDI buffer.

6.2.2 Editing an MDI Program

The MDI program entered to the h4DI buffer can be edited in the same manner as with the
part program stored in the memory.

When the cursor up/down key is pressed, the cursor moves forward or back-
ward in units of blocks of MDI program.

When the cursor right/left key is pressed, the cursor moves forward or back-
ward in units of words.

When the page key is pressed, the MDI program is moved forward or back-
ward in units of pages.

When the [INSRT] key is pressed, the entered data are inserted following the
present cursor position.

When the [ALTER] key is pressed, the word on which the cursor is positioned
is replaced with the entered word.

When the [ERASE] key is pressed, the word on which the cursor is positioned
is erased.

When [WR] key is pressed, the entered word is appended to the existing MDI
program.

Whether or not the MD1 buffer should be cleared by pressing the [RESET] key
can be selected by the setting for the parameter.
MD1buffer is clearedby the reset signal.
MDI buffer is not clearedby the reset signal.
E

6-12
 6.2 MDI OPERATION JOB

..__. ————.-— .. ———... —

D
SUPPLE.
MENT
1.

2.
The MDI program cannot be edited while it is executed. However, editing is pos-
sible in the single-block stop state.

After completing the MDI program editing, cycle start the edited program. In this
case, pay attention to the cursor position since the program is restarted from the
cursor position.

3. When the [BT/TOP] (f5) function soft-key is pressed, the cursor moves to the bot-
tom line of the MDI program, When the [BT/TOP] (f5) function soft-key is
pressed once again, the cursor moves to the top line of the M131 program.

4. When the setting is made so that the MDI buffer is not cleared by the reset signal,
the cursor position is determined by the setting for the parameter.

pm4002 D1 = O The cursor is returned to the beginning of the‘~pogram.

pm4002 D1 = 1 The cursor stays at the same position.

1
—————. .——..—

6.2.3 Execution of an MDI Program

Whh the MODE SELECT switch on the machine operation panel placed in the MDI position,
press the CYCLE START switch, and the entered MDI program is executed. Execution starts
from the block where the cursor is positioned. mu
@
. As the MDI program is executed, the cursor moves at the beginning of the E
block which is presently executed.

● For the execution of the MDI program, the [RUN] process is not necessarily
selected. It is possible to execute the MDI program from any display screen
as long as the MDI program has been entered.

● Whether or not the MDI program should be cleared upon completion of the
execution of the MDI program can be selected by the setting for the parameter.

~ pm3002 D1 = O
N4DI buffer is cleared upon completion of MDI program execu-
tion. I
Single-block mode and MDI buffer are not cleared upon
completion of MDI program execution if an end M code (M02

M130)existS -i

(3
SUPPt.E-
MEt4T
In the single-block stop state, editing an MDI program and the cursor movement by
the cursor keys and the [BT/TOP] (f5) function soft-key are permitted.
———.. ————. —.

6-13

——... -——
....-. —. —-—..- .. —. —————.
-——
6.2.4 Deleting an MDI Program

When the MODE SELECT switch on the machine operation panel is placed in the MDI posi-
tion, delete function is displayed ([DELETE] (f2) function soft-key). When the [DELETE]
(f2) function soft-key is pressed, the MDI program is deleted.

This key is conveniently used when parameter setting is made so that the MDI buffer is not
cleared by the reset operation or when the [RESET] key cannot be pressed during MDI opera-
tion intervention.

6.2.5 Storing an MDI Program

To store the MDI program in the memory, follow the procedure indicated below.

@ In the MDI mode, press the [CLOSE] (f4) function soft-key. Note that the
[CLOSE] function menu item is displayed only in the MDI mode. The mes-
sage “INPUT O NO. ” is displayed.

@ Enter the program number for storing the MDI program. For example, key in
“020” and press the [WR] key. The message of “INPUT COMMENT” is dis-
played,

@ Enter the comment. For example, key in “DRILL” and press the [WR] key.

6-14
 6.3 COMMAND VALUE DISPIAY JOB

6.3 COMMAND VALUE DISPLAY JOB

The job to display the command values in the program presently executed is called the com-
mand value display job. This section describes the procedure used for displaying the com-
mand values.

6.3.1 Collective Display of Command Values

It is possible to display all command values of the program presently executed. When the
[COMMND] (f2) job soft-key is pressed, the command value display screen is displayed as
shown in Fig. 6.3. On this screen, the data of the block being executeci in the automatic mode
are displayed.
.- —-———— ————-— ———.———

(3)
SUPPLE-
MENT
1.

2.
During automatic operation or in the feed hold state, the contents of the execution
register are displayed.

In the block stop state, the contents in the buffer area are displayed. If the buffer
area is <empty>, the contents of the block executed previously are displayed.

COMMAND RUN Oocel NOOOOO

G x 100.000 h403
Y 100,000
GO1 G84 Z 100,000
G17 G67 M92
G90 GW M97

G94 I o F 500
G21 G69 J o E o
G40 G200 K o D o
G49 P o H 5
G80 o 0 L o
G98 R o A o
s B o
G52 T c o

Bmlmmmmllall
Fig. 6.3 Command Value Display Screen

6-15
6.4 SETHNG JOB

Various data necessary for operating the NC can be set by the setting job. When the [SET-
ING] (f3) job soft-key is pressed, any of the following functions maybe displayed.

SWITCH (internal switch) function

SOIWSW (software switch) function

MACRO (microprogram variable) function

F1 DGT (F I -digit) function

SETING (setting) function

S-LMT (stored stroke-limit) function

6.4.1 Internal Switch Function *

By using the switches displayed on this screen, they can be turned ON or OFF without using
the switches on the machine operation panel, Up to 15 switches are displayed on two pages.
The number of switches displayed by this function varies depending on the selected options.

@ When the [SWITCH] (fl) function soft-key is pressed, the internal switch
screen (Fig. 6.4) is displayed.

SWITCH RUN o***** NOOOOO

SINGLE-BLOCK ON OFF
MACHINE LOCK ON OFF
DRY RUN ON OFF
OPTL BLOCK SKIP ON OFF
MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON OFF
AUX FCTN LOCK ON OFF
DISPLAY LOCK ON OFF
EDIT LOCK ON OFF
OPTIONAL STOP ON OFF
START LOCK ON OFF
Z FEED CANCEL ON OFF

Immmmliiiiii
I I

Fig. 6.4 Internal Switch Screen

@ Move the cursor to the switch to be turned ON or OFF, then press the [WR]
key. Each time the [WR] key is pressed, the switch status toggles between ON
and OFF. The new setting of the switch becomes valid immediately.

6-16
 6.4 SETTING JOB

6.4.2 Software Switch Function *

By selecting the optional software switch function, it is possible to substitute the switches
on the operation panel with the switches provided on this screen. When the [SOFT SW] (f2)
function soft-key is pressed, the software switch selection screen is displayed. A maximum
of 64 points of software switches can be used; this uses a maximum of eight pages for display.

For details, refer to the manuals published by the machine tool builder,

6.4.3 Macro Variable Function

When the optional microprogram function is used, it is possible to display

.- and write the local
variables (#1 to #33) and common variables (#100 to #299, #500 to #999).

a When the [MACRO] (f3) function soft-key is pressed, the local variables and
the nesting level are displayed.
● Nesting level is indicated by the symbol in the range of LVLO to LVL4. The
nesting level of the microprogram which is presently executed is indicated by
the symbol and a numerical value.
●
The values of the local variables in the present level are displayed by a signed
data string (intege~ 8 digits, decimal fraction: 7 digits).
● The values of the local variables used in a different level cannot be viewed on
this screen.
● If the data area is blank, it indicates the local variable is cempty>. After the
execution of a microprogram, local variable data are displayed in blank.

6-17

.—. -—- —- ——— -—.

 ● For common variables, nesting level is not displayed.

SETING (MAC) RUN O***** NOOOOO

LOCAL VARIABLE
# 001
LVLO # 002
LVL4 # 003
LVL3 # 004
LWZ # 005
LVL1 # 006
LVLO # 007
# 008
# 009
#olo
fiv

MEM STP LSK

I

Fig. 6.5 Local Variable and Nesting Level Display Screen

@ It is possible to search the variable by directly specifying the variable number.

After entering the variable number, press the cursor up/down key, and the spe-
cified variable is displayed on the screen. The other method to search the vari-
able uses the page keys and the cursor upldown keys. Display the screen that
includes the required variable by pressing the page keys and move the cursor
to the required variable by pressing the cursor up/down keys.

@) After keying in the numerical value, press the [WR] key. The entered value
is stored to the variable that is specified by the cursor.

1. Common variables can be written any time.

2. Local variables can be written only while a microprogram is executed. If an at-

tempt is made to write, it wil be invalid. However, since it is very risky to change
the contents of local variables while a microprogram is being executed, suspend
the execution of the macroprograrn once by single-block stop to change the con-
tents. When changing the contents, make sure that changing the contents does
not cause problems.

6-18
 6.4 SETTING JOB

6.4.4 F1-digit Function

@ Press the [Fl DGT] (f4) function soft-key. The F1-digit data setting screen is
displayed.

F1 DIGIT RUN o***** 1400000

FEED FEED CLAMP

(0.1 M?WMIN) (1 MM/MIN)

F1 100 F1 - F4 16500
F2 200 F5 - F9 20000
F3 300
F4 400
F5 500
F6 600
F7 700
FE 600
F9 900

Fig. 6.6 F1-digit Data Setting Screen

@ Move the cursor to the F1 -digit number for which the present setting should
be changed. After keying in a required feedrate (for example, “5000”) press
the [WR] key. The present data are replaced with the newly entered value.

— .
LJl
+ Fldigit
TERM?
when~ F1.dighfeed command is specified, the feedrate set on this screen is called corresponding tOthe SpeCi-
iiexlF1-digit value (F] to F9).
-. .—

6-19

-—.—.-—— ——..——-.— —- —.- ..—.

.—..—
—...
.—. ——..
 6.4.5 Setting Function

When the [SETING] (f5) function soft-key is pressed, the setting screen as
shown in Fig. 6.7 is displayed.

Either press the page keys or key in the page number. Display the page which
includes the objective setting item by pressing the cursor up/down keys.

Move the cursor to the required setting item by using the cursor up/down key.

For the items for which setting should be made in other than numerical values,
the contents of the setting changes each time the [WR] key is pressed. Selec-
tion is made from “C)N and OFF”, “1S0 and EIA”, “MM and INCH”, etc. For
the items for which setting should be made in numerical values, press the
[WR] key after keying in the required value.

SETING RUN O****. N02000

OUTPUT CODE (PORTI) 1s0 EIA

TV CHECK (PORT1) ON OFF
TV CHECK IN ( ) (PORTI; ON OFF
OUTPUT FEED (PORT1) ON OFF
OUTPUT CODE OF EOB (PORTI ) CRLF LF
EO13 ADD IN ALL PRG O(JT (PORTI) ON OFF
OUTPUT CODE (PORT2) 1s0 EIA
TV CHECK (PORT2) ON OFF
TV CHECK IN ( ) (PORT2 ON OFF
OUTPUT FEED (PORT2) ON OFF
OUTPUT CODE OF EOB (PORT2) CRLF LF
2/5

MEM STP LSK

—
PROG COMMNDm

-E EalI@mmh

1 J

Fig. 6.7 Setting Screen

(3)
SUPPLE-
MENT
The items to be set on this screen correspond to the setting parameters
played by the setting function in the parameter job of the maintenance
that are dis-
process.

6-20
 6.4 SEITING JOB

6.4.6 Stored Stroke Limit Function *

@ When the [S-LMT] (fl) function soft-key is pressed, the stored stroke limit
screen is displayed.

S_STROKE LIMIT RUN O***** NOOOOO

NO.2 PROHIBIT AREA

Axis

z
x
‘i
-El
‘%’T
POS. (MACHINE)
x 0.000
Y 0.000
z 0.000

MEM ST’ LSK

—
PROG COMMND ~= T
.PI -I r—l -I ~—1 TI

[mE-mmmW
Fig. 6.8 Stored Stroke Limit Screen

Press the page keys to display the page that shows the required entry prohibited
area (No. 2 to No. 5 entry prohibited areas). Note that the number of entry pro-
hibited areas varies depending on the selected option.

Move the cursor to the item for which the data should be set by using the cursor
keys.

Press the [WR] key to set the data.

To set the PLUS LIMIT or MINUS LIMIT data, press the NR] key after key-
ing the required data.

For the CHK item, ON/OFF of the stored stroke limit function is changed as
the [WR] key is pressed.

For the AREA item, inside/outside of the entry prohibited area is changed as
the [WR] key is pressed.
.— ———
+ Stored Stroke LimitCheck Function
TERM?
Tbe stored stroke limit check function checks if the present position value of an axis enters the entry prohibited
Q area which is set by the parameters or the G2!2command. This fanction is valid in both automatic and manual
operation.
— — ——

6-21

.——.— —.— — .- —.—..,.-.,

,— —..—————.
6.5 OTHER JOB

6.5.1 NC Path Drawing Job*

On the NC path drawing screen, the NC tool paths are monitored and drawn. The scale, view
angle and other drawing conditions are set for the drawing parameters.
\
DRAW (NC) RUN o***** NOOOOO

Y POS. (UNIVERSAL)
x O.ocul
Y 0.000
z 0.000
(mm)
F
(mmlmim~
T 0000

L, x

MEM STP LSK

– FI COMMND SE1-ING m

mmmmmnb
)

Fig. 6.9 NC Path Drawing Screen

(1) Setting the Program Number

It is necessary to call the part program for which the NC paths should be drawn. After
keying the program number following address “O”, press the [WR] key.

(2) Setting the NC Path Drawing Parameters

Set the parameters for drawing the NC paths – plane, view angle, scale, coordinate sys-
tem, etc. For details, refer to item (9). When the scale is set, NC paths are drawn only
in the specified range and no tool paths are drawn while the cutting tool is moving out-
side the specified range.
 6.5 OTHER JOB

— —
(3) Executing the NC Path Drawing Job

(a) In the automatic operation mode (MEM, MDI, or TAPE)

When the CYCLE START switch is pressed, the [START] (f3) function soft-key
is highlighted and the execution of the selected program starts. The tool paths are
then drawn on the screen.

Axis feed mode is identified by the type of lines:

Cutting feed . . . . . . . Solid line
Rapid traverse . . . . . Dotted line

(b) In the manual operation mode (HANDLE, STEP, JOG or RAPID)

Press the [START] (f3) function soft-key. The paths of tool moved manually are
drawn on the screen.

(4) Suspending the NC Path Drawing Job

If the [START] (f3) function soft-key is pressed while the NC paths are being drawn
([START] function soft-key is highlighted), monitoring is suspended although the NC
continues operating. In this state, NC paths are not drawn on the screen. Pressing the
[START] (f3) function soft-key while the NC path drawing is suspended restarts draw-
ing from the time the soft-key is pressed.

(5) Ending the NC Path Drawing Job

When the program operation ends by the execution of M02 or M30, or by pressing the
[RESET] key, NC path drawing stops with the message “DRAWING COMPLETED”
displayed on the screen.

6-23

..——-—.. ———. —.—

—
(6) Display Selection Function

When the [DSP.SL] (fl ) function soft-key is pressed, the operation information is dis-
played including the position data and the list of programs. The operation information
is cleared when the [DSP.SL] (f 1) function soft-key is pressed again.

DRAW (NC) RUN O***** NOOOOO

I x

MEM STP LSK

– = COMMND SEIING m

mmmanmh

ImmmmBEIEEl
Fig. 6.10 NC Path Drawing Screen

(7) Clear Function

The paths having been drawn are cleared when the [CLEAR] (f2) function soft-key is
pressed.

(8) Start Function

The start function is called by pressing the [START] (f3) function soft-key. When the
[START] (f3) function soft-key is pressed, it is highlighted and NC path drawing starts.
When the [START] (f3) function soft-key is given in ordinary display mode, it indicates
that the NC path drawing is not executed.

6-24
 6.5 OTHER JOB

(9) NC Path Drawing Parameters

@ When the [PRM] (f4) function soft-key is pressed, the NC path drawing pa-
rameter setting screen is displayed.

Note that this function is accessible by pressing the FUNCrION SELECT key.

1. PLANE XY 4. SCALE WORK COORD

II Y XL = 0.0000 I

II I
2. ANGLE YL = 0.0000
ZL = 0.0(!00
x d XH = 0.0000
a-O” YH = 0.0000
@-o” ZH = 0.0000
3. GRAPH. PROCESS (TOOL NCI.T)

5. COORDATDRAW WORK COORD

Fig. 6.11
mmmmmmm
NC Path Drawing Parameter Setting Screen

Move the cursor to”1. PLANE” by using the cursor up/down keys. Select the
NC path drawing plane by pressing the appropriate function soft-keys ([XY]
(fl), [Yz] (f2), [Zx] (m, [Xwl (fa)).

Move the cursor to “2. ANGLE’ by using the cursor up/down keys. Set the
view angle by pressing the appropriate function soft-keys ([LEFT] (f 1),
[RIGHT] (f2), [UP] (f3)., [DOWN] (f4)).

a represents an angle of rotation around the Z-axis. The positive direction is

the rotation in the direction from X-axis to Y-axis.

~ represents an angle made between the XY plane and the view point.

The ANGLE item is valid only when the XYZ plane is selected.

Move the cursor to “3. GRAPH.PROCESS (TOOL No. T)” by using the cursor
up/down keys.

Move the cursor to the tool number (process) for whichl the selected status
should be changed and press the [WR] key. To move the cursor in this area,
use the appropriate function soft-keys ([UP] (f 1), [DOWN] (f2), [LEFT] (f3),
[RIGHT] (f4)). The tool numbers of the selected processes are given in high-
lighted display.

6-25
 @ Move the cursor to “4. SCALE WORK COORD” by using the cursor up/down
keys.

● The set values must satisfy the following conditions:

XL c XH, YL < YH[, ZL < ZH

If the setting does not satisfy this condition, it is not possible to return to the
NC path drawing screen.
● The coordinate values to be set must be the values in the coordinate system
selected by”5. COC)RD AT DRAW”.

@ Move the cursor to ‘“5. COORD AT DRAW WORK COORD” by using the
cursor up/down keys. Select the coordinate system to be used for drawing the
NC paths from the workpiece coordinate system and the machine coordinate
system by pressing l.he appropriate function soft-keys ([UNIV], [ABS]).

@) After setting the NC path drawing parameters, press the [RETURN] (f5) func-
tion soft-key and the screen returns to the NC path drawing screen.

(1O)Scale Function

The required range of NC path drawing can be set on the scale setting screen by directly
setting the frame. Once the drawing scale is changed, NC paths are drawn using the set
scale. Note that the frame set on this screen does not influence the setting made for
SCALE on the NC path drawing parameter setting screen.

@ Press the [SCALE] (f5) function soft-key.

Note that this function is accessible by pressing the FUNCTION SELECT key.
The screen changes to the scale setting screen.

6-26
 6.5 OTHER JOB

SCALE (NC) RUN O***** NOOOOO

MEM STP LSK

– m COMMND SETING -]

mmmnE&

Immlmmmlmml

Fig. 6.12 NC Path Drawing Range Setting Screen

Change the NC path drawing frame size by using the function soft-keys
([LARGE] (f 1), [SMALL] (f2)). The set frame is applied for the next drawing
operation.

Change the position of the frame by pressing the cursor keys to set the center
of drawing.

Press the [RETURN] (f5) function soft-key. The screen returns to the NC path
drawing screen. The NC paths are drawn so that the frame set above will
occupy the largest area in the screen.

To return the drawing scale to the previous scale, press the [STD] (f3) function
soft-key. The screen returns to the NC path drawing screen and the NC paths
are drawn in the standard scale.

(11 )Automatic Scaling Function

When the [AUTO] (f5) function sc~ft-key is pressed, the scale for drawing the NC paths
is automatically y calculated so that the entire paths of the presently selected program can
be drawn. While the scaling calculation is executed, the message “AUTO SCALING”
is displayed. Upon completion of the calculation, the message “SCALING COM-
PLETE” is displayed.

6-27
COMMON PROCESS OPERATION

Chapter 7describes theoperation carried out by using the

common process key.

In the common process, screens used in all ma~hining pro-

cesses in addition to the edit, setup, run, and maintenance pro-
cesses are provided by the present position data control, alarm
display, and time control jobs.
Job selection is possible by using either the job soft-keys or the
[COMN] process selection key.

7.1 PRESENT POSITION DATA CONTF?OL

JOB . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1 Collective Display of Present Position Data . . 7-2
7.1.2 Display of Present Position Data
in the ‘Workpiece Coordinate Systern . . . . . . . 7-4
7.1.3 Display of Present Position Data
in the External Coordinate Values . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.1.4 Display of Remaining Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.1.5 Setting the Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.1.6 Error Pulse Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

7.2 ALARM DISPLAY JOB . . . . . . . . . . . ...7- 10

7.2.1 Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-10
7.2.2 Servo Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.2.3 User’s Message Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

7.3 TIME CONTROL JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7- 13

7.3.1 Calendar Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-14
7.3.2 Operating Time Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

7-1

,...,—— .——
—-...—.
7.1 PRESENT POSITION DATA CONTROL JOB

The present position job displays thleposition data and also permits the setting of the position
data.

When the [POS.] (f 1) job soft-key is pressed, any of the following functions may be dis-
played.

●
ALL (collective display) function
● UNIV (workpiece coordinate system) function
● EXTERN (external coordinate value) function
c INCR (remaining distance) function

●
ERROR (error pulse) function

7.1.1 Collective Display of Present Position Data

When the [ALL] (f 1) function soft-key is pressed, the present position data collective display
screen is displayed.

POSITION COM O***** NOOOOO

UNIVERSAL EXTERNAL

x 0.000 x 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
z 0.000 z 0.000

INCREMENT MACHINE

x 0.000 x 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
z 0.000 z 0.000

MEM STP LSK

– ~ ALARM TIME

“mm Eammh

l~mmmmmml
Fig. 7.1 Present Position Data Collective Display Screen

7-2
 7.1 PRESENTPOSITION DATA CONTROL JOB

The following describes the individual functions.

(1) UNIVERSAL (Workpiece Coordinate System)

The coordinate values of a cutting tool in the set workpiece coordinate system are dis-
played. Whether or not the tool offset data are included in the coordinate values to be
displayed here can be selected by the setting for the parameter.

r pm3000 D2 = O Tool offset data are included. ‘—m

I pm3000” D2 = I I TOO1offset data are not included. I

The workpiece coordinate system can be preset by using [SET] of the [UNIV] function
(see 7.1.5, “Setting the Coordinate Systems”.)

(2) EXTERNAL (External Coordinate Values)

Accumulated travel distance of a cutting tool is displayed in reference to the position

preset by using the preset operaticm.

(3) INCREMENT (Remaining Distance)

The following values are displayed.

● In the automatic operation mode, the distance from the present position of the
cutting tool to the end pclint of the block being executed is displayed.

● In the manual operation mode, the distance is measured from the present posi-
tion of the cutting tool to the manual operation start point. This display is reset
to “O” when the operation mode is returned to manual.

(4) MACHINE (Machine Coordinate System)

The present position of the cutting tool is displayed in the coordinate system that has
its origin at the position where the axes are positioned by the reference point return op-
eration.
—

D
@mPLE-
MWT
The axis names displayed on the screen are those set for parameter pm 1100. If no axis
name is set for this parameter, the default axis names are displayed.

7-3
7.1.2 Display of Present Position Datia in the Workpiece Coordinate

When the [UNIV] (f2) function soft-key is pressed, the present position data in the workpiece
coordinate system are displayed.

POSITION cold O***** NOOOOO

UNIVERSAL

x –123456.789
Y 123456.789
z -123456.789

Fig. 7.2 Workpiece Coordinate System Display Screen

7-4
 7.1 PRESENTPOSITION DATA CONTROL JOB

7.1.3 Display of Present Position Coordinate Values

When the [EXTERN] (f3) function soft-key is pressed, the external coordinate values are dis-
played,

POSITION COM O****= NOOOOO

EXTERNAL

x –123456.789
Y 123456.789
z –123456.789

MEM STP LSK

Fig. 7.3 External Coordinate System Display Screen

7-5
7.1.4 Display of Remaining

When the [INCR] (f4) function soft-key is pressed, the remaining distance is displayed.

POSITION cotJ O**.** NOOOOO

INCREMENT

x 0.000
Y 0.000
z 0.000

MEM STP LSK

Fig. 7.4 Remaining Distance Display Screen

7-6
 7.1 PRESENT POSITION DATACONTROL JOB

7.1.5 Setting the Coordinate Systems

By pressing the [ALL] (f 1), [UNIV] (f2), or [EXTERN] (f3) function soft-keys, the coordi-
nate systems can be set.

(1) Outline of the Setting in Each I=unction

(a) All function

When the [ALL] (f 1) function soft-key is pressed, the external coordinate system
can be set. The external coordinate system can always be set, even while an axis
is moving in automatic operation of a part program.

(b) Workpiece coordinate system function

When the [UNIV] (f2) function soft-key is pressed, the workpiece coordinate sys-
tem can be set. This function is valid in manual operation mode (rapid traverse,
jog feed, step feed, handle feed). If an attempt is made to set a workpiece coordi-
nate system in a mode other than manual mode, the warning message “CAN’T SET
COORD!” is displayed.

(c) External coordinate system function

When the [EXTERN] (f3) function soft-key is pressed, the external coordinate sys-
tem can be set. The external coordinate system can always be set, even while an
axis is moving in automatic cjperation of a part program.

7-7
(2) Setting the Coordinate Systems

Follow the procedure indicated below to set a coordinate system.

@ When the [SET] (f5) function soft-key is pressed, the key is highlighted and,
at the same time, the name of the axis for which a coordinate value can be set
is highlighted.

POSITION COM O***** NOOOOO

UNIVERSAL (COORD-SET)

x –44.572
M 0.000
z 0.000

ramimmmlmlw
Fig. 7.5 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting Screen

Move the cursor to the axis for which the coordinate value should be set by
using the cursor up/down keys.

The coordinate system is set when a coordinate value is entered and the cursor
moves to the next axis name. For example, key in”2 10.5” and press the [WR]
key. The coordinate system is set based on the entered value.

If the [WR] key is pressed without keying in a coordinate value, the coordinate
system is set assuming “O”.

If the [WR] key is pressed after keying in the “/” code, one-half of the position
data value is entered. and the coordinate system is set accordingly.

When the [SET] (f5) function soft-key is pressed, the cursor on the axis name
disappears.

78
 7.1 PRESENT POSITION DATA CONTROL JOB

— ——

cl)
suPt%E-
MENT
1.

2.
If an attempt is made to set a coordinate system in the mode in which a coordinate
system cannot beset, the warning message “CAN’T SET COORD!” is displayed.

The operation to set the coordinate system in the present position data control job
is called the numerical setting up.

7.1.6 Error Pulse Display Function

The error pulse screen is displayed when the [ERROR] (f 1) function soft-key is pressed.

POSITION COM O* =*** NOOOOO

ERROR PULSE

x 0.000
Y 0.000
z 0.000

MEM STP LSK

m ‘~RM TI”E
“Izmidnm[=lnil
lmmmm!!~x
Fig. 7.6 Error Pulse Display Screen

On the error pulse display screen, the contents of the command pulse accumulation registers
in the NC are displayed. The command pulse accumulation registers a:re reset to “O” when
the power is turned ON, and command pulses are all accumulated in these registers after that.

7-9

-—— .,——..———. -— .—... —.._-——

7.2 ALARM DISPLAY JOB

Thealarm display job displays the contents of the alarm if an alarm occurs with the NC unit.

When the [ALARM] (fl) job soft-key is pressed, any of the following functions maybe dis-
played: alarm function, servo alarm function, and user’s message function.

7.2.1 Alarm Function

If an alarm occurs with the NC unit, “ALM” or “BGA” (background alarm) message is dis-
played in the alarm status display area in the screen regardless of the mode or process. If
battery alarm occurs at the same time, either “A/B” or “B/B” is displayed in blinking charac-
ters. At the same time, the alarm number of the alarm having the highest priority is displayed
with the corresponding alarm message and alarm occurring program line in the alarm mes-
sage display area.

When the [ALARM] (fl ) function soft-key is pressed, the screen changes to the alarm display
screen where alarm information o:f all alarms that have occurred is displayed. The alarm
numbers and the alarm messages are displayed in the order of priority.

ALARM COM O.*=** NOOOOO

0190: RADIUS O IN CIRCULAR

0050: POWER OFF PRM SE-F

0190: RADIUS O IN CIRCULAR

MEM STP LSK

1~-mmmmm]
Fig. 7.7 Alarm Message Display Screen

7-1o
 7.2 ALARMDISPLAYJOB

7.2.2 Servo Alarm Function

When an alarm occurs with the servo controller (SERVOPACK), the alarm information is
displayed on the screen. FO11OWthe procedure indicated below.

When the [SV.ALM] (f2) function soft-key is pressed, the servo alarm display
screen is displayed as shown in Fig. 7.8. If an alarm related with the SERVO-
PACK is displayed on the alarm message display screen (Fig. 7.7), details of
the SERVOPACK related alarm can be checked on this screen.

SE RVOALM COM O***”” NOOOOO

3301 OVER CURRENTR (x)

3311 MCCB TRIP (x)
3321 REGEN ABNORMAL (x)
3.X31 OVER VOLTAGER (x)
3341 SHORTAGE VOLTAGE (x)

MEM STP LSK

Fig. 7.8 Servo Alarm Display Screen

@ If alarms cannot be displayed on one page of the display screen, they are dis-
played on more than one page. To change the display page, use the page keys. I
If alarm display is given on one page, the page keys are invalid.

7-11
7.2.3 User’s Message Function

The function displays user’s message on the screen by the PLC system (machine sequence
controller) in the NC unit. Usually, this function is used to display the outline of the alarm
detected by the PLC. However, this function is also used to simply display the message.

When the message display instruction (macro instruction) is executed in the PLC, either
“ALM” or “MB” blinks at the alarm status display area.

(1) When the [ALARM] (fl ) Function Soft-key is Pressed

The following display is given.

● ALM 1080 SEQUENCE ERROR O

● ALM2180 SEQUENCE ERROR 1

● ALM 3240 SEQUENCE ERROR 2

(2) When the [USERS] (f3) Function Soft-key is Pressed

The user’s message screen is clisplayed where detailed error codes output from the PLC
are displayed. For details, refer to the manuals published by the machine tool builder.

USER’S MES1 COM O***** NOOOOO

5000 SPINDRE ALARM

5010 ATC ALARM

MEM STP LSK

rmiimmmlmlm
Fig. 7.9 User’s Message Screen

7-12
 7.3 TIME CONTROL JOB

7.3 TIME CONTROL JOB

Thetime control job allows the display and setting of the date and time using the calendar
function. When the operating time data are selected, operating time data can be displayed
and set.

When the [TIME] (f3) job soft-key is pressed, either the calendar screen or the operating time
screen is displayed. The [CALEN] (f 1) and [W.TIME] (f2) function soft-keys are used to
change the display screen.

CALENDER Cotd O***** NOOOOO

Y M D

DAT 1991.01.01
H M s

TIM 22:2:2:22

MEM STP LSK

Pos. ALARM =

“mmn[=ln A

. ‘J

riimmmmmml
Fig. 7.10 Calendar Display Screen

7-13

.—— -.—
7.3.1 Calendar Function

(1) Calendar Display

When the [CALEN] (fl ) function soft-key is pressed, the calendar screen is displayed
where the NC’s calendar data (date and time) are displayed.

CALENDER Cotd O***** NOOO

00
Y M D

DAT 199-I. 01.01

H M s

TIM 22:22:22

MEM STP LSK

Pos. ALARM fih~ T

“Elcl@lc3clcil

l~mmmmmm
Fig. 7.11 Calendar Setting Screen

(2) Calendar Setting

@ Press the FUNCTION SELECT key to display the [SET] (fl) function soft-
key.

@ When the [SET] (fl) function soft-key is pressed, the calendar setting mode
is called and the [SEr] (fl ) function soft-key is highlighted. At the same time,
the cursor is displayed on “DAT”.

@ Selection of date and time is possible by moving the cursor. The cursor up/
down keys are used to move the cursor.

@) Set the date. For example, key in “1991 .01.01” and press the [WR] key.

@ Set the time. For example, key in “22.22.22’: and press the [WR] key.

@ When the [SET] (f5) function soft-key is pressed, the cursor disappears and
the newly entered date and time are displayed.

7--14
 7.3 TIME CONTROL JOB

7.3.2 Operating Time Function

The NC accumulates operating time in the individual operation modes and the contents of
the accumulated time data can be displayed on the screen. This function allows the analysis
of cycle time used to finish one workpiece and also the checking of total NC unit running
time. The operating time is displayed on the following four modes and time data are dis-
played in units of hours, minutes, and seconds.

~-d
Displays the total accumulated time afkr turning the power ON.

Displays the total accumulated time in which the NC has operated m the automatic

I CUTTING I Displays the total accumulated time in which the NChas operated inthe cutting mode. I

Displays the total accumulated time in which external input signals have been ON.
TIMER*
I (option) I
Press the [W.TIME] (f2) function soft-key.

To reset the displayed time data, display the [0 CLR] (f I ) function soft-key
first by pressing the FUNCTION SELECT key.

When the [0 CLR] (f 1) function soft-key is pressed, the ke:y is highlighted and,
at the same time, the cursor is displayed on the POWER ON item, indicating
that the zero clear mode has been set.
T \

W TIME O SET COM O***** NOOOOO

POWER ON OOOOH:
00‘:
00s
CYCLE ST 0000:00:00
CUTTING 0000:00:00

MEM STP LSK

.
PO’. ALARM r~

“mo[=nclh

J
1

Immmmmlllmllsl

Fig. 7.12 Zero Clear Mode Screen

7-15

..-..—
@) To clear the time data to “O”, move the cursor to the item to be cleared and press
the [WR] key. The time data of the item on which the cursor is positioned are
cleared to “O” and the cursor moves to the next item.

@ When the [0 CLR] (fl ) function soft-key is pressed, the cursor disappears and
the zero clear mode is canceled.

7-16
 8
MAINTENANCE PROCESS

Chapter 8 describes the operation carried out by using the

maintenance process key.

In the maintenance process, display and setting of the data

necessary to maintain the NC unit and input/output of the data
using an external device are executed by the parameter job,
1/0 monitoring job, input/output and verify job, and internal in-
formation job.

Job selection is possible by using either the job soft-keys or

the [MAINTl process selection key.

8.1 PARAMETE:R JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8.1.1 Parameter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-3
8.1.2 Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-6
8.1.3 Sequence Parameter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.1.4 Pitch I;rror Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

8.2 l/O MONITORING JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

8.2.1 Displaying the ON/OFF Status
of thel/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-8
8.2.2 Displaying the ON/OFF Status
of the Selected l/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.3 TurningON/OFFl/OS ignalsForcibly . . . . . . 8-11

8-1
8.3 lNPUT/CNJTPUT AND VERIFY JOB . . 8-12
8.3.1 input/output and Verify Function . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.2 Background Reset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.3.3 I/C)Device Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

8.4 INTERNAL INFORMATION JOB . . . . . 8-15

8.4.1 Version Number Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.4.2 Memory Dump Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-16
8.4.3 Key Memory Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-16
8.4.4 Servo Configuration Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

8-2
 8.1 PARAMETERJOB

8.1 PARAMETER JOB

With the parameter job, the data stored in the internal memory (parameter data, setting data,
battery back-up memory data, pitch error compensation data) can be displayed and set. Ac-
cording to the contents, specific functions are turned ON and OFF or the operation conditions
of the functions are determined.

When the [PARAM] (f 1) job soft-key is pressed, the following function soft-keys are dis-
played: [PARAM] (fl), [SETING] (f-2), [SEQPRM] (f3), and [P.ERR] (f4).

Before setting the parameters, set “ON” for “PARAMETER CHANG” parameter by using
the [SETING] job in the [RUN] process, With this setting, the data set for parameters, battery
back-up memory, and pitch error can be changed. After the completion of changing, make
sure to return the setting for “PARAMETER CHANG” to “OFF”.

~ CAUTION
c The end user must not change parameters relating to machine accuracy, travel
axis control and spindle axis control.
The NC parameters are set to the optimum values for each machine, and changing them
could therefore result in unexpected operation. This could cause tcol damage due to
interference, and resulting accidents involving injuries to personnel.
Reset the NC after any manual intervention.

8.1.1 Parameter Function

With the parameter function, display and setting of parameter data stored in the NC are pos-
sible. Usually, the parameter data are set by the machine tool builder and to change the set-
ting for the parameters, make sure to consult the machine tool builder.

Press the [PARAM] (f 1) function soft-key.

The parameters are largely classified into two types – bit type and byte/wordl
double-word type.

(1) Bit Type Parameters

Follow the procedure indicated below to write the bit type parameters.

Move the cursor to the parameter for which the present setting should be
changed. For this operation, use the page keys and the cursor up/down keys,
or use the cursor up/dew n keys after keying in the parameter number.

Press either the [INSRT] key or the cursor right key. In the case of [INSRT]
key, the cursor moves to the decimal number display area and in the case of
the cursor right key, the cursor moves to the bit data position.

8-3
 @ Move the cursor to the bit position where the data should be changed and press
the [WR] key. Each time the [WR] key is pressed, the bit status (ON/OFF)
is changed alternately. Writing a numerical value is allowed only when the
cursor is moved to the decimal number position at the right end column.

Table 8.1 Example) Writing a decimal number for bit data

Key Operation Bit 76543210 DecimalNumber

[0] [WR] 00000000 0

[8] [WR] 00001000 8
[2][5][5][WR] 11111111 255
E

PARAMETER MNT o***** NOOOOO

76543210
pml 000 00000000 o
pm1001 11 111111 8
pm1002 00000000 255
pm1003 00000000 0
pm1004 00000000 0
pm1005 00000000 0
pm1006 00000000 0
pm1007 00000000 0
pm1008 00000000 0
pm1009 00000000 0
0: OFF l:ON

MEM STP LSK

ImE!l DIAGNl~olJT fJATA

Eammmmm+l

Fig. 8.1 Parameter Input Screen (Bit Type Parameters)

8-4
 8.1 PARAMETERJOB

(2) Byte/Word/Double-word Type Parameters

Follow the procedure indicated below to write the bytt#word/doubl e-word type param-
eters.

@ Move the cursor to the parameter for which the present setting should be
changed. For this operation, use the page keys and the cursor up/down keys,
or use the cursor up/down keys after keying in the parameter number. When
parameter number search is executed, it is not necessary to enter “pm”.

@ Key in a required parameter value and press the [WR] key, The keyed in value
is entered to the specified parameter.

PARAMETER OIAGN O***** NOOOOO

pm 8100 0
pm 8101 0
pm 8102 0
pm 8103 0
pm 8104 0
pm 8105 0
pm 8106 0
pm 8107 0
pm 8108 0
pm 8109 0

MEM STP LSK

m@@l[=m E2m

= SETTING sEQpRM pERR J

Fig. 8.2 Parameter Input Screen

(Byte/Word/Double-word Type Parameters)
 @ After changing the setting for the parameters, press the [RESET] key. The
new settings become valid when the NC is reset.

● When the setting is made for the parameters that become valid after the power
is turned OFF, the allarm “ALM 0050: POWER OFF PRM SET” occurs. If
this alarm message is displayed, turn OFF the power once and then turn it back
ON.

● When the setting is made for the parameters that become valid when the part
program is initialized, the alarm “ALM 0051: PROGRAM GENERATION
PRM SET” occurs. If this alarm message is displayed, program clear is neces-
sary.

Contact your Yaskawa representative. Even after the occurrence of this alarm,
it is possible to run the NC without problems by turning OFF the power once
and then turning it back ON again. In this case, the new setting is invalid.

8.1.2 Setting Function

It is possible to display the setting data stored in the NC and also to set the data. Follow the
procedure indicated below.

@ Press the [SETING] (f2) function soft-key.

@ Move the cursor to the setting number for which the present setting should be
changed.

@) Enter the required value.

(3)
SUPPLE.
MEW
1. Operation is basically the same as with the parameter function. When changing
the setting data, it is not necessary to set “ON’ for the “PARAMETER CHANG”
parameter.

2. When the setting is changed for the setting data, the new data become valid im-
mediately.

3. A part of the setting data can be set on the setting function screen in the RUN
process.

8-6
 8.1 PARAMETERJOB

8.1.3 Sequence Parameter Function

With the sequence parameter function, display and setting are possible for the sequence pa-
rameters. Here, the sequence parameter refers to the data used by the PLC. Follow the proce-
dure indicated below.

@ Press the [SEQPRM] (f3) function soft-key.

@ Move the cursor to the sequence parameter number for which the present set-
ting should be changed.

@ Enter the required parameter data. For the procedure for entering the parame-
ter data, refer to 8.1.1, “l>arameter Function”.

(3
SUPPLE-
MENT
On the bit type data display screen, the numerical values given at the right end of the
column are hexadecimal numbers.
— . . . .. .. ——--——— .. ... .. _._. ___..,. +___

8.1.4 Pitch Error Function *

The pitch error function allows the display and setting of the pitch error compensation data
stored in the NC.

@ Press the [P.ERR] (f4) function soft-key,

@ Move the cursor to the pi!ch error number for which the present setting should
be changed.

@ Enter the required pitch error compensation data. For the procedure for enter-
ing the data, refer to 8.1.1, “Parameter Function”.

8-7
 8.2 1/0 MONITORING JOB

With the I/O monitor job, ON/OFF status of the I/O signals of the NC, PLC, and the machine
can be monitored.

8.2.1 Displaying the ON/OFF Status of the 1/0 Signals

When the [DIAGN.] (f2) soft-key is pressed, the ON/OFF status of the I/O signals of the NC,
PLC, and machine are displayed. This display can be displayed at any time.

DIAGNOSIS MNT O***** NOOOOO

76543210
# 1000 0010000020
# 1001 0000100000
# 1002 0000000000
# 1003 0000000000
# t 004 0000000000
# 1005 0000000000
# 1006 O11111O17D
# 1007 OOO1111O1E
# 1008 0000000000
# 1009 0000000000
* .0 0: OPEN 1: CLOSED

MEM STP !SK

PARAM. w] lN/OUT DATA t

ImmlmmImlm
1
E!l
1

Fig. 8.3 1/0 Signal Display Screen

CD
SUPPLE.
MENT
On the I/O signal display screen, the numerical values given at the right end of the
column are hexadecimal numbers.

8-8
 8.2 1/0 MONITORING JOB

8.2.2 Displaying the ON/OFF Status of the Selected 1/0 Signals

It is possible to display the ON/OFF status of the I/O sigpals by selecting the required ones.

a Move the cursor to the I/O signal number that should be selected.

For this operation, use the page keys and the cursor up/dc)wn keys, or use the
cursor up/down keys after keying in the parameter number.

@ Press the [SI.JDEL] (f 1) :function soft-key and the selected I/O signal number
is stored; the “*” symbol is displayed to the left of it. The entire number of
the selected I/O signal number is displayed atthe lower area of the screen (*
= xx).

@ Repeat steps ~ and@ above to select the I/O signal numbers. Selection is
possible for up to ten signal numbers.

r DIAGNOSIS MNT O***** NOOOOO

76543210
*# 1000 0010000020
# 1001 0000100000
# 1002 0000000000
* # 1003 0000000000
# 1004 0000000000
# 1005 0000000000
* # 1006 0111 11017D
* # 1007 0001 llf OIE
* # 1008 0000000000
# 1009 0000000000
* .5 0: OPEN 1: CLOSED

MEM STP LSK

mm[mmcJ6
E’N’O”T ‘ATA

pimimlimml miiiiiiimq
Fig. 8.4 Selected 1/0 Signal Screen

8-9
 @ Press the [DISP] (f2) function soft-key. The selected I/O signal numbers are
displayed.

DIAGNOSIS MNT o***** NO04)O0

76543210
# 1000 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 20
# 1003 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 00
# 1006 0 1 111 1017D
# 1007 000 1 1 1 1 0 lE
#loo8 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00

0: OPEN 1: CLOSED

MEM STP LSK

—
PARAM. ~~] lN/OUT DATA

nE3Dmmh

Immlmm Eml El

Fig. 8.5 Selected 1/0 Signal Display Screen

When the [RETURN] (f5) function soft-key is pressed, the screen returns to
the I/O signal display screen which is displayed when the [DIAGN] (fl) job
soft-key is pressed.

When the [DELETE] (f3) function soft-key is pressed, the selection of the I/O
signal numbers is canceled.

When the [SL/DEL] (f2) function soft-key is pressed after moving the cursor
to the I/O signal number that has been selected, the selection of that I/O signal
number is canceled.

8-10
 8.2 1/0 MONITORING JOB

8.2.3 Turning ON/OFF 1/0 Signals Forcibly

The forced contact ON/OFF selection function is provided to check the machine sequence.
This function allows the contact status to be changed forcibly without changing the machine
sequence. To make this function valid, set “ 1” for parameter pmOl 09 in the [SETING] func-
tion of [PRM] job in the [MAINT] process.

@ Move the cursor to the I/O signal number that should be selected. For this op-
eration, use the page keys and the cursor up/down keys, c,r use the cursor up/
down keys after keying in the parameter number.

@ Depress the [INSRT] key. The cursor moves to the bit di~ta area.

@ Move the cursor to the bit that should be selected for forced contact ON/OFF
operation and depress the [CPS] (f4) function soft-key, A box (Cl) appears
at the selected bit. The box disappears when the [CPS] (f4) function soft-key
is depressed again.

@ Depress the [WR] key. Each time the [WR] key is depr~ssed, the ON/OFF
status of the selected bit is changed alternately.

@ After moving the cursor to the I/O signal number for which the “*” symbol
is displayed to the left, depress the [SL/DEL] (fl ) function soft-key and the
selection of forced contact ON/OFF operation is canceled.

@ When the [DELETE] (f3) function soft-key is depressed, selection of forced

contact ON/OFF operation is canceled for all contacts.

8-11
 8.3 INPUTIOUTPUT AND VEFIIFY JOB

The input/output and verify job allows the input and output of the NC data with an external
device. It is possible to display the input/output data while the data are input from a tape
reader or output to a tape punch by setting the appropriate value for the parameter.

pmOO07D5 = O Data are dkplayed on the screenduring data input/outputusing tape.

I pmOO07 D5 = I I Data are not displayed on the screen during data inputioutput using tape. I

If data are displayed for input/output and verify operation, processing time will be extended.

8.3.1 Input/output and Verify Function

The inputioutput and verify function provides the following menu items.

● Input/output and verify of all parameters (setting, parameters, sequence pa-

rameters and battery back-up memory, pitch error, offset)
● Input/output and verify of setting data
● Input/output and verify of parameters (not possible for sequence parameters
pm7000 to pm7099)
● Input/output and verify of sequence parameters and battery back-up memory
✎

(3
supple-
ment
Although data are displayed in hexadecimal number for battery back-up memory, out-
put is decimal value.
.- —

● Input/output and verify of pitch error compensation parameters (option)

c Input/output and verify of all offset data (tool offset and work coordinate sys-
tem shift data)

● Input/output and verify of tool life control data (option)

● Input/output and verify of macro and common variables (option)

The input/output and verify of the data is possible disregarding of the NC operation mode.
However, automatic operation is not possible during inputioutput and verify.

8-12
 8.3 lNPUT/OUTPUT AND VERIFYJOB

(3) Selection and Operation of the Function

Press the appropriate function soft-key corresponding to the required opera-

tion. The screen is displayed corresponding to the pressed function soft-key.
Fig. 8.6 shows the parameter input screen.

For input, press the [IN] (fl ) function soft-key.

For output, press the [OIJT] (f2) function soft-key.

For verify, press the [VE,R] (f3) function soft-key.

Move the cursor to the parameter which should be input, output, or verified
and press the [WR] key. The message “INPUT (OUTPIJT/VERIFY) OK?”
is displayed.

When the [Y] key is pressed, the selected function starts and the screen
changes to the inputioutputherif y data display screen.
Whether or not the zero suppress function is used for these functions can be selected
by the setting for the parameter.

-0.,.
“O” data are not output (zero suppress function)

0
supple-
ment
1.

2.
For the input, since only the data (other than “O”) that have been output are writ-
ten, “O” is not written,

For the verify, since only the data (other than “O”) that have been output are veri-
fied, verify is not executed for the part which was “O” in output.
—

8-13

—.-.- ————.
------ .,.—— ,-— — .-—.- .,.....— -.—.—--.———
,——-— —--
 \
lN/OUT PARAM MNT O***** NOOOOO
IN

ALL PARAMETER — SETTING

— PARAMETER
— SEQ. PRM.& KEEP MEM
— PITCH ERROR PRM.
T — OPTION PARAMETER
OFFSET
TOOL LIFE
MAC RO.COMMON

MEM STP LSK

—
PARAM. lN/OUT = DATA

-m@lm Emh

Immmmmlmml
I 1

Fig. 8.6 Parameter Input Screen

8.3.2 Background Reset Function

The switch for background reset which provides the function different from the reset switch
arranged on the NC operation panel is available. The background reset function provides
the following functions.

* Interruption of input/output/verify function

●
Turning ON the label skip function
●
Canceling the background alarm (ALM 9000)

The [BGREST] (f4) function soft-key has no influence on the operation even if it is pressed
during operation. If the [BGREST:I (f4) function soft-key is pressed, the “RST” status mes-
sage is not displayed on the screen,

8.3.3 1/0 Device Setting Function

It is possible to set the I/O device by pressing the [RS232C] (f5) function soft-key. For the
operation procedure, refer to the [RS232C] function of the [IN/OUT] job in the [PROG] pro-
cess.

8-14
 8.4 INTERNAL INFORMATIONJOB

8.4 INTERNAL INFORMATION JOB

Selection of each job is possible by pressing the corresponding job soft-keys ([PARAM] (fI),
[DIAGN] (f2), [IN/OUT] (f3), and [DATA] (f4)), or by pressing the [MAINT] process key.

For control of the internal information, the following function soft-keys which are accessible
by pressing the [DATA] job soft-key are provided: [VER NO] (fl), [DUMP] (f2), [KEY-
MEM] (f3), and [SERVO] (f4).

8.4.1 Version Number Function

The version number function is providexl for the purpose of maintenance and it is not used
for daily operation. When the [VER NC)] (f 1) function soft-key is pressed, the version num-
ber list screen is displayed. On this screen, the following information is displayed.

(1) SYSTEM NO

Two system numbers (NC and PC ladder) are displayed.

(2) OPTION VERSION NO

When the option boards are installed, the software version of these c)ption boards is dis-
played.

(3) BASIC VERSION NO

The software version of the basic boards is displayed.

, —
vERSION NO MNT 0***** NOOOOO

ACGC COMBINATION
SYSTEM NO A-PACK :08361-02
NC MAIN: 0S330-13 NC MAIN: 08330-13
LANG: 08332-05 LANG: 0S332-05
BOOT :00356-00 NC COMBINATION
COM : 0s340-03 COM : 0s340-00
DRAW : 0s339-01 DRAW : 0s339-00
GPACK : 0S337-04 C-PACK :08337-04
ACGC : 0s360-06 ACGC :08360-06

USER
LADDER : ●********
GAPL : ****.*.

EDIT STP LSK

—
PARAM. w] lN/OUT DATA

@@mm PTn&
—
\ — -J

mmmmlmmlml
Fig. 8.7 Version Number Display Screen

8-15

-.. ——- ..—.—

—.-——._+.—_______ .,.___, ______ —_._.
8.4.2 Memory Dump Function

The memory dump function is provided for the purpose of maintenance and it is not used
for daily operation. When the [DUMP] (f2) function soft-key is depressed, the memory
dump screen is displayed. This screen is provided for the service technician of YASNAC
NC.

8.4.3 Key Memory Function

When the [KEYMEM] (f3) function soft-key is pressed, the key memory screen is displayed.
On the key memory screen, the history of key entry from the NC operation panel is displayed.
The correspondence between the keys used and the key codes is indicated below.

List of key codes:

Alphabet, numerals, [SHIFT] + A – Z

The characters of the pressed keys are displayed. [SP] is displayed only for space bar.

Special keys:
Soft-keys Process keys and other keys
( ) key ......... MN-L PROG key ......... PRG
A key ......... MN-R SET key ......... SET
v

1 key ......... FI RUN key . . . . . .,. . RUN

2 key ,. .,..,. . F2 MAINT key ......... MNT
3 key ......... F3 COMN key ......... CMN
4 key ......... F4 AUX 1 key ......... ALJX 1
5 key ......... F5 AUX2 key ......... AUX2
Cursor keys [RESET] key ......... RES
➤ key ....... . CAN key ......... CAN
A key ...... .. EOB key ......... EOB
● key ......... INSRT key . . . . . ... . INS
~ key . . . . . . .,. ALTER key ......... ALT
Page keys ERASE key ......... ERS
A key ......... PG-U WR key ......... WR
V key ......... PG-D

8-16
 8.4 INTERNAL
INFORMATION
JOB

8.4.4 Servo Configuration Function

When the [SERVO] (f4) function soft-key is pressed, the servo configuration screen is dis-
played. The screen displays the types of SERVOPACKS and servomotors installed to the
NC.
Note: The servo configuration function is valid to the NC which uses the IR servo.

SERVO MNT ()***** NOOOOO

MEM STP LSK

PARAM. DIAGN, lN/OUT [-l

mmm P3nb

Immlmmmmlml

Fig. 8.8 Servo Configuraticm Screen (Example)

8-17
 MAINTENANCE

Chapter 9 describes the maintenance data that can be

accessed by the users.

9.1 MAINTENANC EDAT A

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.1 Checking the Status of Troubles . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.2 Checking the NC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.3 Display of Alarm Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.4 Cause of Alarm and Corrective Action . . . . . . 9-6
9.1.5 Troubleshooting(1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-7
9.1.6 Troubleshooting(2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-21
9.1.7 Alarms Not Indicated by Alarm Numbers . . . 9-27

9-1
9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

To locate the cause of problems or when contacting your Yaskawa representative for advice,
it is very important that users precisely understand the actual situation. To minimize the
downtime, check the following points precisely.

~ CAUTION
● When an alarm occurs, eliminate its cause and confirm safety before resetting it.
Failure to observe this caution could result in malfunction.

“ For details on trouble relating to the machine-related sequence, refer to the

manual issued by the machine tool builder.

9.1.1 Checking the Status of Troubles

(1) Understanding the Situation

To make clear the status of troubles, check the following items first.

● Type of operation that causes a trouble.

Do other types of operation not cause troubles?

Q Details of troubles.

How, frequency (always or sometimes), and when.

“ Unusual situation when the trouble occurred.

Was there an unusual external occurrence such as power failure or lightning

when the trouble occurred?
● Timing of trouble occurrence.

Had the trouble occurred during or after the operation of the keys or in a specif-
ic operation mode?

(2) Check Items

(a) Troubles related with axis feed and spindle drive

Check the following items.

● Indication of the LEDs on the drive unit

● Fuses and breakers

● Timing of trouble occurrence– when the power is turned ON, during accelera-
tion, during deceleration, or during fixed speed spindle rotation, etc.?

9-2
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

(b) Troubles related with part program

Record the program block data, offset data, workpiece coordinate system offset
data, coordinate system setting data, etc.

9.1.2 Checking the NClnformation

Independent of the contents of the troubles, the following information must be checked.

(1) Hardware Environment

● Machine tool builder’s name

● Delivery date of machine tool

● Type and model name of the machine tool

● Type and model name of the NC and units

(Example)

r NC unit YASNACJ300M 1
Servo drive CACR-IR05SE

Servo motor USAGE1M5A

Spindle drive VSA26 M5

Spindle motor UAASKA-08CA3

+

9-3
(2) NC System Software

YASNAC J300s software is managed by the system numbers.

(a) System number (NC: [lClClClCl-ClCl)

The system number refers to the system software number which consists of five
integer digits and a two-digit revision number. The system number of the basic
software of the NC is displayed at the start-up screen which is displayed when the

r
power is turned ON.
,

YA!3NAC
J 300

AA SELF TESTING !! AA
System No,

/-’’”
A
NC: 01271-00

Immmmlwlmm
Fig. 9.1 Start-up Screen

Note that optional software also has individual system numbers - communication
module, PLC ladder, ACGC applications, etc.

9-4
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

(b) Calling the system number display screen

Follow the procedure indicated below to call the system number display screen.

Press the [MAINT] process key on the NC operation panel.

Press the FUNCTION SELECT key in the function selection mode, and the
function soft-key as shown in Fig. 9.2 is displayed.

STP LSK
II II

Immmmlmmlml
Fig. 9.2

@ Press the [VER.NO] (fl ) function soft-key and the system number display
screen is displayed,

F_====_ O*--

ACGC COMBINATION
NOOOOO

SYSTEM NO A-PACK : 06361-02

NC MAIN: 0833C-I 3 NC MAIN: OB33W13
uNG: 08332-05 LANG: 08332-05
BOOT :08356-00 NC COMBINATION
COM : 0834&03 Cotd : 06346-00
DRAW : 0833%01 DRAw : 06339-00
C-PACK : 08337+4 C-PACK : OK337-04
ACGC : 0836CW36 ACGC : OB36C-06

USER
UDDER : *.$+*..**
GAPL : .**...*.

II EDIT
—
STP LSK

PARAM. = lN/OUT DATA

mmE=mc3h

Fig. 9.3 System Number Display Screen

9.1.3 Display of Alarm Information

If an alarm occurs, the alarm number ancl comment of the alarm of the top priority is displayed
in the normal display area disregarding the selected mode and the screen. For the procedure
to follow to display the alarm information, refer to 7.2, “ALARM DISPLAY JOB”.

9-5
 9.1.4 Cause of Alarm and Corrective Action

The following shows the classification of YASNAC J300 alarms.

Table 9.1 Alarm Numbers and Classification

—
No. Contents Stop Mode output How to Reset

Errors related to edit and operation

[nput error
0000 to 0049 Occurring in the background mode Block stop Reset
alarm
also.

Errors related to edit and operation

[nput error Reset
0050 to 0099 Not occurring in the background Block stop
Power OFF for #0050 and #005 1
dams
mode.

[nput error
0I00 to 0499 Program error Block stop Reset
alarm

Program error [nput error

I000 to 1099 Block stop Reset
DNC, COMS total, etc. alarm

Reset operation after removing the cause.

Machine related error Stop after
With the alarm caused by the machine
2000 to21 99 OT, reference point return, machine deceleration, or Alarm
ready signal, if it occurs in the first pow-
ready, in-position, etc. immediate stop
:r ON operation, it is automatically reset.

Reset after removing the cause.

Servo and spindle related alarm !mmediate stop,
3000 [0 3299 41amr Wkh the SVOFF alarm, it is automatical-
ESP, CPU mutual monitoring or serve, OFF
ly reset by the SVON.

For maintenance
Memory check error CPU halt
[mmediate stop,
8000 to 8049 Watchdog timer error klarm
or serve OFF Switching to the special maintenance
Offline error $creen

Error occurring in background edit-

Background
9000 to 9049 ing (basically the same as with 0000 Not stopped Reset or with reset soft-key
;rror output
to 0049)

No number
indication Battery error
Not stopped No output Changing the battery
IAT indication Encoder alarm
BAT, AXIS
I

No number
indication Key operation error, edit operation
Not stopped Warning Next key operation
Warning error (not serious operation error)
message I

9-6
 9.1 IMAINTENANCEDATA

9.1.5 Troubleshooting(1)

(1) Alarm Nos.: OOIOand 0011 (Parity Error)

Table 9.2 Troubleshooting –Alarm Nos.: OOIOand OO-ll (Parity Error)

.—.
Alarm ~
Cause Check Item Courr:ermeasures
No. ~
—
0010 TH error ● In the tape mode operation. ● Clean the tape reader.
Check thenumber ofpunched holes foreachcharacter. Anala]m ● Check thetape for problems.
occurs inthe following cases: ● If the punched hole is faulty or
EIAcode: Anevennumber of holes fluffy, chan~e the tape.
lSOcode: Anoddnumber of holes ● If the tape reader is faulty, change
<The following explanation is given assuming the EIA code.> the tape reader.

............................
~ ~(mq~

LSK _ RR

‘R ~’
1 block of data
Maximum of 128 characters
~
EOB: End of block code
EOR: Rewind stop code
— ..—
● In the memory or edit mode operation If the JANCD-JPO 1 board or an ex-
Check the machining program storage area. pansion board (JANCD-JMMO 1) is
faulty, change the faulty board.

0011 ~ TV error ● In the tape mode operation If the tape for which TV check is
Check the tape if TV check is allowed. (The number of charac - not allowecl is used, change the set-
ters in a block must be even, including the EOB code.) ting for the pwameters to turn OFF
the TV check function.
pm0004 D 1 = O
pm0006 D 1 = O
Or correct the tape so that the TV
check is allowed.
—

9-7

. .
(2) Alarm Nos.: 0016,0017,0018,9016, 9017,9018 (RS-232C Error)

Table 9.3 Countermeasures – Alarm Nos.: 0016, 0017.0018.9016.9017.

9018 (RS-232C Error)

Alarm
No.
Cause
I Check Item Countermeasures

0016 Transmission error Check if the RS-232C transmission Check the grounding of cables.
9016 error (high noise level) occurs.

0017 Overrun Check if more than 10 characters

9017 have been read after the output of
the RS-232C interface stop code.

0018 Line selection Check the RS-232C interface line ● Check the RS-232C device
9018 selection for error. specifications.
● Check the setting forparame-
ters.

Note: Nos. 0016, 0017, and 0018 are for online and Nos. 9016, 9017, and 9018 are for offline,

tr,31 UNIT
PORT
BORS
STOP BIT
Is 1/0 cievice NO BITS
setting OK? PARITY
X ON/OFF
RTS CONTROL
<> DR LINE CONTROL
YES
NC DATA SPECIAL CON-
TROL
I

Detail check is necessaty.

(Contact your Yaskawa
representative.)

Fig. 9.4 RS-232C Interface Troubleshooting Flowchart

9-9
 9.1 MAINTENANCED
ATA

(a) Setting the interface

When the RS-232C interface is used, baud rate, stop bit length, and use of control
code must be set in the following procedure.

@ Press the [MAINT] process key on the NC operation panel.

@ Press the [IN/OUT] (f3) job soft-key.

@ Press the [RS232C] (f5) function soft-key to select the I/O device setting func-
tion.

@ Set the necessary RS-232C communication parameters.

—~
PROGRAM 1/0 MNT 012345 N12345

lN/OUT UNIT SET IN OUT

PORT ‘40.1 N0,2

UNIT RS232C RS232C
BORS 4800 9600
STOP BIT 2BIT 1BIT
BITS W31TS 7BITS
PARITY OFF EVEN
X ON/OFF ON OFF
RST CONTROL ON OFF
PARITY ISO ON OFF

MEM STP LSK

PARAM. DIAGN [ llWOU~

“mmcz@lm Elh

lmmlmmmlmfs!l

Fig. 9.5 Setting for the Serial Interface

 (b) Setting for the serial interface

For the serial interface, setting is possible for the following parameters,

Table 9.4 Serial Interface Setting

Menu Item I Input I output I

YE tape reader YE tape puncher
UNIT (device)
General-purpose RS-232C General-purpose RS-232C

NO. 1 NO. 2
PORT
NO. 1 NO. 2

75 75

150 150

I 300 I 300

600 600
BORS (baud rate)
1200 1200 +

I 2400 I 2400 I
I 4800 I 4800 I
I 9600 I 9600 I
1 bit 1 bit
STOP BIT
t--- 2 bits 2 bits

7 bits 7 bits
BITS (bit length)
8 bits 8 bits

Even parity Even parity

PARITY (parity scheme) Odd parity Odd parity

I None I None I
X ON/OFF (control code)
*’=+
Supported Supported
RTS CONTROL
None None

Supported Supported
PARITY 1S0
None None

Note: Although two RS-232C ports are provided, these two ports cannot be used at the same time. For these two ports,
setting can be made independent y from each other.

9-1o
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

Selecting the input/output port

When changing the port to be used, follow the procedure indicated below.

@ Movethe cursor totherequired portnumber.

@ Press the FUNCTION SELECTkey.

@ Press thesoft-key comes130nding totheitem to beset, andthedata arewritten

to the cursor position.

Tables 9.5 and 9.6 show the RS-232C voltage level and the interface connection
cable, respectively.

Table 9.5 RS-232C Voltage Level

Vo < –3V
~w _
Function
—
Signal Status Mark Space
. —
Logic 1 0
— E= —

Table 9.6 RS-232C Interface Connection Cable (A)

H
NC Side (DB-9P) Device Side
Connection
Symbol Signal Name Pin No. Symbol

FG Frame grounding 1

SD I Send data I 2

RD I Receive data I 3

RS I Request to send I 4

0
‘-T=H
—
l–-()~
.
ER ]

9-11

-.
 (d) Example of port connection

An example of connection at RS-232C port is indicated below. Fig. 9.6 shows the
connection of standard RS-232C tape reader.

.—.
JANCD-JCPO1
—.— .-—
I

r
Ta~_ader—- (PTR)
1 I 1
CN02-7

I
CN02-6
CN02-5
I
CN02-4
CN02-3
CN02-2
CN02-1 I

I
I

L_—._! i L-—___
DB-25S
J
— J !uuaAL-1
1012O-3OOOVE

Note:Cable length between the tape reader andthe main board (JANCD-JCPO1) must be within 3 m.
If a cable longer than 3 m must be used, contact your Yaskawa representative,

Fig. 9.6 Connection of No. 1 RS-232C Port

9-12
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

(3) Alarm No.: 1099 (High TemperiXure)

Table 9.7 Countermeasures --Alarm No.: 1099 (High Temperature)

—
Cause Check Item Countermeasures

Ambient temperature of the ● Open the NC unit door to check if ● If the fan is faulty, it is necessary
NC rack exceeded the speci- the cooling fan is operating cor- to change it. Contact your Yaska-
fied value* due to the failure rectl y. wa representative.
of cooling fan. ● Make sure that air is blowing out Q If the cooling duct is blocked, re-
*: 700c k 30c when through the ventilation port of the move interfering object and s~t
measured above cooling duct. the cooling fan.
CPS- 18. ● Make sure that the ventilation
port of the cding duct is not
blocked.
— —_——
Internal temperature of the Allow the power supply unit to cool It is necessary to change the power
power supply unit is high. by turning OFF the power with the supply unit. Cc,ntact your Yaskawa
NC unit door opened. If the alarm representative.
occurs even after the power supply
unit has been ccoled for 30 minutes,
the power supply unit will be faulty.

Ambient temperature of the ● Measure ambient temperature, This is not the failure of the NC
NC unit is high*. ● If the NC uni[ is subject to direct unit. Remove the cause.
*: Allowable temperature sunlight, the NC unit temperature
range for operation is will exceed the allowable limit.
o to 40”C.
—

9-13
(4) Alarm Nos.: 2061 to 2068 (Reference Point Return Area Error)

Table 9.8 Troubleshooting – Alarm Nos.: 2061 to 2068

(Reference Point Return Area Error)

Cause Check Item Countermeasures

The reference Deceleration limit switch (DECLS) Return the axis to a position on the
point return start #3073 DO ( 1st axis) Execute reference deceleration LS or away from it
point return again
point is at the #3073 D1 (2nd. axis) and, then, execute reference point
while observing the
zero point side #3073 D2 (3rd axis) t/O signal monitor return once again.
of the decelera- #3073 D3 (4th axis) screen,
tion limit switch. #3073 D4 (5th axis)

If reference point ret.um is started from a point

located at the reference point side of DECLS
(point C) as shown below, an alarm occurs.
Note: This error check is not made before the execution
of manual reference point return after the power
is turned ON.
Feedrate

:A
Feedrate
b

-–-~<oiF

Approach feed- Compare the setting for the approach feedrate Change the setting for parameters
!ate is too fast. parameter with the parameter list. pm2521 to pm2525 to an appropri-
ate value.

(5) Alarm Nos.: 2071 to 2078,2081 to 2088

(Reference Point Return F’osition Error)

Table 9.9 Troubleshooting – Alarm Nos.: 2071 to 2078,2081 to 2088

(Reference Point Return Position Error)

Cause Check Item Countermeasures

E
Alarm in manual Check if the error occurs every time. Contact machine tool builder or
reference point your Yaskawa representative.
return operation

Alarm in auto- G28: Check if the alarm occurs every time. Contact machine tool builder or
matic referemce your Ymkawa representative.
point return op-
G27: Check the point specified in the program Review the program.
eration
if it agrees with the zero point.
—

9-14
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

(6) Alarm Nos.: 2101 to2108 (P-!3ET Error)

The P-SET alarm occurs if the error between the position specified in the program and
the actual machine position is larger than the value set forparameterspm1321 (1st axis)
to pm 1325 (5th axis) in the following modes of operation.

At the completion of positioning in GOO,G27, G28, G29, G30, etc., error detect ON (1/O
monitor parameter #3004 D4 = 1), and G04 (dwell).

If error pulses have been accumulated, check the number of accum ulated pulses on the
error pulse display screen before contacting your Yaskawa representative.

(7) Alarm No.: 3000 (Servo Power Not Ready)

Table 9.10 Troubleshooting - Alarm No.: 3000 (Servo Power Not Ready)
. —
Cause Check Item Countermeasures

Secondary power supply is If the NC RESET switch, etc. is depressed Depress the POWER ON
not applied. after depressing the POWER ON button button again.
once, or after clearing the emergency stop
or alarm state, the alarm message is dis-
played. This does not indicate the occur-
rence of alarm.
—
With the secondary power Check the following on the 1/0 monitor Contact your Yaskawa rep-
ON 1/0 input specification, screen: resentative.
the input is not turned ON. #3005 DO= 1 (SVON)
(For the automatic servo #3503 DO= 1 (SVONS)
power ON)
—
Emergency stop signal stays Check if alaml No. 3002 is displayed Reset the emergency stop
ON. (#3503 D4 = 1) on the screen. input signal.

The secondary power ON Check the alalm indication for other alarms. Take appropriate measures
signal is turned OFF due to by referring to the alarm
some other alarm. code.
—

9-15

—.-—_ .._ ._. __..,,___ —.-- =....-. — —.-. ..--... —. —... —.- .. .—. ——-——————
 91-6
.aA!]u]uWld9J
F2M12~W~NIOk KSUlU03‘SCEWJaqloUI :3]o.N
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

(12) Alarm Nos.: 3081 t03088(Broken PGCable)

The A and B phase signal cables a~e checked for breakage.

Table 9.13 Troubleshooting – Alarm Nos.: 3081 to 3088 (Broken pG Cable)

Cause Check Item Cc)untermeasures

Signal cables between the Make sure that the cable connectors are If they are loose or discon-
NC and the AC servo drive plugged into the connectors securely. nected, connect them cor-
unit are broken or loose. rectl y.
—.
Faulty PG cable breakage Check if the alarm occurs in the first de- Contac: your Yaskawa rep-
detection circuit pressing of POWER ON button even if the resentxive.
cables are connected correctly.
—. —
Error in motor type parame- Check the motc)r type setting parameters Correct the setting for the
ter setting (pm 1061 to pm 1065) if “O” has been set. motor type setting parame-
ters (prl 1061 to pm 1065).
—

(13)AIarm No. 3091 (Broken Spindle PG Cable)

The A, B, and C phase signal cables are checked for breakage.

Table 9.14 Troubleshooting – Alarm No.: 3091 (Broken Spindle PG Cable)

——
Cause Check Item Countermeasures 1
Signal cables between the Make sure that the cable connectors are If they are loose or discon-

1
NC and the AC servo drive plugged into the connectors securely. nected, connect them cor-
unit are broken or loose. rect] y.
— —— —
Faulty PG cable breakage Check if the alarm occurs in the first press- Contact your Yaskawa rep-
detection circuit ing of POWER ON button even if the cables resentative.
are connected correctly.

Faulty PG If an alarm occurs during low speed opera- Contact your Yaskawa rep-
tion, the PG codd be faulty. resentative.
——

(14) Alarm Nos.: 3121 to3125 (Excessive Speed)

This alarm is detected if the motor speed exceeds 1.2 times the maximum motor speed.
Contact your Yaskawa representat ive. ●

9-17
(15)Alarm Nos.: 3161 to3165 (Absolute Error)

Malfunction of the absolute encoder is detected. Contact your Yaskawa representative

after checking the following:

. Whether the alarm occurs immediately after the control power is turned ON.

. Whether the alarm is cleared when the power is turned OFF and then turned
ON again.

c Whether the battery alarm occurs at the same time.

(16) Alarm Nos.: 3181 to 31851 (Position Error)

Malfunction of the PG pulse (counter in the absolute encoder is detected. Contact your
Yaskawa representative after checking the following:

● Whether the alarm occurs immediately after the control power is turned ON.

● Whether the alarm occurs frequently during operation.

(17)Alarm Nos.: 3201 to 3205 (Servo Drive Unit Communication Error)

Communication error between the NC and the AC servo drive unit is detected. Contact
your Yaskawa representative.

(18)Alarm Nos.: 3301 to 3305 (Over current)

Contact your Yaskawa representative after checking the following:

● Whether the alarm cjccurs immediately after the control power is turned ON.

c Whether the alarm occurs after turning ON the main power.

(19)Alarm No.: 3311 to 3315 (MCCB Trip)

Contact your Yaskawa representative after checking the following:

● Whether the alarm cjccurs immediately after the control power is turned ON.

● Whether the alarm occurs after turning ON the main power.

9-18
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

(20) Alarm No.: 3321 t03325 (Regeneration Error)

Contact your Yaskawa representative after checking the following:

● Whether the alarm occurs immediately after the control power is turned ON.

. Whether the alarm OCCUI-S

after turning ON the main power.

(21 )Alarm No.: 3331 to 3335 (Over Voltage)

Contact your Yaskawa representative after checking the following:

● Whether the alarm occurs at the start of motor rotation.

c Whether the alarm occurs during deceleration.

(22) Alarm No.: 3341 to 3345 (Under Voltage)

Contact your Yaskawa representative after checking the following:

● Whether the alarm occurs after turning ON the main power.

(23) Alarm No.: 3351 to 3355 (Heat Sink Overheat)

Table 9.15 Troubleshooting - Alarm No.: 3351 to 3355 (Heat Sink Overheat)

Cause Check Item Countermeasures

Faulty control board Check whether the alarm occurs immediate- Contmt your Yaskawa rep-
ly after the control power is turned ON. resentative.

Fan stop ● Check whether the alarm occurs during Conta:t your Yaskawa rep-
operation (alarm reoccurs if the control resentative.
power is turned ON after turning it OFF
once, or the operation restarts when the
NC is reset after several minutes.)
● Check whether the fan is rotating.

r
(24) Alarm No.: 3361 to 3365 (Wire Break in Current Instruction Cable)

Contact your Yaskawa representa.tive after checking the following: @

● Whether the alarm occurs immediately sifter the control power is turned ON.

● Whether an alarm other than cument instruction cable breakage occurs.

9-19

—-—..——...—. —.— .— . ————

(25) Alarm No.: 3371 to 3375 (Open Phase Detection)

Contact your Yaskawa representative after checking the following:

● Whether the alarm occurs immediately after the control power is turned ON.

● Whether the alarm occurs after turning ON the main power.

9-20
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

9.1.6 Troubleshooting (2)

For the system equipped with the drive unit compatible with YENET1 200, check is made
by both the drive unit itself and the NC unit. If a fault is detected, the drive unit notifies the
NC unit the alarm information in two systems.

The drive unit first gives the NC unit the information on the occurrence of an alarm (alarm
No. 3101 to No. 3105 and No. 3201) and then the content of the alarm. The NC unit displays
alarm No, 3100 when it receives the alarm information from drive units.

Therefore, three alarms usually occur if an error is detected with the drive unit. If fuse blown
occurs with the X-axis servo unit, alarm No. 3100, No. 3101, and No. 3021 occur.

(1) Alarm Nos.: 3021 to 3025 (Fuse Blown)

The main circuit of the servo unit will be faulty.

The servo unit detects the error.

Contact your Yaskawa representat ive.

(2) Alarm Nos.: 3041 to 3045, ancl 3051 (Excessive Follow-up Error)

This alarm occurs if the follow-up error exceeds 120% of the error in rapid traverse
(100%) operation.

The servo unit detects the alarm.

Improper gain adjustment is one of the reasons.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

(3) Alarm Nos.: 3061 to 3065 (Overload)

This alarm occurs if the load exceeds the rated torque considerably.

The servo unit detects the error.

Review the cutting conditions. Contact your Yaskawa representa.tive after checking
whether the alarm occurs simply after turning the control power C~N.

9-21
(4) Alarm Nos.: 3081 to 3085 and 3091 (Broken PG Cable)

The encoder signal cable or the encoder itself will be faulty.

The servo unit or the inverter detects the error.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

(5) Alarm Nos.: 3101 to 31051 (Servo Alarm)

This alarm occurs when the NC unit detects the alarm signal output from the servo unit.

Check the contents of the alarm by displaying the servo alarm display screen (press [F2]
of the alarm job in the common process.).

(6) Alarm Nos:: 3111 to3115 (Servo Communication Alarm)

Probable causes of this alarm are broken YENET1 200 communication cable, loose
cable connection, and communication processing error.

The servo unit detects the ala.rrn.

Contact your Yaskawa representative after making sure that the cable is securely con-
nected.

(7) Alarm Nos.: 3121 to3125 (Excessive Speed)

This alarm occurs if the motor speed exceeds 4950 r/rein or the value set for the parame-
ter.

The servo unit detects the alarm.

It is necessary to check whether the connection to the encoder is correct.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

(8) Alarm Nos.: 3141 to 3145 (Run-away Prevention)

The encoder will be faulty.

The servo unit detects the alarm.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

9-:22
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

(9) Alarm Nos.: 3151 t03155(Phase Detection Error)

The encoder signal cable or the encoder itself will be faulty.

The servo unit detects the error.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

(1 O)Alarm Nos.: 3161 to3165 (Absolute Error)

This alarm occurs if the absolute value data cannot be received correctly in one to two
seconds after turning ON the power to the encoder.

The servo unit detects the error,

The encoder or the servo unit will be faulty.

Contact your Yaskawa representative,

(ll)Alarm Nos.: 3181 to 3185 (Atxolute Position Error)

The number of feedback pulses is checked every turn of the encoder and this alarm oc-
curs if there is an error in the counted number of pulses.

The servo unit detects the alarm.

The encoder or the servo unit will be faulty, or malfunction could have occurred due
to noises.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

(12) Alarm No.: 3201 (Inverter Alarm)

This alarm occurs when the NC unit detects the alarm signal output from the inverter.

Check the contents of the alarm by displaying the servo alarm display screen (press [F2]
of the alarm job in the common process.).

(13) Alarm Nos.: 3281 to 3285, 3291 (YENET1 200 command time-out)

This alarm occurs when the YENET1200 communication lines fail to get ready. m

The NC units detects the alarm. E

The servo unit or the inverter unit will be faulty.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

9-23
(14)Alarm Nos.: 3301 to 3305 (Over Current)

The servo unit detects the alarm.

The servo unit will be faulty if the alarm occurs before the operation is started after tur-
ningthe power ON,

If the alarm occurs during operation, ground fault of the motor will be the cause.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

(15)Alarm Nos.: 3331 to 3335 (Over Voltage)

The servo unit detects the alarm.

If the alarm occurs when the power is turned ON to the spindle, the input voltage will
be too high.

If the alarm occurs during motor operation, it is necessary to review the operation condi-
tions; lower motor speed, for example.

If the alarm occurs when the servo control power is turned ON, the servo unit will be
faulty.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

(16)Alarm Nos.: 3351 to 3355 (Heat Sink Overheat)

This alarm occurs when the heat sink temperature is abnormally high.

The servo unit detects the alalm.

If this alarm occurs, turn OFF the power and allow the heat sink to cool. After that turn
the power ON again.

If the alarm occurs immediate y after turning the power ON, the servo unit will be faulty.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

(17) Alarm Nos.: 3381 to 3385,3391 (YENET1200 Communication Error)

This is an communication errclr between the NC unit and the servo unit or between the
NC unit and the inverter unit; the NC unit detects the alarm when no answer is returned
for the command output by the NC unit.

The servo unit or the inverter unit will be faulty, or the cable will not be connected se-
curely.

Contact your Yaskawa representative,

9-24
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

(18)Alarm Nos.: 3401 to 3405 (Converter Alarm)

This alarm occurs due to the following reasons: blown fuse, regenlaration alarm, open
phase, or faulty board.

The servo unit detects the alarm.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

(19)Alarm Nos.: 3411 to 3415 (Servo Unit Alarm)

This alarm occurs due to the following reasons: destroyed parameter setting, faulty cur-
rent detector, encoder’s battery alarm, memory error, or sensor error.

The servo unit detects the alarm.

The servo unit or the motor will be faulty.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

(20) Alarm No.: 3421 (Inverter Unit Alarm)

This alarm occurs when the inverter detects an alarm other than converter alarm, broken
PG cable, excessive follow-up error, and communication error.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

(21 )Alarm Nos.: 3425, 3431 to 34(35 (YENET1 200 Watchdog Error)

This alarm occurs when the NC unit detects the watchdog error with the inverter unit
or the servo unit.

The inverter unit or the servo unit will be faulty.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

(22) Alarm Nos.: 3441 to 3445 (Ground Fault)

This alarm occurs when the servo unit detects the alarm when the power is turned ON.

Motor insulation is faulty. ●

Contact your Yaskawa representative. El

9-25
(23) Alarm No.: 3451 and 3452 (Follow-up Error)

This alarm occurs when the follow-up error exceeds the value set for the servo unit pa-
rameter.

The servo unit detects the alarm.

If this alarm occurs during axis feed over a long distance, it is necessary to either lower
the command speed or increase the gain.

If the motor does not rotate, the servo unit will be faulty.

Contact your Yaskawa representative.

9-:26
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

9.1.7 Alarms Not Indicated by Alarm Numbers

Troubles caused by abnormal functioning of the NC, but not indicated by an alarm number,
and required countermeasures are indicated below. If the troubles cannot be cleared by fol-
lowing the procedure indicated below, contact the machine tool builder cr your Yaskawa rep-
resentative.

(1) Power Cannot be Turned ON

(a) Power is not supplied to the NC

Check the SOURCE LED (green) of the DC power supply (CPS- 18FB) in the
CPU module if it is lit.

Check the input AC power across CN03- 1 and CN03-5 terminals of the DC
power supply (CPS- 18FB).

Specification: 200/220/230 VAC -15 to +1 O%, 50/60 Hz *2 Hz

5 ‘R s 1

‘6 2

7 4
\ i
CN 03

(b) Alarm LED on the DC power supply(CPS-18FB) is lit

Table 9.16 Alarm LED: on DC power supply (CPS-18FB)

SignalName
~)x ‘Unc’’on=
Lit Power is input.

:a =
SOURCE Green
Not lit Power is not input.
Normal
=
Power ON status POWER ON Green Lit DC power is output.

+ 5 V error Red Lit +5 V overvoltage or overcurrent

Error
+24 V error Lit +24 V overvoltage or overcurrent
indication
Overheat Red LiE Overheat of components in the NC unit

9-27
 Check the DC output voltage at CNO1 terminals of the DC power supply
(CPS-18FB).
40

5
a +5V

024 +24V
CNO1
1

+5 V Across CNOI-I and CNO1-4

+24 V Across CNO1 -3 and CNO1 -5

(2) No Display is Given on the CRT

If nothing is displayed on the CRT, the CRT itself might be faulty, or the display circuit
or connection cables might be faulty. When nothing is displayed even if the power can
be turned ON to the NC, check the cable connection to the operation panel and also the
connectors.

(3) Handle Mode Operation is Impossible

(a) Handle mode signal is not input

@ Check the bit status of UO monitor #3000.

D2=1
Other bits (DO, D1, D3 to D7) = O
@ Check the mode display given in the normal display area on the screen.

(b) Axis selection signal is not input

~ I/O monitor
Check whether one of the following bits is ON.

#3070

&a
Do=] 1st axis
Dl=l 2nd axis

D2=1 3rd axis

D3=1 4th axis

D4=1 5th axis

9-28
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

● No. 2 handle
Check whether one of the following bits is ON.

#3080
DI)=l Ist axis

Dl=l 2nd axis

E]

D4=1 5th axis

~

● No. 3 handle
Check whether one of the following bits is ON.

D4=1 5th axis

1

(c) There is no input to handle PG

@ Check the input voltage (5 V) at the handle PG terminal.

@ Check the handle PG signal cable connector if it is securely plugged in.

(d) Handle PG is faulty

Check the following (counter monitor) on the I/O screen if the values change ac-
cording to the operation of the pulse handle.

#3037 (No. 1 handle)

#3038 (No. 2 handle)
#3039 (No. 3 handle)

9-29
 (e) Other related parameters

Check the setting for the following parameters.

Parameter pm2860 (linear axis)

Maximum feedrate for handle operation

k
Parameter pm2861 (rotary axis)

Acceleration/deceleration tmle constant

Parameters pm2561 to pm2565

LYY3EzL
Pulse multiplication ratio of” X 100’ is
Parameter pm2549

(4) Jog Operation is Impossible

(a) Jog mode signal is not input

Check the bit status of 100 monitor #3000.

Dl=l
Other bits (DO, D2 to D7) = O

(b) Axis move direction signal is not input.

Check the bit status of IhO monitor #3071 and #3072,

B=

I D4 I +5thaxis I D4 I -5thaxis I

9-30
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

(c) Jog feedrate signal is not input, or job feedrate setting parameter is incor-
rect

Check the bit status on the I/O monitor screerl whether it changes according to the
operation of the JOG FEEDF.ATE switch, and also check if the setting for the pa-
rameters is correct.

Table 9.17 og Feedrate

r Step D4
JV16
0
o
1/0 Monitor #3002
D3
JV8
0
0
D2
JV4
()
0
D1
JV2
o
0
DO
JV 1
0
1
Jog Feedrate

Set for parameter pm2400

Set for parameter pm2401
o 0 i o 1 0 Set for parameter pm2402
14 o 0 ~ o 1 1 Set fo~arameter pm2403
Is o 0 i ‘1 o 0 Set for parameter pm2404
%E2

1=++-+--HH+t-H
I
8
9
10
Set for parameter pm2408
Set for parameter pm2409 –
I 11
I 12
13
t-- 14

L.-.L.L
16 o 1 1 1 1 I Set for parameter pm2415
t-- 17
I 18
19
* 20
I 21

L2---
1-----23
24

l-.-2z-
L--z-
27
28
t=
I 29
I 30
1 31
I 32

9-31
 (d) Axis interlock is input

Check the bit status on the I/O monitor screen. If “O”, the corresponding axis can-
not move.

(e) Machine lock is ON

Even when the machine lock function is ON, position display changes. Check
the input of the machine lock switch (1/O monitor, #3006 D5 = O). If” 1”, the
axes do not move.

Check the internal toggle switch (parameter pmOOOOD 1 = O). If” 1”, the axes
do not move.

(5) Manual Rapid Traverse is Impossible

(a) The rapid mode is not selected

Check the bit status of IJO monitor #3000.

DO=l
Other bits (D1 to D7) = O

(b) Axis move direction signal is not input.

Check the bit status of I/O monitor #3071 and #3072.

I #3071 I #3072 I

9-:32
 !3.1MAINTENANCE DATA

(c) Rapid traverse override isnot input

@ Check tie bitstatus ontl~e VOmonitor screen whetier itchanges according

to the operation of the RAPID TRAVERSE RATE OVERRIDE switch, and
also check if the setting for the parameters is correct.

Table 9.18 Input Status and Rapid Traverse Rate

s I
InputStatusof
#3003
Rapid Traverse Rate
I
1
I
I
1

33==
[Setting for

as=~=]
[Setting for [Setting for [Setting for

F. (set for pm2447)

[Setting for

@ For the 6-step specification (pm2000 D3 = 1), refer to Table 9.19.

Table 9.19

Input Status Rapid Traverse Rate

ROV4 ROV2 ROVI Ist to 5th Axis I

1 0 1 F2 (set for prn2449)

1 0 0 F1 (set for pm244S)

o 1 1 100%

o 1 0 50?io

o 0 1 zfi~o

o 0 0 Fo (set for pm2447)

1

(d) Parameter setting is incorrect

Refer to Tables 9.18 and 9.19.

9-33
 (e) Axis interlock is input

Check the bit status on the I/O monitor screen. If “O”, the corresponding axis can-

s
not move.

#3078

Do=] 1st axis

D1=I 2nd axis

D2=I 3rd axis

D3=1 4th axis

D4=1 5th axis

(f) Machine lock is ON

● Even when the machine lock function is ON, position display changes. Check
the input of the machine lock switch (110 monitor, 3006 D5 = O). If” 1”, the
axes do not move.

● Check the internal toggle switch (parameter pmOOOOD1 = O). If” 1”, the axes
do not move.

(6) Manual Reference Point Return is Incorrect

The following explanation is given assuming that jog and rapid traverse are executed
correctly.

(a) Manual reference point return signal is not input

Check the I/O monitor #3007 DO. The status must be” 1”.

Otherwise, the axis continues moving to OT at the same feedrate even if it reaches
point A. See Fig. 9.7.

(b) Jog or rapid traverse mode is not selected

I/O monitor #3000 DO or D1 must be”1”.

9-34
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

(c) Deceleration limit switch signal is not input.

Check I/O monitor #3073 DO to D4 while moving an axis at a slow feedrate such
as in jog operation. Make sure feedrate changes as shown in Fig. 9.7.

Feedrate
Rapidtraverse (pm2001topm2805) Approachfeedrate (pm2521to pm2528)

Creep feadrate (pn]253tto 2535)

Traveld!stanc~,fPm4451to pm4455)

14:h&=Fe.rat)squ.ce

#3073 ~Ukoiz:.ign.

Fig. 9.7 Reference Point Fleturn Control 1/0 Signals

(d) Parameter setting is incorrect.

Check the setting for the related parameters against the parameter sheet by refer-
ring to Fig. 9.7.

(e) Position of the dog for the deceleration limit switch is incorrect.

If the dog position is incorrect, the zero point could be shifted by one turn of the
motor.

(f) Others (loose coupling or dog)

If another adjustment is incorrect, zero point could be shiftecl at random.

9-35

——-.
.—.—.—. .—..- .—..—..—- ———
———--
(7) Cycle Start is Impossible

(a) Cycle start signal is not input, or feed hold signal is open.

Check the I/O monitor #3003 DO whether it goes” 1” when the cycle start switch
is pressed. In this case, the feed hold signal must be open; this can be confh-med
by I/O monitor #3003 D [ = 1.

(b) Start interlock signal is input.

If I/O monitor #3004 D2 = 1, cycle start is impossible.

(c) The NC is in the reset status.

Normal status: I/O monitor #3500 D 1 = O

Also check the external reset signal status.
Normal status: I/O monitor #3004 D1 = O

(8) GO1, G02, or G03 Mode Operation is Impossible

(a) The spindle is in the speed agreed status.

Check whether parameter pm 1000 D7 = 1.

If it is” 1”, check whether the spindle is in the speed agreed status by I/O monitor
#3111.

(b) FEEDRATE OVERRIE~E switch setting is OVO.

Check the setting for I/O monitor #311 1 DO to D4 whether the setting is correct.

9-:36
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

(c) lnthed~run mode, setting forjogfeedrate is incorrect

Table 9.20
1/0 Monitor#3040
D4 D3 D2 D1 DO Feedrate Override (Automatic Operation)

0V16 0V8 0V4 0V2 (X/l

o 0 0 0 0 09Z0—
o 0 0 0 1 10% —
o 0 0 1 0 20% ——
0 0 0 I 1 B()~o

0 0 1 0 0 40’70
0 0 1 0 1 50%
0 0 I 1 0 60%
0 0 1 1 1 70%
0 1 0 0 0 80%
0 1 0 0 1 90%
0 1 0 1 0 I0070
0 1 0 1 I I I0%
o 1 1 0 0 I 2070
0 1 1 0 1 130Y0
o 1 I 1 0 140?lo
o 1 1 1 1 — 150’%0—
1 0 0 0 0 — 160%
1 0 0 0 1 170%
1 0 0 1 0 18070 —
1 0 0 1 1 190%
I o I o 0 200%
1 0 I o 1 220?10
I o 1 1 0 24(FZO
1 0 I 1 I 260% —
1 1 0 0 0 280T0
I 1 0 0 I 300Y0
1 1 0 1 0 340V0
1 1 0 1 1 380% —
1 1 I o 0 42070
1 1 1 0 1 4609’0
1 1 I 1 0 500YO”
—
1 1 1 1 1 5409.

(d) Start interlock signal is input.

If I/O monitor #3004 D2 = 1, start interlock is ON.

Normal: #3004 D2 = O

9-37
 (e) Axis interlock is input.

Check I/O monitor #3087 DO to D4.

Normal: #3078 DO to D4 = 1

(f) Setting of the servo system is incorrect.

Check whether the axes can be moved manually.

(9) Spindle Rotation is Impossible

(a) Error in a program (no S command, or no spindle start M code)

Check the contents of the program on the [RUN] screen.

(b) Start signal has not been input.

Check the output signals (#1 100s) on the I/O monitor screen.

(c) Spindle rotation command has not been output.

Check #3654 to #3656 on the 110 monitor screen.

(d) The spindle drive is in the alarm status.

Check the alarm indication of the spindle drive.

(e) Combination of GRO and SOR is incorrect, or “O’ is input for parameter
pm1412 or pm1413.

Check I/O monitor #311 O by referring to Table 9.21.

Table 9.21 Input of GRO and SOR and S4-digit Command Analog Voltage

S4-digit Command Analog Voltage

=
Voltage corresponding to the spindle speed specified in the NC
010
program.
o 1 Voltage corresponding to parameter pm 1412

1 0 Voltage corresponding to parameter pm 1413

* 1 1 Ov

Note: If” l” is set for parameter pm 1O(MD5, SSTP input is reversed

9-38
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

(f) Setting for the parameters related to spindle operation is incorrect.

Check the setting for the related parameters.

l--%%+=
Spindle Motor
Rotation Command Gear range 1 Gear range 2 Gear range 3 Gear range 4
/

‘O” +-”’’”--”---”
“---------”;-
..-.
A...

4~
‘f t
.
,..
. ..’
.. . . .
,.,’ ...’.. ----
..
,.. ,, -.. .
,,
,..’.
/.-.
,,
.-
.-,
... .-’

:moE
.:.:.,
.,:’,>..:.
:-
— Spindle Speed
(rlmin)

L pm1410 _ pm1411
_ pm1406 - -~ pm1407

Fig. 9.8

(1O)FIN Wait Status after Execution of Spindle Related Commands

If sequence processing is interrupted waiting for a signal, the NC enters the FIN wait
status.

(a) Spindle speed agree signal is not input.

If the NC enters this status after the execution of such as “M03 S 100” commands, ●

check whether #311 1 D6 = 1 (waiting for FIN).

E
Check the I/O signals of#1000s at the I/O section by referring to the ladder chart
supplied by the machine tool builder.

9-39
 (b) Spindle zero speed signal is not input.

If the NC enters this status after the execution of “MOS” command, check the I/O
signals of#1000s at the I/O section by referring to the ladder chart supplied by the
machine tool builder.

(c) Others

If the NC enters this status after the execution of “Ml 9“ or “M20” (spindle orienta-
tion command), check the I/O signals related with spindle orientation by referring
to the ladder chart supplied by the machine tool builder.

(11) Edit Operation is Impossible

(a) The edit lock signal is input.

Check I/O monitor #3007 D2.

Normal: #3007 D2 = O
If “#3007 D2 = 1”, program edit is impossible.

(b) Edit lock is set by the parameter (pmOOOOD7).

Set “pmOOOOD7 = O“ to cancel the edit lock setting.

(c) Others

@ The corresponding alarm message is displayed.

OVER MEM CA.P !

TOO MANY PROGS !
ALREADY IN !
@ Delete unnecessary l?rograms and edit the program again.

(12)Skip Function (G31 ) Failure

(a) The skip signal has not been input.

@ Check ON/OFF status of the skip signals by checking the I/O monitor #3514
DO to D2.

@ Check the operation of proximity switches, etc.

9-40
 9.1 IMAINTENANCEDATA

(b) Parameter setting is incorrect.

~ Check the setting forpararneter pm2001 DO. If the setting forpm2440 is “O”
while “pm2001 DO = 1”, an axis does not move.

Feedrate in the skip feed mode (G31 ) is the feedrate set for

H d
pm2001 DO= 1
parameter pm2440.

Feedrate in the skip feed mode(G31) is the feedrate specified

pm2001 DO= O
with an F code.
—

@ Check the setting for parameterspm5011 DO to D2.

Set the signal status at the start of the processing when the SKIP signal is input.

Fig. 9.9
‘24”1r“ A B

If “O, processing starts at the point where 24 V faI1s to O V.

After changing the setting, be sure to turn OFF the power once and turn it ON
again.

Check the setting for parameters pm5010 DO to D2

The setting for this parameter determines ENABLJYDISABLE of the control

circuit for the “SKIP” input.
Set”1” to use the skip function.

After changing the setting for this parameter always turn OFF the power once
and then turn it ON again.

(13)Tape Mode Operation is Impossible

(a) Mode selection signal is incorrect.

Check the bit status of I/O monitor #3000.

D4=1
Other bits (DO to D3, D5 to D7) = O

9-41
 (b) Setting at the tape reader is incorrect.

Check the setting made at taper reader model 2801 B-2. Refer to the table indicated
below.

I DIP Switch (DS) I Trans-

mis- Auto/
Input
sion Self-
Control
Speed check
(bps)

ON* I o~ OFF (3N ON OFF 270 4800 AUTO

ON ON OFF 300 AUTO

OFF OFF OFF 200 AUTO

ON ON OFF 9600 AUTO

ON OFF OFF 2400 AUTO

OFF OFF OFF 1200 AUTO

—
Self-
ON
check

Code
ON
control

Line
OFF
control

Note: * Standard setting

Arrangement of DIP switches (standard settina)

Fig. 9.10 Setting for Tape Reader

(c) Loose contact

Make sure that the cable connectors are securely connected.

9-42
 9.1 MAINTENANCE DATA

(d) Faulty tape reader

@ If the tape does not move even when the FEED switch is pressed, change the
tape reader.

@ Ifthered LEDinthe taI~ereader isnotlit (power isnot:$upplied tothe taper

reader, or tape reader is faulty.), change the tape reader.

@ Check the tape holder.

(e) Power supply (EYG30/55GTL) for tape reader is faulty.

@ Check if 200 V is input to the power supply.

@ Check if 5 V and 24 V are correctly output.

9-43
—
 APPENDIX
1

LIST OF NC lNPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS

Appendix 1 describes the diagnosis numbers of the input/out-

put signals between the NC and the PLC.

1.1 INPUT SIGNALS (PLC -+ NC) . . . . . . . Al -2

1.1.1 Operation Mode Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . Al -2
1.1.2 Servo Axis Control Signals
(X-axis to5th-axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Al-5
1.1.3 Spindk;Contro l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. AI-7

1.2 OUTPUT SIGNALS (NC + PLC) . . . . . Al -9

1.2.1 Operation Mode Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . Al -9
1.2.2 Servo Axis Control (X-axis to 5th-axis) . . . . Al -13
1.2.3 Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A1 -15
1.2.4 Constant s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A1 -17

Al-1
 APPENDIX 1.1 INPUT SIGNALS (PLC + NC)

1.1.1 Operation Mode Control Signals

Appendix Table 1.1 Operation Mode Control Signals

M
7 6 5 4 3 2 I o
A
#moo
l-.-Ez
\
MEM MDI T’ STP H JOO RT
/
J
v
Operation Mode

#3002
E I “2 M’1 JV16 JV8 JV4 JV2 JV I
1
~~ v
Manual Pulse Multiply Jog Feedrate

#3003 ROV4 ROV2 ROV 1 * SP ST

~’ stop Cycle Start

#3004 STLK ERS MRD

cl-
Start Interlock External Reset Machine
Ready
#30Q5 ERR2 ERR I ERRO EXTC SVON
Servo 0~” Dccel. Block Stop Time Count External
and Stop Servo ON
\ J
v
External Error Detection

#3006 DRN PRST DLK AJ3S SBK

E I “K i
MST Function Machine Lock Dry Run Program Display Lock Manual Sinble-Bled
Lock Restart Absolute
#3007 RET TLMI EDT ‘K ZRN2 ZRN
cl” I
;:;:$i’ ~“ Edit ‘0& Sceond Reference
Tool Length Measurement Reference Point Return
Point Return
#3008 PLYBAK EWS CPRN HOFS
Playback Ext. Write Interruption Auto Mode
Signal Point Return Handle Offset

~~
Playback

#3009 SPST MSKP MS]

1
Touch Sensor Manual Manual
Signal Skip Mode Centering
Mode

——————~
Measurrnent Function

#301I FSED CLR FSED CH FSED MEM FSED M ECLM EOUT \ EVER EIN

~’ ~
FS Automatic Edit External 1/0 Verify
 Appendix Table 1.1 Operation hflode Control Signals (cent’d)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

#30 12 TLCTN TLSKP

I ‘CH r~mEcIzEc
\ v
J L__+
-–”~
Tool Life Control Life Finish EXt. Stroke Check
Check Request

#30 16 GOS2
I ~=:~J
Second
S-curve form
Decel/Accel

#30 I7 I DSPP3 I DSPP2 I DSPPI \ DSPPO I DSPJ3 I DSPJ2 I DSPJ1 I DSPJO I

Ext. Screen Change (Process Designation) Ext. Screen Change (Job Designation)

#30 18 DSPCHG
I ~icEEl
Ext. Screen
Change L /
~—
Strobe Ext. Screen Change (Function Designation)
Signal

#3023 TLTGN7 TLTGN6 TLTGN5 TLTGN4 TLTGN3 I TLTGN2 I TLTGN1 \ TLTGNO j

Tool Life Management (Life Expired Check Group No. Designation)

#3025 TGN7 TGN6 TGN5 TGN4 TGN3 TGN2 TGN I TGNO

Tool Life Control Management (Tool SKIPGroup No.)

#3030 I ED7 I ED6 I ED5 IED41ED31ED21 EDI IEM 1

Ext. Data Input

#303 1 ED15 ED14 ED13

‘D12 I ~zcEcPcl

Ext. Data Input

#3032 ED23 ED22 ED21 ED20 ED19 ED18 ED17 ED16

Ext. Data Input

#3033 ED31 ED30 ED29

ED28 I ~~:dQDLJ

Ext. Data Input

#3034 EDCL EDAS2 EDAS 1 EDASO

L I ~!m---ExJ

Ext. Data Input

#3036
Program
Interruption

Al-3
 Appendix Table 1.1 Operaticm Mode Control Signals (cent’d)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#3037 I 1HP7 \ 1HP6 I IHP5 I 1HP4 I 1HP3 \ IHP2 I lHP1 I lHPO I
\ v
)

PG Pulse Input Monitor

#3038 I 2HP7 I 2HP6 I 2HP5 I 2HP4 I 2HP3 I 2HP2 I 2HPI I 2HP0 I

L )
v
PG Pulse Input Monitor

#3039 \ 3HP7 I 3HP6 I 3HP5 ! 3HP4 I 3HP3 ] 3HP2 / 3HPI I 3HP0 I

\ v
J

PG pulse Input Monitor

#3040
E.L_”pT BDT OV16 OV8 OV4 OV2 “v 1

Override Optional Stop Block Delete ~

v
J

Cancel FeedrateOverride

#304 1 RWDH RWD EOP

c~ I ‘1”
MT Function High-speed Rewind End of
Fin. Rewind Program

#3042 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2

Block Delete

#3046
E I “6
“15 “14 “13 “12 UI 1 “10

Microprogram Input

#3047 “115 uIt4 “113 UIt2 “111 “110 “19 “18

L
Y J
Microprogram Input

#3048 “123 “122 “121 “120 “119 “118 “117 “116

L
v
J
Macrcprogram Input

#3049 “130 “129 “128 “127 “126 “125 “124

EI!Im

Macmprogram Input

Al-4
 1.1.2 Servo Axis Control Signals (X-axis to 5th-axis)

Appendix Table 1.2 Servo Axis Control Signals (X-axis to 5th-axis) A

7 6 5
m
#3070
is I &&I+*

Pulse Handle Axis Selection

#307 1 +5 +4 +Z
+crcl
L —~
v
Manual Feed Axis/Direction Selection

#3072
L_L_LIJ~~K~;
Manual Feed Axis/Direction Selection

#3073
““c’ I ~Ec12EcL!zz_l

Reference Point Return Decel. LS

#3074 I
I *+5 I~!:~l

#3075

Overtravel LS
I
#3078
I I I *’T’ I ~_Eq

Axis Interlock

#3079 * SVOF5
~~?q

Axis Servo OFF

I
#3080
I I 2“’ I ~zcPcEEl
__.___T_—_————~
No. 2 Pulse Handle Axis Selection

#308 1
[ 3“’ I ~mEcEzzcl

No. 3 Pulse Handle Axis Selection

#3082
~.~”~~
__v_~
Mirror Image Axis Selection

Al-5
 Appendix Table 1.2 Servo Axis Control Signals (X-axis to 5th-axis) (cent’d)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

#3083 DTCH5 DTCH4

Axis Disconnection Designation

#3084 AMLK5 AMLK4 AMLKZ AMLKY AMLKX
L )
v
Axis Dependent Machine Leek

‘3’01 E I L
GOQ25 GO024 GO02Z GO02Y GO02X
J
v
No. 2 GOOMode

Al-6
 1.1.3 Spindle Control

Appendix Table 1.3 Spindle Control

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
#3110 GRO SOR
1 ~~~~
Gear Shift Fixed Speed S Analog ~ .v.~
output Spindle Gear Range
Reverse

#3111 SFIN SAGR

~~mz~
S Function Spindle Speed
Fin. Agreed Spindle Speed Override

#3112 SD17 SD16 SD15

=~
L v
S Command Binary

#3113 SD115 SD114 SD113 SDI 12

~~-z~~
L
S Command Binary

#3114 SD123 SD122 SD121 SD120

l~’-!~~-
\ v
—~
S Command Binary

#3115 STPGR
~~z:=—~
Solid Tap
Gear
Selection

#3116
~~’=~~
Spindle Servo Spindle C-axis
ON Control Mode Switching
Request

#31 7
__L-EEJ~~~ Spindle ~ ._v_~
Position Spindle Index
Loop Mode

#31 8 SID7 SID6 SID5

‘1D4 l~~cInE=l
L
Spindle Index

#3119 SIDIO
~ “D” si~

Spindle Index

Al-7
 Appendix Table 1.3 Spindle Control (cent’d)
7 6 5 4 3 2 I

#3 120 SPSSC- 1 SPTLL- I SPTLH- 1 SPREV- I SPFWB 1 I SPEMG- 1 SPRDY- 1

L- 1
A Soft-start Torque Limit Torque Limit Reverse Forward Emergency Operation
Cancel L H Rotation Rotation stop Ready
i \
Signals for YENET1200 Compatible Inverter

#3121 SPMGR-1 SPLGR- 1 SPORT-1 SPPPI-1 SPCHW-I

M Gear L Gear Orientation speed Winding

Selection Seleetion Controller Switehover
P-PI
Switchover
L J
v
Signals for YENETI 20QCompatible Inverter

Al-8
 APPENDIX 1.2 OUTPUT SIGNALSI (NC+ PLC)

1.2.1 Operation Mode Control Signals

Appendix Table 1.4 Operation Mode Control Signals

7 6 5 4 2 1 0

#3500 I
L
I I BGEDES I WARNS r IE;S * ESP s RSTS ~L=\
output - output - output – output – output - output –
BG Edit Warning State Input Error J3MG. Reset State Alarm/Emor
Error State state Stop State State

#3501

output – output – output – output – output –

No. 2 GOO Label Editing Auto Mcde Manual Mode
Mode State Skip State SeIeeted Selected

#3502
I ONPB OHT TO * BALM
I ~ElzE~
_v_————_~
~’
Output – NC Control Monitor Output - System No. Switch Monitor

#3503 PWLOST
‘Sp I ~=cEEcl
Power Lost Emergency Servo Alarm output - output –
stop Brake ON Servo ON
Monitor Monitor

#3504 ES END ER END

I ~E!cIzEEcczEEcl
L J ‘———~~
v
External Data Input Function Fht. Output Output – FS Auto Edit Monitor

#3505

output –
ToolLength
Measurement
Mode

#3506 CALEN4 CALEN3 CALEN2 CALEN I

__L___L~-’~
Calendar Output L 2
v
Output - System No. Setting Monitor

#3507 MSKPO
I ~=:cl
In Manual
Skip Mode

#3508 TLCHA TLCHB TLCEND TLANS

I ~=:~
Tool Change New Tool Life-Expired Life
Signal Seleetion Check Fin. ExpirecUNot-
Signal output Expired
output
L J
v
Tool Life Control

#3514
I .~=:~
output –
Direct
Pmeessing
Signal
Monitor

Al-9
 Appendix Table 1.4 Operation Mode Control Signals (cent’d)
7 6 5 4 3 2 I o
#3515 EL SETS MLK SETS DtlN SETS PRST SETS DLK SETS ABS~SET~l

Output – Internal Toggle Switch Monitor

#3516 I SETS SRN I SETS FI \ I I I SETS EDLK I SETS ZRN2 \ SETS ZRN I
L J
v
Output – Internal Toggle Switch Monitor

#35 17 I SETS PLBK I SETS STLK / SETS ZING / I I SETS CPRN \ SETS HOFS I

Output – Internal Toggle Switch Monitor

#3518 SETS M [5 SETS M14 SETSMIZ I SETSMIY SETS MIX

c. 1 1

Output – Internal Toggle Switch Monitor

#3519 E I TLGS6 TLGS5 TLGS4 TLGS3 TLGS2 TLGSI ~~1

Output - Tool Life Control Execution Group

#3520 I MA7 I MA6 / MA5 I MA4 / MA3 I MA2 I MA] I MAO I

M Code Output

#3521 I M30R I M02R I MOIR I MOOR I I I MA9 I MA8 I

M Decode Output M Code Output

I

#3530 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 lYi Tt
1-

T Code Output

I
‘353’ l-_-I!2 T14 T13 T12 Tll TIO T9 T8

T (:Ode Output

#3532 TI 9 T18 T17 T16

L—————~

T Code Output

#3533 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO
[ I

B Code Output

#3534 B13 B12 B1l B1O B9 B8

E I ’14

B Code Output

Al -10
 Appendix Table 1.4 Operation Mode Control Signals (cent’d)
7 6 5
#3535 TF BF
4 [5*:3 ~F :1

Output - Read M, B, T Code

#3537 RWDS OP
‘EN l~EIrE~
During During Feed R State F State Stopped During
Rewinding Operation Completed Operation

Output – Series Operation Status Ivlonitor

#3538
~~~~1

‘~~ G93M M04 Status

Output – Internal Toggle Switch
Monitor

#3539
~~~~
-~
Output – Canned Cycle Operation Status Monitor

#3540 U07 u06 U05

’04 1~~~
L
v
Macro Program Output Signal

#3541 UO15 U014 UO13

‘0]2 l~Ec?EEii
L
v
Macro Program Output Signal

#3542 U023 U022 U021

’020 IEEEIZEEIIECIX?!CI
L
v
Macro Program Output Signal

#3543 U03 I U030 U029

’028 l~EcIzEzcD!El

Macro Program Output Signal

#3544 Posx Uvx

‘Vx l~iicIz!Ecl
\
v
X-axis IAMP Alarm

#3545 O-PHX OIREFX OFX

1~~~
L )
v
X-axis IAMP Alarm

#3546 POSY UVY

‘Vy 1~~~
L v
Y-axis IAMP Alarm

AI-11

—.— .-. —- ...-— — ----- .,.-. .—— .——. ..—.

 Appendix Table 1.4 Operaticm Mode Control Signals (cent’d)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#3547
L--!Y!o OIREFY OFY OHY

Y-axis IAMP Alarm

#3548 ~ Posz Uvz Ovz RGZ MCBZ Ocz ABSZ

Z-axis IAMP Alarm

#3549
El
\
OIREFZ OF-Z OHZ
J
v
Z-axis IAMP Alarm

Al -12
 1.2.2 Servo Axis Control (X-axis to 5th-axis)

Appendix Table 1.5 Servo Axis Control (X-axis to 5th-axis)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#36 10 TGONX Pcx PBX
‘Ax I zIEcrzEEIzE~

Output – Servo l_JnitMonitor

#361 1 TGONY PCY PBY

“y I zE3zEIEz~4
Output – Servo LJnitMonitor

#3612 TGONZ Pcz PBZ

‘AZ I ZEZIZEEIEZIZE3

Output – Servo lJnit Monitor

#36 13

Output – Servo ~JnitMonitor

#36 14 TGON5 PCS PB5

‘A’ I z!IIIlz-EI_N3cl

Output – Servo [Jnit Monitor

#3615

Output – Follow-up Monitor

#3616 PSET5
I ~EccI!EctzEcl

Output – PSET”StrrtusMonitor

#36i 7

Output – Axis Dkcorrnected Status

#3618 AMLK 5S
I zzEcrzzzcIzEEEImEEl

Output – Axis Machine Lock Status

#3628 GO025S
I ~“EE13EIIEEcl

Output - No. 2 GOOMode

#3630 ZP5 ZP4 ZPZ

zpy~
L
v
10utput - Fkst Reference Point Position Monitor

Al -13
 Appendix Table 1.5 Servo Axis Control (X-axis to 5th-axis) (cent’d)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

‘363’ m I – I
2ZP5 2ZP4 2ZPZ 2ZPY 2ZPX

Output – Second Reference Point Position Monitor

#3632 ~ 3ZP5 3ZP4 3ZPZ 3ZPY 3ZPX

Output – Third Reference Point Position Monitor

#3633 4ZP5 4ZP4 4ZPZ 4ZPY 4ZPX

Output– Fourth Reference Point Position Monitor

#3634 PMON7 PMON6 PMON5 PMON4 PMON3 PMON2 PMON 1

tzz!m

Position Monitor Output

‘3635 c~ I PMON 10 PMON9

Position Monitor Output

AI-14
 1.2.3 Spindle Control

Appendix Table 1.6 Spindle Control

‘1 6 5 4 3 2 I o
GR 4S GR 3S GR 2S GR IS GRS S GSC S
I GKIEEI
~ ‘wtp”t-GRs Output-Gsc‘U’PU’-G96y:;;
controlStatus ControlStatus ConWol~atus
Output–GearRange
Status
Reversed
Status

#365 1 SF 0s SLPS
[ I S’”’’CEZEI
output – s Spindle output - ~~
Command Orientation Spindle Output – Spindle Index Monitor
Sampling Position Loop
Monitor
#3652
~~~~
Axis Control Mode
Mode Switching

#3653 Pcs
~~

Output – Monitor of PO Signal, etc.

#3654 SD07 SD06 S“05

‘“4 IGSGEECI
L
v
Output - S Command Binary

#3655 SD015 SDO14 S“013

I ‘“t’ r~~l
\ Y
Output - S Command Binary

#3656 S“023 SD022 S“021

I ‘“20 I ~EiEIE!zctEIcl
L v
Output - S Command Binary

#3657 SARM7 SARM6 SARM5 SARM4 SARM3 SARM2

[ I s’K13!mcl
v
Output – Actual Spindle Speed Monitor

#3658 SARM 15 SARM14 SARM 13 SARM12 SARMII SARM1O

I sAR’~
L v
Output – Actual Spindle Speed Monitor

#3659 SARM23 SARM22 SARM21 SARM20

I ~i~
\ v
output – Actual Spindle Speed Monitor

AI-15
 Appendix Table 1.6 Spindle Control (cent’d)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#3660 SPCHW% I SPOR& 1 SPORG-I SPTLE-I SPTDET-I SPSDET-I SPAGR- 1 SPZSPD 1
1
Whaling Orientation Load Axis Torque Torque speed Speed Agreed Zero Speed
Switehover Complete Zero Point Limit Deteetion Detection
Complete
L /
v
Signals for YENEN 200 Compatible Inverter

#3661
r~ I SPTALM– 1

Error Warning
SPFLT-1

Fault

Signals for YENET1200

Compatible Inverter

#3740 LDX-7 LDX-6 LDX-5 LDX-4 LDX-3 LDX-2 LDX-1 LDX-O

L /
v
X-axis Load Data (L)
. .
#3741 LDX- 15 LDX- 14 LDX-13 LDX-12 LDX- 11 LDX-10 LDX-9 LDX-8
1
\ /
v
X-axis Load Data (H)
#3742 LDY-7 LDY-6 LDY-5 LDY-4 LDY-3 LDY-2 LDY-1 LDY-O
I
L
v
Y-axis Load Data (L)
#3743 LDY-14 LDY-13 LDY-12 LDY-11 LDY-10 LDY-9 LDY-8
El
v
Y-axis Load Data (H)
#3744 LDZ-7 LDZ-6 LDZ5 LDZ-4 LDZ-3 LDZ-2 LDZ- 1 LDZ-O
[

Z-axis Load Data (L)

#3745 LDZ- 15 LDZ- 14 LDZ- 13 LDZ-12 LDZ- 11 LDZ- 10 LDZ-9 LDZ-8

I
L /
v
Z-axis Load Data (H)
#3746 LD4-7 LD4-6 LD4-5 LD44 LD4-3 LD43 LD4- 1 LD4-O
1
L ,
v
4th-axis Load Data (L)
#3747 LD4- 15 LD4- 14 LD4- 13 LD4-12 LD4- 11 LD4- 10 LD4-9 LD4-8
I
/
v
4th-mis Load Data (H)

#3748 LD5-7 LD5-6 LD5-5 LD5-4 LD5-3 LD5-2 LD5- 1 LD5-O

L
v
5th-axis Load Data (L)

AI-16
 Appendix Table 1.6 Spindle Control (cent’d)
7 6 5 4

#3749 LD5-15 LD5-14 LD5-13 LD5-12

I I &*&
v A
5th-axis Load Data (H)
‘m

1.2.4 Constants

Appendix Table 1.7 Constants

7 6 5 4 3 2
#3996 0 0 0 0 0 0
;*
L /
v
Constants

#3997 o 0 0 0
I ~=cr!!cl
L —~
v
Constants

#3998 o 0 0 0
I ~~rzrl

Constants

#3999

Al -17
 APPENDIX 2
PARAMETER TABLE
AA

B
Appendix2 describes the classification and function of the
parameters used for YASNAC J300.

2.1 CLASSIFICATIONOF
THE PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A2”2
2.2 PARAMETER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A2-3
2.3 PARAMETER TABLE (YENET1 200
COMPATIBLE DRIVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . A2 -47

M-1
 APPENDIX 2.1 CLASSIFICATIC)N OF THE PARAMETERS

Appendix Table 2.1 Classifications of the Parameters

No. Classification Data Type Parameter No. Sign Power OFF/ON* Remarks
Bit pmOOOO- pmO099
Byte pmO 100 -pmO109
I Related to setting
Word pm0400 - pm0429 Used
D-word pm0800 - pm0939 Used

Related to axis and spindle Bit pm1000-pm1099 pm 1020- pm 1099

control Byte pm1100 - pm1393 pm1300-pm1399
2 Axis control
Servo Word pm1400 - pm1799 Used pm1600-pm1799
Spindle D-word pm 1800 -pm 1859 Used pm1820 - pm1859
Bit pm2000 -pm2019
Related to feed
Feedrate and acceleration Byte pm2100 -pm2139
3
Thread/tap Word pm2400 - pm2649 Used pm2600 - pm2649
Pulse handle
D-word pm2800 - pm2899 used pm2870 - pm2899
Bit pm3000 - pm3009
Related to interface and
communications Byte pm3100 - pm3109
4
Edit, tape input,display, Word pm3400 - pm3459 Used
communications, DNC
D-word pm3800 - pm3859 Used
Related to program and Bit pm4000 - pm4039
automatic operation
Program/automatic Byte pm4100 - pm4199
5
operation,canned cycle, Word pm4400 - pm4599 used
offset,coordinate system,
zero return, macro D-word pm4800 - pm4899 Used

Bit pm5000 - pm5019 pm5010 - pm5019

Byte pm5 100- pm5 109
Related to 1/0 and automation
6 assisting Word pm5400 - pm5449 Used
1/0, PLC, skip, TLM
D-word pm5800 - pm5809 Used

.-
Bit pm6000 - pm6009
Related to safety and Byte pm6100 -pm6149
7 maintenance (machine)
Stroke check, pitch error Word pm6400 - pm6479 Used pm6450 - pm6479
D-word pm6800 - pm6949 Used
PLC ladder Bit pm7000 - pm7099
8 Related to battery back-up Byte and word
memory Byte pm71 00- pm7999

Bit pm8000 - pm8099

Byte pm8100 - pm8119
9 Others Word pm8400 - pm8429 Used
D-word pm8800 - pm8829 Used
Word pm9000 - pm9551

A2-2
 APPENDIX 2.2 PARAMETER TABLE

Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter lable

ParameterNo. Bit Description

o Single-block switch o OFF 1: ON

1 Machine lock switch o OFF 1: ON

2 Dry run switch o: OFF 1: ON

3 Block delete switch o: OFF 1: ON

pmOOOO
4 Manual absolute switch o: OFF 1: ON
—
5 lAu~iliary function lockswitch o: OFF 1: ON
—
6 Display lock switch o OFF 1: ON
—
7 Edit lock switch o OFF 1: ON
—
o Optional stop switch o: OFF 1: ON

pmOOO1 1 Start lock switch o OFF 1: ON

—
2 Z-axis neglect switch o OFF 1: ON

o Mirror image 1 0: OFF 1: ON

1 Mirror image 2 0 OFF 1: ON

—
pmOO02 2 Mirror image 3 0 OFF 1: ON
—
3 Mirror image 4 0 OFF 1: ON
— — ——
4 Mirror image 5 0: OFF 1: ON

1 Axis disconnection designation (4th-axis) o: OFF 1: ON

pmOO03 —
2 Axis disconnection designation (5th-axis) o: OFF 1: ON

ISO/EIA code selection for output tape co~e

o 0 ISO code
I 1: EIA code
—
Execution of TV check
1 0: Not executed
I: Executed

Counting the number of characters in ( ) for TV check

2 0: Not counted
1: Counted
—
pmOO04
TH check for 1S0 code input
3 0 Executed
Data setting for
1: Not executed
No. } pOlt —
Feed holes in output to rape
4 0 Not punched
1: Punched

TH check for 1S0 code output

5 0 Executed
1: Not executed
—
EOB codes in 1S0 code output
6 0: CR and LF
1: LF
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

o Manual zero return switch o OFF 1: ON

1 No. 2 manual zero return switch o: OFF 1: ON

2 Interruption point return switch o: OFF 1: ON

3 Automatic mode handle offset switch o OFF 1: ON

pmOO05
4 Setup point return switch o OFF 1: ON

5 Playback switch o OFF 1: ON

6 FI -digit switch o: OFF 1: ON

7 Program restart switch o: OFF 1: ON

ISO/EIA code selection for output tape code

0 O: ISO code
1: EIA code

Execution of TV check
I O: Not executed
1: Executed

Counting the number of characters in ( ) for TV check

2 O: Not counted
1: Counted

TH check for ISO code input

pmOO06 3 O: Executed
I: Not executed

Feed holes in output to tape

4 O: Not punched
1: Punched

TH check for ISO code output

5 O: Executed
1: Not executed

EOB codes in 1S0 code output

6 O CR and LF
1: LF

A2-4
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Selection of input unit

o 0 mm
1: inches
——
OWration instructions and control instruc~ions in user macro
1 0 Notinterrupted bysingle-block stop.
1: Interrupted bysingle-block stop.

Occurrence of an alarm if skip signal is not turned ON until the completion of axis move specified in the
skip function block
2
O An alarm occurs.
1: An alarm does not occur.

Addition of work shift correction amount

3 0: Not added
pmOO07 1: Added
—
Tool life control by T command
4 0 Executed
1: Not executed (valid only when the optional tool life control function is selected.)

Display of program list during inputioutputiverify of a program

5 0 Program list is displayed.
1: Program list not displayed.
—
“O” data in parameter output
6 0 “O” data are output.
1: “O” data are not output.
—
Buzzer sound for the operation of keys in the keyboard
7 0 No buzzer sound
1: Buzzer sound

A2-5
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

No. 2 stored stroke limit

o 0: Invalid
1: Valid

No. 3 stored stroke limit

1 0: Invalid
I: Valid

No. 4 stored stroke Iimit

2 0: Invalid
I: Valid

No. 5 stored stroke limit

3 0: Invalid
I: Valid
pmOO08
No. 2 entry prohibited area
4 0: Inside the boundary
1: Outside the boundary

No. 3 entry prohibited area

5 0: Inside the boundary
1: Outside the boundary

No. 4 entry prohibited area

6 0: Inside the boundary
1: Outside the boundary

No. 5 entry prohibited area

7 0: Inside the boundary
1: Outside the boundary
—.
Selection of input port
o (): No. 1 pOrt
1: No. 2 pOrt

Selection of output port

4 0: No. I pOrt
1: No. 2 port
pmOO09
Number of tool life control groups and tools (pmOO09)

Groups Tools D6 D7
6.7 @128 2 0 0
@ 64 4 I o
@ 32 0 1
@ 16 1: 1 1

M-6
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter lable (cent’d)
—
ParameterNo. Bit Description

Input device setting

D3 D2 D1 Do
o 0 0 0 Reserved
o 0 0 I YE tape reader
o-3
0 0 1 0 General-purpose RS-232C device
o 0 1 I Not used
—
pmOOIO
1 1 1 1
—
No. 1 port device
Output device setting
setting D7 D6 D5 D4
o 0 0 0 Reserved I
o 0 0 1 Reserved 2
4-6
0 0 I o General-purpose RS-232C de~ ice
o 0 I 1 Not used
—
1 1 1 1

BPS setting
D2 D1 Do
o 0 0 lCOor 75
0 0 1 llOor 150
0 1 0 3C0
0-2
o 1 1 600
1 0 0 1200
1 0 1 240
1 1 0 48CI0
1 1 I 9600
pmOO11
Stop bit length
Communication 3 0 1 bit
parameter setting 1: 2 bits
No. 1 port (input)
for general-purpose Data length
RS-232C device 4 0 7 bits
(format) 1: 8 bits
—
Parity bit
D6 D5
5.6 0 0 No parity
o 1 Even parity
I o Odd parity

Setting of low baud rate selection

7 0: 100 and 110 bps
1: 75 and 150 bps
—

M-7
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Control by control code

o O: Not executed
1: Executed
pmOO12
RTS control
Communication 1 O: Not executed
parameter setting 1: Executed
No. 1 port (input) DR line check
for general-purpose O: Not executed
2
RS-232C device 1: Executed
(control)
NC data special control
7 O: Not executed
1: Executed

BPS setting
D2 D] Do
o 0 o 100 or 75
0 0 1 llOor 150
0 1 0 300
0-2
0 1 1 600
I o 0 1200
I o 1 2400
1 1 0 4800
1 1 1 9600
pmOO13
Stop bit length
Communication 3 O: 1 bit
parameter setting 1: 2 bits
No. 1 port (output)
for general-purpose Data length
RS-232C device 4 O: 7 bits
(format) 1: 8 bits

?arity bit
D6 D5
5.6 o 0 No parity
o 1 Even parity
1 0 Odd parity

Setting of low baud rate selection

7 O: IOOand llObps
1: 75 and 150 bps
I

A2-8
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Control by control code

o 0 Notexecuted
1: Executed
—
pmOO14
RTS control
Communication 1 0 Not executed
parameter setting 1: Executed

No. ] pOlt (Output)

DR Iine check
‘or general-purpose ~
O Not executed
RS-232C device
1: Executed
(control)
NC data special control
7 0 Not executed
1: Executed
.—
Input device setting
D3 D2 D1 Do
o 0 0 0 Reserved
0 0 0 1 YE tape reader
o-3
o 0 1 0 General-purpose RS-232C device
o 0 I I Not used
—
pmOO15
1 1 1 I
—
No. 2 port device
Output device setting
setting D7 D6 D5 D4
o 0 0 0 Reserved I
0 0 0 1 Reserved 2
4-7
0 0 1 0 General-purpose RS-232C device
o 0 1 1 Not used
—
1 1 1 1

/42-9

— ..__ .. .
.-. .—-—. . . .. . . . .._______ ______ ... . .________ ..._..,__________ .. ___
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

BPS setting
D2 DI DO
o 0 0 100 or 75
0 0 1 llOOr 150
0 1 0 300
o-2
0 1 1 600
1 0 0 1200
1 0 1 2400
1 1 0 4800
1 1 1 9600
pmOO16
Stop bit iength
Communication 31 0: 1 bit
parameter setting 1: 2 bits
No. 2 port (output)
or general-purpose Data length
RS-232C device 4 t 0: 7 bits
(format) 1: 8 bits

Parity bit
D6 D5
5.6 0 0 No parity
o 1 Even parity
1 0 Odd pari~y

Setting of low baud rate selection

7 0: 100 and 110 bps
1: 75 and 150 bps

Control by control code

o 0: Not executed
1: Executed
pmOO17
~RTS control
I O: Not executed
Communication
I: Executed
parameter setting
No. 2 pOrt (Output) DR line check
‘or general-purpose 2 0: Not executed
RS-232C device 1: Executed
(control)
NC data special control
7 0: Not executed
1: Executed
—

M-lo
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

3PS setting
D2 D1 Do
o 0 0 100 or 75
0 0 1 llOOr 150
o 1 0 300
o-2
0 1 I 600
1 0 0 1200
I o 1 2400
1 1 0 4800
1 1 1 9600
pmOO18
Stop bit length
Communication 3 O: 1 bit
parameter setting 1: 2 bits
No. 2 pOrt (OUtpUt)
‘or general-purpose >ata length
RS-232C device 4 O: 7 bits
(format) 1: 8 bits

‘arity bit
D6 D5
5.6 o 0 No parity
o 1 Even parity
1 0 Odd parity

jetting of low baud rate selection

7 O: 100 and llObps
1: 75 and 150 bps

~ontrol by control code

0 O Not executed
1: Executed
pmOO19
CTS control
Communication 1 O Not executed
parameter setting 1: Executed
No. 2 pOrt (OUtpUt)
JR line check
‘or general-purpose
2 O: Not executed
RS-232C device
1: Executed
(control)
SC data special control
7 O: Not executed
1: Executed

3dit, display, and inputloutput operation of part programs 08000 to 08999

0 0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
pmO020
;paces in program input
7 O: Spaces are deleted when a program is input. (Spaces in comments are no! deleted.)
1: Spaces are not deleted when a program is input.

M-11

—
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

O: Edit, display, andinputioutput ol~ration ofpatiprogmms 08~to 08999confoms tothe setting

pmO021 o for pmO020
1: Display ofpartprograms 08000 to08999 is permitted.

O: Edit, display, andinputioutput ol]eration ofpafiprograms 08~to 08999confoms tothe setting

pmO022 o for pm3004.
1: Display of part programs 080W to 08999 is permitted.

DC3 control code designation

4 0: 13H
1: 93H

DR signal check by communication module

pmO030
Communication module device designation
-*

1. -
1
~ Tape operation designation for NC
0: PTR
71 1: Communication module

BPS setting
D2 D1 Do
o 0 0 1200
0-2 0 0,1
0 I o 4800
0 1 1 9600

pmO031

Communication
parameter setting
RS-232C
-* ‘:

-city
1 0 Odd parity

A2-12
 Appendix
. . Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

ParameterNo. Bit Description

BPS setting
D2 D] Do
o 0 0 1200
0-2 0 0 1 2400
0 1 0 4800
0 1 1 9600
I o 0 19200

pmO032 Stop bit length

3 0 lbit
Communication 1: 2bits
parameter setting
RS-422 Data length
4 0 7bits
1: 8 bits

Parity bit
D6 D5
5.6 0 0 No parity
o 1 Even parity
1 0 Odd parity
—
Designation of inputs
o 0: Least input unit
1: 10 times the least input unit

Application of override setting on spindle speed output

2 0: Not applied
1: Applied
—
Display of actual spindle speed
pm 1000 4 0: Calculated value based on S command
1: Feedback from the spindle motor
—
SSTP setting for “O” output in response to “O” S command
5 0: SSTP“o”
1: SSTP”’1”
Checking of SAGR when feedrate is changed from rapid traverse to cutting feedrate.
7 0 Not checked
1: Checked

Output sign of S in S5-digit command

D1 Dt) M03 M04
o 0 + +
pm1001 0.1 1 —
0
1 0 + —
1 1 — +

Magnification ratio of spindle speed parameter

pm I002 0 0 xl
1: Xlo
—
D/A output status is input to the PLC.
pm 1003 2 0 Yes
1: No
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

1st - 5th physical servo axis slot number

I D1 DO
0 No. 1 slot axis
0.1 ~ :
1 No. 1 slot: axis
1; o No. 2 slo~ axis
1 No. 1 slot axis

1st - 5th physical servo axis slot inside axis number

pm 1020- pm 1024 D4 D3
0 0 1st-axis
3.4
o 1 lst-axis
1 0 2nd-axis
1 1 3rd-axis

1st - 5th physical servo axis

7 0: Invalid
1: Valid

No. 1, No. 2 physical spindle slot number

DI DO
o 0 No. 1 slot axis
o 1 No. 1 slot axis
1 0 No. 2 slot axis
1 1 No. 1 slot axis

No. 1, No. 2 physical spindle slot inside axis number

pm 1026- pm 1027
1st-axis
3.4
-: 1

-~
1: Valid

)42-14
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)
.—
Parameter No. Bit Description

Velocity loop control method

o 0 PI
1: IP
.—
Velocity loop control automatic setting
1 0: InvaIid
1: Valid
—
Separately installed PG
2 0: Invalid
1: Valid
pm1030 - pm1034 —
Reverse connection of separately installed PG
1st - 5th axis servo 4 0 Invalid
control type 1: Valid

0 Servo axis
5
1: C-axis integral with spindle

Axis type
6 0: Linear axis
!: Rotary axis
—
Motor rotation direction
7 0 Forward rotation
I: Reverse rotation

D2 D1 Use of PG
0 0 No PG for spindle
1.2
o 1 PG used at the spindle
I o PG used at the motor
pm 1039
Spindle servo control
Spindle servo 5 0: Executed
control type 1: Not executed
—
Spindle configuration
7 0 Normal spindle
1: C-axis integrated
—

A2-15

—--—..-
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Servo feed amount change

o 0: Not executed
1: Executed

Absolute encoder
I O: Motor PG
1: Separately installed PG
Disregarding error pulses at the input of emergency stop
2 0: Not disregarded
1: Disregarded

pm1044-pm1048 Execution of follow-up processing for the input of servo OFF

3 0: Not executed
Ist-axis - 5th-axis 1: Executed
-~
I Use of absolute encoder
4 I O Not used
I ~ used

Infinite length for rotary axis control

6 0: Not possible
1: Possible

Use of 17-bit encoder

71 0: Not used
1 1: Used
I

~ No. 1 spindle feedback pulse magnification ratio setting

DI DO
o 0 xl
o. I
o 1 x2
I o x4
I 1 x8
pm1053
Execution of spindle indexing in loop control
2 0: Not executed
I: Executed

Execution of C-axis indexing when switching to C-axis

3 0: Not executed
1: Executed

Amplifier type for 1st - 5th axis

pm 1060 0-4 0: Analogamplifier
1: Digitalamplifier

A2-16
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)
— ——
Parameter No. Bit Description

Setting of motor selection cede for “n’’th-axis

F series M series S series R series
MTYPEN Type MTYFEN Type MTYPEN Type MTYPEN Type
o Short 10 M-03B 20 S-02A 30
1 F-02C 11 M-06B 21 S-03A 31
2 F-03C 12 M-09B 22 S-05A 32
3 F-05C 13 M-12B 23 S-08A 33 R-03C
4 F-09C 14 M-20B 24 S-15A 34 R-05C
5 F-13C 15 M-30B 25 S-30A 35 R-07C
6 F-20C 16 M-44B 26 36
7 F-30C 17 27 37
8 F-44(2 18 28 38
9 19 29 39
pm1061 -pm1065 o-7

G series D series Special

MTYPEN Type MTYPEN Type MTYPEN Type
40 G-02A 50 D-05E 246
41 G-03A 51 D- IOE 247
42 G-05A 52 D-15E 248
43 G-09A 53 D-:QE 249
44 G-13A 54 D-37E 250
45 G-20A 55 251 S-07HS
46 G-30A 56 252 D-09HS I 1
47 G-44A 57 253 S-1 OHS
48 58 254 F-20HS11
49 59 255 F-09FX

Availability of digital amplifier offset autclmatic adjustment

pm 1070 0-4 0: Not available
1: Available
—
Availability of projection compensation function in circle cut ( Ist - 5th axis)
pm1080 o-4 0 Not available
1: Available
—
Externally installed encoder type (1st - 5th axis)
Type Sel.ting
Linear scale o
15-bit ABS 1
15-bit ABS (rotary axis) 2
pm1081 - pm1085
17-bit ABS 3
8192-pulse new INC 11
25000- pulse new INC 18
30000- puke new INC 19
360000- pulse type for C-axis 23
—
Spindle encoder type: 1024INC
pm1091
Setting 21

Resonance filter type (1st - 5th axis)

pm1099 o-4 0 Secondary axis resonance filter
1: Cubic root axis resonance filter
——
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Dry run during rapid traverse

o 0: Invalid
1: Valid

Dry run during thread cutting

I O: Valid
1: Invalid

Spindle override during tapping

2 0: Not clamped at 1007.
1: Clamped at 100% (only for lathe)

Setting of input unit for pm2447 (Fo feedrate)

3 0: mrdmin
pm2000
1: %

~Validity of feedrate override signal

41 0: Valid when” 1” (NO contact)
1: Valid when “O” (NC contact)

Replacing rapid traverse with jog until the completion of reference point return after turning ON the
power
6 I
O: Rapid traverse is not replacecl with jog.
1: Rapid traverse is replaced with jog.

Setting jog feedrate of rotary axis at [/10 of that of linear axis

7 0: Not set at 1/10
1: Setat 1/10

Feedrate for skip function

pm2001 o 0: As specified by F code
I: As set by parameter

Validity of automatic mode handle offset (lst - 5th axis)

pm2002 o-4 0: Invalid
1: Valid

Valid operation of automatic mode handle offset

1 0: Other than rapid traverse
1: Only in the interpolation mode
pm2003 ‘– ‘–
Setting of X 100 for manual pulse multiply
7 0: x 100
1: Value set for parameter (pm2459)

Feedrate at the detection of 0.001 mm or 0.0001 inch

pm2004 o 0: F6.O mm/min or F4. 1 inchlmin
1: F6. 1 mm/min or F4.3 inch/rein

M-”(8
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

—
Addition of tool position offset amount in Z-axis position data for display
2 0 Added
1: Notadded

Position data display change (work shift cc~ordinate system screen, correction amount screen)
3 , 0: Machine coordinate system
1: Workpiece coordinate system
pm3000
Position data display change (offset screen)
4 , 0: Machine coordinate system
I: Workpiece coordinate system
1 —
,
; Position data display change (program screen)
5! O: Machine coordinate system
1: Workpiece coordinate system
.—
~External timer display
0! O: Invalid
1: Valid

Setup menu screen

1 0: Valid
1: Invalid
—
Simplified TLM
3 , 0: Valid
1: Invalid

Priority of validity between T and M96 if specified in the same block

pm3001 4 I O: Tcommand becomes valid first.
1: M06 command becomes valid first.
—
Waiting pot display
5 0 Invalid
1: Valid

Tool pot word display

6 0 Invalid
1: Valid

Sub tool pot word display

7 0: Invalid
I 1: Valid —

M-19
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Clear of MDI buffer by program reset if M02 or M30 is specified at the completion of MDI program
o O: Cleared
1: Not cleared

Clear of MDI buffer by panel reset or external reset

1 O: Cleared
1: Not cleared

Start position of MDI program

2 O: Present cursor position
1: Beginning of the MDI program

Input switching on work shift and offset screens

3 O: By soft-keys
1: According tothesetting forpm3002(D4, D5)
pm3002
Input on work shift screen (correction screen)
4 O: Absolute
1: Incremental

Input on offset screen

5 O: Absolute
1: Incremental

EDIT process address search

6 O: Character search
1: Binary search

RUN process address search

7 O: Binary search
1: Character search

A2-20
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter lable (cent’d)

ParameterNo. Bit Description

Initial screen at power ON

D1 DO
o 0 4POS
0.1
o 1 Program check screen
1 0 Edit screen
1 1 4POS
— —
Job screen of the setup process at power ON
2 O: Workpiece coordinate system job screen
1: Tool job screen

Input mode setting at power ON

pm3003 3 O: Absolute
1: Incremental
—
Clearing of the program that requires the check for alarm
4 O Cleared byresetopemtion
1: Cleared byreset opemtion after fiecheck forthe alarm

Display of the spindle and the next tool on the RUN screen
5 O Notdisplayed
1: Displayed

ATC display
6 O: Byte+ byte
1: Word

Edit/display/output of part programs of 09000 to 09999

L
0 0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
—

A2-21

—..—..
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Processing if the same O number already exists in loading a program from tape
o 0: Warning
1: Existing program is overwritten by new program

Clearing of the program numbers at power ON

1 0: Cleared
1: Not cleared

Definition of program number

2 0: Numerical value specified following O
I: Numerical value specified following O or N

Interpretation of M code (M02, M30. M*99 [*: O - 3]) read at the end of program loading from tape
pm3005 3 0: Regarded as program end
1: Not regarded as program end

Automatic editing of a program number in program rename/copy/storing operation

4 0: Edited automatically
1: Not edited

Conversion of “:” code (1S0) at input and output

5 0: Not converted
1: Converted

Conversion of “:” code (1S0) at input and output (valid if pm3005 D5 = 1)

6 0: Not converted
1: Converted
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Paramdc.r
. . .. ...
...-.-!
Nn
..-.
Rit
-,. r..-.
Description

Identification of tape operation device

o 0: I/O input specification
1: Setting specification

Designation of processing at the occurrence of communication module error

1 0 NC placed in the alarm state
1: NC not placed in the alarm state

Buffer area data storing amount at the start of DNC operation

D3 D2 Bytes
0 0 2048
2.3
0 1 128
pm3006 1 0 256
I I 512
—
Designation of the transmission of the control character
4 0 Not transmitted
1: Transmitted

Communication mcdule protocol

D7 D6 D5
0 0 0 Protocol I
5-7
o 0 1 Protocol 2
0 1 0 Protocol 3
0 1 1 Protocol 4

Function key of [SRCH] key

11 0: Background function key
1: Foreground function key
—
~ I O: Setting of pm3006 DO, DI is valid.
pm3007 I: If pm3006 D 1 = 1, only time-out error is not output.
—
Buffering of 150-byte DAT binary data after the reception of the WAT command by the communication
module.
7
O: Buffered
1: Not buffered

A2-23

.—
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

I Selection of G code in 01 -group when the power is turned ON or the NC is reset

o~ O: GOO
1: Gol

Selection of G code in 03-group when the power is turned ON

1 0: G90
1: G91

Selection of G code in 04-group when the power is turned ON

2 0: G98
1: G99

pm4000 ~Selection of G code in 08-group when the power is turned ON

D4 D3
3.4 o 0 G49
o I G43
1 0 G44

Selection of G code in 02-group when the NC is reset

5’ 0: G17
1: G code specified immediately before the reset

~Selection of G code in 03-group when the NC is reset

61 0: G cede set for pm4000 D 1
I 1: G code specified immediately before the reset

A2-24
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter “Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Mirror image mode when the power is turned ON or the NC is reset

o 0 M94 (mirror image OFF)
1: M95 (mirror image ON)

Initial M code mode when the power is turned ON or the NC is reset

1 0 M96 (arc)
1: M97 (linear)
.—
Application of mirror image ON the intermediate positioning point for G28 if h495 is set when the power
is turned ON or the NC is reset
2
O: Mirror image is applied
1: Mirror image is not applied.
—
Presetting of workpiece coordinate system shift distance when the power is turned ON (G54 - G59:
#4143)
3
pm4001 O: Not preset
1: Preset
. .
Presetting of workpiece coordinate system shift distance at the completion of zero return (G54 - G59:
#4143)
4
O Not preset
1: Preset

Occurrence of alarm if an attempt is made to execute cycle start without carrying out reference point re-
turn after turning the power ON
6
O Alarm occurs (0411 - 0415) (conforms to pm4018 DO - D4).
I: Alarm does not occur (setting is possible forpm4018 DO - D4).
—
Cycle start interlock when system number switch is set at” 1” or pmO109 DO = 1
7 0 Cycle start interlock is not provided.
1: Cycle start interlock is provided.

Reference point return direction ( Ist - 5th axis)

pm4002 o-4 0 Positive direction
1: Negative direction
—
Manual reference point return type in the second and later operation after power ON
6 0: High-speed type
I: Low-speed type
pm4003 —
Automatic reference point return type in the second and later operation after power ON
7, 0: High-speed type
1: Low-speed type

Occurrence of alarm if movement command other than G28 is executed without carrying out manual or
automatic reference point return after power ON (1st - 5th axis)
pm4004 o-4
O: Alarm does not occur.
1: Alarm occurs.

Automatic coordinate system setting (I st - 5th axis)

pm4006 o-4 0: Invalid
1: Valid
—

A2-25
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Returning of the execution pointer to the start of the program when the NC is reset by the external key
operation
o
O: Returned
1: Not returned

Rewinding of tape by M30 when YASNAC standard tape reader is connected to the No. 1 RS-232C port
1 O: Not rewound
1: Rewound

Rewinding of tape by M30 when YASNAC standard tape reader is connected to the No. 2 RS-232C port
pm4008
2 O: Not rewound
1: Rewound

Possibility of starting of memory operation from a mid point of a block

3 O: Possible
I: Not possible; always started from the beginning of a block

High-speed automatic start for high-speed rewind operation

7 O: Does not start at high-speed
1: Start at high-speed

Present value is input to system variables #5001 and on at the execution ofG31 skip.
0 O: Present value
1: Command value

Microprogram common variables #100 - #299 become <empty> by the reset operation.
I O: Emptied
1: Not emptied
pm4009
Output of leading zeros if the upper digit value of a variable is “O” at the execution of DPRINT function
2 O: Spaces are output.
1: Nothing is output.

MST status when operation mode is changed from automatic to manual

7 O: M, S, and T are forcibly finished without SPL indicating lamp lit.
1: M, S, and T are saved with Si?L indicating lamp lit.

A2-26
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

ParameterNo. Bit Description

~Processing after the change of offset amount

0 0: Newoffset amoun~becomes valid from the block to be buffered next.
I 1: Newoffset amount becomes valid from the H(D) code to& buffered ne;tt.

; D code in the G12/G13 mode

1~ O: Modal
~ 1: One shot
—
Operation expression forthedirect input clfmeasured workplace value
pm401 O 0 Present value saved temporarily -Keyed-in value
21
1: Keyed-in value –Present value saved temporarily
—
Processing of D code after reset (valid whenpm4011 D1 = O)
6 0: 00
1: Saved
—
Processing of H code after reset or reference point return (valid whenpm4011 D I = 1)
7 0: 00
1: Saved
— —
Designation of offset number for G45 - G48
1 0: Only Dcode
1: Only Hcode
——
Validity of manual absolute function if there is no axis move command in the block where incremental
amount is generated
2
O: Manual absolute function is valid.
1: Manual absolute function is not valid.
—
pm401 I
Validity of manual absolute function if there is no axis move command in the block where incremental
amount is not generated
3
O: Manual absolute function is valid.
1: Manual absolute function isnot valid.

Ignoring of the manual absolute function for the incremental commands.

7 0 Manual absolute function isnot ignored.
1: Manual absolute function is ignored.
—.
Processing when the workpiece coordinate system shift distance is changed
o 0 Newvalue becomes valid from thenextcomrnand.
1: New value becomes valid from the next block.

Reversing of the input incremental value c~fthe workpiece coordinate system shift distance
pm4012 1 0: Not reversed
1: Reversed

Workpiece coordinate system setting expansion address

7 0: “J”
~: <,p!>

A2-27
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Start-up and cancel motion

o 0: Type B compensation method
1: Type A compensation methcd

, Switching point of offset direction (G41/G42)

1 0: Point of intersection
1: At the start and end points

pm4013 Processing after the offset amount is changed

2 0: New offset amount becomes valid from the end point.
rool radius offset C I: New offset amount becomes valid from the start point.

Availabi Iity of interference check function

3 0: Not provided
1: Provided

~Processing after the detection of interference

41 O: Automatic correction
1: Alarm

: Direction of G60 unidirectional positioning operation ( Ist - 5th axis)

pm4014 o-4 0: +
1: -
i! —

A2 -28
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter “Table (cent’d)
—
Parameter No. Bit Description

Entry of program restart mode

o 0 By VO
1: By soft-key

Allowable error range check for circular arc command

1 0 Not executed
1: Executed

Waiting of PSET when exiting the geometry offset mode

2 0 PSET is not waited.
1: PSET is waited.
—
Error detection at the completion dwell
3 0: Error detection is OFF.
1: Error detection is ON.
pm4015 In-position check when the G code mode is changed to GOO(GOO, 001 -+ GOO)
4 0: In-position check is not executed.
1: In-position check is executed.
——
GOOerror detection during solid tap
5 0: GOOerror detection is ON.
1: GOOerror detection is OFF.
—
Display of the peak value of synchronization error between the spindle and the hcte machining axis dur-
ing solid tap.
6
O Not displayed
1: Displayed
— —
Approach speed for program restart
7 0 Jog feedrate
1: Rapid traverse
—
Positioning mode in a canned cycle
1 OGOO
I: GOOor GOI, either of which presently selected
—
M code to be output in the G74/G84 canned cycle
2 0: M code reversing the one specified before the start of the canned cycle
1: M03 for G74 and M04 for G84
pm4016 Output of M05 for changing the spindle rotation direction (forward/reverse) at the hole bottom in the
G74, G84 canned cycle
3
O: M05 is not output.
1: M05 is output.

Execution type of GI 84/G 174

4 0 Return to R-point level in each feed (type. A)
1: Pecking cycle (type B)

A2-29
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Output of M05 before the output of M 19 in the G76/G77 cycle

1 0: M05 is not output,
1: M05 is output.

Spindle override during the execution of G84/G74 tapping cycle

2 0: Fixed at 1007.
1: Fixed at the value read at the start of cycle
pm4017
Validity of pm0400 dwell time in the G76/G77 cycle
3 0: Invalid
1: Valid

Validity ofpm0401 pitch dwell time

4 0: Invalid
I: Valid

Occurrence of alarm (0411 - 0419) in response to the cycle start executed without carrying out manual
reference point return after power ON (1st - 5th axis)
pm4018 o-4
O: Alarm does not occur.
1: Alarm occurs.

Backing up of the macro variable data during normal operation

2 0: Macro variable data is backed up.
I I, Macro variable data is not backed up.

Validity of B code macro execution c,n single block switch

4 0: Valid
1: Invalid

Designation of argument in M code macro

pm4020 5 0: Not designated
1: Designated

Designation of multiple M codes in en-seblock in M code macro

6 0: Second and later codes are regarded as normal M codes.
1: Second and later codes are regarded as argument.

Designation of multiple S codes in one block in S code macro

7 0: Second and later codes are regarded as normal S codes.
1: Second and later codes are regarded as argument.

Objective for argument in M (G) code macro call

pm4021 6 0: The words given after the macro call code are regarded as the objective for argument.
1: The words given in the same block are all regarded as the objective for argument.
--

A2-30
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Validity of reference point return ( 1st - 5th axis)

pm4022 o-4 0 Invalid
1: Valid

Validity of playback write (1 st - 5th axis)

pm4024 o-4 0 Invalid
1: Valid

Use of H and D codes

o 0 Used in common
1: Used individually
pm4029
Setting of the tool group in the skip status
1 0: Presently selected tool group
1: TOOISin the specified tool group

Binary data for direct operation

o 0 Invalid
1: Valid
pm4030
Buffering of T code command
1 0 Not buffered
1: Buffered

Valid timing of cycle start signal

o 0: Valid at “O” -t “l”
1: Valid at ‘{l” -t “O”

Output of rewind signal when rewinding NC program by the reset and rewind signal
pm5000 1 0: output
1: Not output

Turning ON of RST output signal when ES*Pinput signal is ON

2 0: Not turned ON
1: Turned ON

Selection of external data input data type

pm500 I o 0: Binary
1: BCD

First skip signal

o 0: Disable
1: Enable

Sensor ON timing
pm5010 5 0 Input of direct in signal “O” -t “ 1”
1: Input of direct in signal” 1” + “O”

Manual skip function

7 0: Manual skip function is valid.
1: Manual skip B function is valid.

Valid timing of first skip signal

pm5011 o 0 “24 V“ + “0 V“
1: “O V“ -+ “24 V“

A2-31
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Servo power ON method

o 0: By power on button
1: By external input signal

Measuring by worldoffset presetter

pm501 2 1 0: By touch sensor
I: By soft-key

Mode of measuring by worldoffset presetter

2 0: 1/0 type
I: Soft-key type

Tool measuring direction by offset presetter

o 0: X-axis direction
I: Y-axis direction

Validity of TLM and offset presetter when both offset presetter and TLM options are set valid.
pm5013 2 0: TLM is valid.
1: Offset presetter is valid.

Execution of TLM measurement in manual skip B

3 0: Not executed
1: Executed

Pitch error compensation (I st - 5th axis)

pm6000 o-4 0: Invalid
1: Valid
——
Setting of compensation data for the pitch error compensation function
pm6001 o 0: Incremental
1: Absolute

I Execution of stored stroke limit check for entry prohibited area (Ist - 5th axis)
pm6002 O-4 i O: Executed

Execution of stored stroke limit check for rotary axis (1st - 5th axis)
pm6004
c

Axis disconnection ( 1st - 5th axis)

pm6006 o-4 0: Invalid
1: Valid

Measuring objective in tool length measurement

pm6008 o 0: Travel distance
I: Remaining distance

A2-32

.—— —.—,
_____
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter “Table (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

pmO103 Time-out time of protocol 2 in DNC operation 1-15 1=1s

—
Time until the occurrence of ALM9023 (APL4 errcr)
o : 489ms
pmO104 0-255
1-254 : 1 -254ms
255 : Waiting infinitely

pmO 107 Manual skip measuring point monitor O-6

—
pmO 109 Internal system number switch setting “O”, “l” 0-255

pm0400 Dwell period for G76, G77 0-32767 l=lms

—
pm0401 Pitch dwell peried for G73, G83 0-32767 l=lms

Bit information
D]: X– D8: X-
pm0420 - pm0425 Manual skip contact direction (No. 1- No. 6 point)
D2: Y+ D9: Y–
D3: Z+ DIO:Z-
—
pm0801 Break point sequence number setting (1) 1-99999
—
pm0802 Break point sequence number setting (2) 1-99999

pm0803 Scaling ratio setting (1) Ratio = pm0892/pm0894 1-999999 1 =0.001

—
pm0804 Scaling ratio setting (2) 1-1000000 1 =0.001

pm0805 Angle for G76, G77 1-360000 1 =0.001 deg

pm0806 Tool length measurement bias amount 0- * 999999999 1 = C.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0807 Tool length measurement bottom level 0- * 999999999 1 = C.001 mm, 0.0001 inch
——
pm0811 - pm0815 Coordinate values at skip signal input ( I st - 5th axis) 0- * 999999999 1 = Minimum input unit
—
In “mm” mode
I = 0.1 mm/min
pm0820 - pm0828 F1 -digit feedrate (FI - F9) 0- ;;400000
In “inch” mode
1 -0.01 inch/rein

1 = Minimum detection
pm0831 - pm0833 No. 2 stored stroke limit, 1st - 3rd axis (+) 0- * 999999999
unit
—
1 = Minimum detection
pm0834 - pm0836 No. 2 stored stroke limit, 1st - 3rd axis (-) 0- * 999999999
unit

1 = Minimum detection
pm0837 - pm0839 No. 3 stored stroke limit, Ist - 3rd axis (+) 0- * 999999999
unit

1 = Minimum detection
pm0840 - pm0842 No. 3 stored stroke limit, 1st - 3rd axis (-) 0- * 999999999
unit

1 = Minimum detection
pm0843 - pm0845 No. 4 stored stroke limit, 1st - 3rd axis (+) 0- + 999999999
unit

1 = Minimum detection
pm0846 - pm0848 No, 4 stored stroke limi~ 1st - 3rd axis (-) 0- * 999999999
unit
——

A2-33
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

1 = Minimum detection
pm0849 -pm0851 No. 5 stored stroke limit, 1st - 3rd axis (+) 0- + 999999999
unit

1 = Minimum detection
pm0852 - pm0854 No. 5 stored stroke limit, 1st - 3rd axis (-) 0- + 999999999
unit

Deceleration feedrate by comer feedrate designation func-

pm0860 0-240000 1 s 1 mm/min
tion, ““mm” mode (P)

Deceleration distance by comer feedrate designation func-

pm0861 0-999999999 I -0.001 mm
tion, “mm” mode (L)

Deceleration feedrate by comer feedrate designation func-

pm0862 1 = 0.1 inch/rein
tion, “inch” mode (P)

Deceleration distance by comer feedrate designation func-

pm0863 1 = 0.0001 inch
tion, “inch” mode (L)

pm0870 Return stroke in G73 cycle 0-999999999 i = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0871 Return stroke in G83 cycle 0-999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0873 Returns stroke in G 184/G 174 cycle 0-999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

Calendar output function, date setting, No. 1- No. 4 parame-

pm0905 - pm0908 ter5

pm0920 - pm0922 Manual skip position information, No. 1 point (X - Z) 0- * 999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.000 I inch

pm0923 pm0925 Manual skip position information, No. 2 point (X - Z) 0- * 999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0926 - pm0928 Manual skip position information, No. 3 point (X - Z) 0- * 999999999 I = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0929 - pm093 1 Manual skip position information, No. 4 point (X - Z) 0- * 999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0932 - pm0934 Manual skip position information, No. 5 point (X - Z) 0- * 999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0935 - pm0937 Manual skip position information, No. 6 point (X - Z) 0- * 999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pml10&pml102 Servo axis display name (X-axis) x: 88 00 00

pml103-pm1105 Servo axis display name (Y-axis) Y 89 00 00

pml106-pml108 Servo axis display name (Z-axis) z: 900000

U: 850000
pml109-pmllll Servo axis display name (4th-axis) v 860000
W 870000
A: 650000
B: 660000
C: 670000
pm1112-pmll14 Servo axis display name (5th-axis) Set any of the above
values

name __Ls: 8300”I

!EI!!Lkpind’edisplay
Set by converting ASCII
code into decimal

A2-34
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter lable (cent’d)
— ——
No. Description Setting Range Unit

Set b{ converting ASCII

pm 1142-pm I144 Servo axis automatic system axis display name (X-axis) X: 880000
code into decimal

Set bf convertingASCII
pml145 -pml147 Servo axis automatic system axis display name (Y-axis) Y 890000
code into decimal
—
Set b! converting ASCI1
pml148-pml150 Servo axis automatic system axis display name (Z-axis) z 900000
code into decimal

U: 850000
v; 860000 Set by converting ASCII
pml151 -pml153 Servo axis automatic system axis display name (4th-axis)
W 870000 code into decimal
A: 650000
B: 660000 —
C: 670000 Set by converting ASCII
pml154-pml156 Servo axis automatic system axis display name (5th-axis) Set any of the above code into decimal
values
—
Set bt converting ASCII
pm1169-pml171 Spindle automatic system axis display name s: 830000
code into decimal
—
3: 3 iaxes, 4 4 axes,
pm 1200 High-speed mode operation, number of controlled axes 3-5
5: 5 ilXeS

U: 850000
High-speed mode operation, address name of additional 4th v 860000
pm1201
axis (input in the ASC1lcode) W: 870000
A: 650000
B: 660000 —
High-speedmode operation,addressname of additional5th C: 670000
pm I202 Set any of the above
axis (input in the ASCII code)
values
.—
pm 1220 Spindle index confirmation timer 1-255 l=4ms

pm1225 Spindle index stopped confirmation speed I -255 1 ~ I r/rein

pm 1226 Spindle index stopped confirmation speed, gear B selected I -255 1 ,= 1 r/rein
—
pm1240 Axis number to execute solid tap(1) 1

pm1241 Servo axis number to execute solid tap(1) 1-5

—
pm1252 Solid tap (1) return feedrate multiplication ratio 1-255 1 :=0,1 times

pm1253 Solid tap (2) return feedrate multiplication ratio

—
pm 1260 Spindle, loop control gear number (A) o-4

pm1261 Spindle, loop control gear number (B) o-4

Jm1321 -pm1325 1st - 5th axis, error detect on area 0-255 1 = Minimum input unit

pm1331 Spindle, error detection on area in loop control 0.255 1 = Minimum input unit

Spindle, error detection on area in loop control, gear B se-

pm1332 0.255 1 :=Minimum input unit
lected

M-35
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

I No. Description Setting Range Unit

Spindle, magnification ratio for axis feed in servo error area

1 pm1351
in reference to rapid traverse rate
0-200 1=170

1=1 r/rein, 10r/min

Note According to the
pm1400-pm1403 Spindle, spindle speed clamp (minimum) forgearl -gear4 0-30000
setting for pm 1002
Do
—

r
Spindle,spindle speed clamp (maximum) for gear 1- gear 4 0-30000 1= 1r/rein, 10r/rein
pm1408-pm1411 Spindle, max. motor speed for gear 1- gear 4 I 0-30000 I 1-1 rhnin, 10 rhnin I
Spindle speed in response to the input of spindle orientation
pm1412 0-32767
(SOR) signal
l= ’r’md

I
Motor speed in response to the input of spindle gear shift
pm1413 0-32767 I s 1 r/rein
(SRO)
I

pm1414 Spindle, zero point for indexing 0-4095 ~“1

Spindle, maximum speed corresponding to 10 V of com-

I pm1415
mand I
0-32767 I s 1 r/rein, 10 r/rein
I
pm1416 Maximum spindle speed during solid tap 0-32767
L.......
I pnl14; Spindle, position loop gain 0-32767
~~~~~ti

II-1
Maximum spindle speed corresponding to 10 ‘Vof command
0-666 r/rein
(C-axis is used)

I pm1419 Spindle, specified speed for gear A 0-32767 1-1 r/rein

! 1
Spindle, maximum spindle speed correspondi~g to 10 V
pm1435 0-32767 1-1 r/rein, 10r/rein

F-
~command (gear B selected) I I
Spindle, maximum spindle speed during solid tap (gear B
pm 1436 0-32767 1-1 r/rein, 10 r/rein
selected) I I
‘ Spindle, position loop gain (gear B selected) 0-32767 1 =0.01 [s-l]
Solid tap (1), servo axis drawing-in in-position width 0-32767 1 = Minimum input unit

I pm1501 Solid tap (2), servo axis drawing-in in-position width I 0-32767 I 1 = Minimum input unit I

I pm1502 Solid tap (I), synchronization offset parameter K 1 -32767-32767

pm1503 Solid tap (l), synchronization offset parameter K2 -32767-32767

pm 1504 Solid tap (2), synchronization offset parameter K 1 -32767-32767

I pm1505 Solid tap (2), synchronization offset parameter K2 -32767-32767

I pm1506 Rotary tool spindle (1), synchronization offset parameter K 1‘ -32767-32767

I pm1507 Rotary tool spindle (1), synchronization offset parameter K2’ -32767-32767

A2 -36
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter “Table (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

1=1 tooth
Spindle, the number of teeth of gear A at the spindle side
pm1510 0-32767 Note: “9” if intermediate
used in loop control
gear is not used.
—. —
Spindle, the number of teeth of gear A of spindle irtermedi-
pm1511 0-32767 1 = I tooth
ate gear in loop control
—
Spindle, the number of teeth of gear A of intermediate gear
pm1512 0-32767 1 = 1 tooth
in loop control

Spindle, the number of teeth of gear A at the motor side used

pm1513 0-32767 1 = i. tooth
in loop control
— —
Spindle, the number of teeth of gear Bat the spindle side
pm1514 0-32767 l=! tooth
used in loop control

Spindle, the number of teeth of gear B of spindle ir&ermedi-

pm1515 0-32767 1 = : tooth
ate gear in loop control
—
Spindle, the number of teeth of gear B of intermediate gear in
pm1516 0-32767 1= tooth
loop control

Spindle, the number of teeth of gear B at the motor side used

pm1517 0-32767 1 = [ tooth
in loop control

pm1540 Delay time to check the spindle speed arrived signs (SAGR) 0-32767 l=lms
—
pm1551 -pm1555 1st - 5th axis, backlash compensation amount 0-32767 i=IpM
— —
Number of teeth of motor when changing the servo feed
pm1561 -pm1565 1-255 1 = I tooth
amount (1st - 5th axis)
— — —
Number of teeth of screw when changing the servo feed
pm1571 -pm1575 I -255 1 = I tooth
amount (1st - 5th axis)
~:~
pm1580 I st axis, position loop gain Kp 500-20000
— ——
pm1581 1st axis, velocity loop gain Kv 350-32767 1 = 0.1 [ 1/s]

pm1582 1st axis, velocity loop integration time constant Ti 26-32767 1 = 0.01 [ins]

pm1584 1st axis, velocity feed forward gain Kvfff 0-100 1 =[).01 [Ye] 1 = 1%
—

pm1586 1st axis, axis torsion filter time constant Tn I -32767 1 = 0.01 [ins]
—
pm1589 1st axis, monitor board signal selection, multiplica!.ion ratio 1-32767

pm1590 2nd axis, position loop gain Kp 500-20000 1 =().01 [1/s]

----
pm1591 2nd axis, velocity loop gain Kv 350-32767 1 =().1 [1/s]

pm 1592 2nd axis, velocity loop integration time constant ‘R 26-32767 1 = ().01 [ins]
—
pm1594 2nd axis, veloeity feed forward gain Kvfff 0-100 1 =().01 [70] 1 = 190

pm1596 2nd axis, axis torsion filter time constant Tn 1 ~~32767 1 s ().01 [ins]
—
pm1599 2nd axis, monitor board signal selection, mukiplication ratio 1.32767
—
pm 1600 3rd axis, position loop gain Kp 500-20000 1 =().01 [1/s]
— =

M-37

._.. _.. —-.———— ______________________ .. .._ .——.——.

 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)
—
No. Description Setting Range Unit

pm1601 3rd axis, velocity loop gain Kv 350-32767 1 =0.1 [1/s]

pm 1602 3rd axis, velocity loop integration time constant Ti 26-32767 l=O.O1 [ins]
.
pm i 604 3rd axis, velocity feed forward gain Kvfff 0-100 1=0.01 [90] 1=1%

pm 1606 3rd axis, axis torsion filter time constant Tn 1-32767 I -0.01 [ins]

pm1609 3rd axis, monitor board signal selection, multi)?lication ratio 1-32767

pm1610 4th axis, position loop gain Kp 500-20000 1 =0.01 [1/s]

pm1611 4th axis, velocity loop gain Kv 350-32767 1 =0.1 [1/s]

—
pm1612 4th axis, velocity loop integration time constant TI 26-32767 1-0.01 [ins]

pm1614 4th axis, velocity feed forward gain Kvfff 0-1oo 1 =0.01 [70] 1 = 170
—
pm1616 4th axis, axis torsion filter time constant Tn 1-32767 1-0.01 [ins]

pm1619 4th axis, monitor board signal selection, multiplication ratio 1-32767
—
pm 1620 5th axis, position loop gain Kp 500-20000 1 =0.01 [1/s]

pm1621 5th axis, velocity loop gain Kv 350-32767 1 =0.1 [1/s]

—
pm1622 5th axis, velocity loop integration time constant TI 26-32767 1 = 0.01 [ins]

pm 1624 5th axis, velocity feed forward gain Kvfff 0-1oo 1-0.01 [%] 1=1%
—
pm1626 5th axis, axis torsion filter time constant Tn 1-32767 1 = 0.01 [ins]

pm 1629 5th axis, monitor board signal selection, multiplication ratio I -32767

pm1671 -pm1675 1st - 5th axis, torque limit (+) 1-32767

pm1681 - pm1685 1st - 5th axis, torque limit (–) –32767 -–1 1=1 [%]

1-1 pulse
Minimum detection unit
pm1701 -pm1705 1st - 5th axis, backlash sub-compensation amount 1-32767
= L(pm1821)/
PG (pm1071~

pm1711 -pm1715 1st - 5th axis, backlash time constant 1-32767 1 s 0.01 [ins]

pm1791 - pm1795 1st - 5th axis, multi-segment geometry offset c>et%cient 0-32767 1- Xo.ool

pm1801 -pm1805 1st - 5th axis, geometry offset coefficient 0-32767 1 = Xo.ool
—
Ist - 5th axis, axis move distance or table rotation angle per 1 1 = Minimum detection
pm1821 -pm1825 0-999999999
turn of motor unit or 0.001 deg

pm1831 -pm1835 1st - 5th axis, inertia of load 0-32767 1 = 0.0 I [kg-cm2]
—
1- 1/1000 ~m
1st 5th axis, minimum detection unit of separately installed
pm1841 -pm1845 0-999999999 (0.000001 deg) or
PG or number of pulses per 1 turn of motor
1 = 1 pulse

In Fl -digit designation, variation in feedrate per division of

pm2111 -pm2119 0-255 1 = 0.1 mrn/min/puke
pulse handle
—

A2-38
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter lable (cent’d)
—
No. Description Setting Range Unit

1= 1 mrn/min,
Feedrate corresponding to the JOG FEEDRATE setti ng posi-
pm2400 -pm2431 0-32767 0.1 inch/rein,
tion, O -31
1 deg/min

pm2432 Multiplication of jog feedrate parameter value by 10 or 100 1, 10, 100 1=X1

Designation of the addition start switch position if pm2432

pm2433 0-31
#o

Designation of position where the jog feedrate parameter

pm2434 value is multiplied by 1/10 (if both pm2433 and pm:2434 are 0-31
specified, pm2433 is given priority.)

I = 1 mrn/min,
pm244-O Feedrate for the execution of skip 0-32767 0.1 inch/rein,
1 deg/min

1 ~ 1 mm/min,
pm2444 Feedrate of rapid traverse by external deceleration 0-32767 0.1 inch/rein,
1 de~min

1- 1 mm/min,
pm2445 Feedrate of cutting feed by external deceleration 0-32767 0.1 inch/rein,
1 deglmin

1. 1 mrn/min

pm2447 Feedrate for rapid traverse override FCI

0-100, (pm2000 D3 = O)
0-:32767 1=1%
(pm2t-lt10 D3 = 1)
—
pm2448 Feedrate for rapid traverse override F1 0-100 1==1%
—
pm2449 Feedrate for rapid traverse override F2 0-100 1==1%
Multiplication value for x 100 position of manual pulse
pm2459 0-:32767 1=X1
multiply switch

1st - 5th axis, rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time

pm2461 - pm2465 con5tant 4-32767 1-1 ms (multiple of 4)

Spindle, rapid traverse acceleratiorddeceleration time

pm2471 4- ;32767 I .= 1 ms (multiple of 4)
constant

Spindle, rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time

pm2472 4-32767 1 = 1 TM(multiple of 4)
constant (gear B selected)

1st - 5th axis, acceleration/deceleration time constant in nor-

pm250 I - pm2505 0-32767 I=lns
mal cutting

1st - 5th axis, acceleration/deceleration time constant in

pm251 1 -pm2515 0-32767 I=lms
thread cuttinghpping

1 .= 1 mm/min,
pm2521 - pm2525 1st - 5th axis, reference point return approach speed 0-32767 0.1 inchlmin,
1 deglmin
—

A2-39
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

1- lmmlmin,
pm253 1- pm2535 1st - 5th axis, reference point return creep speed 0-32767 0.1 inch/rein,
1 deglmin

pm2541 No. 1 spindle, index start speed 1-32767 1-1 r/rein

pm2542 No. 1 spindle, index start speed (gear B selected) 1-32767 1=1 r/rein

pm2546 No. 1 spindle, index creep speed 1-32767 1 =lr/min

pm2547 No. 1 spindle, index creep speed (gear B selected) 1-32767 1=1 r/rein

Ist - 5th axis, acceleration/deceleration time constant in han-

pm2561 - pm2565 d,e feed 4-32767 1 s 1 ms (multiple of 4)

1st - 5th axis, acceleration/deceleration time constant in No. 2

pm257 1- pm2575 4-32767 1-1 ms (multiple of 4)
GOOmode operation

1 = 0.001 m/s
pm2580 Cutting feedrate acceleration 125-32767
(multiple of 4)

pm2581 S-curve factor in cutting feed O-6

1st 5th axis, S-curve factor in rapid traverse acceleration/de-

pm2591 - pm2595 Ce,eration 0-20

1st - 5th axis, S-curve factor in rapid traverse acceleration/de-

pm2601 - pm2605 0-15
celebration in second S-curve acceleration/deceleration

1- 1 mm/min,
pm2800 Maximum cutting feedrate (linear axis) 0-240000
0.1 inchlmin

1 = 1 mm/min,
pm2801 - pm2805 1st - 5th axis, rapid traverse mte 0-240000
0.1 inchhnin,

pm2810 Maximum cutting feedrate (rotary axis) 0-240000 1 = I deg/min

1 s 1 mm/min,
1st - 5th axis, rapid traverse rate in second S-curve accelera-
pm2811 - pm2815 Lion,dece,eration 0- 240004) O.I inch/rein,
1 deg/min

1 = 1 mtimin,
pm2821 - pm2825 Ist - 5th axis, bias in normal acceleratiotideceleration 0-240000 0.1 inch/rein,
1 deg/min

1 = 1 mm/min,
pm283 1- pm2835 Ist - 5th axis, bias in thread cutting acceleratiotideceleration 0- 240c00 0.1 inchlmin,
1 deg/min

1. 1 mtimin,
pm2851 - pm2855 1st - 5th axis, second GOOfeedrate 0-240000 0.1 inch/rein,
1 deglmin

1 = lmm/min,
pm2860 Maximum feedrate in handle feed (linear axis) 0-240000
0.1 inctimin

pm2861 Maximum feedrate in handle feed (rotary axis) 0-240000 1- ldeg/min

A2-40
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter “Fable (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

1 = 1mm/min,
pm2862 Feedrate in high-speed feedrate section during circle cut cl -240000
Cl.1 inch,/min

Number of servo lag pulses for feed clamp in handle feed

pm2863 0-240000 1 s 1 pulse
operation(’’o”: Not clamped)

1 = 1 mm/min,
pm2864 Shift feedrate in G76/G77 canned cycle 0-240000 cl. 1 in&/min

1- 1 mtimin,
pm2865 Maximum feedrate in F] -digit feed (Fl - F4) 0-240000 cl- ] inch,/min,

1 deg/min

1 s 1 mm/min,
pm2866 Maximum feedrate in F1 -digit feed (F5 - F9) 0-240000 cl.I inch,/min,
1 deg/min
—
Set ky converting ASCII
pm3400 - pm3409 Title display at power on, Ist line, 1-10 columns
code into decimal

Set by converting ASCII

pm3410 - pm3419 TMe display at power on, 2nd line, 1-10 columns
code into decimal

1st digit
Magnification for
Title display, magnification ratio 2-digit value is assumed to
the 1st line
Ist line : 2 times be a hexadecimal numbe~
pm3420 (l-3)
2nd line: 1 time convert it into decimal for
2nd digit
Set 12h = 18 (decimal) setting.
Magnification for
the 2nd line (1 - 3)
—
Ist and 2nd digits:
Title display, display start position 1st line start posi- 2-digit value is assumed to
1st line : 10th digit tion (1 - 39) be a hexadecimal numbe~
pm3421
2nd line: 12th digit 3rd and 4th digits: convert it into decimal for
Set OCOAh = 3082 (decimal) 2nd line stint posi- setting.
tion (1 - 39)

Battery backed-up memory

pm3422 Tool pot, display start number 7000-7999
number
—
Battery backed-up memory
pm3423 Tool pot, display end number 7000-7999
number
—
Battmy backed-up memory
pm3424 ATC display, MG number 7000-7999
number
—
Battery backed-up memory
pm3425 ATC display, SP number 7000-7999
num”xr
—
Battery backed-up memory
pm3426 ATC display, WT number 7000-7999
number

Battery backed-up memory

pm3427 Sub-tool pot number, display start number 7000-7999
number
.—

A2-41
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

Battery backed-up memory

pm3428 Sub-tool pot number, display end number 7000-7999
number

‘‘RDI” command PLC battery backed-up memory number

pm3440 7000-7999
designation

“SOD’ command PLC battery backed-up memory number

pm3441 7000-7999
designation

pm3442 Spindle forward rotation M code number (for drawing) 0-999

pm3443 Spindle reverse rotation M code number (for drawing) 0-999
pm3444 Spindle stop M code number (for drawing) 0-999
.
pm3445 Spindle orientation M code number (for drawing) 0-999
pm3446 Too] change M code number (for drawing) 0-999
pm3447 Coolant ON M code number (for drawing) 0-999
pm3448 Coolant OFF M code number (for drawing) 0-999
.Average time necessary for the execution of an M code (for
pm3449 0-65535 l=lms
drawing)

Average time necessary for the execution of an S code (for

pm3450 0-65535 l=lms
drawing)

Average time necessary for the execution of a T code (for

pm3451 0-65535 l=lms
drawing)
—

pm3830 - pm3853 ‘“O”must be set; the system uses these parameters.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4100 0-255 a binary numben convert it
in user macro, #
into decimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4101 0-255 a binary numbe~ convert it
in user macro, [
into decimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4102 0-255 a binary numben convert it
in user macro, ]
into decimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4103 0-255 a binary numbev convert it
in user macro, +
into decimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4104 O-255 a binary numbe~ convert it
in user macro, =
into decimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4105 0-255 a binary number convert it
in user macro, (
into decimal for setting.
~–

A2-42
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)
——
3
No. Description Setting Range Unit

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special charac hersused
pm4106 0-255 a binary numbe~ convert it
in user macro, )
into clecimal for setting.
—
Hole pattern is regarded as
Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special charac @rs used
pm4107 0-255 a binary numbeL convert it
in user macro, .
into clecimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA cede, of special charac ters used
pm4108 0-255 a binary number convert it
in user macro, ,
into clecimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special charac’~rs used
pm4109 0-255 a binary numbe~ convert it
in user macro, “ “
into cecimal for setting.

Tool life control

group (O -9)
pm4110 Tool life control group command T code offset
=T command
–pm4110 X 1000

Designation of coordinate system if work coordinate system 54-59

pm4143
shift is executed at power on or reference point return

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characmrs used
pm4144 0-255 a binary number; convert it
in user macro, <
into decimal for setting.
—
Hole pattern is regarded as
Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4145 0-255 a binary numbe~ convert it
in user macro, >
into decimal for setting.
— —
Hole pattern is regarded as
Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4146 O ~~255 a binary numbe~ convert it
in user macro, ;
into decimal for setting.

0: Not converted
Designation of operation mode in high-speed mode opera-
pm4160 1: Converted in the speci-
tion
fied sections
— —
High-speed mode operation conversion start designation
code (in ASCII) ifpm4160 = 1
pm4161 - pm4163 (Example) HON pm4161 48H
pm4162 4FH
pm4163 4EH
.
High-speed mode operation conversion end designation code
(in ASCII) if pm4160 = 1
pm4164 - pm4166 (Example) HOF pm4164 48H
pm4165 4FH
pm4166 46H

pm4167 Segment type in high-speed mode operation I-4 1==1 ms,2=2ms,4=4ms

—
pm4400 - pm4409 Buffering stop M code(1) - ( 10) 0-999

A.-43
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

pm4450 Small arc skip value in nose R and tool radius offset mode 0-32767 1 = Minimum input unit

1-0.001 mm,
pm4451 - pm4455 1s( - 5th axis, reference point return distance 0-32767 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

1-0.001 mm,
pm4461 - pm4465 1st - 5th axis. overtravel distance in G60 0-32767 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

pm4480 - pm4503 G code macro (1 - 24) call G code 1-999

pm4504 - pm4527 M code macro ( 1- 24) call M code 1-9999

I -0.001 mm,
pm455 I - pm4555 Virtual C-phase shift distance, 1st - 5th axis -32767-32767 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

High-speed mode operation, acceleration/dec4 eration at

pm4800 1 = 1 mrn/sec2
comers

1 = Minimum input unit in

pm4801 - pm4805 Ist - 5th axis, automatic coordinate system in “’mm” input 0- * 999999999
“mm” system

pm4810 High-speed mode operation, acceleratiorr/deceleration 1 s 1 mm/sec2

1 = Minimum input unit in

pm4811 -pm4815 Ist - 5th axis, automatic coordinate system in “inch” input 0- + 999999999
“inch” system

Allowable error range in circular arc interpolation by R com-

pm4820 0-999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch
mand

High-speed mode operation, allowable acceleration in circu-

pm4823 1-1 mm/sec2
lar arc interpolation block

pm4840 - pm4863 G code macro (1 - 24) call program number 0-99999

pm4864 - pm4887 M code macro (1 - 24) call program number 0-99999

“O” or call program

pm4888 S code macro call designation
number

“O” or call program

pm4889 T code macro call designation
number

“O” or call program

pm4890 B code macro call designation
number

Duration of time from resetting of signal for l.uming servo

pm5400 0-32767 l=lms
Dower off to brake release at servo power ON 7

1st - 5th axis, duration of time from ESP signal (normally

pm5401 - pm5405 0-32767 l=lms
closed) rising edge to base block ON

Duration of time from sending M, S, T code to sending of

pm5410
MF, SF, TF
0-32767 l=lms
I
Software switch, input battery backed-up memory start num-
pm5420 7000-7999
ber

M-44
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter lable (cent’d)

No. Description I Setting Range I Unit

Software switch, output battery backed-up memory start

pm542 1 7000-7999
number I I I
pm5427 Program restart switch, battery backed-up memory number
-a-— -/
Manual skip signal, battery backed-up memory number

-+=2==41
pm5428
(workpiece presetter)

pm6101 -pm6105 1st - 5th axis, pitch error compensation magnificaticm ratio

1 = X-axis, 2 = Y-axis,
pm6111 -pm6113 No. 2 stored stroke limit check axis designation, 1-3 o-3
I 3 :=Z-axis

pm6114-pm6116

pm6117 -pm6119
No. 3 stored stroke limit check axis designation,

No. 4 stored stroke limit check axis designation,

1-3

1-3
--d-———flu—— --
I 0-3 I

---H
pm6120 - pm6122 No. 5 stored stroke limit check axis designation, 1-3

pm6130 - pm6139 No. 1- No. 10 position monitor, check axis ‘–-

1st - 5th axis, pitch error compensation data storing memory
pm6401 - pm6405
$tart number

1st - 5th axis, pitch error compensation data storing memory

pm6411 - pm6415
md number i

pm6421 - pm6425
1st - 5th axis, memory number storing the reference point for
pitch error compensation I
1 s 0,001 mm,
pm6801 - pm6805 1st - 5th axis, pitch error compensation intervals 0-999999999
0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

1-0.001 mm,
pm6811 - pm6815 1st - 5th axis, second reference point position 0-:+
999999999 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

1 = 0.001 mm,
pm682 I - pm6825 1st - 5th axis, third reference point position 0-+999999999 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

pm683 I - pm6835 1st - 5th axis, fourth reference point position

pm6840 offset presetter measuring direction reference value,*:A:%cooolinch

XO

pm6841 Dffset presetter measuring direction reference value, ZO I O- +999999999 I 1-0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm6842 Work presetter measuring probe radius, (DX+) I O- *999999999 I 1 =0.001 mm, O.OCO1inch

pm6843 Work presetter measuring probe radius, (DX-) I O- +999999999 I I =0.001 mm,t).()~1 inch

pm6844 Work presetter measuring probe radius, (DX+)

pm6845 Work presetter measuring probe radius, (DY-) +:=:==::2

pm6846 Work presetter measuring probe radius, (HZ–)

~~@&lmOOOO1 ‘rich

A2-45
 Appendix Table 2.2 Parameter Table (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

pm6847 Work presetter measuring enabled retraction stroke 0- * 999999999 1-0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm6848 Work presetter measuring point feed-away stroke 0- * 999999999 1-0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch
—
pm6861 - pm6865 1st - 5th axis, pitch error compensation stroke (maximum) 0-+999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg

pm687 I - pm6875 1st - 5th axis, pitch error compensation stroke (minimum) 0-*999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg

pm6881 - pm6885
1st - 5th axis, pitch error compensation
Lion
reference point posi-
0-*999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg
—
1-0.001 mm,
pm690 I - pm6905 1st - 5th axis, stored stroke limit (+) 0-*999999999 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

1-0.001 mm,
pm691 1- pm6915 1st - 5th axis, stored stroke limit (–) 0-+999999999 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

pm6920 - pm6929
No. I - No. 10 position monitor positive direction area
boundary value
0-*999999999 1.0.001 mm

pm6930 - pm6939
No. I - No, 10 position monitor negative direetion area
boundary value
0-*999999999 1-0.001 mm

pm8811 - pm8815 Ist - 5th axis, offset amount in zero point setting 0-*999999999 I s 1 pulse

A2-46
 APPENDIX 2.3 PARAMETER TABILE
(YENET1200 COMPATIBLE DRIVER)

When the driver compatible with the YENET1200 is used, the contents of the parameters
are partly changed. In this case, please refer to Table 2.3.

Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter lable

—
ParameterNo. Bit Description

o Single-block switch o: OFF 1: ON

1 Machine lock switch o: OFF 1: ON

—
2 Dry run switch O: OFF 1: ON
——
3 Block delete switch o: OFF 1: ON
pmOOOO —
4 I Manual absolute switch o: OFF 1: ON
1

5 ~Auxiliary function lock switch o OFF 1: ON

—
I
6 ~Display lock switch o: OFF 1: ON
)
7 i Edit lock switch o: OFF 1: ON
——————
0 Optional stop switch o: OFF 1: ON

pmOOO1 1 Start lock switch o: OFF 1: ON

— ——
2 Z-axis neglect switch o: OFF 1: ON

o Mirror image 1 0: OFF 1: ON

1 Mirror image 2 0 OFF 1: ON

pmOO02 2 Mirror image 3 0 OFF 1: ON

3 Mirror image 4 0: OFF 1: ON

—
4 Mirror image 5 0: OFF 1: ON

1 Axis disconnection designation (4th-axis) o: OFF 1: ON

— —
pmOO03
2 Axis disconnection designation (5th-axis) o: OFF 1: ON
— — ~

A2-47
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

ISO/EIA code selection for output tape code

o O: ISO code
1: EIA code

Execution of TV check
1 O: Not executed
1: Executed

Counting the number of characters in ( ) for TV check

2 O: Not counted
1: Counted
pmOO04
TH check for ISO code input
3 O: Executed
Data setting for
1: Not executed
No. 1 pOtl — —
Feed holes in output to tape
4 O: Not punched
1: Punched

TH check for ISO code output

5 O: Executed
1: Not executed

EOB codes in 1S0 code output

6 O: CR and LF
1: LF

Manual zero return switch o: OFF 1: ON

No. 2 manual zero return switch o OFF 1: ON

2 Interruption point return switch o OFF 1: ON

3 Automatic mode handle offset switch o: OFF 1: ON

pmOO05
4 Setup point return switch o: OFF 1: ON

5 Playback switch o: OFF 1: ON

6 FI -digit switch o: OFF 1: ON

7 Program restart switch o: OFF 1: ON

A2-48
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)
—
Parameter No. Bit Description

ISO/EIA code selection for output tape code

o 0 ISOcode
1: EIAcode
—
Execution of TV check
1 0 Notexecuted
1: Executed
—
Counting the number of characters in ( ) for TV check
0: Not counted
21
1: Counted
—
TH check for 1S0 code input
pmOO06 3 0 Executed
1: Not executed

Feed holes in output to tape

4 0 Not punched
1: Punched

TH check for 1S0 code output

5 0 Executed
1: Not executed
——
EOB codes in ISO code output
6 0 CR and LF
1: LF
—

A2-49
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Selection of input unit

o 0: mm
1: inches

Operation instructions and control instructions in user macro

I O: Notinterrupted bysingle-block stop.
1: Interrupted bysingle-block stop.

Occurrence of an alarm if skip signal is not turned ON until the completion of axis move specified in the
skip function block
2
O: An alarm occurs.
I: An alarm does not cccur.

Addition of work shift correction amount

3 0: Not added
pmOO07 I: Added

Tool life control by T command

4 0: Executed
1: Not executed (valid only when the optional tool life control function is selected.)

Display of program list during input/outputherify of a program

5 0: Program list is displayed.
I: Program list not displayed.

‘“O”data in parameter output

6 0: “O” data are output.
I: “O” data are not output.

Buzzer sound for the operation of ke,ys in the keyboard

7 0: No buzzer sound
1: Buzzer sound

A2-50
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

—
qo. 2 stored stroke limit
o O: Invalid
1: Valid

No. 3 stored stroke limit

1 O: Invalid
1: Valid

io. 4 stored stroke limit

2 O Invalid
1: Valid

Qo. 5 stored stroke limit

3 O Invalid
1: Valid
pmOO08
No. 2 entry prohibited area
4 O: Inside the boundary
1: Outside the boundary

‘Jo. 3 entry prohibited area

5 O: Inside the boundary
1: Outside the boundary
—
qo. 4 entry prohibited area
6 O: Inside the boundary
1: Outside the boundaty

No. 5 entry prohibited area

7 O: Inside the boundary
1: Outside the boundary

Selection of input port

0 (): No. 1 pOlt
]: No. 2 pOrt
—
lle code used for counting
1 O An M code
1: T9999 command
pmOO09
Number of tool life control groups and tools (pmOO09)

Groups Tools D6 D7
6.7 @128 2 0 0
@64 4 1 0
@ 32 0 1
@ 16 1: I 1

N-51
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Input device setting

D3 D2 DI Do
o 0 0 0 Resewed
0 0 0 1 YE tape reader
o-3
o 0 I o General-purpose RS-232C device
o 0 1 1 Not used

pmOO10
1 I 1 1
No. 1 port device
Output device setting
setting
D7 D6 D5 D4
o 0 0 0 Reserved 1
0 0 0 1 Reserved 2
4-6
0 0 1 0 General-purpose RS-232C device
o 0 1 1 Not used
—
I 1 I 1

BPS setting
D2 D] Do
o 0 0 1000r75
o 0 1 llOor 150
0 1 0 300
0-2
0 1 1 600
1 0 0 1200
1 0 1 2400
1 1 0 4800
1 1 1 9600
pmOOI I
Stop bit length
Communication 0: 1 bit
3
parameter setting 1: 2 bits
No. 1 port (input)
or general-purpose Data length
RS-232C device 4 0: 7 bits
(format) 1: 8 bits

Parity bit
D6 D5
5.6 0 0 No parity
o 1 Even parity
1 0 Odd pari~y

Setting of low baud rate selection

7 0: 100 and 110 bps
1: 75 and 150 bps

/42-52
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter lable (cent’d)
—
ParameterNo. Bit Description

Control by control code

o 0 Not executed
1: Executed
— ——
pmOO12
RTS control
1 0 Not executed

El
Communication I
parameter setting 1: Executed A
Al
No. 1 port (input) DR line check
‘or general-purpose ~ O Not executed
RS-232C device 1: Executed
(control)
NC data special control
7 0 Not executed
1: Executed

BPS setting
D2 D] Do
o 0 0 1COor 75
0 0 1 llOor 150
0 1 0 3C0
0-2
o 1 1 600
1 0 0 1200
I o 1 2400
1 1 0 4800
1 1 1 9600
pmOO13
Stop bit length
Communication ‘3 O I bit
parameter setting 1: 2 bits
No. I pOrt (Output)
for general-purpose Data length
RS-232C device 4 0: 7 bits
(format) 1: 8 bits

Parity bit
D6 D5
5.6 lo 0 No parity
I o 1 Even parity
1 0 Odd parity

Setting of low baud rate selection

7 0: 100 and I1O bps
1: 75 and 150 bps
— —
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Control by control code

o 0: Not executed
1: Executed
pmOO14
, RTS control
Communication 1 0: Not executed
parameter setting 1: Executed
Vo. 1 port (output)
DR line check
or general-purpose ~
O: Not executed
RS-232C device
1: Executed
(control)
NC data special control
7 0: Not executed
1: Executed

Input device setting

D3 D2 D1 Do
o 0 0 0 Reserved
0 0 0 1 YE tape reader
o-3
o 0 I o General-purpose RS-232C device
o 0 1 1 Not used
—
pmOO15
I 1 I }

No. 2 port device

Output device setting
setting D5 D4
D7 D6
o 0 0 0 Reserved 1
0 0 0 1 Reserved 2
4-7
0 0 1 0 General-purpose RS-232C device
o 0 1 1 Not used
—
1 1 1 1

M-54
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)
—
ParameterNo. Bit Description

BPS setting
D2 D1 Do
o 0 0 100 or 75
0 0 1 llOor 150
0 I o 300
0-2
0 1 1 600
I o 0 1200
1 0 1 2400
1 1 0 4s00
1 I 1 9600
pmOO16
Stop bit length
Communication 3 0 1 bit
parameter setting 1: 2bits
No. 2 pOrt (OUtpUt) ——
“orgeneral-purpose Data length
RS-232C device 4 0 7 bits
(format) 1: 8 bits

Parity bit
D6 D5
5.6 0 0 No parity
o 1 Even parity
1 0 Odd parity
—
Setting of low baud rate selection
7 0 100 and 110 bps
1: 75 and 150 bps
—
Control by control code
o 0: Not executed
1: Executed
—
pmOOl 7
RTS control
I 0: Not executed
Communication
1: Executed
parameter setting
‘JO. 2 port (output) DR line check
‘or general-purpose 2 0: Not executed
RS-232C device I: Executed
(control)
NC data special control
7 0 Not executed
1: Executed

A2-55
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

~BPS setting
! D2 D] Do
o 0 0 I00 or 75
0 0 1 llOOr 150
1 0 300
o-2 ~ :
1 1 600
1 0 0 1200
I
1 0 1 2400
1 1 0 4800
I I 1 9600
pmOO18
Stop bit length
Communication 3 0: 1 bit
parameter setting 1: 2 bits
No. 2 pOtT (Output) -—

for general-purpose Data length

RS-232C device 4 0: 7 bits
(format) 1: 8 bits

Parity bit
D6 D5
5.6 0 0 No parity
o 1 Even parity
I o Odd parity

Setting of low baud rate selection

7 0: 100and llObps
1: 75 and 150 bps

Control by control code

o 0: Not executed
1: Executed
pmOO19 +
i RTS control
Communication 1, 0: Not executed
parameter setting 1: Executed
No. 2 pOrt (Output)
DR line check
for general-purpose z
O: Not executed
RS-232C device
1: Executed
(control) 1
~NC data special control
7 0: Not executed
1: Executed

~Edit, display, and inputioutput operation of part programs 08000 to 08999

0 0: Permitted
I 1: Prohibited
pmO020
Spaces in program input
7 0: Spaces are deleted when a program is input. (Spaces in comments are not deleted.)
1: Spaces are not deleted when a program is input.
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

O: ~it, display, andinputioutput o~raticJn ofp~programs 08~Oto 08999c<>nfoms tothesettir

pmO021 o for pmO020
1: Display of part programs 08000 to 08999 is permitted.

O: Edit, display, and inputioutput operaticm of part programs 08000 to 08999 conforms to the settir
pmO022 o for pm3004.
I: Display of part programs 08000 to 08999 is permitted.
—
DC3 control code designation
4 0 13H
1: 93H
—.
DR signal check by communication module
5 0: Not checked
1: Checked
—
pmO030
Communication module device designation
6 0 RS-232C
1: RS-422
—
Tape operation designation for NC
7 OPTR
1: Communication module
—
BPS setting
D2 D1 Do
o 0 0 [200
0-2 0 0 I 2400
0 1 0 4800
0 1 1 9600
1 0 0 I92(30
pmO03 I Stop bit length
3 0: 1 bit
Communication 1: 2 bits
parameter setting
RS-232C Data length
4 0 7 bits
1: 8 bits
—
Parity bit
D6 D5
5.6 0 0 No parity
o 1 Even parity
1 0 Odd parity
—
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

BPS setting
D2 D1 Do
o 0 0 I200
0-2 0 0 I 2400
0 1 0 4800
0 I I 9600
1 0 0 19200

pmO032 Stop bit length

3 0: 1 bit
Communication 1: 2bits
parameter setting
RS-422 Data length
4i O: 7 bits
I 1: 8 bits

! Parity bit
D6 D5
5.6 ~ O 0 No parity
0 1 Even parity
I
+tio~of~pu~s 0“ ‘ar’ty
o 0: Least input unit
1: 10 times the least input unit

1Application of override setting on spindle speed output-

0: Not applied
21 1: Applied

~
pm1000 4 0: Calculated value based on S command
I 1: Feedback from the spindle motor
I
1SSTP setting for “0’ output in response to “O” S command
s~ o:SSTP
“0”
1:Ss’1-p”l”
Checking of SAGR when feedrate is changed from rapid traverse to cutting feedrate.
7’ 0: Not checked
1: Checked

i Output sign of S in S5-digit commarid

DI DO M03 M04

0.1 o 0 + +
pm1001
0 I — —
1 0 i- —
1 1 — +

Magnification ratio of spindle speed parameter

pm 1002 0 0: xl
1: Xlo

~D/A output status is input to the PLC.

pm 1003 2; O: Yes
1: No

A2-58
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

1st - 5th physical servo axis

YENET1 200 station number setting (No. 2 to No. 15 station)
D3 D2 DI Do D3 D2 D1 DO
0000 Alarm 0001 No. 8 station
1 000 Alarm 1 001 No. 9 station
o-3 o I 00 No. 2 station o 1 0 1 No. 10 station
1 1 00 No. 3 wation 1 1 0 1 No. 11 station
0010 No. 4 wation O 0 1 1 No. 12 station
1 0 1 0 No. 5 sration I 01 1 No. 13 station
pm1020 - pm1024 01 1 0 No. 6 sration O I 1 1 No. 14 station
1 1 1 0 No. 7 sration 1 1 1 1 No. 15 station

1st - 5th physical servo axis specifica~iom

6 O Servo axis
1: C-axis integral with spindle

1st - 5th physical servo axis

7 O Invalid
1: Valid

No, 1 physical spindle

0-3
YENET1200 station number setting (see pm 1020- pm1024)
—
No. 1 physical spindle specifications
6 O: Spindle
pm!026
1: C-axis integral with spindle
— —
No. 1 physical spindle
7 O: Invalid
1: Valid

W-59
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)
I
Parameter No. Bit ; Description

~velocity loop control ‘method

o 0: PI
1: 1P

Velocity loop control automatic setting

I O: Invalid
1: Valid

Separately installed PG
2 0: Invalid
I: Valid
pm 1030- pm 1034
Reverse connection of separately installed PG
1st - 5th axis servo 4 0: Invalid
control type 1: Valid

0: Servo axis
5
1: C-axis integral with spindle

! Axis type
61 0: Linear axis
1: Rotary axis
I
~Motor rotation direction
71 0: Forward rotation
1: Reverse rotation

D2 D1 Use of PG
No PG for spindle
I“2!:Y PG used at the spindle
1 0 PG used at the motor
pm1039
~Spindle sewo control
Spindle servo 5! O: Executed
control type 1: Not executed

Spindle configuration
7 ! O: Normal spindle
1: C-axis integrated

A260
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Servo feed amount change

o 0 Notexecuted
1: Executed

Absolute encoder
1 0 Motor PG
1: Separately installed PG

Disregarding error pulses at the input of emergency stop

2 0 Not disregarded
1: Disregarded

pm1044-pm1048 Execution of follow-up processing for the input of servo OFF

3 0: Not executed
1st-axis - 5th-axis 1: Executed
—
Use of absolute encoder
4 0 Not used
1: Used
——
Infinite length for rotary axis control
6 0 Not possible
1: Possible

Use of 17-bit encoder

7 0 Not used
1: Used
——
No. 1 spindle feedback pulse magnification ratio setting
DI Do
0 0 xl
0.1
o 1 x2
1 0 x4
1 1 x8
pm1053
Execution of spindle indexing in loop control
2 0 Not executed
1: Executed
—.
Execution of C-axis indexing when switching to C-axis
3 0 Not executed
1: Executed

Amplifier type for 1st - 5th axis

pm 1060 0-4 0: Analog amplifier
1: Digital amplifier
—.

A2-61

—.—..- _—— --
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Setting of motor selection code for “n’’th-axis

Setting Type Setting Type
51 usAGED-03A/c 91 usAGED-03B/D
52 -05AJC 92 -05BID
53 -09AIC 93 -09BID
54 -13A/c 94 - 13BID
55 -20AIC 95 -20BID
56 -30’WC 96 -30BID
57 -44AJC 97 -44B/D
pm1061 - pm1065 o-7

Setting Type Setting Type

142 SGMG-05ACJA 171 SGMG-03ACIB
I 43 -09AElA 172 -06ACIB
144 -13 ADA 173 -09ACIB
I 45 -20AUA 174 -12AnB
146 -30AClA 175 -20ACIB
I47 -44AnA 176 -30ACIB
177 -44AUB

Availability of digital amplifier offset automatic adjustment

pm 1070 0-4 0: Not available
I: Available

Availability of projection compensation function in circle cut ( 1st - 5th axis)

pm 1080 0-4 0: Not available
I: Available

Externally installed encoder type (1st - 5ttr axis)

Type Setting
Linear scale 20
15-bit ABS 21
15-bit ABS (rotary axis) 22
pm1081 -pm1085
17-bit ABS 23
8 192-pulse new INC 11
25000- pulse new INC 18
30000- pulse new INC 19
360000- pulse type for C-axis 23

Spindle encoder type: I0241NC

pm1091
Setting: 21

Resonance filter type (lst - 5th axis)

pm 1099 0-4 0: Secondary axis resonance filter
I: Cubic root axis resonance fil[er

A2-62
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter lable (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Dry run during rapid traverse

o 0 Invalid
1: Valid

Dry run during thread cutting

1 0 Valid
1: Invalid

Spindle override during tapping

2 0: Not clamped at 100%
1: Clamped at 1007. (only for lathe)
—
Setting of input unit for pm2447 (F. feedrate)
3 0: mrn/min
pm2000
1: %
—
Validity of feedrate override signal
4 0: Valid when” 1“ (NO contact)
1: Valid when “O” (NC contact)

Replacing rapid traverse with jog until the completion of reference point return after turning ON the
power
6
O: Rapid traverse is not replaced with jog.
1: Rapid traverse is replaced with jog.

Setting jog feedrate of rotary axis at 1/10 c,f that of linear axis
7 0: Not set at 1/10
1: Set at 1/10
—
Feedrate for skip function
pm2001 o 0: As specified by F code
1: As set by parameter

Validity of automatic mode handle offset ( 1st - 5th axis)

pm2002 o-4 0 Invalid
I: Valid

Valid operation of automatic mode handle offset

1 0 Other than rapid traverse
1: Only in the interpolation mode
—
pm2003
i Setting of X 100 for manual pulse multiply
7! o: x 100
1: Value set for parameter (pm2459)
I
~Feedrate at the detection of 0.001 mm or 0.0001 inch
pm2004 o , 0 F6.O mm/min or F4. 1 inctimin
1: F6. 1 mm/min or F4.3 inch/rein
—

A2-63
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit ~ Description

~Addition oftoolposition offset amol~nt in Z-axis position da~fordisp1ay

2j O: Added
1: Not added
-~
I Position data display change (work shift coordinate system screen, correction amount screen)
3 0: Machine coordinate system
1: Workpiece coordinate system
pm3000
Position data display change (offset screen)
4 0: Machine coordinate system
1: Workpiece coordinate system

Position data display change (program screen)

O: Machine coordinate system
I 1: Workpiececoordinatesystem
1’
~External timer display
O: Invalid
0 I 1: Valid

, lSetupmenuscreen

I ~$~~id

Simplified TLM
3 0: Valid
1: Invalid

, Priority of validity between T and M.96 if specified in the same block

pm3001 4 0: T command becomes valid first.
1: M06 command becomes vahd first.

Waiting pot display

-+

-+
1: Valid

A2’64
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter l-able (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Clear of MDI buffer by program reset if M02 or M30 is specified at the completion of MDI program
O: Cleared
1: Notcleared

Clear of MDI buffer by panel reset or external reset

O CIeared
1: Notcleared

MDI program
Start position of
2 O: Presentcursor position
1: Beginningof the MDI program —
.
Input switchingon work shiftand offsetscreens
3 O: By soft-keys
1: Accordingto the setting for pm3002 (D4, D5) —
pm3002
Input on work shift screen (correction screen)
4 O: Absolute
1: Incremental

Input on offset screen

5 O: Absolute
1: Incremental
—
EDIT process address search
6 O Character search
1: Binary search
—
RUN process address search
7 O Binary search
1: Character search
—

A2-65

.——..
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Initial screen at power ON

D1 DO
0 0 4POS
0.1
o 1 Program check screen
1 0 Edit screen
I 1 4POS

Job screen of the setup process at power ON

2 0: Workpiece coordinate systemjobscreen
1: Tooljob screen

Input mode setting at power ON

3 0: Absolute
pm3003
1: Incremental

Clearing of the program that requires the check for alarm

4 0: Cleared by reset operation
1: Cleared byreset operation after thecheck forthe alarm

Display of the spindle and the next tool on the RUN screen
5 0: Not displayed
1: Displayed

ATC display
6 0: Byte +byte
1: Word

Edit/display/output of part programs of 09000 to 09999

pm3004 o~ O: Permitted
1: Prohibited

A2-66
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter lable (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Processing if the same O number already exists in loading a program from tape
o 0 Warning
1: Existing program isoverwritten by new program

Clearing of the program numbers at power ON

1 0 Cleared
1: Not cleared
—
Definition of program number
2 0 Numerical value specified following O
1: Numerical value specified following O or N

Interpretation of M code (M02, M30, M*99 [*: O - 3]) read at the end of program loading from tape
pm3005 3 0: Regarded as program end
1: Not regarded as program end

Automatic editing of a program number in program rename/copy/storing operatimr

4 0: Edited automatically
1: Not edited

Conversion of “:” code (1S0) at input and output

5 0: Not converted
1: Converted

Conversion of “:” code (1S0) at input and output (valid if pm3005 D5 = 1)

6 0: Not converted
1: Converted

A2-67
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Identification of tape operation device

o 0: I/O input specification
1: Setting specification

Designation of processing at the occurrence of communication module error

1 , 0: NCplaced inthe alarm state
1: NCnotplaced inthe alarm state

Buffer area data storing amount at the start of DNC operation

D3 D2 Bytes
I() 2048
2.3
lo 2128
pm3006 ~,{ 2256
1 I 2512

Designation of the transmission of the control character

41 0: Not transmitted
I i: Transmitted

Communication module protocol

D7 D6 D5
0 0 0 Protocol I
5-7
o 0 1 Protocol 2
0 1 0 Protocol 3
0 1 1 Protocol 4

Function key of [SRCH] key

1 0: Background function key
1: Foreground function key

0: Setting of pm3006 DO, D 1 is valid.

6
pm3007 1: If pm3006 D] = 1, only time-out error is not output.

Buffering of 150-byte DAT binary data after the reception of the WAT command by the communication
y ~module.
I O: Buffered
1: Not buffered
I

/42.68
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Selection of G code in 01 -group when the power is turned ON or the NC is reset

o 0 GOO
I: GO1

Selection of G code in 03-group when the power is turned ON

1 0: G90
1: G91

Selection of G code in 04-group when the power is turned ON

2 0 G98
1: G99

pm4000 Selection of G code in 08-group when the power is turned ON

D4 D3
3,4 0 0 G49
o I G43
1 0 G44
—
Selection of G code in 02-group when the NC is reset
5 0: G17
1: G code specified immediately before the reset

Selection of G code in 03-group when the NC is reset

6 0: G code set for pm4000 D1
1: G code specified immediately before the reset
—

A2-69

.-. —. ——. —... —_=— .——. .—-—

——— .— .—.—
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)
1

Parameter No. Bit ~ Description

1

: Mirror image mode when thepower istumed ONorthe NC is reset

o, 0: M94 (mirror image OFF)
1: M95 (mirror image ON)

~Initial M code mode when the power is turned ON or the NC is reset

1 0: M96 (arc)
1: M97 (linear)

~Application of mirror image ON the intermediate positioning point for G28 if M95 is set when the power
2 I is turned ONortheNC is reset
O: Mirror image is applied
1: Mirror image is not applied.

Presetting of workpiece coordinate system shift distance when the power is turned ON (G54 - G59:
1#4143)
3
pm4001 O: Not preset
1: Preset

Presetting of workpiece coordinate system shift distance at the completion of zero return (G54 - G59:
~#4i43)
4
O: Not preset
1: Preset

Occurrence of alarm if an attempt is made to execute cycle start without carrying out reference point re-
turn after turning the power ON
6
0: Alarm occurs (041 1- 0415) (conforms topm4018 DO - D4).
1: Alarm does not cccur (setting is possible forpm4018 DO - D4).

Cycle start interlock when system number switch is set at” 1“ or pmO 109 DO= 1
7 0: Cycle start interlock is not provided.
I: Cycle start interlock is provided.

~Reference point return direction (1st - 5th axis)

pm4002 0-4 i O: Positive direction
I 1: Negative direction

~ ~Manual reference point return type in the second and later operation after power ON
O: High-speed type
I: Low-speed type
pm4003
Automatic reference point return type in the second and later operation after power ON
7 0: High-speed type
1: Low-speed type

Occurrence of alarm if movement cc~mmand other than G28 is executed without carrying out manual or
automatic reference point return after power ON (1st - 5th axis)
pm4004 o-4 I

Automatic coordinate system setting (1st - 5th axis)

z -*

A2-70
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Returning of the execution pointer to the start of the program when the NC is reset by the external key

o operation
O: Returned
1: Not returned

~Rewinding of tape by M30 when YASNAC standard tape reader is connected to the No. 1 RS-232C port
11 0: Not rewound
1: Rewound

Rewinding of tape by M30 when YASNAC standard tape reader is connected to the No. 2 RS-232C port
pm4008
2 0: Not rewound
1: Rewound

Possibility of starting of memory operation from a mid point of a block

3 0: Possible
1: Not possible; always started from the beginning of a block
—.
High-speed automatic start for high-speed rewind operation
7 0: Does not start at high-speed
1: Start at high-speed
—
Present value is input to system variables #5001 and on at the execution ofG31 skip.
o 0 Present value
1: Command value

Microprogram common variables #100 - ;#299 become <empty> by the reset operation.
I O Emptied
1: Not emptied
pm4009
Output of leading zeros if the upper digit value of a variable is “O” at the executio~ of DPRINr function
2 0: Spaces are output.
1: Nothing is output.
—
MST status when operation mode is changed from automatic to manual
7 0: M, S, and T are forcibly finished without SPL indicating lamp lit.
1: M, S, and T are saved with SPL indicating lamp lit.

A2-71
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Processing after the change of offset amount

o 0: Newoffset amount bcomesvalid from the block to be buffered next.
I: New offset amount becomes valid from the H (D) code to be buffered next.

D code in the G12/Gl 3 mode

Operation expression for the direct input of measured workpiece value

pm4010 O: Present value saved temporarily – Keyed-in value
1: Keyed-in value – Present value saved temporarily
;e
i Processing of D code after reset (valid when pm401 1 D1 = O)
61 0: 00
1: Saved

~Processing of H code after reset or reference point return (valid when pm40 11 D1 = I)
7; o: 00
1: Saved

Designation of offset number for G45 - G48

1, 0: Only D code
1: Only H code
—
Validity of manual absolute function if there is no axis move command in the block where incrememal
amount is generdted
2
O: Manual absolute function is valid.
1: Manual absolute function is not valid.
pm4011
Validity of manual absolute function if there is no axis move command in the block where incremental
amount is not generated
3
O: Manual absolute function is valid.
1: Manual absolute function is not valid.

; Ignoring of the manual absolute function for the incremental commands.

7i O: Manual absolute function is not ignored.
I
1: Manual absolute function is ignored.

‘ Processing when the workpiece coordinate system shift distance is changed

o 0: New value becomes valid from the next command.
1: New value becomes valid from the next block.

Reversing of the input incremental ~alue of the workpiece coordinate system shift distance
pm40 12 1 0: Not reversed
I: Reversed

Workpiece coordinate system setting expansion address

7 0: “J”
1: “P”

A2 -72
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter “Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Start-up and cancel motion

o 0 Type Bcompensation methcd
1: Type A compensation method
——
Switching point of offset direction (G41/G42)
1 0: Point of intersection
1: At the start and end points
—
pm4013 Processing after the offset amount is changed
2 0: New offset amount becomes valid from the end point.
Tool radius offset C 1: New offset amount becomes valid from the start point.
—
Availability of interference check function
3 0 Not provided
1: Provided

Processing after the detection of interference

4 0: Automatic correction
1: Alarm

Direction of G60 unidirectional positioning operation (1st - 5th axis)

pm4014 o-4 0: +
1: -

M-73
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Entry of program restart mode

o 0: By I/O
1: By soft-key

Allowable error range check for circular arc command

1 0: Not executed
1: Executed

Waiting of PSET when exiting the geometry offset mode

2 0: PSET is not waited.
1: PSET is waited.

Error detection at the completion dwell

3 0: Error detection is OFF.
1: Error detection is ON.
pm4015 In-position check when the G code mode is changed to GOO(COO, GOl + GOO)
4 0: In-position check is not executed.
1: In-position check is executed.

GOOerror detection during solid tap

5 0: COO error detection is ON.
I: GOOerror detection is OFF.

Display of the peak value of synchronization error between the spindle and the hole machining axis dur-
ing solid tap.
6
O: Not displayed
1: Displayed

Approach speed for program restart

7 0: Jog feedrate
1: Rapid traverse

Positioning mode in a canned cycle

1 0: GOO
I: GOOor GO1, either of which presently selected

M code to be output in the G74/G84 canned cycle

2 0: M code reversing the one specified before the start of the canned cycle
1: M03 for G74 and M04 for G84
pm4016 r Output of M05 for changing the spindle rotation direction (forwardheverse) at the hole bottom in the
G74, G84 canned cycle
3
O: M05 is not output.
1: M05 is output.

Execution type of G184/G 174

4 0: Return to R-point level in each feed (type A)
1: Pecking cycle (type B)

A2-74
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter lable (cent’d)
—
Parameter No. Bit Description
—
Output of M05 before the output of M 19 in the G76/G77 cycle
1 0: M05is notoutput.
1: M05 is output.

Spindle override during the execution of G84/G74 tapping cycle

2 , 0: Fixed at 100%
1: Fixed atthevalue read atthestan ofcycle
I —
pm4017
~Validity of pm0400 dwell time in the G76/G77 cycle
3[ O: Invalid
I 1: Valid

: Va1idityofpm0401 pitch dwell time

4 I O: Invalid
1: Valid

I Occurrence of alarm (041 I - 0419) in respmse to the cycle start executed without carrying out manual
reference point return after power ON ( 1st - 5th axis)
pm4018 o-4
O: Alarm does not occur.
1: Alarm occurs.
———
Backing up of the macro variable data dur ng normal operation
2 0: Macro variable data is backed up.
1: Macro variable data is not backed up.
— —
Validity of B code macro execution on single block switch
4 0: Valid
1: Invalid
.
Designation of argument in M code macro
pm4020 5 ~ O: Not designated
1: Designated

Designation of multiple M codes in one block in M code macro

6 0: Second and later codes are regarded as normal M codes.
1: Second and later codes are regarded as argument.

Designation of multiple S codes in one blcck in S code macro

7 0: Second and later codes are regarded as normal S codes.
1: Second and later codes are regarded as argument.
—
Objective for argument in M (G) code macro call
pm402 1 6 0: The words given after the macro Ci]ll code are regarded as the objective for argument.
1: The words given in the same block are all regarded as the objective for argument.

Validity of reference point return (1st - 5th axis)

pm4022 o-4 0: Invalid
1: Valid
— .
Validity of playback write (1st - 5th axis)
pm4024 o-4 0 Invalid
1: Valid

M-75
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Use of H and D codes

o 0: Used in common
1: Used individually
pm4029
Setting of the tool group in the skip status
1 0: Presently selected tool group
1: Tools in the specified tool group

Binary data for direct operation

o 0: Invalid
1: Valid
pm4030
Buffering of T code command
] ~ (): Not buffered
1: Buffered

Valid timing of cycle start signal

o ‘ O: Valid at “O” --+ “l”
1: Valid at”l” -i “0’

Output of rewind signal when rewinding NC program by the reset and rewind signal
pm5000 1 0: output
1: Not output

Turning ON of RST output signal when ESP input signal is ON

2 0: Not turned ON
1: Turned ON

Selection of external data input data type

pm5001 o 0: Binary
1: BCD

First skip signal

o 0: Disable
1: Enable

Sensor ON timing
pm5010 5 0: Input of direct in signal “0”+ “I”
I: Input of direct in signal “ 1” -+ “0”

Manual skip function

7 0: Manual skip function is valid.
1: Manual skip B function is valid.

Valid timing of first skip signal

pm5011 o 0: “24 V“ -+ “0 V“
1: “O V + “24 V“

A2-76
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter l-able (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Servo power ON method

o O: By power on button
1: By external input signal

Measuring by worldoffset presetter

pm5012 O: By touch sensor
1: By soft-key

Mode of measuring by wor!doffset presetter

2 o 1/0 type
1: Soft-key type

Tool measuring direction by offset presettcr

0 O: X-axis direction
I: Y-axis direction
—.
Validity of TLM and offset presetter when both offset presetter and TLM options are set valid.
pm50 I 3 2 O: TLM is valid.
1: Offset presetter is valid.

Execution of TLM measurement in manual skip B

3 O: Not executed
1: Executed

Gear selection of H gear

Dl DO
0.1 o 0 Gear A
o 1 Gear A
1 0 Gear B
— —
Gear selection of M gear
D3 D2
pm5018 2.3 o 0 Gear A
o 1 Gear A
1 0 Gear B
—
Gear selection of L gear
D5 D4
4.5 o 0 Gear A
o 1 Gear A
1 0 Gear B
—
Pitch error compensation (1st - 5th axis)
pm6000 0-4 O: Invalid
I 1: Valid
—
Setting of compensation data for the pitch error compensation function
I pm6001 0 O: Incremental
1: Absolute

Execution of stored stroke limit check for entry prohibited area ( 1st - 5th axis)
pm6002 0-4 O: Executed
1: Not executed

A2-77

. . .. . .
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

Parameter No. Bit Description

Execution of stored stroke limit check for rotary axis ( 1st - 5th axis)
pm6004 o-4 O: Not executed
1: Executed

Axis disconnection (1st - 5th axis)

pm6006 0-4 O: Invalid
1: Valid

Measuring objective in tool length measurement

pm6008 0 O: Travel distance
I: Remaining distance

AZ-78
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter lable (cent’d)
—
No. Description Setting Range Unit
—
pmO103 Time-out time of protocol 2 in DNC operation 1-15 1=1s
—
Time until the occurrence of ALM9023 (APL4 error)
o : 489 ms
pmO I04 0-255
1-254 : l-254ms
255 : Waiting infinitely
—
pmO107 Manual skip measuring point monitor O-6
—
pm0109 Internal system number switch setting “0”, “l” 0-255
—
pm0400 Dwell period for G76, G77 0-32767 l=lms

pm0401 Pitch dwell period for G73, G83 0-32767 I=lms

—
Bit information
D1:X- D8:X–
pm0420 - pm0425 Manual skip contact direction (No. 1- No. 6 point)
D2: Y+ D9: Y-
D3: Z+ DIO:Z–
—
pm0801 Break point sequence number setting (1) 1-99999
— —
pm0802 Break point sequence number setting (2) 1-99999
—
pm0803 Scaling ratio setting (1) Ratio = pm0892/pm0894 ] -999999 1 = 0.001

pm0804 Scaling ratio setting (2) 1-1000000 1 = 0.001

pm0805 Angle for G76, G77 1-360000 1 = 0.001 deg

pm0806 Tool length measurement bias amount 0- * 999999999 1 = 0,001 mm, 0.0001 inch
—
pm0807 Tool length measurement bottom level 0- k 999999999 1 = 0,001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm081 1- pm0815 Coordinate values at skip signal input ( 1st - 5th axis) 0- * 999999999 1 = Nlinimum input unit
—
In “mm” mode
1 -0.1 mm/min
pm0820 - pm0828 F1 -digit feedrate (F1 - F9) 0-2400000
In “inch” mode
1-0.01 inch/rein
—
1 = Nlinimum detection
pm0831 - pm0833 No, 2 stored stroke limit, 1st - 3rd axis (+) 0- * 999999999
unit

1 = Nlinimum detection
pm0834 - pm0836 No. 2 stored stroke {imit, 1st - 3rd axis (–) 0- * 999999999
unit
—
1 = hlinimum detection
pm0837 - pm0839 No. 3 stored stroke limit, 1st - 3rd axis (+) 0- * 999999999
unit
—
1 = hlinimum detection
pm0840 - pm0842 No. 3 stored stroke limit, 1st - 3rd axis (–) 0- * 999999999
unit
— —
1 = hlinimum detection
pm0843 - pm0845 No. 4 stored stroke limit, Ist - 3rd axis (+) 0- * 999999999
unit
—
1 = Nlinimum detection
pm0846 - pm0848 No. 4 stored stroke limit, Ist - 3rd axis (–) 0- * 999999999
unit
—

A2-79
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

No. Description setting Range I Unit

1 = Minimum detection
pm0849 - pm085 1 No. 5 stored stroke limit, 1st - 3rd axis (+) 0- + 999999999
unit

1 = Minimum detection
pm0852 - pm0854 No. 5 stored stroke limit, 1st - 3rd axis (–) 0- *999999999
unit

Deceleration feedrate by comer feedrate designation func-

pm0860 0-240000 1 ~ 1 mm/min
tion, “mm” mode (P)

Deceleration distance by comer feedrate desij;nation func-

pm0861 0-999999999 1.0.001 mm
tion, “’mm” mode (L)

Deceleration feedrate by comer feedrate designation func-

pm0862 1 s 0.1 inch/rein
tion, ‘“inch” mode (P)

Deceleration distance by comer feedrate designation func-

pm0863 1 = 0.0001 inch
tion, “inch” mode (L)

pm0870 Return stroke in G73 cycle 0-999999999 I 1 =0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0871 Return stroke in G83 cycle 0-999999999 I 1 =0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0873 Returns stroke in G 184/G 174 cycle 0-999999999 I 1 =0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

Calendar output function, date setting, No. 1- No. 4 parame-

pm0905 pm0908
ters

pm0920 - pm0922 Manual skip position information, No. 1 point (X - Z) 0- + 999999999 I 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0923 - pm0925 Manual skip position information, No. 2 point (X - Z) 0- * 999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0926 - pm0928 Manual skip position information, No. 3 point (X - Z) 0- + 999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0929 - pm093 I Manual skip position information, No. 4 poini. (X -Z) 0- + 999999999 I 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0932 - pm0934 Manual skip position information, No. 5 point. (X - Z) 0- + 999999999 I 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm0935 - pm0937 Manual skip position information, No. 6 point. (X - Z) 0- + 999999999 I 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pmllOO-pml 102 Servo axis display name (X-axis) x: 88 00 (xl

pm1103-pml 105 Servo axis display name (Y-axis) Y 89 0000

pm1106-pml 108 Servo axis display name (Z-axis) z: 900000

U: 850000
pml109-pmllll v 860000
Servo axis display name (4th-axis)
W 870000
A: 650000
B: 660000
C: 670000
pmll12-pmll14 Servo axis display name (5th-axis) Set any of the above
values

Set by converting ASCII

pml127-pml129 Spindle display name S: 830000
code into decimal
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter “Table (cent’d)
—
No. Description Setting Range Unit

Set by converting ASCII

pml142-pm1144 Servo axis automatic system axis display name (X-axis) x: 880000
code into decimal
——
Set by converting ASCII
pml145-pml147 Servo axis automatic system axis display name (Y-axis) Y: 890000
code into decimal
—
Set by converting ASCII
pml148-pml150 Servo axis automatic system axis display name (Z-i~xis) z: 900000
code into decimal
—
U: 850000
V: 860000 Set by converting ASCII
pml151-pml153 Servo axis automatic system axis display name (4th-axis)
W 870000 code into decimal
A: 650000 —.—
B: 660000
C: 670000 Set by converting ASCII
pml154-pml156 Servo axis automatic system axis display name (5th-axis) Set any of the above c~e into decimal
values
— — —
Set by converting ASCII
pml169-pml171 Spindle automatic system axis display name S: 830000
code into decimal
.—.
3: 3 axes, 4 4 axes,
pm I200 High-speed mode operation, number of controlled axes 3-5
5: 5 axes
—
u: 350000
High-speed mode operation, address name of addit onal 4th v 860000
pm1201
axis (input in the ASCII code) W 870000
A: 650000 —
B: 6600 Of) —
High-speed mode operation, address name of additional 5th C: 670000
pm1202 Set any of the above
axis (input in the ASCII code)
values

pm1220 Spindle index confirmation timer 1-255 l=4ms

——.
pm 1225 Spindle index stopped confirmation speed I -255 1 = 1 r/rein

pm 1226 Spindle index stopped confirmation speed, gear B selected 1-255 1 = 1 r/rein

pm I240 Axis number to execute solid tap(1) 1

.—
pm1241 Servo axis number to execute solid tap(1) 1-5
— —
pm 1252 Solid tap ( 1) return feedrate multiplication ratio 1-255 1 = 0.1 times
——
pm1253 Solid tap (2) return feedrate multiplication ratio

pm 1260 Spindle, loop control gear number (A) o-4

— —
pm1261 Spindle, loop control gear number (B) o-4
——
pm1321 -pm1325 1st - 5th axis, error detect on area 0-255 1 = Minimum input unit

pm1331 Spindle, error detection on area in loop control 0-255 1 = Minimum input unit

Spindle, error detection on area in loop control, gear B se-

pm1332 0-255 1 = Minimum input unit
Iected
— —

A2-81
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

Spindle, magnification ratio for axis feed in servo error area
pm1351 0-200 1=1%
in reference to rapid traverse rate

1 = 1 r/rein, 10 r/rein
Note: According to the
pm1400-pm1403 Spindle, spindle speed clamp (minimum) for gear 1- gear 4 0-30000
setting for pm 1002
DO

pm1404-pm1407 Spindle, spindle speed clamp (maximum) for gear 1- gear 4 0-30000 I = 1 r/rein, 10 r/rein

pm1408-pm1411 Spindle, max. motor speed for gear 1- gear 4 0-30000 I = 1 r/rein, 10 r/rein

Spindle speed in response to the input of spinclle orientation

pm1412 0-32767 1 = 1 r/rein
(SOR) signal

Motor speed in response to the input of spindle gear shift

pm1413 0-32767 1 = 1 r/rein
(SRO)

pm1414 Spindle, zero point for indexing 0-4095 1 = 360/4096 deg

Spindle, maximum speed corresponding to 10 V of com-

pm1415 0-32767 1- ! r/rein, 10 r/rein
mand

pmi416 Maximum spindle speed during solid tap 0-32767 1 = 1 r/rein, 10 r/rein

pm1417 Spindle, position loop gain 0-32767 1 =0.01 [s-l]

Maximum spindle speed corresponding to 10 V of command

pm1418 0-666 1-1 r/rein
(C-axis is used)

pm1419 Spindle, specified speed for gear A 0-32767

Spindle, maximum spindle speed corresponding to 10 V 0-32767

pm 1435 1 = 1 rlmin, 10 r/rein
command (gear B selected)
—
Spindle, maximum spindle speed during solid tap (gear B
pm 1436 0-32767 1 = 1 r/rein, 10 r/rein
selected)

pm1437 Spindle, position loop gain (gear B selected) 0-32767 1 = 0.01 [s-t]

pm1500 Solid tap ( l), servo axis drawing-in in-position width 0-32767 ~ = Minimum input unit

pm1501 Solid tap (2), servo axis drawing-in in-position width 0-32767 I = Minimum input unit

pm1502 Solid tap (1), synchronization offset parameter K 1 –32767 -32767

pm1503 Solid tap (1), synchronization offset parameter K2 –32767 -32767

pm I504 Solid tap (2), synchronization offset parameter K 1 –32767 -32767

—
pm 1505 Solid tap (2), synchronization offset parameter K2 -32767-32767

pm1506 Rotary tool spindle ( 1), synchronization offset parameter K 1‘ -32767-32767

pm1507 Rotary tool spindle ( 1), synchronization offset parameter K2’ -32767-32767

A2-82
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

I ==1 tooth
Spindle, the number of teeth of gear A at the spindle side
pm1510 0-32767 Note: “9” if intermediate
used in loop control
gear is not used.

Spindle, the number of teeth of gear A of spindle intermedi-

pm1511 0-32767 1 = 1 tooth
ate gear in loop control
7

--lJ3ti:=-----
Spindle, the number of teeth of gear A of intermediate gear
pm1512

~zi=i=a
in loop control
L

Spindle, the number of teeth of gear A at the motor side used

Spindle, the number of teeth of gear B at the spindle side

Spindle, the number of teeth of gear B of spindle intermedi-

~*3ac
k !in@’contro’ ----:=–L::--J
i
Spmdle, the number of teeth of gear B of mtermedlate gear m

Spindle, the number of teeth of gear B at the motor side used

pm1540 Delay time to check the spindle speed arrived signal (SAGR)
-Q:~A
pm1551 -pm1555 1st - 5th axis, backlash compensation amount
~a~- d
Number of teeth of motor when changing the servo feed

~
Number of teeth of screw when changing the servo feed
++:
—
JI
—
pm1580 1st axis, position loop gain Kp 500-20000 I =0.ol [1/s1
—
pm1581 I st axis, velocity loop gain Kv 350-32767 I=o.1 [1/s]
—
pm1582 I st axis, velocity loop integration time constant TI 26-32767 1 ,=0.01 [ins]

pm1584 Ist axis, velocity feed forward gain Kvfff 0-100 1==0,01 [70] l=]%
—
pm1586 1st axis, first step axis torsion filter time constant Tn 1-32767 1 ,=0.01 [ins]
— —
pm1587 1st axis, second step axis torsion filter time constanl I -32767 1 ~ 0.0 I [ins]
—
pm1588 1st axis, third step axis torsion filter time constant 1-32767 1 s0.01 [ins]
—
pm1589 1st axis, monitor board signal selection, multiplication ratio 1-32767
—
pm 1590 2nd axis, position loop gain Kp 500-20000 1 =0.01 [1/s1

pm1591 2nd axis, velocity loop gain K~ 350-32767 1 =0,1 [1/s]

pm 1592 2nd axis, velocity loop integration time constant X 26-32767

pm 1594 2nd axis, velocity feed forward gain Kvfff

pm 1596 2nd axis, first step axis torsion filter time constant Tn
_ :;2::3

A2-83

—— .——..———
.——-..--—. —
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

pm1597 2nd axis, second step axis torsion filter time constant 1-32767 1 s 0.01 [ins]

I pm1598 2nd axis, third step axis torsion filter time constant 1-32767
~--––
+
pm 1599 2nd axis, monitor board signal selection, multiplication ratio 1-32767 ‘=0”01+
500-20000 1 =0.01 [1/s]
~rdaxis’position’oopgain’p I 1
1=0.1
~rdaxis’’’wity]oopgainiv’v 350-32767 [1/s]

B ~~]=l.
3rd axis, velocity loop integration time constant Ti

3rd axis, velccity feed forward gain Kvfff

3rd axis, first step axis torsion filter time constant Tn 1-32767 1-0.01 [ins]

w
~
3rd axis, second step axis torsion filter time constant 1-32767 1 s 0.01 [ins]

3rd axis, third step axis torsion filter time constant 1-32767 1 = 0.01 [ins]

pm 1609 3rd axis, monitor board signal selection, multiplication ratio 1-32767

B
~

I
pm1610

pm1611

pm1612

pm1614

prn1616
4th axis, position loop gain Kp

4th axis, velocity loop gain Kv

4th axis, velocity loop integration time constant Ti

I 4thaxis. velocity feed forward gain Kvfff

~.~1~
I 4th axis, first step axis torsion filtertimeconstantTn I
500-20000

350-32767

26-32767

1-32767
!
1 =0.01 [1/s]

1=0.1 [1/s]

1 = 0.01 [ins]

1 =0.01 [%]

I 1 =0.01 [ins]
1=170
I
I pm1617 I 4th axis, second step axis torsion fiker time constant I 1-32767 I 1 =O.O1 [ins] I
L!ExL-1 4th axis, third step axis torsion filter time constant 1-32767
! 1=001 ‘ins] J
I pm1619 I 4th axis, monitor board signal selection, multiplication ratio I 1-32767 I I
pm 1620 5th axis, position loop gain Kp 500- 200Q0 1 =0.01 [1/s]

H pm1621

pm 1622

pm1624
5th axis, velocity loop gain Kv

5th axis, velocity loop integration time constant TI

5th axis, velocity feed forward gain Kvfff

350-32767

26-32767

0-100
1=0.1 [1/s]

1-0.01

1=0.01
[ins]

[9’0] 1=1%

pm 1626 5th axis, first step axis torsion filter time constant Tn 1-32767 1 = 0.01 [ins]

w pm 1629
“-t=::
5th axis, second step axis torsion filter time constant

5th axis, third step axis torsion filter time constant

5th axis, monitor board signal selection, mult].plication ratio 1-32767

pm1671 -pm1675 1st - 5th axis, torque limit (+) 1-32767 1=1 [%]

pm1681 pm1685 1st - 5th axis, torque limit (–) –32767 -- I 1=1 [%]

pm1711 -pm1715 1st - 5th axis, backlash time constant 1-32767 I s 0.01 [ins]

pm1791 - pm1795 Ist - 5th axis, multi-segment geometry offset coefficient 0-32767 1 = Xo.ool
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter lable (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

pm1801 - pm1805 1st- 5th axis. rzeometry offset coefficient 0-32767 1= Xo.ool

1st - 5th axis, axis move distance or table rotation angle p 1 = Minimum detection
pm1821 -pm1825 0-999999999
turn of motor unit or 0.001 deg

pm1831 -pm1835 1st - 5th axis, ratio of load inertia to motor inertia 0-32767 1 =0.01 [kg-cm2]

l=lflOOOpm
pm1841 - pm1845 1st - 5th axis, number of pulses per 1 turn of motor 0-999999999 (().000001 deg) or
1 s 1 pulse

In F1 -digit designation, variation in feedrate per division

pm2111 -pm2119 0-255 1 =0.1 mm/min/pulse
mrlse handle

1 = 1 mm/min,
Feedrate corresponding to the JOG FEEDRATE sett mg p~
pm2400 -pm2431 0-32767 0.1 inch/rein,
tion, O -31
1 deg/min
—
pm2432 Multiplication of jog feedrate parameter value by 10 or 1 1, 10, 100 l-xl

Designation of the addition start switch position if pm24

pm2433 0-31
#o

Designation of position where the jog feedrate parameter

pm2434 value is multiplied by 1/10 (if both pm2433 and pm2434 0-31
specified, pm2433 is given priority.)

1 s 1 mtimin,
pm2440 Feedrate for the execution of skip 0-32767 0.1 inchlmin,
1 deg/min

1 = 1 mtimin,
pm2444 Feedrate of rapid traverse by external deceleration 0-32767 O.I inch/rein,
1 deg/min

1-1 mrnlmin,
pm2445 Feedrate of cutting feed by external deceleration 0-32767 0.1 inch/rein,
1 deg/min

I = 1 mm/min
0-100, (pm2000 D3 = 0)
pm2447 Feedrate for rapid traverse override FO 1=1%
0-32767
(pm2000 D3 = 1)

pm2448 Feedrate for rapid traverse override F1 0-100 1=1%

pm2449 Feedrate for rapid traverse override F2 0-100 1=1%

——
Multiplication value for x 100 position of manual pulse 1=X1
pm2459 0-32767
multiply switch
——
1st - 5th axis, rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration tim 1 = 1 ms (multiple of 4)
pm2461 - pm2465 4-32767
constant
——
Spindle, rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time 4-32767 1 = 1 ms (multiple of 4)
pm2471
constant
——

.42-85
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

Spindle, rapid traverse acceleration/deceleratimr time

pm2472 4-32767 1-1 ms (multiple of 4)
constant (gear B selected)

pm2481 - pm2485 1st - 5th axis, backlash compensation amount in GO1 mode 0-32767 l= O.l~m

1st - 5th axis, backlash compensation amount in pulse handle

pm2491 - pm2495 ,node 0-32767 l= O.lpm

1st - 5th axis, acceleration/deceleration time constant in nor-

pm2501 - pm2505 ,ma, Cuttino 0-32767 I=lms
0

Ist - 5th axis, acceleration/deceleration time constant in

pm251 I - pm2515 0-32767 l=lms
thread cuttinghapping

1- 1 mrn/min,
pm252 I - pm2525 Ist - 5th axis, reference point return approach speed 0-32767 0.1 inchlmin,
1 deg/min

1 = 1 mm/min,
pm2531 - pm2535 Ist - 5th axis, reference point return creep speed 0-32767 0.1 inch/rein,
1 deglmin

pm2541 No. 1 spindle, index start speed 1-32767 1 = 1 r/rein

pm2542 No. i spindle, index start speed (gear B selected) 1-32767 1 = 1 r/rein
,.
pm2546 I -32767 1 s 1 r/rein

No, 1 spindle, index creep speed (gear B selected) 1-32767 1 = 1 r/rein

*“’’znd-’’e’yed , Max. speed of spindle drive motor 0-32767 1 = 1 r/rein or 10 r/rein

1st - 5th axis, acceleratiorudeceleration time constant in han-

pm2561 - pm2565 d,e feed 4-32767 1 = 1 ms (multiple of 4)

1st - 5th axis, acceleration/deceleration time constant in No. 2

pm2571 pm2575 4-32767 1 = 1 ms (multiple of 4)
GOO mode operation

1-0.001 m/s
pm2580 Cutting feedrate acceleration 125-32767
(multiple of 4)
—
pm2581 S-curve factor in cutting feed O-6

1st - 5th axis, S-curve factor in rapid traverse acceleration/de-

pm2591 pm2595 Ce,eration 0-20

I st - 5th axis, S-curve factor in rapid traverse acceleration/de-

pm260 I pm2605 0-15
celebration in second S-curve acceleratiotideceleration

1- 1 mm/min,
pm2800 Maximum cutting feedrate (linear axis) 0-240000
0.1 inchlmin

1= I mrn/min,
pm280 1- pm2805 1st - 5th axis, rapid traverse rate 0-240000
0.1 inch/rein,
-.
pm2810 Maximum cutting feedrate (rotary axis)
===7===

A2-86
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter lable (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

1= Imm/min,
1st - 5th axis, rapid traverse rate in second S-curve accelera-
pm2811 - pm2815 tiotidece,eration 0-2.40000 0.1 inch/rein,
1 de~min

1 = 1 mm/min,
pm2821 - pm2825 1st - 5th axis, bias in normal acceleration/deceleratimr 0-240000 0,1 inch/rein,
I deglmin

I ,= 1 mm/min,
pm2831 - pm2835 1st - 5th axis, bias in thread cutting acceleration/deceleration 0-240000 0.1 inch/rein,
1 deg/min

1 = 1 mm/min,
pm2851 - pm2855 1st - 5th axis, second GOOfeedrate 0-240000 0.1 inch/rein,
1 deg/min
— ——
1 = 1mm/min,
pm2860 Maximum feedrate in handle feed (linear axis) 0- 2AOOO0
0.1 inch/rein

pm286 1 Maximum feedrate in handle feed (rotary axis) 0-240000 1 ,= ldeg/min

1 ==1mm/min,
pm2862 Feedrate in high-speed feedrate section during circle cut 0-240000
01 inch/rein
—
Number of servo lag pulses for feed clamp in handle feed
pm2863 0-240000 1 s 1 pulse
operation(””O’: Not clamped)
—
1 ,= 1 mm/min,
pm2864 Shift feedrate in G76/G77 canned cycle 0- 2!40000
O.I inch/rein
—
1 = 1 mm/min,
pm2865 Maximum feedrate in F] -digit feed (F1 - F4) 0- 2!40000 O.I inch/rein,
1 deglmin

1-1 mm/min,
pm2866 Maximum feedrate in F1 -digit feed (F5 - F9) 0-240000 0, I inch/rein,
1 deglmin
—
Set by converting ASCII
pm340il - pm3409 Thle display at power on, !st line, 1-10 columns
code into decimal

Set bf converting ASCII

pm3410 - pm3419 Title display at power on, 2nd line, 1-10 columns
code into decimal
—
Ist digit:
Magnification for
Thle display, magnification ratio 2-digit value is assumed to
the 1st line
Ist line : 2 times be a hexadecimal numbeu
pm3420 (l-3)
2nd line: 1 time convert it into decimal for
2nd digit:
Set 12h = 18 (decimal) setting.
Magnification for
the 2nd line (1 - 3)
—1 — ——

A2-87
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

I No. Description Setting Range Unit

Ist and 2nd digits:

Title display, display start position 1st line start posi- 2-digit value is assumed to
1st line : 10th digit tion (I - 39) be a hexadecimal numbec
pm3421
2nd line: 12th digit 3rd and 4th digits: convert it into decimal for
Set OCOAh = 3082 (decimal) 2nd line start posi- setting.
tion (1 - 39)

Battery backed-up memory

pm3422 Tool pot, display start number 7000-7999

F
number

Battery backed-up memory

pm3423 Tool pot, display end number 7000-7999
number

I Battery backed-up memory

pm3424 ATC display, MG number 7000-7999
I number

! Battery backed-up memory

pm3425 ATC display, SP number 7000-7999
number

Battery backed-up memory

I pm3426 ATC display, WT number 7000-7999
number
I
Battery backed-up memory
pm3427 Sub-tool pot number, display start number 7000-7999
I I number

Battery backed-up memory

pm3428 Sub-tool pot number, display end number 7000-7999
1 I number

“-RDI” command PLC battery backed-up memory number

pm3440 7000-7999
designation
—
“’SOD” command PLC battery backed-up memory number

H
pm3441 7000-7999
designation

pm3442 Spindle forward rotation M code number (for drawing) 0-999

pm3443 Spindle reverse rotation M code number (for drawing) 0-999

pm3444 Spindle stop M code number (for drawing) 0-999

B ~d
Spindle orientation M code number (for drawing)

I pm3447
“--
Tool change M code number (for drawing)

I Coolant ON M code number (for drawing) I 0-999 I I

Coolant OFF M code number (for drawing) 0-999
~ I I
Average time necessary for the execution of an M code (for

F
pm3449 0-65535 l=lms
drawing) I
Average time necessary for the execution of an S code (for
pm3450 0-65535 I=lms
dmwing) I
Average time necessary for the execution of a T code (for

+-l
pm345 1 0-65535 I=lms
drawing)

pm3830 - pm3853 “O” must be se~ the system uses these parameters.

A2 -88
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter lable (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

Hole pattern is regarded as
Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4100 0-255 a binary numbeL convert it
in user macro, #
into clecimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special charac ters used
pm4101 0-255 a binary numbev convert it
in user macro, [
into clecimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special charac ters used
pm4102 0-255 a binary number convert it
in user macro, ]
into clecimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4103 0-255 a bhiiry numbeL convert it
in user macro, X
into clecimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4104 0-255 a bkii~ number convert it
in user macro, =
into clecimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4105 0-255 a binary numbe~ convert it
in user macro, (
into decimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4106 0-255 a binary numbe~ convert it
in user macro, )
into clecimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4107 0-255 a binary numbeL convert it
in user macro, .
into decimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4108 0-255 a bimuy numbe~ convert it
in user macro, ,
into decimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4109 0-255 a binary nun~beL convert it
in user macro, “ “
into decimal for setting.

rOOl life control

youp (O - 9)
pm4110 Tool life control group command T code offset
=T command
–pm4110 x 1000
I
Designation of coordinate system if work coordinate system
pm4i43 54-59
shift is executed at power on or reference point return

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4144 0-255 i binary numben convert it
in user macro, <
~ntodecimal for setting.

Hole pattern is regarded as

Punched hole pattern, in EIA code, of special characters used
pm4145 0-255 I binary number; convert it
in user macro, >
mto decimal for setting.
——

/42-89

————, ...-. -— —. —.. .... ...—-.. —-—-— .-—.- —.

 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

0: Not converted
Designation of operation mode in high-speed mode opera-
pm4160 1: Converted in the speci-
tion
fied sections

High-speed mode operation conversion start designation

code (in ASCII) if pm4160 = I
pm4161 -pm4163 (Example) HON pm4161 48H
pm4162 4FH
pm4163 4EH

High-speed mode operation conversion end designation code

(in ASCII) ifpm4160 = 1
pm4164 - pm4166 (Example) HOF pm4164 48H
pm4165 4FH
pm4166 46H

pm4167 Segment type in high-speed mode operation I-4 l=lms,2=2ms,4=4ms

pm4400 - pm4409 Buffering stop M code(1) - (10) 0-999

pm4450 Small arc skip \alue in nose R and tool radius offset mode 0-32767 I = Minimum input unit

1 = 0.001 mm,
pm445 I - pm4455 Ist - 5th axis, reference point return distance 0-32767 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

1 s 0.001 mm,
pm4461 pm4465 1st - 5th axis, overtravel distance in G60 0-32767 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

pm4480 - pm4503 G code macro ( 1- 24) call G code 1-999

pm4504 pm4527 M code macro ( 1- 24) call M code 1-9999

1 s 0.001 mm,
pm455 1- pm4555 Virtual C-phase shift distance, 1st - 5th axis –32767 -32767 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

High-speed mode operation, acceleration/deceleration at

pm4800 1-1 mm/sec2
comers

1 = Minimum input unit in

pm4801 - pm4805 1st - 5th axis, automatic coordinate system in ‘“mm” input 0- + 999999999
‘<mm” system

pm4810 High-speed mode operation, acceleratiorddeceleration 1 = 1 mm/sec2

1 = Minimum input unit in

pm4811 -pm4815 Ist - 5th axis, automatic coordinate system in ‘-inch” input 0- k 999999999
“inch” system

Allowable error range in circular arc interpolation by R com-

pm4820 0-999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch
mand

High-speed mode operation, allowable acceleration in circu-

pm4823 1-1 mm/sec2
lar arc interpolation block

pm4840 - pm4863 G code macro ( 1 - 24) call program number 0-99999

pm4864 - pm4887 M code macro ( 1- 24) cali program number ~ 0-99999

A2-90
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter lable (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

“O” or call program

pm4888 S code macro call designation
number

“O” or call program

pm4889 T code macro call designation
number

“0” or call program

pm4890 B code macro call designation
number
——
Duration of time from resetting of signal for turning servo
pm5400 0-32767 I:=lms
power off to brake release at servo power ON

1st - 5th axis, duration of time from ESP signal (normally

pm5401 - pm5405 0-32767 l=lms
closed) rising edge to base block ON
——
Duration of time from sending M, S, T code to sending of
pm5410 () -32767 I=lms
MF, SF, TF

Software switch, input battery backed-up memory start num

pm5420 7000-7999
ber

Software switch, output battery backed-up memory start

pm5421 7000-7999
number
—
pm5427 Program restart switch, battery backed-up memory number 7000-7999
——
Manual skip signal, battery backed-up memory number
pm5428 7000-7999
(workpiece presetter)

pm6101 -pm6105 1st - 5th axis, pitch error compensation magnificaticm ratio 0-3

1 :=X-axis, 2 = Y-axis,
pm6!ll -pm6113 No. 2 stored stroke limit check axis designation, 1-3 0-3
3 = Z-axis
—
pm6114-pm6116 No. 3 stored stroke limit check axis designation, 1-3 0-3
.— —
~m6117 -pm6119 No. 4 stored stroke limit check axis designation, 1-3 ()-3

pm6 120- pm6 122 No. 5 stored stroke limit check axis designation, 1-3 ()-3
——
pm6 130- pm6 139 No. I - No. 10 position monitor, check axis o-5
——
I st - 5th axis, pitch error compensation data storing memory
pm6401 - pm6405
start number
—— —
1st - 5th axis, pitch error compensation data storing memory
pm641 I - pm6415
md number
—— —
1st - 5th axis, memory number storing the reference point for
pm6421 - pm6425
pitch error compensation
—
I ,= 0.001 mm,
pm6801 - pm6805 1st - 5th axis, pitch error compensation intervals 0-999999999 0,0001 inch,
0.001 deg
—
I s 0.001 mm,
pm681 I - pm6815 1st - 5th axis, second reference point position 0- + 999999999 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

M-91
 Appendix Table 2.3 Parameter Table (cent’d)

No. Description Setting Range Unit

1-0.001 mm,
pm682 I - pm6825 I st - 5th axis, third reference point position 0- + 999999999 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

1-0.001 mm,
pm683 1- pm6835 1st - 5th axis, fourth reference point position 0- i 999999999 0.0001 inch,
0,001 deg

pm6840 Offset presetter measuring direction reference value, XO 0- * 999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm6841 Offset presetter measuring direction reference value, ZO 0- * 999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm6842 Work presetter measuring probe radius, (DX+) 0- * 999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm6843 Work presetter measuring probe radius, (DX-) 0- * 999999999 I = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm6844 ‘Work presetter measuring probe radius, (DX+) 0- * 999999999 I = 0.001 mm, O.(XK)Iinch

pn16845 Work presetter measuring probe radius, (DY-) 0- * 999999999 I = 0.001 mm, O.0001 inch

pm6846 Work presetter measuring probe radius, (HZ–} 0- * 999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm6847 Work presetter measuring enabled retraction stroke 0- * 999999999 I = 0.001 mm, 0.000 I inch

pm6848 Work presetter measuring point feed-away stroke 0- * 999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch

pm6861 - pm6865 1st - 5th axis, pitch error compensation stroke (maximum) 0- * 999999999 1 = 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg

pm6871 - pm6875 1st - 5th axis, pitch error compensation stroke (minimum) 0- + 999999999 I = 0.00 I mm, 0.001 deg

1SI - 5th axis, pitch error compensation reference point posi-

pm6881 pm6885 0- * 999999999 I = 0.00 I mm, 0.001 deg
lion

1 s 0.001 mm,
pm6901 pm6905 1s[ - 5th axis, stored stroke limit (+) 0- * 999999999 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

1 = 0.001 mm,
pm691 1- pm6915 1st 5th axis, stored stroke limit (–) 0- * 999999999 0.0001 inch,
0.001 deg

INo. 1 - No. 10 position monitor positive direc :ion area

pm6920 - pm6929 0- * 999999999 1-0.001 mm
boundary value

No. 1- No. 10 position monitor negative direction area

pm6930 pm6939 0- * 999999999 I = 0.001 mm
boundary value

pm8811 - pm8815 Ist - 5th axis, offset amount in zero point setting 0- * 999999999 I = 1 pulse

A2 -92

.- -.
 APPENDIX 3
ALARM TABLE

Appendix 3 describesthe classification and (contents of

alarms.

3.1 CLASSIFICATION OF ALARMS . . . . . . A:3 -2

3.2 ALARM TAEILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A.3-3
3.3 ALARM TAEILE (YENET1 200
COMPATIBLE DRIVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . A3 -20

A3-1
 APPENDIX 3.1 CLASSIFICATION OF ALARMS

Appendix Table 3.1 Classification of Alarms

No. Contents Stop Mode output How to Reset

Errors related with edit and operation

Input error
0000-0049 Occurring in the background mode Block stop Reset
alarm
also,

Errors related with edit and operation

Input error Reset
0050-0099 Not occurring in the background Block stop
alarm Power OFF for #0050 and ##0051
mode.

Program error Input error

0100-0499 Block stop Reset
(occurring in a series) alarm

Program error
Input error
1000-1099 (occurring over multiple series) Block stop Reset
alarm
DNC, COMS total, etc.

Reset operation after removing the cause

Machine related error Stop after
Whh the alarm caused by the machine
2000-2199 OT, reference point return, machine deceleration, or Alarm
ready signal, if it occurs in the first powe
ready, in-position, etc. immediate stop
ON operation, it is automatically reset.
—
Reset after removing the cause.
Servo and spindle related alarm Immediate stop,
3000-3299 Alarm With the SVOFF alarm, it is automatically
ESP, CPU mutual monitoring in NC or servo off
reset by the SVON.

For maintenance
Memory check error (ROM, RAM)
Immediate stop, CPU halt
8000-8049 Watchdog timer error Alarm
or servo off Switching to the special maintenance
Offline error
screen

Error occurring in background editing

Background
9000-9049 (basically the same as with 0000- Not stopped

BAT indication Battery error

Key operation error, edit operation er- !

ror (not serious operation error)
e 1~~~ : ~F::

.
 APPENDIX 3.2 ALARM TABLE

Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table

——
Alarm No. [description
—
0010 In tape mode operation, TH parity error has occurred.
— —
0011 In tape mode operation, TV parity error has occurred.
— .—
0012 In tape mode operation, an illegal character (not conforming to EIA or 1S0) is detected.
— ——
OQ13 In tape mode operation, one block capacity (128 characters) has been exceeded.
— —
0014 In tape mode operation, there is no response of data set ready signal.
—
0015 In tape mode operation, overflow has occurred with the input numerical value (more than 9 characters).

0016 RS-232C interface transfer error has occurred.

—
0017 After the reading of RS-232C interface stop code, more than 10 characters of data has been read.
— —
0018 There is an error in the RS-232C interface line.

0020 The designated line has already been opened.

—
0021 The designated line has not been opened.
— —
0022 Double-call or combination is incorrect.
— ——— ——
0023 Data has not been sent within the specified length of time.
—
0024 Send or receive start processing has not been executed.
— ——
0025 There is an error in the setting of parameters.
— —
0050 The parameter which is made valid after power off/on operation has been set.

0051 The parameter which is made valid only when the program area is cleared has been set.

0061 T%ere is an error in lhe designation of data in extelmal data input.

—
0062 The program designated by the external data number search is not found.

0100 Overflow has occurred with one-block buffer ( 128 characters).

0101 There is no data specified following an address, or the data is specified without address.
—
0102 “ —“ or “.” is not used correctly.

0103 Illegal character is specified in the significant information area.

—
0104 Overflow has occurred with the input numerical Vidue(more than 9 characters).
—
0105 An axis not defined as an axis is designated.
—
0106 The same address is designated more than one time in one block.
—
0107 Nesting of “’(”; “)” is used without “(”; “(” and “)” are not used in pairs.
— ——
I

0110 More than one M code is designated in one block ~although multiple M code option is not selected.
——
0111 The number of digits in the specified M code is larger than the allowable limit.
—
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. Description

0112 M90and M91arenot designa~d inablak vvithout other commands. There isno Pcommand inthe M91blcck.

I 0113 I There is an error in the designation of an internal M code.

I 0114 I M90/M91 is designated although designation is not allowed.

I 0115 I There is an error in the M191 command.

I 0116 I M93 is designated although designation is not allowed.

I 0125 /M, S, orT is designated although designation of M, S, orT is not allowed.

I 0126 I There is no MOL’M30 command in memory mode or tape mode operation.

● In the mirror image mode, an illegal G is designated.

0127
I ● Mimorimage istumed ONinthe mimorilnage prohibited mode.

I 0[30 I More than one S code is designated in one block although multiple S control option is not selected.

I 0131 I The number of digits in the specified S code is larger than the allowable limit.

0140 I The number of digits in the specified Tcode is larger than the allowable limit.

0144 I The number of digits in the specified Et code is larger than the allowable limit.

~1
I 0151
Offset number is too large.

I Offset number specified in HID switching is too large.

0152 Offset number H is not designated.

0160 Anillegal Gcodeis desigrrated. Ora Gcodltfor which thecomesponding option isnotsclected is designated.
I
0161 G codes which cannot be used in combinaticrr in one block are designated.
I
L 0162

0163
~An address which is mandatory is not specified.
I
~Anillegal Gisdesignated inthehigh-sped mde operation section.
I
0170 ~An illegal G code is designated in a canned cycle.

0171 ~G70-G72 isdesignated inother than acannedcycie.

0172 1R-point level return is designated inG77 (back boring) canned cycle.

0174 In G73/G83, Q and I are not designated. G73/G83 is designated with Q = I = O.

0175 In G70 - G72, designation of address is incorrect.

——
At the start-up of tool radius offset or nose R offset mode,
● There are no axis move commands within 3 blocks.
0180
● MOO, MO 1, M02, or M30 is designated.

● Circular interpolation mode is designated.

0181 The tool radius offset or nose R offset mode ends in the circular interpolation mode.

0182 An illegal G code is designated in the tool radius offset or nose R offset mode.

A3-4
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)
—
Alarm No. [description 1
Inthetwl mdiusoffset ornose Roffset m&e, offset plane has beencllanged. Circular arcis designated outside
0183
the offset plane.
—
0184 In the tool radius offset or nose R offset mode, point of intersection cannot be obtained.
.
0185 In the tool radius offset or nose R offset mode, the shape causing reversed tool movement is designated.

0186 In the tool radius offset or nose R offset mode, a system variable for which buffering is not allowed is designated.

0187 In the tool radius offset or nose R offset mode, irrtcrference is detected.
—
0188 In the tool radius offset or nose R offset mode, automatic interference correction is not possible.
—
0189 Offset mode error (work area has been destroyed, or no output data in data output operation)
—
0190 In circular interpolation commands, a circle of “O” radius has been specified.

Incircular in@plation, commands including threl>axes aredesi~ated. Inhelical interpolation, axesexceeding

0191
the number of controllable axes are designated.

~eplane cannot redefined from tiegiven circular inte~olation conlmands. Incircular interpolation, corn-
0192
mands of four or more axes are designated.
.—. —
0193 The center cannot be obtained from the designated R.

0194 Tool length offset or tool position offset is designated in the circular interpolation mode.
— .——
0196 Chamfering or comer rounding cannot be designated.
— — —
0197 Chamfering or comer rounding designation plane error has occurred.
— ————
+
0198 Chamfering or comer rounding block creation impossible error has occurred.
+ —— .—. —
0200 In inputting an offset amount by using a program, a number designated with P is larger than the allowable limit.
——————
0201 Ininputting anoffset amount byusing aprogram, offset amount is too large. There isanemor in the format.
—
In “G 10 Q2° (inputting work coordinate system shift amount by program), a number clesignated with P is larger
0202
than the allowable limit.

0210 In user macro, the vahre of constant is- outside the allowable range.
—
0211 The number of cancel codes for G67 is too many.
———
0212 There is an error in the format.
—
0213 A value not defined as a variable number is used.
— — —
0214 A variable used in replace statement is the variable which cannot be used for this operati,m.
——————
0215 The nesting level of “’[]“ exceeds the allowable limit.
———
0216 The nesting level of microprogram call exceeds the allowable limit.

0217 DO - END is not used in pairs.

— —
0218 The numbers of brackets “[” and “]” do not agree with each other.
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. Description

0219 In’’DO M”, 1 S m S 3is notsatisfied.

~’n’’”’”n
0221
“ '`n'' isoutside
‘
tieallowable

I In a macropi-ogram, division by “0” is execukd.

rttngeor ``n'' is not found.

I 0222 I Square root of a negative value I

I 0223 I Floating point data exceeds the allowable range. I
I 0224 I In modal call (G66), axis command is specified with M99 return designation. I
I 0225 I Overflow has occurred with operation stack. I

I 0226 I Execution of the following functions was impossible: ASIN, ACOS, LN, SQRT I
I 0227 I Overflow has occurred during conversion int.o integer. I
I 0228 I Overflow has occurred with the input data for the BCD function. I
I 0229 I There is an error in the format of the BIN function. I
I 0230 I Overflow has occurred as the resrdtof execution of the EXP function. I
I 0240 I Reference point return has not been completed with the axis for which G29, G30 is designated. I
I 0241 I Reference point return is invalid for the axis for which G28 is designated.

I 0250 I A-n illegal code has been designated in a solid tap program. I

I 0255 IA C command is designated for the spindle in the spindle control mode. I
I 0256 I An S command is designated for the spindle in the C-axis control mode. I

M
● There isno Por Qcommandinthe M98 block.
● There is no P command in the G65/G66, C~25block.
● Both G25 and M98/M99 are designated in the same block.

Nesting level of M98 subprogram call or G25 exceeds the allowable limit.
~ .2
In a program that calls a microprogram by G, M, or T code (M98, M99, G65, G66, G25), the designated pro-
0262
gram number or sequence number is not found.

I 0263 lAnattempt wasmade tostart aprogmm byexecutingaddress search after buffering subprogram ormacro call. I

I 0264 I M99 is used in copy program when an attempt was made to execute the program copy function. I
● Ior Jcommand isnotdesignated inthe G106 block.
0270 ● Neither Inor I command is designated in the G106 block.
● Anaxisother than Xand Yisdesignated inthe G106 block.
I
0275 I During progmm interruption,an illegal command is designated. I
I
( 0280 I hr the scaling mode, an illegal command is designated. I
0281 I There is an error in the format of G50/G51 block. Scaling value is W“, I
0285 lTheorderofdesignatioticancellationofthefollowingfunctionsisincomect:mimorimage,scaling,romtion. I

A3-6
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)
-1
Alarm No. Description
——
I
0290 A sequence number is not found al the restart of the program. I

0291 The operation that changes the coordinate system i:; executed at the restart of the program

0292 At the restart of the program, an axis was moved by MDI intervention.
— —
030 I There are no tools registered in the. designated tool group.

0302 All tools in the designated tool group are in the skipped status.
—
Inthecoordinate roUtion mode, anillegal Gcode is designated. 0rG68is designated inietoolr adiusoffset ~
0310
mode.
— — —–-+
0311 There is an error in the format of the G68, G69 command block.
—
0312 In the coordinate rotation mode, an axis that cannot be designated is designated.

A work coordinate system that cannot be designated for the G54 - G59 J* work coordinate system shift program
0320
is selected. Or G54-G59is designated inthecirclllar inte~olation mode.
—.
0321 A local coordinate system is set although a work coordinate system is not set.
— —
0322 G53 is designated in incorrect conditions.
—
0360 Incircle cutcommands, radius R < offset amount D.
—
0361 In circle cutting, a plane other than the G17 plane is selected.
—
0362 There is an error in the format of circle cut program.

0365 An illegal G code is designated in G45 - G48 mode.

0370 There is no F command in a cutting program.

——
0380 An axis command is designated in the G04, G40, G21 block.
—
0381 An axis command is designated in the G 10, G22, G23 block.
—
0382 More than one area has been selected from No. 3- No. 5 prohibited areas.
—
0390 An execution program does not exist.
———
0391 An execution program is being input.
—
0392 An execution program is being edited.
I
0393 A sequence number that does no exist is designated in M98 Q G25 commands.

L
— _.— —
0395 Cycle start is executed after changing the mode from tape to memo~, or from memory to tape.
—
During tape/direct operation, an attempt was made to return to the main program by intern] pting program execu-
0396
I tion.
—

I 0397 During tape/direct operation, operation interruption that does not allow the re-execution has been carried out.i
— —–J
0400 An O number of five or more digits is designated.
—
1
I 0401 An N number of five or more digits is designated.
—-J
4

A3-7
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm lable (cent’d)

Alarm No. ~ D.S@tiOn

A P number of five or more digits is designated.
~1
Before the axis move, the axis is in the stored stroke limit No. 2 area.
~1
Before the axis move, the axis is in the stored stroke limit No. 3 area.
~1
Before the axis move, the axis is in the stored stroke limit No. 4 area.
~1
I 0409 I Before the axis move, the axis is in the storedstroke limit No. 5 area.

I 0411 I Reference point return has not been completed (X-axis).

I 0412 I Reference point return has not been completed (Y-axis).

I 0413 I Reference point return has not been completed (Z-axis).

I 0414 I Reference point return has not been completed (4th-axis).

I 0415 I Reference point return has not been completed (5th-axis).

I 0421 I After the execution of G27, the axis has not returned to the reference point (X-axis).

I 0422 I After the execution of G27, the axis has not returned to the reference point (Y-axis).

I 0423 I After the execution of G27, the axis has not returned to the reference point (Z-axis)

I 0424 I After the execution of G27, the axis has not returned to the reference point (4th-axis).

0425 After the execution of G27, the axis has not returned to the reference point (5th-axis).
I
0431 Before the axis move, the axis has reached the entry prohibited area (outside) of stored stroke limit (X-axis)
1

LI 0432
L Before the axis move, the axis has reached the entry prohibited area (outside) of stored stroke limit (Y-axis)
—
Before the axis move, the axis has reached the entry prohibited area (outside) of stored stroke limit (Z-axis)
I
0433 L

L OX—L -
Before the axis move, the axis has reached the entry prohibited area (outside) of stored stroke limit (4th-axis)

Before the axis move, the axis has reached the entry prohibited area (outside) of stored stroke limit (5th-axis)
~1
0491 In the G3 1 block, skip signal (1) has not been input.
I
In the G31 block, skip signal (2) has not been input.
~1
When G3 1 is executed, the skip signal (I) is not ready.
~1
0495 When G31 is executed, the skip signal (2) is not ready.

DNC packet length error has occurred.

’002 L

u~-–-Pc82e”OrhasOccu@=@=
1004 I DNCcheck sum error has occurred.

A3-8
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. [description

I 005 DNC command error has occurred. -+

I 1006 I DNC high-speed cutting mode error has occurred. I

I 1007 I DNC communication module diagnosis error has caurred. I
I
I 1008 I DNC CPU error has occurred.

I 1009 I DNC51 error has occurred.

Start number of the battery backed-up memory stc,ring the cell controller 1/0 link hfo~iition is outside the al-
1020
lowable range.
—
1021 An interface error between the cell controller and COM in the cell controller system.
— —.
1041 Incorrect command has been made for the PLC ccntrol axis (X-axis).

1042 Incorrect command has been made for the PLC ccntrol axis (Y-axis).

I 1043 I Incorrect command has been made for thePLC ccntrol axis (Z-axis). I

I 1044 [1ncorrect command has been made for the PLC cc,ntrol axis (4th-axis). I

I 1045 I Incorrect command has been made for the PLC ccntrol axis (5th-axisj. I

I 1051 I Axis has been changed while the control axis selected statm signal is ON (X-axis). I

I 1052 I Axis has been changed while the control axis selec[ed status signal is ON (Y-axis). I

I 1053 I Axis has been changed while the control axis selected status signal is ON (Z-axis). I
I 1054 I Axis has been changed while thecorrtrol axis selected status signal is ON (4tf-axis). I

i 1055 Axis has been changed while the control axis sele,:ted status signal is ON (5th-axis).

I 1080 I Execution of a program block has been stopped with the ERR O signal ON.

I 1090 I Setting area total check error has occurred. I

1091 Parameter area total check error has occurred.

— —J
1092 Battery backed-up memory area total check error has occurred.
i . .— —--l

L.Joti. Offset and work coordinate system shift amount area total check error has occurred.
— — —J
1094 Macro variable area total check error has occurrecl.
1 . -1
1095 Machining program area total check error has occurred.
l– .— –--l — — J
1096 Tool life control data area total check error has occurred.
L- 1
. — —-1
1098 The fan is faulty.
— —
L- I -1
I I099 \ High temperature in the NC unit. I

I 2001 I Overtravel has occurred (X-axis). I

I 2002 [ Overtravel has occurred (Y-axis).

 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. Description

2003 Overtravel has occurred (Z-axis).

I 2004 I Overtravel has occurred (4th-axis). I

I 2005 I Overtravel has occurred (5th-axis), I
I 2011 I Axis has reached the stored stroke limit No. 1 area (X-axis). I

I 2012 I Axis has reached the stored stroke limit No. 1 area (Y-axis). I
I 2013 Axis hasreached thestored stroke limit No. 1 area (Z-axis). I

I
2014 Axishasr eachedt hestoreds trokelimitNo. 1 area (4th-axis).
A
2015 Axis hasreached thestored stroke limit No. 1 area (5th-axis).

I 2020 ~More than twoareas aremade valid attiesame time mong No.2-No.5 areas. I

I 2021 I Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 2 area (X-axis). I
I 2022 I Axis has reached the otmide of the stored stroke limit No. 2 area (Y-axis), I
I 2023 I Axis has reached the outside of the wored stroke limit No. 2 area (Z-axis). I
I 2024 I Axis hasreached the mtside of the stored stroke limit No. 3 area (X-axis). I
I 2025 I Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 3 area (Y-axis). I
Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 3 area (Z-axis).
~
Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 4 area (X-axis).
~
Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 4 area (Y-axis).
L~”~~J –
Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 4 area (Z-axis).
~

c-4-–-— Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 5 area (X-axis).

1Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 5 area (Y-axis).
J

~
I 2033 ~Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 5 area (Z-axis). I
I 2040 ~Axis has reached the inside of the stored stroke limit No. 2 area. I
204 I ~Axis has reached the inside of the stored stroke limit No. 3 area.

I 2042 ~Axis has reached the inside of the stored stroke limit No. 4 area. I
2043 I Axis has reached the inside of the stored stroke limit No. 5 area. I

L 2044 ~The end point does not lie on the circle in manual circular interpolation type 2.
--+-- --
The start point does not exist on the circle in manual circular interpolation type 1.
—’
I

La ‘— 1
2046 In manual circular interpolation, depth of CU[is too large.
-----J- — A
L
~When the separately installed PG is used for reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to
2051
I ~ON before the C-phase is latched (X-axis). I

A3-10
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. C~escription

When the separately installed PG is used for reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to
2052
ON before the C-phase is latched (Y-axis).

When the separately installed PG is used for reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to
2053
ON before the C-phase is latched (Z-axis).
—
When the separately installed PG is used for reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to
2054
ON before the C-phase is latched (4th-axis).

When the separately installed PG is used for reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to
2055
ON before the C-phase is latched (5th-axis).
—
2060 The reference point return (low-speed type) is executed in the manual skip B (measuring) mode.

2061 Reference point return area error has occurred (X-axis).

2062 Reference point return area error has occurred (Y-axis).

2063 Reference point return area error has occurred (Z-axis).

—
2064 Reference point return area error has occurred (4th-axis).

2065 Reference point return area error has occurred (5th-axis).

After the completion of measurement in the manual skip (A/B) mode, measuring cycle is e xecuted again without
2070
returning the contact detection axis.

2071 Reference point return position error has occurred (X-axis).

2072 Reference point return position error has occurred (Y-axis).

—
2073 Reference point return position error has occurred (Z-axis).
—
2074 Reference point return position error has occurred (4th-axis).
—
2075 Reference point return position error has occurred (5th-axis).

In reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned OFF after it has been turned ON once and then turned ON
2081
again (X-axis).

In reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned OFF after it has been turned ON once and then turned ON
2082
again (Y-axis).
—
In reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned OFF after it has been turned ON once and then turned ON
2083
again (Z-axis).

In reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned OFF after it has been turned ON once and then turned ON
2084
again (4th-axis).
t i — —

w--ax)
In reference point return, the deceleration LS is mrned OFF after it has been turned ON once and then turned ON

1 2091
According to the parameter setting, retraction operation must be made in reference point return operation (X-
axis).

According to the parameter setting, retraction operation must be made in reference point return operation (’Y-
2092
axis).
L I —.

A3-11

—.—”. ..— ——, —.. -. — .—= .,..,, , -— ——-....-,. -...

 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. Description

According to the parameter setting, retraction opxation must be made in reference point return operation (Z-
2093
axis).

According to the parameter setting, retracticm operation must be made in reference point return operation (4th-
2094
axis).

I 2095
According to the parameter setting, retracticm operation must be made in reference point return operation (5th-
axis). I
2101 P-SET error has occurred (X-axis).

2102 P-SET error has occurred (Y-axis).

2103 P-SET error has occurred (Z-axis).

2104 P-SET error has occurred (4th-axis).

P-SET error has occurred (5th-axis).

* Absolute position overflow has occurred with the absolute position detection function
(X-axis).

1 2112
Absolute position overflow has occurred with the absolute position detection function
(Y-axis).

I
I Absolute position overflow has occurred with the absolute position detection function
2113
I ~~-axis)
~— Absolute position overflow has occurred with the absolute position detection function
I (4th-axis).

Absolute position overflow has occurred with the absolute position detection function
2115
(5th-axis).
_
[—________
2121 There is no battery mounted on the AXIS board (X-axis).

2122 There is no battery mounted on the AXIS bowd (Z-axis).

There is no battery mounted on the AXIS board (Y-axis).

*I There is no battery mounted on the AXIS board (4th-axis).

I 2}25 I There is no battery mounted on the AXIS board (5th-axis). I

Difference in axis positions between the position at the previous power off and the position at the start-up of the
absolute position detection function is excessively large (X-axis).

Difference in axis positions between the position at the previous power off and the position at the start-up of the I
2132
i absolute position detection function is excessively large (Y-axis). I
Difference in axis positions between the position at the previous power off and the position at the start-up of the
2133
absolute position detection function is excessively large (Z-axis).

Difference in axis positions between the position at the previous power off and the position at the start-up of the I
+ 2134
absolute position detection function is excessively large (4th-axis).

A3-12
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. [description

Difference in axis positions between the position at the previous power off and the position at the start-up of the
2135
absolute position detection function is excessively large (5th-axis).

2141 Reference point return movement has been interrupted due to mode change (X-axis).

2142 Reference point return movement has been interrupted due to mode change (Y-axis). 7
—~
2143 Reference point return movement has been interrupted due to mode change (Z-axis).
—
2144 Reference point return movement has been interrupted due to mode change (4th-axis).

2145 Reference point return movement has been interrupted due to mode change (5th-axis).
—
During the execution of reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to ON before C-phase
2151
latch is completed (X-axis).

During the execution of reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to ON before C-phase
2152
latch is completed (Y-axis).

During the execution of reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to ON before C-phase
2153
latch is completed (Z-axis).

During the execution of reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to ON before C-phase
2154
latch is completed (4th-axis).

During the execution of reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to ON before C-phase
2155
latch is completed (5th-axis).

2161 While an axis is disconnected, the disconnection input has been turned OFF (X-axis).

2162 While an axis is disconnected, the disconnection input has been turned OFF (Y-axis).

2163 While an axis is disconnected, the disconnection input has been turned OFF (Z-axis).

2164 While an axis is disconnected, the disconnection input has been turned OFF (4th-axis).

2165 While an axis is disconnected, the disconnection input has been turned OFF (5th-axis).

2171 Unmatch in axis disconnection status (X-axis).

2172 Unmatch in axis disconnection status (Y-axis).

—
2173 Jnmatch in axis disconnection status (Z-axis).
.—
2174 Unmatch in axis disconnection status (4th-axis).

2175 Jnmatch in axis disconnection status (5th-axis).

2180 4n axis has been decelerated and stopped due to turning ON of the ERR 1signal.

2190 I%e machine is not ready.

2191 l%e SLPC input signal has been turned off in the spindle command loop sequence by G93.

3000 $ervo power is not turned on.

3001 I’he control is not ready.

A3-13
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)

NC has entered the emergency stop state.

~ The memory used to store machining programs has not been initialized.
“s’’’’”O”
In initialization processing, expansion memory for storing machining programs and the memory after power on
3011
do not match.

3012 Axis configuration setting parameters do not agree with the physical axis configuration.

3014 The number of valid axes is greater than the allowable number.

3021 Fuse is blown (X-axis).

3022 Fuse is blown (Y-axis).

I 3023 I Fuse is blown (Z-axis).

3024 Fuse is blown (4th-axis).

3025 Fuse is blown (5th-axis).

3037 I Serial communication error has occurred in the communication with the inverter (Cl).

3038 ~Serial communication error has occurred in the communication with the inverter (C2).

3041 ; Excessively large servo error (X-axis)

3042 Excessively large servo error (Y-axis)

3043 Excessively large servo error (Z-axis)

3044 Excessively large servo error (4th-axis)

3045 ~Excessively large servo error (5th-axis)

3051 ~Excessively large servo error (No. 1 spindle)

3060 ~Overload (other than servo axis)

3061 I Overload (X-axis)

3062 Overload (Y-axis)

3063 Overload (Z-axis)

3064 I Overload (4th-axis)

3065 I Overload (5th-axis)

3081 I Disconnection in PG wiring (X-axis)

3082 Disconnection in PG wiring (Y-axis)

3083 Disconnection in PG wiring (Z-axis)

3084 Disconnection in PG wiring (4th-axis)

3085 Disconnection in PG wiring (5th-axis)

A3-14
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)
—
Alarm No. [description

3100 Hardware error has been detected with the servo pack or AXIS board.

3101 Servo pack error has occurred (X-axis).

.—
3102 Servo pack error has occurred (Y-axis).
— ——
3103 Servo pack error has occurred (Z-axis).
—
3104 Servo pack error has occurred (4th-axis).

3105 Servo pack error has occurred (5th-axis).

3111 Servo pack communication error has occurred (X-axis).

3112 Servo pack communication error has occurred (Y-axis).

3113 Servo pack communication error has occurred (Z-iixis).

—
3114 Servo pack communication error has occurred (4th-axis).

3115 Servo pack communication error has occurred (5th-axis).

3121 Over-speed has been detected (X-axis).

—
3122 Over-speed has been detected (Y-axis).
—
3123 Over-speed has been detected (Z-axis).
—
3124 Over-speed has been detected (4th-axis).

3125 Over-speed has been detected (5th-axis).

3131 Serial communication error has occurred in the communication with the inverter (No. 1 spindle).

3141 Runaway is detected with the servo controlled axis (X-axis).

3142 Runaway is detected with the servo controlled axis (Y-axis).

3143 Runaway is detected with the servo controlled axis (Z-axis).

—
3144 Runaway is detected with the servo controlled axis (4th-axis).
—
3145 Runaway is detected with the servo controlled axis (5th-axis).

3161 Malfunctioning is detected with the absolute position encoder (X-axis).

3162 Malfunctioning is detected with the absolute position encoder (Y-axis).

—
3163 Malfunctioning is detected with the absolute position encoder (Z-axis).
—
3164 Malfunctioning is detected with the absolute position encoder (4th-axis).
-
3165 Malfunctioning is detected with the absolute position encoder (5th-axis). I
— —
—------
3171 Encoder type parameter has been set incorrectly (X-axis).

3172 Enceder type parameter has been set incorrectly (Y-axis).

A

A3-15
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)
I I I
Alarm No. Description
, /
Encoder type parameter has been set incorrectly (Z-axis).
~
3174 Encoder type parameter has been set incorrectly (4th-axis).
I
I 3175 I Encoder type parameter has been set incorrectly (5th-axis). I
I 3181 I Malfunctioning is detected with the PG counter of the absolute position encoder (X-axis). I

I 3182 I Malfunctioning is detected with the PG counter of the absolute position encoder (Y-axis). I
I 3183 I Malfunctioning is detected with the PGcounterof the absohste position encoder(z-axis). I

I 3184 I Malfunctioning is detected with the PG cotmterof the absolute position encoder (4th-axis). I

I 3[85 I Malfunctioning is detected with the PG counter of the absolute position encoder (5th-axis). I

I 3211 I Separately installed PG is set valid although the hardware is not installed (X-axis). I

I 3212 I Separately installedPG is setvalicialthough the hardware isnotinstalled (Y-axis). I

I 3213 I Separately installed PG is set valid although the hardware is not installed (Z-axis). I
I 3214 I Separately installed PG is set valid although the hardware is not installed (4th-axis). I
I 3215 I Separately installed PG is set valid although the hardware is not installed (5th-axis). I
I 3221 1Disconnection in wiring tothe separately installed PG(X-axis) I

3222 Disconnection in wiring to the separately installed PG (Y-axis)

1
I 3223 I Disconnection in wiring to the separately installed PG(Z-axis) I

I 3224 I Disconnection in wiring to the separately installed PG(4th-axis) I

I 3225 I Disconnection in wiring to the separately installed PG (5th-axis) I
3240 Servo has been turned off due to turning ON of the ERR 2 signal.
L J
Absolute error (separately installed PG) has occurred (X-axis).
~
I 3242 I Absolute error (separately installed PG) has occurred (Y-axis). I

I 3243 I Absolute error (separately installed PG) has occurred (Z-axis). I

I 3244 I Absolute error (separately installed PG) has occurred (4th-axis). I

I 3245 I Absolute error (separately installed PG) has occurred (5th-axis). I

I 3252 I NMI interruption has occurred due to- the occurrence of bus gate error. I

3253 NMI interruption has occurred due to- the occurrence of watchdog time-out. I

I 3260 I SH-INTEX synchronization error has occurred. I

I 3261 I SH-MOTION synchronization error has occurred. I
I 3262 I INTEX-MOTION synchronization error has occurred. I

A3-16
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. [description

3263 MOTION-PLC synchronization error has occurrecl.

I 3264 I MOTION-AXIS synchronization error has occurred. I

I 3265 I ACGC synchronization error has occurred. I
I 3266 I DNC synchronization errorhas occurred. I

I 3270 I Data error has occurred when t.mingtiepowerO= (batte~backed-upm emo~). I

I 3271 I Data error has occurred when turning the power OFF (tool life control). I
I 327’2 I Data error has occurred when turning the power OFF (macro). I
I 3273 I Data error has occurred when turning the power OFF (internal memory). I

I 3274 I Program has been destroyed due to turning the power off during editing (program). I
I 3275 I Data error has occumed when turning the power OFF during editing (custom variables). I

The power has been turned OFF during editing. This requires the program to be checked after turning the power
3276
ON.

3281 AXIS error 1 has occurred. 4

I 3282 I AXIS error 2 has occurred. I

I 3283 I AXIS error 3 has occurred.

I 3284 I AXIS error4 has occurred. I

3285 AXIS error 5 has occurred.

3296 During sequence editing, the power is turned ON for the NC with the system number swikh set in “O”.

3297 Sequence data has been destroyed.

—
3299 Communication error has occurred in YENET.

3301 Excessively large current is supplied to the servo pack main circuit (X-axis).
—
3302 Excessively large current is supplied to the servo pack main circuit (Y-axis),
—
3303 Excessively large current is supplied to the servo pack main circuit (Z-axis).

3304 Excessively large current is supplied to the servo pack main circuit (4th-axis).
—
3305 Excessively Iarge current is supplied to the servo pack main circuit (5th-axis).
—
3311 Servo pack MCCB has been tripped (X-axis).

3312 Servo pack MCCB has been tripped (Y-axis).

3313 Servo pack MCCB has been tripped (Z-axis).

—
3314 Servo pack MCCB has been tripped (4th-axis).

3315 Servo pack MCCB has been tripped (5th-axis).

A3-17
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. Description

3321 An error has occurred with the servo pack regeneration resistor (X-axis).

3322 An error has occurred with the servo pack regeneration resistor (Y-axis).

3323 An error has occurred with the servo pack regeneration resistor (Z-axis).

3324 An error has occurred with the servo pack regeneration resistor (4th-axis).

3325 An error has occurred with the servo pack regeneration resistor (5th-axis).

3331 DC voltage in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally high (X-axis).

3332 DC voltage in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally high (Y-axis).

3333 DC voltage in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally high (Z-axis).

3334 DC voltage in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally high (4th-axis).

3335 DC voltage in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally high (5th-axis).

3341 DC voltage in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally low (X-axis).

3342 DC voltage in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally low (Y-axis).

3343 DC voltage in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally low (Z-axis).

3344 DC voltage in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally low (4th-axis).
I
3345 -o
LJL ““-’’---
VUILa~C ‘- “--
111 ‘--”- ~dGK
L1lC >CIVU -“-’- 11121111
–-’- C1l -:--’’”
UU1l ‘- tlU1lU1lllttlly
1> -L--—-””’ ‘-”””‘<”-
lUW --”-’
(J U1-ilAIS}.

I 3351 Heat sink in the servo pack has been overheated (X-axis).

I 3352 Heat sink in the servo pack has been overheated (Y-axis).

I 3353 Heat sink in the servo pack has been overheated (Z-axis).

H+
Heat sink in the servo pack has been overheated (4th-axis).

Heat sink in the servo pack has been overheated (5th-axis).

I 3361 Disconnection of the current command cable between the NC and the servo pack (X-axis).

I 3362 Disconnection of the current command cable between the NC and the servo pack (Y-axis).

3363 Disconnection of the current command cable between the NC and the servo pack (Z-axis).

3364 Disconnection of the current command cable between the NC and the servo pack (4th-axis).

3365 Disconnection of the current command cable between the NC and the servo pack (5th-axis).
=
Open phase in the three-phase power supply for the servo pack (X-axis).
I

I 3372 Open phase in the three-phase power supply for the servo pack (Y-axis).

I 3373 Open phase in the three-phase power supply for the servo pack (z-axis).
—
3374 Open phase in the three-phase power supply for the servo pack (4th-axis).

A3-18

— —.-——
 Appendix Table 3.2 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. Description ‘~

3375 Open phase in the three-phase power supply for the servo pack (5th-axis).

9010 TH parity has occurred.

9011 TV parity has occurred.

9012 In RS-232C communications, an illegal character (not conforming to EIA or 1S0) is detected.

In RS-232C communications, one block capacity ( 128 characters) has been exceeded. 3
9013

9014 [n RS-232C communications, there is no response of data set ready signal.

—
9015 Overflow has occurred with the input numerical value (more than 9 characters).

9016 In RS-232C communications, interface parity error has occurred.

—
9017 In RS-232C communications, interface overrun has occurred. (protocol setting error or transmission error)

9018 There is an error in RS-232C interface line selection.

9019 Framing error has occurred (stop bit setting error cjr transmission error).

9020 The designated line has already been opened.

9021 The designated line has not been opened.

—
9022 Double-call or combination is incorrect.

9023 Data has not been sent within the specified length of time.
—
9024 Send or receive processing is not executed.

9025 There is an error in the designated parameter.

A3-19
 APPENDIX 3.3 ALARM TABLE
(YENET1200 COMPATIBLE DRIVER)

When the driver compatible with the YENET1 200 is used, the contents of the alarm numbers
are partly changed. In this case, please refer to Table 3.3.

Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table

Alarm No. Description

0010 In tape mode operation, TH parity error has occurred.
I
0011 In tape mode operation, TV parity error has occurred.
I
0012 In tape mode operation, an illegal character (not conforming to EIA or 1S0) is detected.
I

~1 In tape mode operation, one block capacity ( 128 characters) has been exceeded.

I In tape mode operation, there is no response of data set ready signal.

~1
0015 In tape mode operation, overflow has occurred with the input numerical value (more than 9 characters).

0016 RS-232C interface transfer error has occurred.

0017 After the reading of RS-232C interface stop code, more than 10 characters of data has been read.

0018 There is an error in the RS-232C interface line.

0020 The designated line has already been opened.

0021 The designated line has not been opened.

0022 Double-call or combination is incorrect.

0023 Data has not been sent within the specified length of time.

0024 I Send or receive start processing has not been executed.

I
0025 ! There is an error in the setting of parameters,

0050 The parameter which is made valid after power off/on operation has been set.

0051 The parameter which is made valid only when the program area is cleared has been set.

There is an error in the designation of data in external data input.

~
0062 The program designated by the external data number search is not found.
I
0100 Overflow has occurred with one-block buffer (128 characters).

O1o1 There is no data specified following an address, or the data is specified without address.

0102 “-” or “’“

. is not used correctly.

0103 Illegal character is specified in the significant information area.

0104 Overflow has occurred with the input numerical value (more than 9 characters).

0105 An axis not defined as an axis is designated.

0106 The same address is designated more than one time in one block.

0107 Nesting of “(”; ‘“)” is used without “(”; “(” and “)” are not used in pairs.

A3 -20
 . ,. -,,- A .,-, ,,, ., .

Appenalx lame 3.3 ~larm la~le ~conra~

Alarm No. [description

—
0110 More than one M code is designated in one block although multiple M code option is not selected.

0111 I The nurnberof digits in the specified Mcode is Iarger than the allowable limit. I

0112 I M90 and M91 are not designated in a block without other commands. There is no P command in the M91 block. I

0113 I There is an error in the designation of an internal IM code. I

0114 I M90/M91 is designated although designation is not allowed. I

0115 IThere is an error in the M191 command. I

0116 I M93 is designated although designation is not allcwed. I

0125 I M, S, orTisdesignated akhoughdesignation of M, S, orTis notallowed. I

0126 / There is no M02/M30 command in memory mode or tape mode operation. I

● In the mirror image mode, an illegal G is designated.

0127
. Mirror image is turned ON in the mirror image :prohibited mode. I
0130 I More than one S code is designated in one block although multiple S control option is not selected. I

0131 I The number of digits in the specified S code is larger than the allowable limit.

0140 I The number of digits in the specified Tcode is larger than the allowable limit.

0144 I Thenumberof digits in the specified B code is larger than the allowable limit. I
0150 Offset number is too large.
— — —
0151 Offset number specified in H/D switching is too large.
— —
0152 Offset number H is not designated.
—
0160 An illegal G code is designated. Or a G code for which the corresponding option is not s,>lected is designated.

0161 G codes which cannot be used in combination in one block are designated.
—
0162 An address which is mandatory is not specified.
—
0163 An illegal G is designated in the high-speed mode operation section.

0170 An illegal G code is designated in a canned cycle.

—
0171 G70 - G72 is designated in other than a canned cycle.

0172 R-point level return is designated in G77 (back boring) canned cycle.

0174 In G73/G83, Q and I are not designated. G73/G83 is designated with Q = I = O.

—.
0175 In G70 - G72, designation of address is incorrect.
—
At the start-up of tool radius offset or nose R offset mode,
● There are no axis move commands within 3 blocks.
0180
● Mm, MOI, M02, or M30 is designated.
● Circular interpolation mode is designated.

A3 -21
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. Description

0181 The tool radius offset or nose R offset mode ends in the circular interpolation mode.

0182 An illegal G code is designated in the tool radius offset or nose R offset mode.

In the tool radius offset or nose R offset mode, offset plane has been changed. Circular arc is designated outside
0183
the offset plane.

0184 In the tool radius offset or nose R offset mode, point of intersection cannot be obtained.

0185 In the tool radius offset or nose R offset mode, the shape causing reversed tool movement is designated.

0186 In the tool radius offset or nose R offset mode, a system variable for which buffering is not allowed is designated.

0187 In the tool radius offset or nose R offset mode, interference is detected.

0188 In the tool radius offset or nose R offset mode, automatic interference correction is not possible.

0189 Offset mode error (work area has been destroyed, or no output data in data output operation)

0190 In circular interpolation commands, a circle of “’O”radius has been specified.

In circular interpolation, commands including three axes are designated. In helical interpolation, axes exceeding
0191
the number of controllable axes are designated.

The plane cannot be defined from the given circular interpolation commands. In circular interpolation, com-
0192
mands of four or more axes are designated.

0193 The center cannot be obtained from the designated R.

0194 Tool length offset or tool position offset is designated in the circular interpolation mode.

0196 Chamfering or comer rounding cannot be designated.

0197 Chamfering or comer rounding designation plane error has occurred.

0198 Chamfering or comer rounding block creaticn impossible error has occurred.

0200 In inputting an offset amount by using a program, a number designated with P is larger than the allowable limit.

0201 In inputting an offset amount by using a program, offset amount is too large. There is an error in the format.

In “’G 10 Q2° (inputting work coordinate system shift amount by program), a number designated with P is larger
0202
than the allowable limit.

0210 In user macro, the value of constant is- outside the allowable range.

0211 The number of cancel codes for G67 is too many.

~,
0212 There is an error in the format.

0213 A value not defined as a variable number is used.

0214 ~A variable used in replace statement is the variable which cannot be used for this operation.

0215 ~The nesting level of”[ ]“ exceeds the allowable limit.

0216 ~The nesting level of microprogram call exceeds the allowable limit.

A3 -22
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)
—
Alarm No. Description
—
0217 DO - END is not used in pairs.
—
0218 The numbersof brackets“’[”and “]” do not agree witheach other.
0219 In “DO M“, 1 S m S 3 is not satisfied.

0220 In “GOTO n“, “n“ is outside the allowable range or ‘“n” is not found.
—
0221 In a microprogram, division by “0” is executed.
— —.
0222 Square root of a negative value
—
0223 Floating point data exceeds the allowable range.

0224 In modal call (G66), axis command is specified with M99 return designation.
—
0225 Overflow has occurred with operation stack.
—
0226 Execution of the following functions was impossible: ASIN,ACOS,1.N,SQRT
.
0227 Overflow has occurred during conversion into integer.

0228 Overflow has occurred with the input data for the 13CD function.
—
0229 There is an error in the format of the BIN function.
.
0230 Overflow has occurred as the result of execution of the EXP function.
—
0240 Reference point return has not been completed with the axis for which G29, G30 is designated.
—
0241 Reference point return is invalid for the axis for which G28 is designated.
— —
0250 A-n illegal code has been designated in a solid tap program.
— —
0255 A C command is designated for the spindle in the spindle control mode.

0256 An S command is designated for the spindle in the C-axis control mocle.
—
● There is no P or Q command in the M98 block.
0260 ● There is no P command in the G65/G66, G25 block.
● Both G25 and M98/M99 are designated in the same block.
—
0261 Nesting level of M98 subprogram call or G25 exceeds the allowable limit.
— — —
In a program that calls a microprogram by G, M, or T code (M98, M99, G65, G66, G25), the designated pro-
0262
gram number or sequence number is not found.

0263 An attempt was made to start a program by executing address search after buffering subprogram or macro call.

0264 M99 is used in copy program when an attempt was made to execute the program copy function.
—
● I or J command is not designated in the G106 block.
0270 ● Neither I nor I command is designated in the G 106 block.
● An axis other than X and Y is designated in the G 106 block.
— —
0275 During program interruption, an illegal command :s designated.
— —.

A3 -23
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)

/ Alarm No. I Description I

I 0280 I In ,he scaling mode, an illegal command is designated. I

I 028I I There is an error in the fm-rnatof G50/G51 block. Scaling value is “O’, I
I 0285 IThe order of designatioticancellation of the following functions is irworrecc mirror image, scaling, rotation.

I 0290 IA sequence number is not found at the restartof the program.

I 0291 IThe opemtionthat~hange, the coordinate system is executed at the restart of the program.

I 0292 I At the restart of the program, an axis was moved by MDI intervention.

I 0301 I There are no tools registered in the designated tool group.

I 0302 I All took in thedesignated tool grcrupare in the skipped status.

In the coordinate rotation mode, an illegal G code is designated. Or G68 is designated in the tool radius offset
0310
I mode.

I 0311 ! There is an error in the format of the G68, G69 command block.

I 0312 In the coordinate rotation mode, an axis that cannot be designated is designated.

I A work coordinate system that cannot be designated for the G54 - G59 J* work coordinate system shift program
0320
; is selected. Or G54 - G59 is designated in the circular interpolation mode.

0321 ~A iocal coordinate system is set although a work coordinate system is not set.

I 0322 I G53 is designated in inccn-rectconditions.

I 0360 I In circle cut commands, radiusR < offset amountD.

I 0361 I In circle cutting, a plane other than the G17 plane is selected.

I 0362 I There is an error in the format of circle cut program.

0365 I An illegal G code is designated in G45 - G48 mode.

I 0370 I There is no Fcommand in a cutting program.

I 0380 I An axis command is designated in the G04, G40, G21 block.

I 0381 1A n axis command is designated in the G1O, G22, G23 block.

0382 More than one area has been selected from No. 3- No. 5 prohibited areas,
I
An execution program does not exist.
~
0391 An execution program is being input.

I 0392 I An execution program is being edited.

I 0393 I A sequence number that does no exist is designated in M98 QG25 commands,

I 0395 I Cycle start is executed after changing the mode from tape to memory, or from memory to tape.

During tape/direct operation, an attempt was made to return to the main program by interrupting program execu-
0396
tion.

A3 -24
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)

I Alarm No. I [description I

I 0397 lDuring~p/directo~ration,o~mtionintemptionthatdmsnotallowtiere-executiontlasbeencatiedout. I

I 0400 / ArI O munberof five orrnore digits is designated. I

I 0401 I An N msrnberof five orrnore digits is designated. I
I 0402 IA P number of five or more digits is designated. I
I 0406 I Before the axis move, the axis is in the stored stroke limit No. 2 area.

0407 Before the axis move, the axis is in the stored stroke limit No. 3 area.
1

0408 Before the axis move, the axis is in the stored stroke limit No. 4 area.
r — --l
0409 Before the axis move, the axis is in the stored stroke limit No. 5 area.
r
0411 Reference point return has not been completed (X.axis).
—.
I
0412 Referencepoint return has not been completed (Y-axis).
I — J
I 0413 I Reference point return has not been completed (Z-axis). I

0414 Reference point return has not been completed (4th-axis).

1 — —d
0415 Reference point return has not been completed (5th-axis).
I d
I 0421 I After the execution of G27, the axis has not returned to the reference point (X-axis). I

I 0422 I After the execution of G27, the axis has not returned to the reference point (Y-axis). I

I 0423 \ After the executionof G27, the axis ha, not returnedto the referencepoint (Z-axis). I
I 0424 I After the execution of G27, the axis has not returned to the reference point (4th-axis). I
I 0425 I After the execution of G27, the axis has not returned to the reference point (5th-axis). I

I 0431 lBeforetheaxismove, theaxishasreachedtheent*yprohibitedarea(ouEide)ofstoredstrokelimit(X-axis) I

I 0432 lBefore theaxis move, theaxis hasreached theentry prohibited area(outside) ofstored stroke limit (Y-axis) I

I 0433 lBeforetheaxismove, theaxishasreachedtheentryprohibitedarea(outside)ofstoredstrokelimit(Z-axis) I

I 0434 lBefore theaxis move, theaxis hasreached theen~y prohibited area(outside) ofstored sHokelimit(4ti-axis) I

I 0435 lBefore theaxis move, theaxis hasreached theentry prohibited area(outside) ofstored stroke limit (5th-axis) I

I 0480 \ The cylindrical interpolation command error has occurred. I

0481 A command error has occurred in the cylindrical interpolation mode.

1 —d
I 0482 I The polar coordinate interpolation command error has occurred. I

I 0483 IA commanderror has occurred in the polar coordinate interpolation mode. I

I 0484 IProgram imerrupthas occurred in the cylindrical orpolarcoordinate interpolation mode. I

I 0491 I In the G31 block, skip signal (I)has not been input. I

A3 -25
 —.. .. .
Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm l“able (cent’d)

Alarm No. Description

0492 In theG31 block, skip signal (2) has not been input.

0494 When G31 is executed, the skip signal (1) is not ready.

0495 When G31 is executed, the skip signal (2) is not ready.

1000 DNC time-out error has occurred.

I(M31 DNC DR line error has occurred.

1002 DNC packet length error has occurred.

1003 DNC 8251 error has occurred.

1004 DNC check sum error has occurred.

I005 DNC command error has occurred.

1006 DNC high-speed cutting mode error has occurred.

1007 DNC communication module diagnosis error has occurred.

1008 DNC CPU error has occurred.

1009 DNC 51 error has occurred.

Start number of the battery backed-up memcry storing the cell controller I/O link information is outside the al-
1020
lowable range.

1021 ~An interface error between the cell controller and COM in the cell controller system.

1041 Incorrect command has been made for the PI.C control axis (X-axis).

1042 Incorrect command has been made for the PLC control axis (Y-axis).

1043 Incorrect command has been made for the PI-C control axis (Z-axis).

I044 Incorrect command has been made for the P!LC control axis (4th-axis).

I045 Incorrect command has been made for the PLC control axis (5th-axis).

1051 Axis has been changed while the control axis selected status signal is ON (X-axis).

1052 Axis has been changed while the control axis selected status signal is ON (Y-axis).

1053 Axis has been changed while the control axis selected status signal is ON (Z-axis).

1054 Axis has been changed while the control axis selected status signal is ON (4th-axis).

1055 Axis has been changed while the control axis selected status signal is ON (5th-axis).

1080 Execution of a program block has been stopped with the ERR O signal ON.

1090 Setting area total check error has occurred.

1091 Parameter area total check error has occurred.

1092 Battery backed-up memory area total check error has occurred.
E ~

A3 -26
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)
— —
Alarm No. Clescription

1093 Offset and work coordinate system shift amount area total check error has occurred.

1094 Macro variable area total check error has occurred.

— —
1095 Machining program area total check error has occurred.
— —
1096 Tool life control data area total check error has occurred.

1098 The fan is faulty.

—
1099 High temperature in the NC unit.
— —
200 I Overtravel has occurred (X-axis).

2002 Overtravel has occurred (Y-axis).

—
2003 Overtravel has occurred (Z-axis).
— — —
2004 Overtravel has occurred (4th-axis).

2005 Overtravel has occurred (5th-axis).

2011 Axis has reached the stored stroke limit No. 1 area (X-axis).
— —
2012 Axis has reached the stored stroke limit No. 1 area (Y-axis).

2013 Axis has reached the stored stroke limit No. 1 area (Z-axis).
— —
2014 Axis has reached the stored stroke limit No. 1 area (4th-axis).

2015 Axis has reached the stored stroke limit No. 1 area (5th-axis).
—
2020 More than two areas are made valid at the same time among No. 2- No. 5 areas.
— —
2021 Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 2 area (X-axis).

2022 Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 2 area (Y-axis).
—
2023 Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 2 area (Z-axis).

2024 Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 3 area (X-axis).
—
2025 Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 3 area (Y-axis).

2026 Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 3 area (Z-axis).
—
2027 Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 4 area (X-axis).

2028 Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 4 area (Y-axis).
—
2029 Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 4 area (Z-axis).
—
2031 Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 5 area (X-axis).
— —
2032 Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 5 area (Y-axis).
—
2033 Axis has reached the outside of the stored stroke limit No. 5 area (Z-axis).
—

A3 -27
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. Description

2040 Axis has reached the inside of the stored strcike limit No. 2 area.

204 I Axis has reached the inside of the stored strc)ke limit No. 3 area.

2042 Axis has reached the inside of the stored strc}ke limit No. 4 area,

I 2043 I Axis has reached the inside of the stored stroke limit No. 5 area.

I 2044 I The end point does not lie on the circle in manual circular interpolation type 2.

I 2045 I The start point does not exist on the circle in manual circular interpolation type 1.

I 2046 \ in manual circular interpolation, depth of cut is too large.

II In< 11
LU.J
I When the separately installed PG is used for reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to
ION before the C-phase is latched (X-axis).

When the separately installed PG is used for reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to
2052
ON before the C-phase is latched (Y-axis).

When the separately installed PG is used for reference point return, the decelemtion LS is turned from OFF to
2053
ON before the C-phase is latched (Z-axis).

When the separately installed PG is used for reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to
ON before the C-phase is latched (4th-axis).

When the separately installed PG is used for reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to
:: ,+ON before the C-phase is latched (5th-axis).

2060 ‘ Thereference point retum(low-speed type) isexecuted inthemanual skip B(measuring) mode.

2061 Reference point return area error has occurred (X-axis).

2062 ~Reference point return area error has occurred (Y-axis).

2063 I Reference point return area error has occurred (Z-axis).

2064 1Reference point retumarea error hasoccurred (4th-axis).

2065 I Reference point return area error has occurred (5th-axis).

After the completion of measurement in the manual skip (A/B) mode, measuring cycle is executed again without
2070
returning the contact detection axis.

Reference point return position error has occurred (X-axis).

e
--=---- Reference point return position error has occurred (Y-axis).

2073 Reference point return position error has occurred (Z-axis).

2074 Reference point return position error has occurred (4th-axis).

2075 Reference point return position error has occurred (5th-axis).

A3 -28
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. [description 7

In reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned OFF after it has been turned ON once and then turned ON
2081
again (X-axis).
—
In reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned OFF after it has been turned ON once and then turned ON
2082
again (Y-axis).
—— A
In reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned OFF after it has been turned ON once and then turned ON
2083
again (Z-axis).

In reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned OFF after it has been turned ON once and then turned ON
2084
again (4th-axis).

In reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned OFF after it has been turned ON once and then turned ON
2085
again (5th-axis).

According to the parameter setting, retraction operation must be made in reference point return operation (X-
2091
axis).

According to the parameter setting, retraction operation must be made in reference point return operation (Y-
2092
axis).

According to the parameter setting, retraction operation must be made in reference point return operation (Z-
2093
axis).

According to the parameter setting, retraction operation must be made in reference point return operation (4th-
2094
axis).

According to the parameter setting, retraction operation must be made in reference point return operation (5th-
2095
axis).

2101 P-SET error has occurred (X-axis).

2102 P-SET error has occurred (Y-axis).

2103 P-SET error has occurred (Z-axis).

2104 P-SET error has occurred (4th-axis).

2105 P-SET error has occurred (5th-axis).

Absolute position overflow has occurred with the absolute position detection function
2111
(X-axis).
——
Absolute position overflow has occurred with the absolute position detection function
2112
(Y-axis).

Absolute position overflow has occurred with the absolute position detection function
2113
(Z-axis).

Absolute position overflow has occurred with the absolute position detection function
2114
(4th-axis).

Absolute position overflow has occurred with the absolute position detection function
2115
(5th-axis).
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. Description

Difference in axis positions between the position at the previous power off and the position at the start-up of the
2131
absolute position detection function is excessively large (X-axis).

Differencein axis positions between the position at the previous power off and the position at the start-up of the
2132
I absolute position detection function is excessively large (Y-axis).

L+
Difference in axis positions between the pos ition at the previous power off and the position at the start-up of the
absolute position detection function is excessively large (Z-axis).

Difference in axis positions between the pos ition at the previous power off and the position at the start-up of the
2134
absolute position detection function is excessively large (4th-axis).

Differencein axis positionsbetweenthe positionat the previouspower off and the position at the start-up of the
2135
I absolute position detection function is excessively large (5th-axis).

~1 Reference point return movement has been interrupted due to mode change (X-axis).

U:—1 2143
Reference point return movement has been interrupted due to mode change (Y-axis).

Reference point return movement has been interrupted due to mode change (Z-axis).
1
2144 Reference point return movement has been interrupted due to mode change (4th-axis).
L
2145 I Reference point return movement has been interrupted due to mode change (5th-axis).

During the execution of reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to ON before C-phase
2151
latch is completed (X-axis).

During the execution of reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to ON before C-phase
2152
I latch is completed (Y-axis).

During the execution of reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to ON before C-phase
2153
I latch is completed (Z-axis).

During the execution of reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to ON before C-phase
21S4
I latch is completed (4th-axis).

During the execution of reference point return, the deceleration LS is turned from OFF to ON before C-phase
2155
I latch is completed (5th-axis).

I 2161 I While an axis is disconnected, the disconnection input has been turned OFF(X-axis).

I 2162 I While an axis is disconnected, the disconnection input has been tumedOFF (Y-axis).

I 2163 I While an axis is disconnected, the disconnection input has been turned OFF(Z-axis).

I 2164 I While an axis is disconnected, the disconnection input has been turned OFF (4th-axis).

I 2165 I While an axis is disconnected, the disconnection input has been turned OFF (5th-axis).

2171 Unmatch in axis disconnection status (X-axis).

2172 Unmatch in axis disconnection status (Y-axis).

2173 Unmatch in axis disconnection status (Z-axis).

~
2174 Unmatch in axis disconnection status (4th-axis).

A3 ~~
30
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. [description

2175 Unmatchin axis disconnectionstatus(5th-axis).

I 2180 I An axis has been decelerated and stopped due to turning ON of the ERR 1 signal. I
I 2190 I The machine is not ready,

2191 The SLPC input signal has been turned off in the spindle command loop sequence by G93.

3000 Servo power is not turned on.

I 3001 I The control is not ready. I

I 3002 I NC has entered the emergency stop state. I

I 3010 I The memory used to store machining programs has not been initialized. I

❑d
In initialization processing, expansion memory for storing machining programs and the memory after power on

AXIS configuration setting parameters do not agree with the physical axis configuration, or the option M not se-

~
3013 YENET station number parameter setting error
—
3014 The number of valid axes is greater than the allowable number.

3021 Fuse is blown ( lst-axis).

3022 Fuse is blown (2nd-axis).

3023 Fuse is blown (3rd-axis).

3024 Fuse is blown (4th-axis).

—
3025 Fuse is blown (5th-axis).

3041 Excessively large servo error ( lst-axis)

3042 Excessively large servo error (2nd-axis)

3043 Excessively large servo error (3rd-axis)

3044 Excessively large servo error (4th-axis)

3045 Excessively large servo error (5th-axis)

I 3051 I Excessively large servo error (No. 1 spindle) I

3061 Overload ( Ist-axis)

3062 Overload (2nd-axis)

3063 Overload (3rd-axis)

3064 Overload (4th-axis) A

3065 Overload (5th-axis)

-A

A3 -31

.——.—..—.
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)

I Alarm No. ~ Description I

3081 ~Disconnectionin PG wiring (1st-axis)

3082 ~Disconnection in PG wiring (2nd-axis)

w
,
Disconnection in PG wiring (3rd-axis)

Disconnection in PG wiring (4th-axis)

I 3085 I Disconnection in PG wiring (5th-axis) I

I 3091 I Disconnection inPG wiring (spindle) I
I 3100 \ YENET1200 drive error has been detected. I
3101 Servo pack error has occurred (1st-axis).

E 3102 Servo pack error has occurred (2nd-axis).

3103 Servo pack error has occurred (3rd-axis).

3104 Servo pack error has occurred (4th-axis). a

I 3105 I Servo pack error has occurred (5th-axis). I

I 3111 I Servo pack communication error has occurred (Ist-axis). I

I 3112 I Servo pack communication ermrhas occurred (2nd-axis). I

I 3113 I Servo pack communication error has occurred (3rd-axis). I

I 3114 I Servo pack cornrnunication error has occurred (4th-axis). I

3115 Servo pack communication error has occurred (5th-axis).

1-
3121 + Over-speed has been detected ( 1st-axis).

3122 Over-speed has been detected (2nd-axis).

3123 Over-speed has been detected (3rd-axis).

3124 Over-speed has been detected (4th-a~is).

3125 Over-speed has been detected (5th-axis).

3131 Serial communication error has occurred in the communication with the inverter (spindle).
I
3141 Runaway is detected with the servo controlled axis ( 1st-axis).

3142 Runaway is detected with the servo controlled axis (2nd-axis).

3143 Runaway is detected with the servo controlled axis (3rd-axis).

I I /
3144 Runaway is detected with the servo controlled axis (4th-axis).

3145 Runaway is detected with the servo controlled axis (5th-axis)

3151 Phase detection error has occurred ( 1st-axis). ~

A3 -32
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. Description

3152 Phase detection error has occurred (2nd-axis).

I 3153 I Phase dekctionemorhas wcumd (3rd-axis), I

I 3154 I Phase detection emorhasoccurred (4th-axis). I

I 3155 I Phase detection error has occurred (5th-axis). I
I 3161 I Malfunctioning is detected with the absolute position encoder (1st-axis). I
I 3162 I Malfunctioning is detected with the absolute position encoder (2nd-axis). I
I 3163 I Malfunctioning iscietected with the absolute position encoder (3rd-axis], I
3164 I Malfunctioning is detected with the absolute position encoder (4th-axis).

I 3165 I Malftmctioning is detected with the absolute position encoder (5th-axis). I

3181 Malfunctioning is detected with the PG counter of the absolute position encoder ( 1st-axis).

3182 Malfunctioningis detectedwith the PG counterof the absolutepositionencoder (2nd-axis)

[ ~
3183 Malfunctioning is detected with the PG counter of the absolute position encoder (3rd-axi~;)
1 I ‘~
3184 Malfunctioning is detected with the PG counter of the absolute position encoder (4th-axi~)
I =-----l
3185 Malfunctioning is detected with the PG counter of the absolute position encoder (5th-axi~)
I
— ‘=-----l

3191 Error has occurred in the reduction of fraction of the gear ratio ( 1st-axis).
I ------
3192 Error has occurred in the reduction of fraction of the gear ratio (2nd-axis).
I
3193 Error has occurred in the reduction of fraction of the gear ratio (3rd-wxis).
I —J
3194 Error has occurred in the reduction of fraction of the gear ratio (4th-axis).
1
— —------l

I 3195 I Error has occurred in the reduction of fraction of the gear ratio (5th-axis). I

E
3221 Disconnection in wiring to the separately installed PG (1st-axis)

3222 Disconnection in wiring to the separately installed PG (2nd-axis) 1

I 3223 I Disconnection in wiring to the separately installed PG (3rd-axis) I

I 3224 I Disconnection in wiring to the separately installed PG (4th-axis) I
I 3225 I Disconnection in wiring to the separately installed PG(5th-axis)

3240 Servo has been turned off due to turning ON of the ERR 2 signal.
1

3241 Absolute error (separately installed PG) has occurred (1st-axis).

.2
3242 Absolute error (separately installed PG) has occurred (2nd-axis).

3243 Absolute error (separately installed PG) has occurred (3rd-axis).

1 — A
3244 Absolute error (separately installed PG) has occurred (4th-axis).
--J

A3 -33
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. Description

3245 Absolute error (separately installed PG) has occurred (5th-axis).

3252 NMI interruption has occurred due to- the occurrence of bus gate error.

3253 NMI interruption has occurred due to- the occurrence of watchdog time-out.

3260 SH-INTEX synchronization error has occurred.

3261 SH-MOTION synchronization error has occurred.

3262 INTEX-MOTION synchronization error has occurred.

3263 MOTION-PLC synchronization error has occurred.

3264 MOTION-AXIS synchronization error has occurred.

3265 ACGC synchronization error has occurred.

—
3266 ~DNC synchronization error has occurred.

3270 ~Data error has occurred when turning the power OFF (battery backed-up memory).

3271 Data error has occurred when turning the power OFF (tool life control).

3272 Data error has occurred when turning the power OFF (macro).

3273 Data error has occurred when turning the power OFF (internal memory).

3274 Program has been destroyed due to turning the power off during editing (program).

3275 Data error has occurred when turning the power OFF during editing (custom variables).

The power has been turned OFF during editing. This requires the program to be checked after turning the power ~
3276
ON.

3281 YENET1 200 command time-out error has o;curred (1st-axis).

3282 YENET 1200 command time-out error has occurred (2nd-axis).

3283 YENET1 200 command time-out error has occurred (3rd-axis).

3284 YENET 1200 command time-out error has occurred (4th-axis).

3285 YENET1 200 command time-out error has occurred (5th-axis).

—
3291 YENET 1200 command time-out error has oscurred (spindle).

3296 During sequence editing, the power is turned ON for the NC with the system number switch set in “O”.
—
3297 Sequence data has been destroyed.

3299 Communication error has occurred in the YENET 1200 (1/0).

—
3301 Excessively large current is supplied to the servo pack main circuit ( lst-axis).

3302 Excessively large current is supplied to the servo pack main circuit (2nd-axis).

3303 Excessively large current is supplied to the servo pack main circuit (3rd-axis).

A3 -34
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)

Alarm No. Description

3304 Excessively large current is supplied to the servo pack main circuit (4th-axis).

3305 Excessively large current is supplied to the servo pack main circuit (5th-axis).

3311 Servo pack MCCB has been tripped (X-axis). 3

I 3312 \ Servo pack MCCB has been tripped (Y-axis). I

I 3313 I Servo pack MCCB has been tripped (Z-axis). I

I 3314 I Servo pack MCCB has been tripped (4th-axis). I

I 3315 I Servo pack MCCBhas been tripped (5th-axis). I

I 3321 I An error has occurred with the servo pack regeneration resistor (X-axis). I

I 3322 I An error has occurred with the servo pack regenemtion resistor (Y-axis). I

I 3323 I An error has occurred with the servo pack regeneration resistor (Z-axis). I

I 3324 I An error has occurred with the servo pack regeneration resistor (4th-axis). I

I 3325 I An error has occurred with the servo pack regeneration resistor (5th-axis). I

3331 I DC voltage in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally high (lst-axis). I
I 3332 I DC voltage in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally high (2nd-axis). I
I 3333 /DC voltage in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally high (3rd-axis). I
I 3334 ~DC vol~ge in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally high (4th-axis).
I
I 3335 I DC voltage in the servo pack main circuit is abnormally high (5th-axis). I
I 3381 / Communication error has occurred in the YENETI 200( Ist-axis). I
I 3382 I Communication error has occurred in the YENET 1200 (2nd-axis), I
I 3383 I Communication error has occurred in the YENET 1200 (3rd-axis). I
3384 Communication error has occurred in the YENET 1200 (4th-axis).
1 -------1
3385 Communication error has occurred in the YENET 1200 (5th-axis).
1 —d
3391 Communication error has occurred in the YENET 1200 (spindle).
1 4
3395 Converter error has occurred (spindle).
–J
3401 Converter error has occurred (1st-axis).
I -4
Converter error has occurred (2nd-axis).
El 4
3403 Converter error has occurred (3rd-axis).
1 I 4
3404 Converter error has occurred (4th-axis).
I 4
I 3405 I Converter emorhas occurred (5th-axis). I

A3 -35

-——. .—.-—.—— .—
—-—-—.
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)

I Alarm No. I Description I

~1 Servo unit error has occurred ( Ist-axis).

Servo unit error has occurred (2nd-axis).

~1
Servo unit error has occurred (3rd-axis).
~1
3414 Servo unit error has occurred (4th-axis).
I

3415 Servo unit error has occurred (5th-axis).

I

Watchdog error has occurred in the YENET 1200 (spindle).

~1------

~L Watchdog error has occurred in the YENET 1200( lst-axis).

Watchdog error has occurred in the YENET 1200 (2nd-axis).

~1

~1 Watchdog error has occurred in the YENET 1200 (3rd-axis).

Watchdog error has occurred in the YENET 1200 (4th-axis).

/

~1
Watchdog error has occurred in the YENET 1200 (5th-axis).
~~

I
3442 Ground fault (2nd-axis)
—
I

3444 Ground fault (4th-axis)

I

3451 Follow-up error has occurred (l st-axis).

I
3452 Follow-up error has occurred (2nd-axis).
L 1

Follow-up error has occurred (4th-axis).

~1
3455 Follow-up error has occurred (5th-axis).
I

~1 Erroneous setting of the motor code ( 1st–axis)

Erroneous setting of the motor code (2nd–ax is)

~1
3463 Erroneous setting of the motor code (3rd–axis)
[

L“4 L-––––-–
Erroneous setting of the motor code (4th-axis)
J

~1 Erroneous setting of the motor code (5th–ax is)

I 9011 I TV parity has occurred. I

A3 -36
 Appendix Table 3.3 Alarm Table (cent’d)
—
Alarm No. [description
—
9012 In RS-232C communications, an illegal character (not conforming to EIA or ISO) is dete cted.

9013 In RS-232C communications, one block capacity (128 characters) has been exceeded.
—
9014 In RS-232C communications, there is no response of data set ready signal.
—
9015 Overflow has ~curred with the input numerical value (more than 9 characters).
—
9016 In RS-232C communications, interface parity error has occurred.
—
9017 In RS-232C communications, interface overrun has occurred. (protocol setting error or transmission error)
—
9018 There is an error in RS-232C interface line selection.

9019 Framing error has occurred (stop bit setting error c~rtransmission error).

9020 The designated line has already been opened.

—
9021 The designated line has not been opened.
.—
9022 Double-call or combination is incorrect.
I
9023 Data has not been sent within the specified length of time.
—
9024 Send or receive processing is not executed.
—
9025 There is an error in the designated parameter.
4
 INDEX

In Appendix 4, technical terms specific to NC anti J300M are

arranged in alphabetical order.
Please use this index when looking for descriptions using the
technical term as the key code.

A4-1

——. -— ..———.-—. —--

 A Deletinga Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25,4-37
DeletingrmMDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-14
Absolute Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18.9-23 DisplayLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-34
Absolute Position Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-23 Displayof Alarm Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-5
Action Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-14 Displayof PresentPositionData in the External
Address Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-13 CoordinateValues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-5
Address Search, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-7 Displayof Present PositionData in tfre Workpiece Coordinate
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-4
ALARM DISPLAY JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-10
Display of Remaining Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-6
Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-10
Display of Subprogram Nesting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- I I
Alarm Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A3-3
Display of the Directory of Part Progmms , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-28
ALARM TABLE (YENETI 200 COMPATIBLE DRIVER) ., A3 -20
Display ingmd Writing tie Twl Pot Num&r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Alarms Nothrdicatedb yAlwmNumbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-27
Display ingthe ATCTwl Status , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5- 17
Arrangement of Battery and Indicator
Display ingthe ON/OFF Status of the UOSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Automatic Handle Mode Offse[
Displaying the ON/OFF Status of the Selected 1/0 Signals 8-9
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Display ingthe Tool Life Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-23
AUTOMATIC OPERATIONS
Dry Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-33
Automatic scaling
Automatic Scaling Function
E

a
AUXKev .....................
Auxiliary Function Lack . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 2-35
Editing a Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-7
AA Editing an MDIProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-12
B Editing the Part Program Stored in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-8
S-inch Take-up Reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-8
Background Reset Function.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8 -14
Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1-11
BGReset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-62
Entry ofart MDIProgmm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-12
Broken PGCable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17.9-22
Erasing the Trml Life Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-27
Broken Spindle PGCable .. 9-17
Error Pulse Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-9
Buzr.er Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-23
Excessive Follow-up Error . . . . . . . . . . . . , ., . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9-16.9-21
Excessive Follow-up Error Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-16
c Excessive Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17.9-22

Calendar Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-14 Execution ofa Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-10

Calling a Part PrOgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-35 Execution ofan MDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-13

Cause of Alamand Comective Action .,........................9-6

Checking the Motors for Abnormalities ,. . . . . . 2-11 F
Checking the NClnformation ..,.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-3
F1-digit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-19
Checking the Status of Troubles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-2
Feed Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-29
CLASSIFICATION OF ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A3-2
Feedrate Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-30
CLASSIFICATION OF THE PARAMETERS AZ-2
Follow-up En’or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9- 26
Collective Display of Command Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-15
Function Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-4
Collective Display of Present Position Data 7-2
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-3
COMMAND VALUE DISPLAY JOB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-15
Fuse Blown . . . .. ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..9. .9-2 I
Communication Conditions, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-57
Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. AI-17
Control Not Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-16 G
Converter Alamr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-25
GENERAL FLOW OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-4
coordinate system formachining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2 -25
Ground Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-25
Copying a Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-41
CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-10
Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-14 H
Handle Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-18
D Heat Sink Overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19.9-24
High Temperature . . . . . . ...9-13
Data Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-13

A4-2
 I Nurmal Display on CRT Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3 -16
number ofactually used characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 -29
I/O Device Setting Function . .,,...,...,....,.....,...,,....,8- 14 numerical setting up .,, ...,,.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
I/O MONITORING JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-8
INPUT SIGNALS (PLC+ NC),...,,.. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. AI-2
hrput/output and Verify Function, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-12
0
INPU’J/OUTPUT AND VERIFY JOB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-12 l-iine MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-24
Inputting a Parr Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-42 OpenPhaseD ejection, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-20
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...,.....,...,....,..,.,2-7 Operating Time Function . . . . . . . . . . . . .,. .,. ,., . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..7. I5
NC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., .,....,.....2-7 OPERATION JNTERVENTION DURING AUTOMATIC
Tape Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-8 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-37
Inspection of the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-13 OperationModeControlS ignals. ..,,,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-2, A1-9
hrterlock inputs.,,...,,..,,...,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..l . . . . . ..l-I4 OPERATION STEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,....,.......,...,..,3-2
lNTERNAL JNFORMATIONJOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..8-[5 OptionSpecification s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1-9
Internal Switch Function....,,..,,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-16 Optional Block Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2.32
Inverter Alarm...,........,....,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-23 optional block skip B function.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. .2.33
Inverter Unit Alarm........,...,,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-25 OptiOna lSto p. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2.32
OIJTPUT SIGNALS (NC+ PLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A1-9
Outputting a Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-46
J Over Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-24
Overcument, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-18
Overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19.9-24
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . .. 9-16.9-21
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,,, .,. ,.. .,. ... . . . . . . . . ..2.3(J

K
Key Buffer Edit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. .3-22
P
Key Memory Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-16 P-SETError, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-15
Pa8e Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-13
Parameter Function,.,.,...,,.,.,.. .,, ..,...,...,,...,...,..8-3
M PARAMETER JOB.................,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-3
Machine Lock .... .. ... .. . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . ...2-34 Paramete rTabl e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A2. . . . . . . .. A2-3
Machine Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1-6 PARAMETER TABLE
Macro Variable Function ., . ...,..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6 . . . . ..6-I7 (YENET1200 COMPATIBLEDRIVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A2-47
MAINTENANCE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-2 Parity Emor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-7
Manual Absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-41 PART PROGRAM DIRECTORY JOB... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-28
Manual Centering Operation...,.,,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-49 PA.REPROGRAM EDIT JOB.....,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-3
MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-16,2-19 PART PROGRAM INPUWOUTPUT AND VERIFY JOB . ... 4-42
Manual Operation Intervention during Automatic Operation . 2-37 Phase Detection Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-23
Manual Rapid Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-16 Pilch Error Function, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,...,.......,..........8.7
Manual Reference Point Retur n.,...., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-20 Play back Function .,, , . .,, . . . . . . . . . .,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-56
Manual Reference Point Return to the SecondReferencePoint 2-23 Pop-up Menu, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-21

MCCBTrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..9-l8 Position Error, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,, ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-18

MDJOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-28 PC)WERON/OFF Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3 -9
MD1 Operation Intervention during Automatic Operation . . . . 2-38 Preparation before Tumingthe Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-9
MDIOPERATIONJOB .. ... . . ... . . . . . . . .. ,6-12 Prl:paration of Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-25
Memory Dump Function . . . . . . . . . . . ,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-16 PRESENT POSITION DATA CONTROL JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Memory Operation, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-27 Pr{xedure for Tumingthe Power OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-12
Prtxedure for Tumingthe Power ON . ., .,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-10
Prfxess Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-11
N Process Screens, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,, ..,,.......,...,...,...,3-3
NC OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...,............,..,,.3-9 Program Information Displayed on Screen ., ... ... ... ... 6.3
NC Path Dmwing Job . . . . . . 4-90,6-22 PROGRAM JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-3
NC System Software..,....,...,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-4 Program Number Search .,,,..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6- 5
9-inch Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-10 PR.OGRAM PATH DRAWING JOB..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-63

A4-3
Program Restart..,........,...,,., ,, . ., ., . .,, , .,, ,, .,, .,.,2-50 TIME CONTROL .IOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-13
PROTECHVE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1-11 TOOL DATA CONTROL JOB,..,,,. ,,, ..,,..,......,.......,5-9
Tool Length Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-43
TOOL LIFE CONTROL JOB....,,., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-23
R
Troubleshooting ...,....,..,..,,,.. . 9-7,9-21
RAPID ... ., . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-16 Turning ON/OFF f/O Signals Forcibly, .,, , ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-11
Rapid Traverse Override ......... . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-31
Reference Point, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2 -20
Reference Pom[Retum Area Error.,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..9-I4
u
Reference Point ReturnPositio nError .,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-14 Under Voltage . . . . . . . . ...9-19
Regeneration Error.,....,...,..,,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-19 User’s Message Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-12
Renaming a Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-39
RESET Key..,....,......,....,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-15
Retumto the Operation [nterrupted Point ,,, .,, , . ., ., .,, .,, .,...2-47
v
RS-232C Commcrnications Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-57 Verifyingthe Part Programs, ,. ..,..., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-53
RS-232C Emor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-8 Version Number Function . .,...,.., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-15
RS-232C Interface Troubleshooting Flowchari ., ., ., 9-8
Run-away Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-22 w
Wke Break in Current Instruction Cable . ., ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-19
s WORKPIECECOORDINATE SYSTEM JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Saving aParc Program after Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4-23 Writing the Measured Tool Length Offset Amount 5-18
Selecting the Absolute/Incremental Mcxle 5-8 Writing the Offset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-9
sequence number search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-8 Writing the Tool Life Control Data,,,. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-23
Sequence Parameter Function . . . ., . . . . ...8-7 Writing the Workpiece Coordinate System Shift Correction
Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-5
Serial Interface Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58.9-10
Writing the Workpiece Shift Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-4
Servo Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-22
Servo Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-II
Servo Axis Control . . . . . .. AI-13 Y
Servo Axis Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. AI-5
YASNAC System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1-7
Servo Communication Alarm 9-22
YENET1200 . . . . . . . ...9-21
Servo Configuration Function ...,... ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8-17
YENET1200 command time-out . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9- 23
Servo Drive Uni[Communicatlon Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-18
YENET1200Communication Emor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9- 24
Servo Power Not Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-15
YENET1200 Watchdog Error.,..,,,. ,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-25
Servo Unit Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-25
Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-20.8-6
SETTING JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-16
Setting the Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7-7
Setting the Tool Life Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5-24
Simultaneous 2-or 3-axis Handle Feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-19
Soft-keys . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3-12
Software Switch Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-17
Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A1-7. A1-I5
Standard Configuration of YASNAC System ., 1-2
Standard Specifications....,....,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1-7
Step Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2-17
Stored Stroke Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1-12
Stored Stroke Limit B, C . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1-13
Stored Stroke Limit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-21
Storing an MDI Program . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6-14
Switching the Program Path Drawing Screen 4-89

T
Tape Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-42

A4-4
 YASNAC J300M
OPERATING MANUAL
TOKYO OFFICE NewI Per Ta<eshloa SoLlh To.Jcr 1-16. <algan, Wnatoki TC.,C 105 .~sar,
Pho-e 8’.3-5402-4511 Fax 81.3-5402-4580
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA. INC
Chicago-Corporate Headquafiers 2942 ‘AacA.r.h.f B(J 5 Korthbrook IL 60362-2328 U S .~
Fhc’? ..647 29.-2340 Fax 1-847-498-240
Chicago-Technical Center 3’60 PMz:~tnu 2 c NIor[rbrook IL 60062-<917 U S A
Phc-[ %47 29 0411 Fax 1-847 29”-. C18
MOTOMAN INC
805 - her., ale ‘Wesl Carrolltcn Ok{ 45449 J S ~.
Phc-e S13.847.620(1 Fax 1-513847-6277
YASKAWA EL~TRICO DO BRASIL COM=RCIO LTDA

. .
‘he-c :9&96.569.300 Fax 49.151%EW9-3C11
Motoman Robotfcs AB
?OX 5C: S38525 Tors as, Swei?.?-
~hc 7e J6 41? E-;0575 Fax 46-486-41410
Motoman Robotec GmbH

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

Y
YASUAWA

MANUAL NO. TOE-C843-13.30B

0 Ptinted in Japan August 199696-30

. ..——.— —.—.——..—-